The History of the great and mighty kingdom of China, and the situation thereof:  
Together with the great riches, huge Cities, politic government, and rare inventions in the same.  
Translated out of Spanish by R. park.  
LONDON. Printed by I. Wolf for Edward White, and are to be sold at the little North door of Paul's, at the sign of the Gun. 1588.   


AA   
To the Right worshipful and famous Gentleman, M. Thomas Candish Esquire, increase of honour and happy attempts.  
IT is now above five and thirty years passed, right worshipful, since that young sacred, and prudent Prince, king Edward the sixth of happy memory, went about the discovery of Cathaia and China, partly of desire that the good young king had to enlarge the Christian faith, and partly to find out some where in those regions ample vent of the cloth of England, for the mischiefs that grew about that time nearer home, aswell by contempt of our commodities, as by the arrests of his merchants in the Empire, Flanders, France, and Spain: foreseeing withal how beneficial ample vent would rise to all degrees throughout his kingdom, and specially to the infinite number of the poor sort distressed by lack of work. And although by a voyage hereupon taken in hand for this purpose by Sir Hugh Willobie, and Richard Chancellor a discovery of the bay of Saint Nicolas in Russia fell out, and a trade with the Muscovites, and after another trade for a time with the Persians by way of the Caspian sea ensued, yet the discovery of the principal intended place followed not in his time, nor yet since, until you took your happy and renowned voyage about the world in hand, although sundry attempts, at the great charges of divers honourable and well disposed persons, and good worshipful merchants and others have been made since the death of that good king, in seeking a passage thither both by the north-east, and by the Northwest. But since it is so (as we understand) that your worship in your late voyage hath first of our nation in this age discovered the famous rich Islands of the Luzones, or Philippinas, lying near unto the coast of China, and have spent some time in taking good view of the same, having brought home three boys borne in Manilla, the chief town of the said islands, besides two other young fellows of good capacity, borne in the mighty Island of japon, (which hereafter may serve as our interpreters in our first traffic thither) and that also yourself have sailed along the coast of China, not far from the Continent, and have taken some knowledge of the present state of the same, and in your course have found out a notable ample vent of our clothes, especially our kerseys, and are in preparing again for the former voyage, as he that would constantly persever in so good an enterprise: we are to think that the knowledge and first discovery of the same, in respect of our nation, hath all this time been by the Almighty to you only reserved, to your immortal glory, and to the manifest show of his especial favour borne towards you, in that besides your high and rare attempt of sailing about the whole globe of the earth, in so short a time of two years and about two months, you have showed yourself to have that rare and especial care for your country, by seeking out vent for our clothes, that aught upon due consideration to move many thousands of English subjects to pray for you, and to love and honour your name and family for ever. For as you have opened by your attempt the gate to the spoil of the great and late mighty, universal, and infested enemy of this realm, & of all countries that profess true religion: so have you by your great care wrought a way to employ the merchants of England in trade, to increase our Navy, to benefit our Clothiers, and (your purpose falling out to your hoped effect) to relieve more of the poorer sort, than all the hospitals and alms houses can or may, that have been built in this realm, since the first inhabiting thereof.  
And Sir, if to this your late noble attempt, it might please you, by your encouragement, and by the help of your purse to add your present furtherance for the passage to be discovered by the northwest, (for proof whereof there be many infallible reasons, and diverse great experiences to be yielded) our course with our commodities to the rich Island of japon, to the mighty empire of China, and to the Islands of the Philippinas, for the vent that you have found out, should be by the half way shortened, and you should double and manifold treble the credit of your former late enterprise, and make your fame to mount, and yourself to live for ever in a much higher degree of glory, than otherwise it might be, or that by any other mean you could possibly devise: In which action so highly importing the general state of this land I have perfect experience that many worshipful and wealthy merchants of this city and other places would most willingly join their purses with yours: and to play the blab, I may tell you they attend nothing with greater desire and expectation, then that a motion hereof being made by some happy man, yourself and they might friendly and seriously join together for the full accomplishing of this so long intended discovery. And to descend to some particulars, there is one special reason that giveth an edge unto their desires, proceeding from the late worthy attempts of that excellent and skilful pilot M. john davis, made for the search of the aforesaid northwest passage these three late years, having entered into the same four hundred leagues further than was ever hitherto thoroughly known, and returned with an exact description thereof, to the reasonable contentment for the time, of the adventurers, and chiefly of the worshipful M. William Sanderson, whose contributions thereunto, although they have been very great and extraordinary, yet for the certain hope or rather assurance that he conceiveth upon the report of the Captain himself and all the rest of any skill employed in these voyages, remaineth still constant, and is ready to disburse as yet to the fresh setting on foot of this enterprise entermitted by occasion of our late troubles, even this year again for the final perfection of so profitable and honourable a discovery, a far greater portion then in reason would be required of any other man of his ability. And albeit sir, that you have taken in your late voyage, besides the knowledge of the way to China, the intelligence of the government of the country and of the commodities of the territories and provinces of the same, and that at the full, according to the time of your short abode in those parts, yet nevertheless for that of late more ample understanding hath been in more length of time, by wonderful great endeavour taken by certain learned Portugeses and Spaniards of great observation, and not long ago published in the Spanish tongue, I have for the increase of the knowledge of the subjects of England, and specially for the illuminating of the minds of those, that are to take the voyage next in hand to japan, China, and the Philippinas, translated the same work into english, and committed it to print, passing over Paulus▪ Venetus, and sir john mandevil, because they wrote long ago of those regions: which labour to say truth, I have undertaken at the earnest request and encouragement of my worshipful friend Master Richard Hakluit late of Oxford, a gentleman, besides his other manifold learning and languages, of singular and deep insight in all histories of discovery and parts of cosmography: who also for the zeal he beareth to the honour of his country and countrymen, brought the same first above two years since over into this court, and at this present hath in hand a most excellent and ample collection of the sundry travails and navigations of our own nation, a matter long intended by him, and serving to the like beneficial and honourable purpose, which I hope will shortly come to light to the great contentation of the wiser sort. In the mean season, having now at length finished according to my poor skill and leisure this my translation, I thought best to dedicate and commend the same to your worshipful patronage, as the man that I hold most worthy of the same, and most able of our nation to judge aright of the contents thereof, and to correct the errors of the author whensoever you shall meet with them: beseeching you to accept in good part the travail and good meaning of the translator: and so wishing unto you, health, increase of knowledge, with fortunate and glorious success in your further courageous attempts, I leave you to the protection of the almighty.  
From London the first of januarie, 1589. Your worships always to command, Robert Park.   

The Printer, to the Christian reader.  
WHereas (good courteous Reader) in this history describing the kingdom of China, with the countries there adjacent, thou shalt find many times repeated, and that in some things too gloriously, the zeal of certain Spanish Friars that laboured in discovery of the said China▪ and the declaration of certain miracles (but falsely reported) by them to have been wrought, together with examples of diverse their superstitious practices: which happily may give offence unto some in reading: thou must understand that this is to be rather imputed unto the first writer of this history in spanish, than to any fault of mine: for the Spaniards (following their ambitious affections) do usually in all their writings extol their own actions, even to the setting forth of many untruths and incredible things: as in their descriptions of the conquests of the east and west Indies, etc. doth more at large appear. Notwithstanding all which, our translator (as it seemeth) hath rather chosen to be esteemed fidus interpres, in truly translating the history as it was, though containing some errors, then to be accounted a patcher or corrupter of other men's works.  
But howsoever, either our first author, or the translator, have showed themselves affectioned, sure I am, that the knowledge of thi● kingdom, will not only be pleasant, but also very profitable to our English nation: and by playing the good Bee, in only accepting herein that which is good, I doubt not, but the reading of this history will bring thee great contentment, and delight.  
Vale.   


The History of the mighty kingdom of China, in the which is contained, the notable things of that kingdom, touching that which is natural.  

CHAP. I. The description of the kingdom and the confines that it hath belonging.  
THis great and mighty kingdom of China, which we do mean to treat of in this History, hath been discovered by clear and true notice, within this ten years, by Spaniards that were dwellers in the islands Philippinas, that are three hundredth leagues distant from the said kingdom: Notwithstanding, that long time before, there was relation given, by way of the Portugal India's, by such as dwelled in Macao, and did tra●●ke to Canton, a city of the same kingdom of China. But this was by relation so, that the one nor the other could satisfy, for that there was found variety in that which was true, till the year of 1577. Friar Martin de Gorrada provincial of the Augustine friars, who were the first discoverers of the said islands Philippinas, and ministered first the holy baptism amongst them, with his companions, friar Hieronimo Martin, Pedro Sarmiento, and Myghell de Loarcha chief officers of the city of Marrila in the said islands, by the order and commandment of Guido de Labassares governor thereof, did enter into the said kingdom of China, Led and governed by a captain belonging to the king of the said kingdom called Omoncon.  
Of the coming of this Omoncon, unto the islands Philippinas, and of his hardiness to carry the aforesaid unto the firm land, he being commanded to the contrary upon pain of death, and how he was received, and great courtesy showed, and of other things very curious, you shall ●inde in the second part of this history, where as is the substance and whole relation of all that was brought unto the king of Spain.  
You shall understand that this mighty kingdom is the Orientalest part of all Asia, and his next neighbour towards the Ponent is the kingdom of Quachinchina, whereas they do observe in whole all the customs and rites of China. The greatest part of this kingdom is watered with the great oriental Ocean sea, beginning at the Island Aynan, which is hard by Quachinchina, which is 19 degrees towards the North, and compassing towards the South, whereas their course is north-east. And beyond Quachinchina towards the North, the Bragmanes do confine, which are much people and very rich, of gold, silver and precious stones, but in especial, Rubies: for there are infinite. They are proud and haughty men, of great courage, well made, but of brown colour: they have had (but few times) war with them of China, in respect for that betwixt both the kingdoms there are great and mighty mountains and rocks that doth disturb them. And hard unto this nation joineth the Patanes and Mogores, which is a great kingdom, and warlike people, whose head is the Gran Samarzan: They are the true Scythas or Massagetas, of whom it is affirmed that they were never overcome by any other nation: they are a people well proportioned, and white: by reason they dwell in a cold country. Betwixt the West and the South is the Trapobana, or Samatra, a kingdom very rich of gold, precious stones & pearls: and more towards the South, are the two Iauas, the great and the less, and the kingdom of the Lechios: and in equal distance, are the Iapones: yet notwithstanding those that are more indifferent to this kingdom are the Tartarians, which are on the self firm land or continent, and are alonely divided by a wall, as shallbe declared in the 9 chapter of this book. These Tartarians have had many times wars with them of China: but at one time (as you shall perceive) they got the whole kingdom of China, and did possess the same for the space of 93. years, till such time as they of China did rebel and forced them out again. At this day they say that they are friends one with another, and that is, for that they be all Gentiles, and do use all one manner of ceremonies and rites. They do differ in their cleanness & laws, in the which the Chinese doth exceed them very much. The Tartarians are very yellow & not so white: and they go naked from the girdlested upwards, and they eat raw flesh, and do anoint themselves with the blood of raw flesh, for to make them more harder and currish, by reason whereof they do so stink, that if the air doth come from that part where they be: you shall smell them afar off by the strong savour. They have for certainty, the truth of the immortality of the soul (although it be with error) for they say that the soul doth enter into other bodies, and that soul that lived well in the first body, doth better it from poor to rich, or from age to youth: and if it lived evil, to the contrary in worse. The sons of the Tartarians do very much observe and keep the commandment in obeying their parents, for that they do wholly accomplish the same without failing any jot of their will, under pain to be severely and publicly punished. They confess one God, whom they worship, & have him in their houses carved or painted, and every day they do offer unto it incense, or some other sweet smells: they do call him the high God, & do crave of him understanding & health. They have also another God, which they say is son unto the other: they do call him Natigay: this is their God of terrestrial things. They have him likewise in their houses, and every time they go to eat, they do anoint his face with the fattest thing they have to eat: that being done they fall to eating, having first given their gods their pittance. They are a kind of people that very seldom do fable a lie, although their lives should lie thereon, and are very obedient unto their king: but in special in their wars, in the which every one doth that he is appointed to do: they are led by the sound of a drum or trumpet, with the which their captains do govern them with great ease, by reason that they are trained up in the same from their youth. And many other things are amongst them, in the which they do resemble them of China, (who) if they did receive the faith of our Lord jesus Christ, it is to be believed that the Tartarians would do the same, for that they are taken for men very ducible, and do imitate very much them of China.   

CHAP. II. Of the temperature of the kingdom of China.  
THe temperature of this mighty kingdom is diversly, by reason that almost the whole bigness thereof is from the South to the North, in so great a length, that the Island of Aynan being near unto this land in 19 degrees of altitude have notice of some provinces that are in mo●e then 50. degrees, and yet they do understand that beyond that, there be more upon the confines of Tartary. It is a strange thing to be seen, the strange and great difference betwixt the colours of the dwellers of this kingdom. In Canton a mighty city, whereas the Portugese's had ordinary traffic with them of China, for that it was nigh unto Macao, where as they had inhabited long since, and from whence they do bring all such merchandise as is brought into Europe: There is seen great diversities in the colours of such people as do come thither to traffic, as the said Portugese's do testify.  
Those which are borne in the city of Canton and in all that cost are brown people, like unto them in the city of Fez or Barbary, for that all the whole country is in the said parallel that Barbary is in. And they of the most provinces inwards are white people, some more whiter than others, as they draw into the cold country. Some are like unto Spaniards, and others more yellow, like unto the Almans, yellow and red colour. Finally in all this mighty kingdom, to speak generally, they cannot say that there is much cold or much heat, for that the Geographers do conclude and say it is temperate▪ and is under a temperate clime, as is Italy or other temperate countries, whereby may be understood the fertility of the same, which is (without doubt) the fortress in all the world, & may compare with the Peru▪ and Nuova Espannia, which are two kingdoms celebrated to be most fertile: and for the verification, you shall perceius in this Chapter next following: wherein is declared such things as it doth yield and bring forth, and in what quantity. And yet above all things (according unto the sayings of friar Herrada provincial and his companions, whose relation I will follow in the most part of this history, as witnesses of sight) unto whom we may give certain credit without any exception: They say that the country is so full of youth, that it seemeth the women are delivered every month, and their children when they are little, are extreme fair: and the country is so fertile and fat, that it yieldeth fruit three or four times in the year, which is the occasion that all things is so good cheap, that almost it seemeth, they sell them for nothing.   

CHAP III. Of the fertility of this kingdom, and of such fruits and other things as it doth yield.  
THe inhabitants in this country are persuaded of a truth, that those which did first find and inhabit in this land, were the nephews of Noah (who after they had travailed from Armenia, whereas ●he Ark stayed▪ wherein God did preserve their grandfather from the waters of the flood) went seeking a land to their contentment: and not finding a country of so great fertility and temperature like unto this, wherein was all things necessary for the life of man, without comparison: they were compelled with the abundance thereof for to inhabit therein, understanding that if they should search throughout all the world they should not find the like: and I think they were not deceived, according as now it is to be seen, and what may be considered in the process of this chapter, of such fruits as the earth doth yield. And although there is declared here of such as shall suffice in this work, yet is there left behind a great number more: of whose properties, as well of herbs and beasts, which of their particulars may be made a great volume, and I do believe that in time there will be one set forth.  
The great travel and continual labour of the inhabitants of this country, is a great help unto the goodness and fertility thereof, and is so much that they do neither spare nor leave mountains nor valleys, neither rivers, but they do sow and plant all such things as they perceive that the place will yield, according unto the goodness thereof: as orchards with fruit, great fields of wheat, barley, rice, flax and hemp, with many other things: all which travail unto them is very easy, remembering with what great liberty they do enjoy their goods, and the great & infinite number of people that there is, as well for handy crafts as for to till and cultivate the ground. In all this mighty country they do not suffer vagabonds nor idle people, but all such (over and above that they are grievously punished) they are holden for infamous: neither do they consent nor permit any of them that are naturally borne there, to go out of their countries into other strange countries, neither have they any wars at this present: which was the thing that in times past did consume much of their people. The king doth content himself only with his own kingdom, (as one that is held the wisest in all the world.) Beside all this they are naturally inclined to eat and drink well and to make much of themselves, in apparel, & to have their houses well furnished with household stuff: and to the augmenting hereof, they do put themselves in great labour & travail, and are great dealers and trafickers: all which with the fertility of the country above said, is the occasion that justly it may have the name to be the most fertilest in all the whole world.  
This country doth yield all kind of herbs, as doth Spain, and of many kinds more: also all manner of fruits, like as in Spain, with divers other sorts: the names whereof are not yet known, for that they do differ very much from ours, but yet the one and the other are of a marvelous excellent taste, as they do say. They have three sorts of Oranges, the one very sweet which doth exceed sugar in their sweetness: the other sort not so sweet as the first: the third sort are somewhat sour, but very delightful in the taste. Also they have a kind of plums that they do call Lechias, 
Excellent plums.  that are of an exceeding gallant taste, and never hurteth any body although they should eat a great number of them. It yieldeth great abundance of great melons, and of an excellent savour and taste, and very big. Also a kind of russet appels that be very great, of a good taste. I do not here declare of other fruits, nor of their names, because I will not seem tedious unto the reader, nor spend the time herein, but will treat of other things of more importance.  
In all parts of this kingdom, there is great store of sugar, 
Excellent white sugar good cheap.  which is the occasion that it is so good cheap: for you shall have a quintal of very excellent white and good sugar, when it is most dearest, for the value of six rials of plate. There is great abundance of honey, for that their delight is in hives, 
Honey & wax.  by reason whereof not only honey, but wax is very good cheap: and there is so great quantity thereof, that you may lad ships, yea fleets thereof. 
Excellent good silk.  They do make great store of silk and excellent good, and give it very perfit colours, which doth exceed very much the silk of Granada, and is one of the greatest trades that is in all that kingdom.  
The velvets, damasks, satins, and other sorts of webs which is there made, is of so small price, that it is a wonder to speak it, in especial unto them that do know how their prizes be in Spain and in Italy: They do sell none of their silks there by the yard, neither any other kind of websterie, though it be linen: but by the weight, wherein there is least deceit. They have great store of flax, 
Great store of flax and hemp.  wherewith the common people do apparel themselves: also hemp for the cawlking of their ships, and to make ropes and hasers. And on their dry and tough lands, although they be stony, they gather great store of cotton wool. They do sow wheat barley, rye and oats▪ and many other kinds of grain: 
Cotton, wool, wheat and barley, rye, oats.  and the one and the other do yield great increase. In the marish grounds, (of which there be many) by reason of moist and great abundance of rivers that be in this country, they do sow rice, 
Great abundance of rice.  which is a common victual or mantiniment unto all people of the kingdom, and unto them that dwell near them: and they do gather so great abundance, that when it is most dearest you shall have a haneg for a rial of plate: of the which and of all other grains aforesaid, the country was wont to yield three and four times in the year there increase.  
On their high grounds that are not good to be sown, there is great store of pine trees which yield fruit very savoury: chestnuts greater and of better taste then commonly you shall ●inde in Spain: 
Chestnuts.  and yet betwixt these trees they do sow Maiz, which is the ordinary food of the Indians of Mexico, and Peru, and great store of Panizo, so that they do no leave one foot of ground unsown. And of truth almost in all the whole country you shall not find any ground, that is barren or without profit, what by the natural virtue of the country, and also by the manuring and helping of it.   

CHAP. four Here I do proceed in the fertility of this kingdom, and of such things as it doth yield.  
BEsides the fertility of this country beforesaid, all the fields be very fair to behold, and yield marvelous odoriferous smells, by reason of the great quantity of sweet flowers of divers sorts. It is also garnished with the green trees that he planted by the rives sides, and brooks: whereof there is great quantity. And there is planted there, orchards and gardens, with banqueting houses of great pleasure: the which they do use very much for their recreation and avoiding the troubles of mind. 
All kind of beasts.  The Loytias or Gentlemen do use to plant great forests and thick woods, whereas do breed many wild boors, bucks, hares and conies, and divers other beasts: of whose skins they make very excellent furs, 
Excellent furs. Musk.  but in especial of Martas Cevellinas, of which there is a great number. There is great abundance of musk, the which they do make of a little beast that doth feed of nothing else but of a root which is of a marvelous smell, that is called Camarus, as big as a man's finger. They do take them & beat them with blows till they be bruised all to pieces: then they do put them in a place whereas they may soon putrify, but ff●st they do bind very fast such parts, whereas the blood may run out of their bruised bones all to pieces remaining within them. Then after when they think they be putrefied, than they do cut out small pieces with skin and all, and tie them up like ●als or cods, which the Portugals (who doth by them) do call Papos: And this is the finest that is brought out of all Indies (i● there be no deceit used in it) for many times they will put amongst it small pieces of lead, and other things of weight. There is also great store of kine, 
Great store of buffs. Dear, hogs and goats.  that are so little worth, that you may buy a very good one for eight ●ials of plate: & beeves that are bought for half the money: one whole venison is bought for two rials▪ great store of hogs, whose flesh is as wholesome and good as our mutton in Spain. There is great abundance of goats, & of other beasts that are to be eaten: which is the occasion that they are of little value. 
Great store of wildfowl.  The flying fowls that do breed about the lakes & rivers, are of so great quantity, that there is spent daily in small villages in that country many thousands, and the greatest sort of them are Teals. The fashion how they do breed and bring them up shallbe declared in a chapter particularly: for that which is said shall not seem impossible. They be sold by weight, 
Fowl so●de by weight.  & likewise capons and hens, & for so small value, that two pounds of their flesh being plucked, is worth ordinarily two Foys, which is a kind of money like unto the quarts of Spain: hog's flesh, two pounds for a Foy and a half, 
A penny.  which is 6. maravadiz. Likewise all other victuals after the same rate, as it doth plainly appear by the relation made by the friars.  
There are also many herbs for medicines, 

rhubarb and other medicinal herbs.  
Four hundred of Nutmegs for six pence.  
Cloves six pound for 3▪ penny: the like of pepper.  
cinnamon 25. pound for two shilliings▪   as very fine rhubarb, and of great quantity: and wood called Palo de china: great store of Nutmegs, with the which they may lad fleets, and of so low a price that you may buy four hundredth for a rial of plate: and cloves, six pound for half a rial of plate: and the like in pepper. cinnamon, one rove which is 25. pound, for four rials of plate, and better cheap. I do leave to speak of many o●her herbs medicinable & profitable for the use of man: for that if I should write the particular virtue of every of them, it would require a great volume. Of fish, both swimming and shell fish of all sorts, that they have with them is to be wondered at: not only upon the sea coasts, but also in the remote places of that kingdom, by reason of the great rivers, which be navigable unto such places. 
Mines of gold and silver & other metals. Iron and steel 4. shilling a quintal Silver is more worth than gold. Great store of pearls.  Besides all this it is very rich of mines of gold and silver, and other metals, the which (gold and silver excepted) they do sell it so good cheap that a quintal of Copper, iron or steel is to be bought for eight rials of plate. Gold is better cheap there then it is in Europe, but silver is more worth. There is found great store of pearls in all this kingdom: but the most part of them are not round, by the which you may gather and understand the goodness and fertility of the same. And that the first that did discover and inhabit that kingdom, were not deceived for that they found all things necessary unto the preserving of the life of man, and that in abundance: for the which with just reason, the inhabitants may think themselves to possess the best and fertilest kingdom in all the whole world.   

CHAP. V Of the antiquity of this kingdom.  
AS before is said, this kingdom is of so ancient antiquity that there is opinion, that the first that did inhabit this country, were the nephews of Noe. But the light which is found in the histories of China, is that from the time of Vitey, who was their first king, and did reduce their kingdom unto an empire, and hath and doth endure unto the king that now raineth: as you shall understand in the place where we shall make mention of the kings of that country, whereas you shall understand by just computation, that unto this day, there hath rained natural and usurped to the number of 243. kings. 
243. kings.  The son doth succeed the father in the kingdom, and for want of a son, the next kinsman doth succeed: and for that they do take (after the use of the emperors of Turkey) so many wives as pleaseth them: it seldom falleth out to lack heirs, for that the first son that is borne of either of his wives is right heir unto the kingdom: and the rest of his sons he doth appoint them cities where as they do dwell privately: and there they are provided of all things necessary for them, conformable unto their degrees, with express commission vpon'paine of death, never to go out of them, neither to return unto the court, except they be sent for by the king. So after this conclusion, all those that are kinsfolk unto the king, are resident and kept in a mighty and populous city, called Causi, 
The mighty city of Causey.  whereas those whom the king and his counsel do think and s●e to be men of great wisdom, or given to martial affairs, they do command that they never go forth of their houses, to avoid occasions of suspicion whereby might grow alterations and treasons against the king. The dwelling places of these provinces, are mighty and of a huge bigness▪ for that within the compass of them, they have all manner of contentment necessary for them: as gardens, orchards, fishing ponds of divers sorts, parks and groves, in the which are all kind of flying fowls, fish and beasts, as are to be found in the mountains and rivers. And it is walled round about with a stone wall, so that every house of these seemeth to be a town. They give themselves much unto music, wherewith they do pass away the time. And for that they are given to pleasure and ease, they are commonly corpulent and fat, very fair conditioned and quiet, liberal unto strangers. These princes in what place so ever they are: the governors of the cities are bound to visit them every festival day. Likewise if they do pass on horseback by their doors, they must alight and walk on foot while they have passed it: and if they be borne in a little chair, likewise to come out of the same, and to walk on foot with silence, till they be passed. And for that they shall not plead ignorance, the gates of these prince's houses are all painted red: so that they being brought up from their youth, in this strait close and idle life, it is not unto them tedious, but doth rather rejoice in the same.   

CHAP. VI The bigness of this kingdom of China, and of such measures as they do use in travail.  
THis mighty kingdom which we commonly call China, without knowing any cause or foundation wherefore we should so call it. Those countries near joining unto the same, do call it Sangley: and they in their natural tongue do call it Taybiner, the which is to be understood, nothing but a kingdom: and is the most biggest and populous that is mentioned in all the world, as it shallbe apparent in the discourse of this history, and in the wonderful things that shallbe treated of in the next chapter following. All the which is taken out of the books and histories of the said Chinos, whereas they do make mention of the mightiness thereof, and of the 15. provinces that are comprehended in the same: The which books and histories were brought unto the city of Manilla, printed and set forth in China, and were translated into the spanish tongue, by interpreters of the said nations. And for that they were baptized and became Christians: they remain as dwellers amongst us in these Islands, the better to observe and keep the laws of baptism, and to fly the pain & punishment the which they should receive for doing the same: for that they turned Christians and received the faith without the licence of the king and counsel, which is forbidden upon pain of death, and is executed with great violence, and without remission. This mighty kingdom is in circuit or compass about 69516. Die, which is a kind of measure that they do use: which being reduced into the spanish account, is almost 3000. leagues, 
The China is in compass 3000. leagues and 1800. ●eagues long.  and in length 1800. leagues, this is to be understood the whole 15. provinces: the which are garnished with many cities and towns, besides a great number of villages, as you may plainly see in the chapter following. By the said book it is found that the Chinos have amongst them, but only three kind of measures: the which in their language are called Lii, Pu, and Icham, which is as much to say, or in effect, as a furlong, league, or journey: the measure which is called Lii, hath so much space as a man's voice in a plain ground may be heard in a quiet day, hallowing or whoping with all the force and strength he may: and ten of these Liis maketh a Pu, which is a great spanish league: and ten Pus maketh a days journey, which is called Icham, which maketh 12. long leagues. By the which account it is found that this kingdom hath the number of leagues as a●ore is said: Yet by the account of other books, they do find it bigger and of more leagues. Yet friar Martin de Herrada, provincial of the austin friars in the islands Philippinas, who is an excellent Geometrician and Cosmographer, did cast the account with great diligence▪ by their own descriptions, and doth find it to amount unto the sum aforesaid, to be 1800. leagues long, and 3000. leagues in compass, beginning at the province of Olam, which is that towards the South, and nearest unto Malacia, and so alongst the country towards the North east, for the space of 600. leagues.   

CHAP. VII. Of the 15. provinces, that are in this kingdom.  
THis mighty kingdom is divided into fifteen provinces that every one of them is bigger than the greatest kingdom that we do understand to be in all Europe. Some do esteem those cities to be metropolitans, where as is resident, the governors, precedents, or viz Rées, which in their natural tongue are called Cochin: of the provinces, two of them which are called Tolanchia, and Paguia, are governed by the king in person, with his royal counsel. The occasion why the king is always resident or abiding in one of these two provinces, which are two of the mightiest, and most popularst of people, is not for that in them he is most at his content, or receive more pleasure in them then in any of the other: but only for that they do con●ine upon the kingdom of Tartary, with whom in times past they had ordinary and continual wars: and for that the king might with more ease put remedy in such harms received, and defend with better opportunity the rage of his enemy, he did ordain and situate his palace and court in them two. And for that it hath been of antiquity many years past, it hath remained hitherto, and appeareth to continue still the habitation of the kings of that kingdom, as by desert for the excellency of the clime, and abundance of all things necessary.  
The names of the fifteen provinces are as followeth: Pag●ia, Foquiem, Olam, Sinsay, Sisuam, Tolanchia, Cansay, Oquiam, Aucheo, Honan, Xanton, Quiche●, Chequeam, Susuam, and Saxij. Almost all these provinces, but in particular ten of them which are alongst the sea costs, are full of deep rivers of sweet water and navigable, upon whose branches are situated many cities and towns, whereof you may not only have the number of them, but also their names: for that these Chinos are so curious people, that in their books are named besides the cities and towns, the banqueting houses and houses of pleasure, which the gentlemen have for their recreation. And for that it will be more trouble than profit to enlarge any further in this matter, I will refer it unto the next chapter, where I will entreat of the cities and towns, that either of these provinces hath, and pass over all the rest, as not necessary: for our intent is to set forth the bigness of this kingdom.   

CHAP. VIII. Of the cities and towns that every one of these provinces hath in himself.  
THese fifteen provinces, which with better truth might be called kingdoms, according unto the greatness of them as you may perceive by the number of cities and towns that each of them hath, besides villages, the which if I should add hereunto, would be an infinite number.  
The number of cities & towns that every province hath. First▪ the province of Paguia, where as ordinarily the king and his counsel is resident, hath 47. cities and 150. towns, 
Canton 
hath 37. cities and 190. towns.  Foquien 
hath 33. cities and 99 towns.  Olam 
hath 90. cities and 130. towns.  Synsay 
hath 38. cities and 124. towns.  Sisuan 
hath 44. cities and 150. towns.  Tolanchia 
hath 51. cities and 123. towns.  Cansay 
hath 24. cities and 112. towns.  Ochian 
hath 19 cities and 74. towns.  Aucheo 
hath 25. cities and 29. towns.  Honan 
hath 20. cities and 102. towns.  Xaton 
hath 37. cities and 78. towns.  Quicheu 
hath 45. cities and 113. towns.  Chequeam 
hath 39 cities and 95. towns.  Susuan 
hath 42. cities and 105. towns.   By which account appeareth to be 591. cities and 1593. towns, beside villages and houses of pleasure, which are an infinite number: by the which you may consider, that this kingdom doth deserve to be called great, and compared with the best and principal●t, that is hea●d of in all the whole world. The Chinos do use in their pronunciation to term their cities with this syllable, Furio, that is as much to say, city, as Taybin fu, Canton fu, and their towns with this syllable Cheu, They have some villages that are so great; that it lacketh but only the name of a town. All their cities for the most part are situated by the rivers sides: such as are navigable, the cities are moated round about, which make them to be very strong, not only the cities but towns are walled round about with high and strong walls of stone, one fathom high, and all the rest is of brick, but of so hard a substance that it is not to be broken almost with pickaxes. Some cities hath their walls so broad, that 4. and 6. men may walk side by side on them: they are garnished with many bulwarks and towers, a small distance the one from the other, with their battlements & fair galleries, where as many times their vizroyes doth go to recreate themselves with the gallant sight of the mountains and rivers, with their fields so odoriferous. There is betwixt the walls of their cities & the moat of the same a broad space, that six horsemen may ride together, the like space is within, betwixt the walls and the houses, whereas they may walk without impediment. Their walls are kept in such good reparation, by reason of their great care and diligence, that they seem to be but new made, & yet in some cities there is found mention of two thousand years since the first foundation. In every city the king doth ordain a justice, and giveth him great rents only to visit them, and make them to be renewed and repaired where as is requisite, and is done upon the king's cost: for out of his rents in such cities & towns is given them all that is needful to be asked. The high ways in all this kingdom are made & kept plain with great care & diligence, and the entering into the cities and towns are very sumptuous and with great majesty, they have three or four gates bound with iron very strong. Their streets very well paved, and so broad that 15. horsemen may ride together in them, and so strait, that although they be very long, yet you may discover the end: On both the sides are portals, under which be their shops full of all sorts of merchandises very curious, and of all occupations that you will desire: In the streets a good space the one from the other, are made many triumphal arks of extreme beauty: They are made of masons work, very curiously painted after the fashion of the old antiquity of Rome: All their houses ordinarily have three doors, that in the midst is great, the other be lesser, but of a marvelous gallant propotion: The king is always resident in the city of Suntien, 
The mighty city called Suntien, or Quinsay.  which in their language is as much to say, the city of heaven. Of which city the Chinos do declare many things which seemeth to be true, for that if you do talk with many of them, and at sundry times and places, yet do they not vary the one from the other: and according to their report, it should be greatest in all the world, in these days. They who do make it to be least, do affirm, that to go from gate to gate leaving the suburbs, had need of a summer's day and a good horse to do it: it is also called Quinsay, as Marcus Paulus doth call it.   

CHAP. IX. Of the wonderful buildings in this kingdom, and of mighty wall or circuit in the same of 500 leagues long.  
IN this kingdom in all places there be men excellent in architecture: and the necessaries that they have to build with is the best that is in the world. For as it is said in the chapter past, they have a kind of white earth of the which they make bricks, of so great hardness and strength, that for to break them, you must have pickaxes, and use much strength: and this is the cause that in all the kingdom there is mighty buildings and very curious. Putting apart the king's palace where he is resident in Taybin, (for of that you shall have a particular chapter:) in all such cities that be the heads of the provinces, is resident a viceroy or governor, and dwelleth in the house that (in every such city) the king hath ordained on his proper cost: all the which to conclude are▪ superbious and admirable, and wrought by marvelous art, and are as big as a great village, by reason that they have within them great gardens, water ponds & woods compassed about: in the which (as it is declared in the 4. chapter) is great quantity of hunt and flying fowls. Their houses commonly be very gallant, and after the manner of Rome, and generally at the doors and gates of them are planted trees in gallant order: the which maketh a gallant shadow and seemeth well in the streets. All these houses are within as white as milk, in such sort that it seemeth to be burnished paper. The floares are paved with square stones very broad and smooth: their ceilings are of an excellent kind of timber, very well wrought and painted, that it seemeth like damask and of the colour of gold, that showeth very well: every one of them hath three courts and gardens full of flowers and herbs, for their recreation. And there is none of them but hath his fish pool furnished, although it be but small. The one side of their courts is wrought very gallant: like as it is in counting houses, upon the which they have many idols carved, and wrought of divers kinds ofmettals: the other three parts or angles of their courts, are painted with divers things of very great curiosity. But above all things they are marvelous clean, not only in their houses, but also in their streets: in the which commonly they have three or four necessary or common places of ease, very curiously ordained and placed, for that the people being troubled with their common necessity shall not foul the streets, and therefore they have this provision: the like is used in all ways throughout the kingdom. Some cities there be, whose streets be navigable, as in Brussels in Flanders, Mexico in the Indians, and as in Venice in Italy: which is the occasion that they are better served and provided, for that their barks and boats do enter laden with all kind of victuals hard to their doors.  
The highways throughout all this kingdom, are the best and gallantest paved, that ever hath been discovered: they are very plain, yea unto the mountains, and they are cut by force of labour and pickaxes, and maintained with brick and stone, the which by report of them which hath seen it, is one of the worthiest things that is in all the realm. There are many mighty bridges, and of a wonderful making, & some wrought upon boats, as it is in Syvill: but in especial upon such rivers as are broad and deep. In the city of Fucheo, there is a tower right against the house of the kings chief receiver, & it is affirmed by those that have seen it, to surmount any building that hath been amongst the Romans: the which is raised and founded upon forty pillars, and every pillar is of one stone, so big and so high that it is strange to tell them, and doubtful to the hearers to believe it: for which cause I think it best not to declare it in particular, as I do in all things where as I do find it difficult to be believed, and where I have no certain author to verify the truth.  
There is in this kingdom a defence or wall that is five hundred leagues long, 
A wall of 500 leagues long.  and beginneth at the city Ochyoy which is upon the high mountains, and runneth from the West unto East. The king of that country which made it was called Tzintzon, and it was for his defence against the Tartaries, with whom he had wars: so that the wall doth shut up all the frontier of Tartary. But you must understand that four hundred leagues of the said wall is natural of itself, for that they be high and mighty rocks very nigh together: but the other hundred leagues is comprehended the spaces or distance that is betwixt the rocks, the which he caused to be made by men's hands of very strong work of stone, and is of seven fathom broad at the foot of it, and seven fathom high. It beginneth at the parts of the sea, in the province of Canton, and stretcheth forth by that of Paguia and Causay, and doth firnish in the province of Susuan. This king for to finish this wonderful work, did take of every three men one through his kingdom, and of ●iue two: who for that they travailed in their labour so long a journey, and into different climes, (although that out of those provinces that were nearest, there came great store of people) yet did they almost all perish that followed that work.  
The making of this superbious and mighty work, was the occasion that his whole kingdom did rise up against the king, and did kill him, after that he had reigned forty years, and also a son of his that was called Aguitzi. The report of this wall is held to be of a very truth, for that it is affirmed by all the Chinos that do traffic to the islands Philippinas and to Canton, and Machao, and be all confirmable in their declaration as witnesses, because they have seen it: and it is the farthest parts of all the kingdom, whereas none of us unto this day hath been.   

CHAP. X. Of the dispositions, countenance, with apparel and other exercises of the people of this country.  
BOth men and women of this country are of a good disposition of their bodies, well proportioned and gallant men, somewhat tall: they are all for the most part broad faced, little eyes and ●lat noses, and without beard save only upon the ball of the chin: but yet there be some that have great eyes and goodly beards, and their faces well proportioned, yet of these sorts (in respect of the others) are very few: and it is to be believed that these kind of people do proceed of some strange nation, who in times past when it was lawful to deal out of that country, did join one with another.  
Those of the province of Canton (which is a hot country) be brown of colour like to the moors: but those that be farther within the country be like unto Almains, Italians and spaniards, white and red, and somewhat swart. All of them do suffer their nails of their left hand to grow very long, but the right hand they do cut: they have long hair, & esteem it very much & maintain it with curiosity: of both they make a superstition, for that they say thereby they shallbe carried into heaven. They do bind their hair up to the crown of their head, in calls of gold very curious and with pings of the same.  
The garments which the nobles and principals do use, be of silk of different colours, of the which they have excellent good and very perfect: the common and poor people do apparel themselves with another kind of silk more courser, and with linen, serge and cotton: of all the which there is great abundance. And for that the country for the most part is temperate, they may suffer this kind of apparel, which is the heaviest that they do use: for in all the whole kingdom they have no cloth, 
Great abundance of wool and good cheap.  neither do they suffer it to be made, although they have great abundance of wools, and very good cheap: they do use their coats according unto our old use of antiquity, with long skirts, and full of plaites, and a flap over the breast to be made fast under the left side, the sleeves very big and wide: upon their coats they do use cassocks or long garments according unto the possibility of either of them, made according as we do use, but only their sleeves are more wider. They of royal blood and such as are constituted unto dignity, do differ in their apparel from the other ordinary Gentlemen: for that the first have their garments laid on with gold and silver down to the waste, and the others alonely garnished on the edges, or hem: they do use hose very well made and stitched, 

Shoes and buskins of velvet.  
Great abundance of martyrs furs.   shoes and buskins of velvet, very curious. In the winter (although it be not very cold,) they have their garments furred with beasts skins, but in especial with Martas Cevellinas, of the which they have great abundance (as aforesaid) and generally they do use them at all times about their necks. They that be not married do differ from them that be married, in that they do kirrle their hair on their forehead, and wear higher hats. Their women do apparel themselves very curiously, much after the fashion of Spaine● they use many jewels of gold & precious stones: their gowns have wide sleeves, that wherewith they do apparel themselves is of cloth of gold and silver and divers sorts of silks, whereof they have great plenty, as aforesaid, and excellent good, and good cheap: and the poor folks do apparel themselves with velvet, unshorn velvet and serge. They have very fair hair, and do comb it with great care and diligence, as do the women of Genovay, and do bind it about their head with a broad ●ilke lace, set full of pearls and precious stones, and they say it doth become them very well: they do use to paint themselves, and in some place in excess.  
Amongst them they account it for gentility and a gallant thing to have little feet, 
An ill use and custom.  and therefore from their youth they do swadell and bind them very strait, and do suffer it with patience: for that she who hath the least feet is accounted the gallantest dame. They say that the men hath induced them unto this custom, for to bind their feet so hard, that almost they do lose the form of them, and remain half lame, so that their going is very ill, and with great travel: which is the occasion that they go but little abroad, and few times do rise up from their work that they do: and was invented only for the same intent. 
A good custom to avoid inconveniences.  This custom hath endured many years, and will endure many more, for that it is established for a law: and that woman which doth break it, and not use it with her children, shallbe counted as evil, yea shallbe punished for the same. They are very secret and honest, in such sort that you shall not see at any time a woman at her window nor at her doors: and if her husband do invite any person to dinner, she is never seen nor eateth not at the table, except the gest be a kinsman or a very friend: when they go abroad to visit their father, mother, or any other kinsfolks, they are carried in a little chair by four men, the which is made close, and with lattices round about made of gold wire and with silver, and curtains of silk: that although they do see them that be in the street, yet they cannot be seen: they have many servants waiting on them. So that it is a great marvel when that you shall meet a principal woman in the street, yea you will think that there are none in the city, their keeping in is such: the lameness of their feet is a great help thereunto, The women as well as the men be ingenious, 
Ingenious people.  they do use drawn works and carved works, excellent painters of flowers, birds and beasts, as it is to be seen upon beds and boards that is brought from thence. I did see myself, one that was brought unto Lysborne in the year 1582. by captain Ribera, chief sergeant of Manilla, that it was to be wondered at the excellency thereof: it caused the king's majesty to have admiration, and he is a person that little wondereth at things. All the people did wonder at it: yea the famous imbroderers did marvel at the curiousness thereof. They are great inventors of things, that although they have amongst them many coaches and wagons that go with sails, 
Wagons with sails.  and made with such industry and policy that they do govern that with great ease: this is credibly informed by many that have seen it: besides that, there be many in the Indies, and in Portugal that have seen them painted upon clothes, and on their earthen vessel that is brought from thence to be sold: so that it is a sign that their painting hath some foundation. In their buying and selling they are very subtle, in such sort that they will departed a hair. Such merchants as do keep shops (of whom in every city there is a great number) they have a table or sign hanging at their door, whereon is written all such merchandise as is within to be sold. 
Cloth of gold tissue & silk.  That which is commonly sold in their shops is cloth of gold and silver, cloth of tissue, silks of divers sorts and excellent colours: others there be of poorer sort that selleth serges, pieces of cotton, linen and fustian of all colours: yet both the one and the other is very good cheap, for that there is great abundance, and many workmen that do make it. The Apothecary that selleth simples, hath the like table: 
Por●●an.  there be also shops full of earthen vessels of divers making: red, green, yellow and gilt: it is so good cheap that for four rials of plate they give fifty pieces: they make them of very strong earth, the which they do break all to pieces and grind it, and put it into sesternes with water, made of lime and stone, and after that they have well tumbled and tossed it in the water: of the cream that is upon it they make the finest sort of them, & the lower they go, spending that substance, that is the courser: they make them after the form and fashion as they do here, and afterward they do gild them, and make them of what colour they please, the which will ne●er be lost: then they put them into their kills and burn them. This hath been seen and is of a truth, as appeareth in a book set forth in the Italian tongue, by Duardo Banbosa, that they do make them of periwinkle shells of the sea: the which they do grind and put them under the ground to refine them, whereas they lie 100 years: and many other things he doth treat of to this effect. But if that were true, they should not make so great a number of them as is made in that kingdom, and is brought into Portugal, and carried into the Peru, and Nova Espania, and into other parts of the world: which is a sufficient proof for that which is said. And the Chinos do agree to this to be true. The finest sort of this is never carried out of the country, for that it is spent in the service of the king, and his governors, & is so fine and clear, that it seemeth to be of fine and perfit crystal: that which is made in the province of Saxii is the best and finest. 
All occupations be in streets by themselves.  Artificers and mechanical officers do dwell in streets appointed, whereas none do dwell amongst them, but such as be of the same occupation or art: in such sort that if you do come at the beginning of the street, look what craft or art they are there, it is to be understood that all that street are of that occupation. It is ordained by a law and statute, that the son shall inherit his father's occupation, 
The son inherits his father's occupation.  and shall not use any other without licence of the justice: if one of them be very rich and will not work, yet he cannot let but have in his shop men that must work of his occupation. Therefore they that do use it, by reason that they are brought up in it from their youth, they are famous and very curious in that which they do work, as it is plainly seen in that which is brought from thence to Manilla, and into the Indies, and unto Portugal: Their currant money of that kingdom is made of gold and silver, without any sign or print, but goeth by weight: so that all men carrieth a balances with them, and little pieces of silver and gold, for to buy such things as they have need of. And for things of a greater quantity they have bigger balances in their houses & weights that are sealed, for to give to every man that which is theirs: for therein the justices have great care. In the government of Chincheo they have copper money coined, but it is nothing worth out of that province.    

The history of the mighty kingdom of China, wherein shallbe declared, of the religion that is amongst the people, and of their idols that they do worship, and of other things touching that they do use above nature. The second Book.  

CHAP. I. Of the number of gods that they do worship, and of some tokens and paintings that is found amongst them that do represent a mystery of our Christian religion.  
IN the two provinces, Paguina an Tolanchia, whereas we have said, the king of the country is ordinarily resident, for that they do bound upon Tartary, with whom they have had continual wars: and again the most principal and politic people be in those places, over and above all the other.  
Amongst the figures of all their idols that they have, the Chinos do say that there is one of a strange and marvelous making, 
A strange image.  unto whom they do great reverence: they do paint him a body with three heads, that doth continually look the one on the other: and they say that it doth signify, that all three be of one good will and essence, and that which pleaseth the one pleaseth the other: and to the contrary, that which is grievous and displeaseth the one, is grievous and displeaseth the other two: 
A mystery of the trinity.  the which being interpreted christianly, may be understood to be the mystery of the holy trinity, that we that are christians do worship, and is part of our faith: the which with other things seemeth somewhat to be respondent to our holy sacred and christian religion▪ 
S. Thomas preached in this kingdom.  so that of very truth we may presume that saint Thomas the Apostle did preach in this kingdom, who as it is declared in the lesson on his day. After that he had received the holy ghost, and preached the holy gospel unto the Parthes, Medes, Persas, Brachmanes and other nations, he went into the judias, 
The martyrdom of saint Thomas.  whereas he was martyred in the city of Calamina, for his faith and holy gospel that he preached.  
It is verified that when this glorious apostle did pass into the Indies, he traveled through this kingdom of China, where as it appeareth he did preach the holy gospel and mystery aforesaid, of the holy trinity: whose picture in the manner aforesaid doth endure unto this day, although those people, by the great and long blindness which they are in with their errors and idolatry, do not perfectly know what that figure with three heads doth represent or signify. The better for to believe that which is said, or at least to understand that it is so, is that it is found in the writings of the Armenians, that amongst them are in reputation and of great authority: & there it saith that this glorious apostle did pass through this kingdom of China, when he went into the Indies, where he was martyred, & that he did preach there the holy gospel, although it did profit very little, for that the people were out of order, and occupied in their wars: and therefore this Apostle did pass into the Indies, and left some of the country (although but a few) baptized and instructed, that when it should please God, they might have occasion to persever in that which was taught them.  
They have also amongst them (as it is said) certain pictures after the fashion and with the ensigns of the twelve apostles, which is a help to the verifying of that aforesaid: although if you do ask of the people who they are, they do answer that they were men, and great philosophers that did live virtuously, and therefore they are made angels in heaven. They do also use amongst them the picture of a woman very fair with a man child in her arms, whereof they say she was delivered and yet remained a virgin, and was daughter unto a mighty king: they do reverence her very much, and do make prayer unto her: more than this, they cannot say of this mystery, but that she lived a holy life and never sinned.  
Friar Gaspar de la Cruz a Portugal of the order of saint Dominicke, was in the city of Canton, where he did write many things of this kingdom, and with great attention, whom I do follow in many things in the process of this history, and he saith, that he being upon a small Island that was in the midst of a mighty river, there was a house in manner of a monastery of religious people of that country, and being in it, he saw certain curious things of great antiquity: amongst them he saw a chapel like unto an oratory or place of prayer, very well made, and curiously dressed: it had certain stairs to mount into it, and compassed about with guilt grates, and was made fast: and looking upon the altar, the which was covered with a cloth very rich: he saw in the midedst of the same an image of a woman of a marvelous perfection, with a child having his arms about her neck, and there was burning before her a lamp: he being amazed at this sight, he did demand the signification: but there was none that could declare more thereof then that which is said before. Of this which hath been said, it is easily to be believed how that the apostle S. Thomas did preach in this kingdom, for that it is seen, these people have conserved these traditions many years past, and do conserve the same: which is a sign & token that they had some notice of the true God, whose shadows they do represent. There is amongst them many errors, and without any foundation, and is not of them to be seen nor perceived till such time as by faith they shall know the right God: as may be seen in the chapters, where we shall speak of these matters.   

CHAP. II. I do prosecute the religion they have, and of the Idols they do worship.  
Over and above that which is sai●e, these Idolaters and blind people (being men so prudent & wise in the government of their common wealth, and so subtle and ingenious in all arts) yet they do use many other things of so great blindness and so impertinent, that it doth make them to wonder, which attentively do fall in the consideration: yet is it not much to be marveled at, considering that they are without the clear light of the true Christian religion, without the which the subtlest and delicatest understandings are lost and overthrown. Generally amongst them they do understand that the heaven is the creator of all things visible and invisible: and therefore they do make a show of it in the first carat or letter of the cross row, & that the heaven hath a governor to rule all such things as are comprehended there above: whom they call Laocon Tzautey, which is to be understood in their language: the governor of the great and mighty God, this they do worship as the principal, next unto the sun. They say that this governor was not begotten, but is eternal, and hath no body, but is a spirit. Likewise they do say that with this there is another of the same nature, whom they call Causay, and is like wise a spirit, and unto this is given power of the lower heaven, in whose power dependeth the life and death of man. This Causay hath three subjects whom he doth command, and they say they be likewise spirits, and they do aid and help him in things touching his government. They are called Tauquam, Teyquam, Tzuiquam, either of them hath distinct power the one over the other: they say that Tauquam hath charge over the rain, to provoke water for the earth, and Teyquam over human nature, to bring forth mankind: over wars, sowing the ground and fruits. And Tzuiquam over the seas and all navigators. They do sacrifice unto them, and do crave of them such things as they have under their charge and government: for the which they do offer them victuals, sweet smells, frontals and carpets, for their altars: likewise they promise many vows and represent plays and comedies before their Idols, the which they do very naturally.  
Besides this, they have for saints, such men as have surmounted other in wisdom, in valour, in industry, or in leading a solitary or asper life: or such as have lived without doing evil to any. And in their language they call them Pausaos, which be such as we do call holy men.  
They likewise do sacrifice unto the devil, not as though they were ignorant that he is evil, or condemned, but that he should do them no harm, neither on their bodies nor goods. They have many strange gods, of so great a number, that alonely for to name them, is requisite a large history, and not to be brief as is pretended in this book: And therefore I will make mention but of their principals, whom (besides those which I have named) they have in great reverence.  
The first of these they do call Sichia, who came from the kingdom of Tranthlyco which is towards the west: this was the first inventor of such religious people, as they have in their country both men and women, and generally doth live without marrying in perpetual closeness. And all such as do imitate this profession do wear no hair, which number is great, as hereafter you shall understand: and they greatly observe that order left unto them.  
The next is called Quanina, and was daughter unto the king Tzonton, who had three daughters, two of them were married, and the third which was Quanina, he would also have married, but she would never consent thereunto: saying, that she had made a vow to heaven to live chaste, whereat the king her father was very wroth, and put her into a place like unto a monastery, whereas she was made to carry wood and water, and to work and make clean an orchard that was there. The Chinos do tell many tales of this maid, for to be laughed at: saying, that the apes came from the mountains for to help her, and how that saints did bring her water: and the birds of the air with their bills did make clean her orchard, and that the great beasts came out of the mountains and brought her wood. Her father perceiving that, imagining that she did it by witchcraft, or by some art of the devil, (as it might well be) commanded to set fire on that house whereas she was: then she seeing that for her cause that house was set on fire, she would have destroyed herself with a silver pin, which she had to trim up her hair, but upon a sudden at that instant there fell a great shower of rain and did put out the fire, and she departed from thence and hid herself in the mountains, whereas she lived in great penance and led a holy life. And her father in recompense of the great sin and evil he committed against her, was turned to a leper, and full of worms, in such sort that there was no physician that could cure him: by reason whereof he was constrained to repair unto his daughter to seek cure, (which being advised of the same by revelation of a divine spirit) than her father being certified thereof, did crave pardon at her hands, and did repent him very much of that which he had done, and did worship unto her, the which she seeing, resisted her father therein, and put a saint before him, that he should worship it and not her, and therewith she strait ways returned unto the mountains, whereas she died in great religion. This they have amongst them for a great saint, and do pray unto her to get pardon for their sins of the heaven, for that they do believe that she is there.  
Besides this, they have another saint which they call Neoma, and was borne in a town called Cuchi, in the province of Ochiam. This they say was daughter unto a principal man of that Town, and would never marry, but left her own natural soil and went unto a little Island, which is right over against Ingoa, whereas she lived a very strait life, and showed many false miracles The occasion why they have her in reputation of a saint, is. There was a certain Captain of the king of China, whose name was Compo: he was sent unto a kingdom not far from thence to make war against the king, It so chanced that he with his navy came to an anchor at Buym, and being ready to depart, he would have weighed his anchors, but by no means he could not move them: being greatly amazed thereat, and looking forth he saw this Neoma sitting on them. Then the Captain came unto her and told her with great humility that he was going to wars by commandment of the king. And that if so be she were holy, that she would give him counsel what were best for him to do, to whom she answered and said, that if he would have the victory over them that he went to conquer, that he should carry her with him. He did perform that which she said and carried her with him unto that kingdom, whose inhabitants were great Magicians, and threw oil into the sea, and made it seem that their ships were all on fire. This Neoma did work by the same art, and did undo that which the other did practise or imagine, in such sort, that their magic did profit them nothing, neither could they do any harm unto them of China. The which being perceived by them of the kingdom, they did yield themselves to be subjects and vassals unto the king of China. The Captain believed this to be a miracle, yet notwithstanding he did conjure her (as one of good discretion) for that things might fall out to the contrary, and the better to certify his opinion, whereby he might the better give relation thereof unto the king, 
A false miracle.  he said. Lady turn me this rod the which I have in my hand dry, to become green and flourishing, and if you can so do, I will worship you for a saint. Then she at that instant did not only make it green, but also to have an odoriferous smell. The which rod he put upon the poop of his ship for a remembrance, and for that he had a very prosperous and good voyage, he did attribute it unto her. So that unto this day, they have her in reputation of a saint, and carry her picture upon the poop of their ships, and such as be travelers to the sea do offer unto her sacrifices.  
These aforesaid they do esteem for their principal saints, yet besides all these they have an infinite number of carved idols, which they do place upon altars in their temples: the quantity of them is such (that in my presence it was affirmed by friar Geronimo Martin, he that entered into China, and is a man of great credit worthy to give credit unto, that amongst many other things, he was in one of their temples in the city of Vcheo, where as he did count one hundred and twelve idols: and besides this they have many in the high ways and streets, and upon their principal gates of the city, the which they have in small veneration, as you shall perceive in this chapter following: whereby it is plainly to be seen, in what subjection they are unto errors and Idolatry, such as do lack the truth of true Christian religion.   

CHAP. III. How little they do esteem their Idols whom they worship.  
THese miserable Idolaters do so little esteem their Idols, that it is a great hope and confidence, that at what time so ever the gospel shall have any entry into that country, straightways they will leave off all their superstitions: in particular in casting of lots, which is a thing much used throughout all that kingdom: also this will be a great help thereunto, for that they are generally men of good understanding, and ducible and subject unto reason, in so ample sort (as is declared by that religious dominic aforesaid) he being in Canton in a temple whereas they were sacrificing unto their Idols, being moved with great zeal to the honour of God, did throw certain of them down to the ground. When these Idolaters did see his boldness which seemed unto them to be without reason: they laid hands on him with an infernal fury, with determination for to kill him: then he did request of them that before they did execute it, that they would hear what he would say: the which his petition seemed unto the principals that were there to be just, and commanded all the people to withdraw themselves, and to hear what he would say. Then he with the spirit that God did put in him, said, that they should advertise themselves, for that God our Lord and creator of heaven and earth, had given unto them so good understandings, and did equal them unto the politikest nations in all the world: that they should not employ it unto evil, neither subject themselves to worship unto stones and blocks of wood which have no discourse of reason, more than is given them by the workmen that did make them, and it were more reason the idols should reverence & worship men, because they have their similitude & likeness: with these words and other such like in effect, they were all quieted, and did not only approve his saying to be true, but did give him great thanks, excusing themselves: saying, that until that time there was none that ever did give them to understand so much, neither how they did evil in doing their sacrifices, and in token of gratefulness (leaving their idols on the ground, and some broken all to pieces) they did bear him company unto his lodging. Hereby you may understand with what facility, by the help of almighty God, they may be reduced unto our catholic faith: opening (by the light of the gospel) the door which the devil hath kept shut by false delusions so long time, although the king with all his governors and ministers hath great care that in all that kingdom there be none to induce novelties, neither to admit strangers or any new doctrine without licence of the said king, & of his royal counsel upon pain of death, the which is executed with great rigour. They are people very ducible and apt to be taught, and easy to be turned from their idolatry, superstition & false gods: the which they have in small veneration as aforesaid. With great humility they do receive & approve corrections of their weakness, & do know the vantage that is betwixt the gospel and their rites and vanities, and do receive the same with a very good will, as it hath been and is seen in many Chinos that have received baptism in the City of Manila, upon one of the islands Philippinas, whereas they do dwell, and leave their own natural country for to enjoy that which they understand to be for the salvation of their souls. So that those who have received baptism are become very good Christians.   

CHAP. four Of lots which they do use when they will do any thing of importance, and how they do invocate or call the devil.  
THe people of this country do not alonely use superstitions, but they are also great Augurisers or tellers of fortunes, and do believe in auguries, as a thing most certain and infallible, but in especial by certain lots which they do use at all times, 
They cast lots.  when they begin any journey, or for to do any thing of importance, as to marry a son, a daughter, or lend any money, or buy any lands, or deal with merchandise, or any other thing whose end is incertain or doubtful. In all these matters they do use lots, the which they do make of two sticks, flat on the one side, and round on the other, and being tied together with a small thread, throw them before their Idols. But before they do throw them, they do use great ceremonies in talk, and use amorous and gentle words, desiring them to give them good fortune. For by them they do understand the success to be good or evil in their journey, or any other thing that they do take in hand. Likewise they do promise them, if they do give them good fortune, to offer unto them, victuales, frontalles, or some other thing of price. This being done they throw down their lots, and if it so fall out that the flat side be upper, or one flat side and the other round, they have it for an evil sign or token. Then they return unto their Idols, and say unto them many injurious words, calling them dogs, infamous, villains, and other names like in effect. After they have uttered unto them all injuries at their pleasure, than they begin again to fawn upon them, and entreat them with mild and sweet words, craving pardon of that which is past, and promising to give them more gifts then before they did, if their lot do fall out well. Then in the like manner as before, they do proceed, and throw the lots before the idols: but if it fall not out according unto their expectation, than they return again with vituperious and vile words: but if to their desire, then with great praises and promises. But when that in matters of great importance, it is long before their lots do fall well: then they take them and throw them to the ground and tread upon them, or else throw them into the sea, or into the fire, 
They throw their gods under their feet.  whereas they let them burn a while: and sometimes they do whip them until such time as the lots do fall as they would have them, which is the round side upwards, and is a token of good success unto that, for which they do cast their lots. Then if the lots do fall out unto their content, they do make unto them great feasts with music and songs of great praise, and do offer unto them geese, ducks, and boiled rise. But if the thing whereon they do cast their lots be of importance, than they do offer unto them a hogs head boiled, dressed with herbs and flowers, the which is esteemed above all other things, and therewith a great pot with wine. Of all that they do offer, they do cut off their bills, and the claws of the fowls, and the hogs snout, and do throw upon it grains of rise, 
A hog's head for a sacrifice.  and sprinkling it it with wine, they set it in dishes upon the altar, and there they do eat and drink making great feast and cheer before their idols.  
Another kind of lots they do use, 
Another kind of lots.  in putting a great number of little sticks into a pot, and upon every one of them is written a letter: and after that they have tumbled and tossed them together in the pot: they cause a child to put in his hand and take out one, and when they have seen the letter, they seek in a book which they have for that purpose: the leaf that beginneth with that letter, and look what they do find written therein, they do interpret of it conformable unto the thing that they cast their lots for.  
Generally in all this country when they find themselves in any trouble, 
Invocation to the devil.  they do invocate and call upon the devil with whom they do ordinarily talk (even as we do call upon God in our need) of him they do demand what way and order they might take to clear themselves thereof, as they did in the presence of friar Pedro de Alfaro, of the order of saint Francis, in the year of our Lord 1580. at such time as he came from China, as may be seen in his relation. The order that they have in invocating or calling on the devil, is as followeth. They cause a man to lie upon the ground, his face downwards then another beginneth to read upon a book singing, and part of them that are present do answer unto him: the rest do make a sound with little bells, and tabor: then within a little while after, the man that lieth on the ground, beginneth to make visages and gestures: which is a certain token that the devil is entered within him: then do they ask of him what they do desire to know: then he that is possessed doth answer, yet for the most part they be lies that he doth speak: 
The devil telleth lies.  although he do keep it close, yet doth he give divers reasons unto that which he doth answer, for that always they do answer either by word or by letters, which is the remedy they have, when that the devil will not answer by word. And when that he doth answer by letters, then do they spread a red mantle or coverlet upon the ground, and throw thereon a certain quantity of rice dispersed equally in every place upon the coverlet: then do they cause a man that cannot write to stand there with a stick in his hand, than those that are present do begin to sing and to make a sound as at the first invocation: and within a little while the devil doth enter into him that hath the stick, and causeth him to write upon the rice, then do they translate the letters that are there form with the stick, and being joined altogether, they find answer of that they do demand: although for the most part it falleth out as aforesaid, as unto people that do communicate with the father of all lying, and so do their answers fall out false and full of leasings. If that at any time he do tell them the truth, it is not for that he doth it by nature or with his will: but to induce them under the colour of a truth to persever in their errors, and they do give credit unto a thousand lies: in this sort do they invocate the devil, and it is so ordinary a thing throughout all the kingdom, that there is nothing more used nor known.   

CHAP V Of the opinion they have of the beginning of the world, and of the creation of man.  
ALthough the Chinos be generally very ingenious, and of a clear understanding, yet in their own respect, they say that all other nations in the world be blind, except the Spaniards whom they have known but of late time: they have amongst them both natural and moral philosophy, the which is read publicly amongst them, and also astrology.  
But now touching the beginning of the world, and the creation of man: they have many errors, whereof some of them shallbe declared in this chapter, taken out of their own books, and specially out of one that is entitled the beginning of the world.  
They say that at the beginning, the heaven, the earth, & the water were a mass or lump joined in one. And that there is one resident in heaven, whom they call by name Tayn, he by his great science did separate heaven and earth, the one from the other, so that the heaven remained high in the state that it is, and the earth following his natural inclination, as grave and heavy, did remain whereas it is. They say that this Tayn did create a man of nothing, who they call Pauzon, 
Strange opinions.  and likewise a woman, who they call Pauzona. This Pauzon by the power that was given him by Tayn, did create of nothing another man who they call Tanhom, with thirteen other brothers. This Tanhom was a man of great science, in so ample sort, that he did give name unto all created things, and did know by the assignment and doctrine of Tayn, the virtue of them all, and to apply them to heal all manner of diseases and sicknesses: this Tanhom and his brethren, but especially the eldest, who was called Teyencom, he had twelve: his first begotten, called Tuhucom had nine, so had all the rest very many. They do believe that the lineage and generation of these did endure for more than ninety thousand years. And in the end & conclusion of them, did end all humane nature: for that it was the will of Tayn, who did first create the man & woman of nothing, for to be revenged on certain injuries that they did unto him, and for every one that he had showed unto them, they did almost know so much as himself, and would not acknowledge any superiority, as they did promise him, at such time as he did give unto him the secret of all his science. At that time did the heaven fall down, then did Tayn raise it up again, and created another man upon the earth named Lotzitzam, he had two horns, out of the which proceeded a very sweet savour: the which sweet smell did bring forth both men and women. This Lotzitzam vanished away, 
marvelous barieties.  and left behind him in the world many men and women, of whom did proceed all nations that now are in it. The first that this Lotzitzam brought forth was called Alazan, and lived nine hundred years: then did the heaven create another man called Atzion, whose mother called Lutim was with child with him, only in seeing a lions head in the air: he was borne in Truchin in the province of Santon, and lived eight hundred years: at this time was the world replenished with much people, and did feed on nothing but on wild herbs and raw things: then was there borne into the world one called Vsao, who gave them industry to make and do many things, as to use the trees to make defence to save them from wild beasts, which did them much harm, and to kill them, and make garments of their skins. After him came one called Huntzui, 
The first invention of ●●re.  who did invent the use of fire, and instructed them what they should do, and how to roast and boil their victuals, and how to barter and sell one thing for another. They did understand one another in their contradictions by knots made upon cords, for that they had not the use of letters nor any mention thereof. After that they say, that a certain woman, called Hantzibon was delivered of a son named Ocheutey, who was the inventor of many things & ordained marriage, & to play on many & divers instruments. They do affirm that he came from heaven by miracle for to do good upon the earth: 
Strange opinions.  for that his mother going by the way did see the print of a man's foot, & putting her foot on it, she was strait ways environed with a lightning, with whom she was conceived, and with child with this son. This Ocheutey had a son called Ezoulom who was the inventor of physic & astrology, but in especial matters touching law and judgement. 
The invention of plough and spade.  He showed them how to till the land, and invented the plough and spade: of this man they do tell many wonderful and marvelous things, but amongst them all, they say that he did eat of seven several kinds of herbs that were poison, and did him no harm: he lived 400. hundred years: his son was called Vitey, the first king they had amongst them, 
The first king of China.  he reduced all things to be under government, and to have it by succession, as shallbe declared in the chapter, whereas I will treat of the king of this mighty kingdom that now liveth. These and many other varieties and toys they say of the beginning of the world: whereby may be understood, how little men may do without the favour of God, and the light of the catholic faith, yea though they be of the most subtlest and finest wit that may be imagined.   

CHAP VI. How they hold for a certainty, that the soul is immortal, and that he shall have another life: in the which it shallbe punished or rewarded according unto the works which he doth in this world, and how they pray for the dead.  
BY that aforesaid, it appeareth to be of a truth that the apostle S. Thomas did preach in China, & we may presume that all which we have seen doth remain printed in their hearts from his doctrine, and beareth a similitude of the truth, & a conformity with the things of our catholic religion. Now touching this that we will treat of in this chapter, of the immortality that they believe of the soul, and of the reward or punishment which they shall have in the other life, according unto the works done in company with the body: which appeareth to be the occasion that they do not live so evil as they might, not having the knowledge of this truth.  
I do hope by the power of his divine majesty, that they will easily be brought unto the true knowledge of the gospel. They say and do affirm it of a truth, 
The soul is immortal.  that the soul had his first beginning from the heaven, and shall never have end: for that the heaven hath given it an eternal essence. And for the time that it is within the body that God hath ordained, if it do live according to such laws as they have without doing evil, or deceit unto his neighbour: them it shallbe carried unto heaven, whereas it shall live eternally with great joy, & shallbe made an angel: & to the contrary, if it live ill, shall go with the devils into dark dungeons and prisons, whereas they shall suffer with them torments which never shall have end. They do confess, that there is a place whither such souls as shallbe made angels do go to make themselves clean of all such evil as did cleave unto them, being in the body: and for that it should be spéedelier done, the good deeds which are done by their parents & friends do help them very much. So that it is very much used throughout all the kingdom to make orations, & prayers for the dead, for the which they have a day appointed in the month of August. They do not make their offerings in their temples, but in their houses: the which they do in this manner following. The day appointed, all such as do bear them company until their sacrifices are concluded for the dead: which are such as we do call here religious men, every one hath his companion and walketh the streets, and doth report the days & houses where they will be, for that it cannot be done altogether. So when they come unto the house whereas they must do their offices: they enter in, & do prepare that every one do make oration and sacrifice according to their fashion for the dead of that house: understanding that by their help they shallbe made clean from their evils, which is an impediment that they cannot be angels nor enjoy the benefit which is ordained for them in heaven. One of these that is like unto a priest, doth bring with him a taber, & other two little boards, & another a little bell. Then they do make an altar, 
Strange ob sequys.  whereon they do set such idols as the dead had for their saints living: then do they perfume them with frankincense and storax, and other sweet smells: then do they put 5. or 6 tables full of victuals for the dead & for the saints: then straightways at the sound of the taber, little boards & bells (which is a thing more apt for to dance by, as by report of them that have heard it) they begin to sing certain songs which they have for that purpose, then do the novices go up unto the altar, and do offer in written paper those Orations which they did sing to the sound of those instruments, This being done, they sit down and begin anew to sing as before. 
They make their sacrifices in the night.  In the end of their prayers and songs, he who doth this office, doth sing a prayer, and in the end thereof (with a little board that he hath in his hand for the purpose) he striketh a blow upon the table, than the other do answer in the same tune, declining their heads, & do take certain painted papers, and guilt papers, and do burn them before the altar. In this sort they are all the night, which is the time that ordinarily they do make their sacrifices: the which being done, the priests & those that be in the house, do eat the victuals that was set upon the tables, wherein they do spend the residue of the night till it be day. They say that in doing this they do purify and make clean the souls that they may go & become angels. 
Great superstition.  The common people do believe of truth that the soul that liveth not well, before they go into hell (which shall not be before the end of the world, according as they do think in their error) in recompense of their evil life, the heavens do put them into the bodies of buffs and other beasts: and those which live well, into the bodies of kings & lords, whereas they are very much made of & well served. These and a thousand toys in like sort, making that the soul doth move out of one into another, as certain old philosophers did affirm it to be, who were as blind and as far from the truth as they.   

CHAP. VII. Of their temples, and of certain manner of religious people both men and women, and of their superiors.  
THere are found in this kingdom many moral things, the which do touch very much our religion, which giveth us to understand that they are people of great understanding, in especial in natural things, and that it should be of a certainty, that the holy apostle of whom we have spoken, did leave amongst them by his preachings occasion for to learn many things that do show unto virtue: one of the which is, that there is found amongst them many monasteries, in their cities and towns, and also in the fields, wherein are many men and women that do live in great closeness, and obedience: after the fashion of other religious monasteries. They have amongst than (that is known) only four orders, every one of them hath their general, who dwelleth ordinarily in the city of Suntien, or Taybin, whereas is the king & his counsel. These their generals they do call in their language Tricon, who do provide for every province a provincial to assist & visit all the convents, correcting and amending such faults as is found, according unto the institution and manner of living. This provincial doth ordain in every convent one, which is like unto the prior or guardian whom all the rest do reverence and obey. This general is for ever till he do die, except they do find in him such faults that he doth deserve to be deprived: yet they do not elect their provincials as we do use, but it is done by the king & his counsel, always choosing 〈◊〉 that is known to be of a good life and fame: so that favour carrieth nothing away. This general is appareled all in silk, 
Gallant colours for religious men.  in that colour that his profession doth use: either black, yellow, white or russet, which are the four colours that the four orders do use: he never goeth forth of his house, but is carried in a little chair of ivory or gold, by four or six men of his habit. When any of the convent doth talk unto him, it is on their knees: they have also amongst them a seal of their monastery, for the dispatching of such business as toucheth their religion. These have great rents given them by the king for the sustaining of themselves and their servants. All their convents hath great rents in general: part given them by the king, and part of charity, given them in those cities or towns whereas they have their houses, the which are many and very huge. They do ask their charity in the streets, singing with the sound of two little ●ords, and other instruments. Every one of them when they do beg, doth carry in their hands a thing, wherein are written certain prayers, that they say is for the sins of the people: and all that is given them in charity they lay it upon the said thing, wherewith they do understand (in their blind opinion) that their spirit is clear of all sin. In general their beards and heads are shaven, and they wear one sole vesture, without making any difference, according unto the colour of their religion. They do eat altogether, & have their sells according to the use of our friars, their vestures or apparel is ordinary of serge of the said four colours. They have beads to pray on as the papists use, although in another order: they do assist all burials for to have charity: they do arise two hours before day to pray, as our papists do their matins, and do continue in the same until the day do break: they do pray all in one voice, singing in very good order and attention, and all the time of their praying they do ring bells, whereof they have in that kingdom the best and of the gallantest sound that is in all the world, by reason that they are made almost all of steel, 
Gallant bells.  they pray unto the heaven, whom they take for their God, and unto Sinquian, who they say was the inventor of that their manner of life, and became a saint. They may leave their order at all times at their pleasure, giving their general to understand thereof.  
But in the time that they are in that order they cannot marry, neither deal with any women upon pain to be punished asperly. At such time as one doth put himself in religion, the father or next kinsman of him that taketh the order, doth invite all them of the convent, and doth make them a great and solemn banquet, yet you must understand that the eldest son of any man cannot put himself in any monastery, but is prohibited by the laws of the country, 
The eldest son is prohibited to take orders.  for that the eldest son is bound to sustain his father in his old age. When that any of these religious men do die, they do wash him, and shave him, before they do bury him, & do all wear mourning apparel for him. The religious man or woman, that is once punished for any fault, cannot afterward turn and receive the habit at any time. They have a certain mark given unto them in token of their fault, and that is a bord● put about their neck, so that it is seen of all people. Every morning and evening they do offer unto their Idols, frankincense, benjamin, wood of aguila and cayolaque the which is marvelous sweet, and other gums of sweet and odoriferous smells. When that they will launch any ship into the water, after that it is made, than these religious men, all appareled with rich robes of silk, do go to make sacrifices upon the poops of them, whereas they have their oratory's, and there they do offer painted papers of divers figures, the which they do cut in pieces before their idols, with certain ceremonies and songs well consorted, and ringing of little bells, they do reverence unto the devil. And they do paint him in the fore castle, for that he shall do no harm unto the ships: that being done, they do eat and drink till they can no more. And with this they think it is sufficient for the ship, that all such voyages as she shall make shall succeed well, the which they have amongst them for a thing most certain: and if they did not bless them in this order, all things would fall out to the contrary.   

CHAP. VIII. The order that they have in burying of the dead, and the mourning apparel they have.  
IT seemeth unto me not far from our purpose, to declare in this place, how they use in this kingdom to bury the dead, & it is surely a thing to be noted: the manner is as followeth. When that any one doth die, at the very instant that he yieldeth up the ghost, they do wash his body all over from top to toe, 
A strange kindof burial.  then do they apparel him with the best apparel that he had, all perfumed with sweet smells. Then after he is appareled, they do set him in the best chair that he hath, then cometh unto him his father & mother, brethren & sisters, & children, who kneeling before him, they do take their leave of him, shedding of many tears, & making of great moan every one of them by themselves. Then after them in order cometh all his kinsfolks & friends, and last of all his servants (if ●e had any,) who in like case do as the other before. This being done, they do put him into a coffin or chest made of very sweet wood, (in that country you have very much) they do make it very close, to avoid the evil smell. Then do they put him on a table with two banks, in a chamber very gallantly dressed and hanged with the best clothes that can be gotten, covering him with a white sheet hanging down to the ground, whereon is painted the dead man or woman, as natural as possible may be. But first in the chamber whereas the bead body is or at the entry, they set a table with candles on it, and full of bread & fruits of divers sorts. And in this order they keep him above ground 15. days, in that which time every night cometh thither their priests & religious men, whereas they sing prayers and offer sacrifices, with other ceremonies: they bring with them many painted papers, and do burn them in the presence of the dead body, with a thousand superstitions & witchcrafts: & they do hang upon cords (which they have for the same purpose) of the same papers before him, & many times do shake them & make a great noise, with the which they say it doth send the soul strait unto heaven. In the end of the 15. days, all which time the tables are continually furnished with victuals & wine, which the priests, their kinsfolks and friends, that do come to visit them do eat. These ceremonies being ended, they take the coffin with the dead body, & carry him into the fields, accompanied with all his kinsfolks & friends, & with their priests & religious men carrying candles in their hands, whereas ordinarily they do bury them on a mountain, in sepultures that for the same purpose in their life time they caused to be made of stone & masons work: that being done, strait ways ha●d by the sepulture, they do plant a pine tree, in the which place there be many of them, & they be never cut down except they be overthrown with the weather, & after they be fallen they let them lie till they consume of themselves, for that they be sanctified. The people that do bear him company to the grave, do go in very good order like a procession, & have with them many instruments, which never leave playing till such time as the dead is put into the sepulchre. And that burial which hath most priests & music is most sumptuous, wherein they were wont to spend great riches. They sing to the sound of the instruments many orations unto their Idols: and in the end they do burn upon the sepulchre many papers, whereon is painted, slaves, horse, gold, silver, silks, & many other things, the which they say, that the dead body doth possess in the other world whether he goeth to dwell. At such time as they do put him into the grave, they do make great banquets & sports with great pastime, saying of a truth, that look what soever they do at that time, the angels & saints that are in heaven do the like unto the soul of the dead that is there buried. Their parents, familiars and servants, in all this time do wear mourning apparel, the which is very asper, for that their apparel is made of a very course wool, & wear it next unto their skins, & girt unto them with cords, and on their heads bunnets of the same cloth, with verges broad like unto a hat hanging down to their eyes: for father or mother they do wear it a hole year, and some two years, & if his son be a governor (with licence of the king) he doth withdraw himself many times, leaving the office he hath, the which they esteem a great point of honour, & have it in grea● account, and such as are not so much in alliance do apparel than in died linen certain months. Likewise their parents and friends, although these do wear it but for the time of the burial.   

CHAP. IX. Of their ceremonies that they use in the celebrating the marriages.  
THe people of this kingdom have a particular care to give state unto their children in time, before that they be overcome or drowned in vices or lascivious living. The which care is the occasion, that in this country being so great, there is less vice used than in any other smaller countries: whose over much care doth cause them many times to procure to marry their children being very young: yea and to make consort before they be borne with signs & tokens, making their writings and bands for the performance of the same in public order. In all this kingdom, yea and in the islands Philippinas, it is a customable use, that the husband doth give dowry unto the wife with whom he doth marry, and at such time as they do join in matrimony, the father of the bride doth make a great feast in his own house, and doth invite to the same, the father and mother, kinsfolks and friends of his son in law. And the next day following, the father of the bridegroom, or his next parent, doth the like unto the kinsfolks of the bride. These banquets being finished, the husband doth give unto his wife her dowry in the presence of them all, and she doth give it unto her father or mother (if she have them) for the pains they took in the bringing her up. Whereby it is to be understood, that in this kingdom, and in those that do confine on it, 
They that have most daughters are most richest.  those that have most daughters are most richest, so that with the dowries their daughters do give them, they may well sustain themselves in their necessity, and when they die, they do give it that daughter that did give it them, that it may remain for their children, or otherwise use it at their wills. A man may marry with so many wives as he can sustain, so it be not with his sister or brother's daughter, 
They may marry with many wives.  and if any do marry in these two degrees, they are punished very rigorously. Of all their wives, the first is their legitimate wife, and all the rest are accounted but as lemanes or concubines. These married men, do live and keep house with his first wife, and the rest he doth put in other houses, or if he be a merchant, than he doth repart them in such villages or towns, whereas he doth deal in, who are unto him as servants in respect of the first. When the father doth die, the eldest son by his first wife doth inherit the most part of all his goods, and the rest is reparted in equal parts amongst the other children, both of his first wife and of all the other wives. For lack of a son by his first wife, the first borne of the other wives doth inherit the most part: so that few times or never there is none that dieth without heirs, either by his first wife, or by the others. And if it so fall out that any of these his wives do commit adultery (the which seldom chanceth, by reason of their keeping in, and great honesty, 
Honest women.  as also it is great infamy unto the man that doth offer any such thing) then may the husband finding them together, kill them: but after that first fury being past, he cannot but complain of the adulterers unto the justice, and although it be proved very apparent, yet can they give them no more punishment but beat them cruelly upon their thighs, as is the custom and law of the country, as shallbe declared unto you in his place. Then may the husband afterwards sell his wife for a slave, and make money of her for the dowry he gave her: notwithstanding, there be amongst them that for interest will dissemble the matter, yea and will seek opportunities and occasion. Yet if such be spied or known they are righteously punished. They say in the provinces that be near unto Tartary, and in the self same Tartary they do use a custom and manner of marriage very strange, that is: the vizroyes or governors do limit and appoint a time when that all men and women shall meet together such as will marry, or receive the order of religion.  
The time being accomplished, all such as would be married do meet together in a city of that province appointed for that purpose: and when they come thither, they do present themselves before 12. ancient and principal men appointed there by the king for the same purpose, who do take a note of their names both of men and women and of what state and degree they are, 
A strange kind of marriage.  and of their substance for to dowry their wives with whom they shallbe married. Then do they number all the men and women that be there, & if they do find more men than women, or to the contrary, more women than men: then they cast lots, & do leave the number that doth so bear in register till the next year, that they may be the first that shallbe married. Then six of those ancient men, do put the men in three parts, the rich they put in one part without any consideration of gentility or beauty, and those that are rich in a mean, in an other part, and the poor in the third part. In the mean time that these six men be occupied in the reparting of the men, the other▪ six do repart the women in three parts, to say in this manner, the most fairest in one part, and them not so fair in an other, and the foulest in an other. This division being made, than do they marry them in this order: unto the rich men they do give the fairest, and they do give for them the prize that is appointed by the judges, and unto them that are not so rich they do give them that are not so fair, without paying for them any thing at all: and unto the poor men they give the foulest, with all that which the rich men do pay for the fair women, dividing it into equal parts. Sure it is a notable thing if it be true. This being done, they are all married in one day, and helped (although peradventure not all content) the marriages being done there is great feasts made, in such houses as the king hath ordained in every city for the same purpose, the which are furnished with beds, and all other necessaries belonging thereunto, for that the new married people may be served of all that is needful for the time that the feast do endure. This solemnity being finished, which they say doth endure fifty days: these new married people do go unto their own houses. You must understand that this custom of marriage is ordained for the common and poor people, and not for Lords nor gentlemen, who are not bound to obey this ordinance, but to marry whereas they like best, every one to seek and marry with his equal, or else by an order which the king hath set down unto the viceroys and governors, what to be done therein.  
When that the king of China is married, then doth he choose thirty concubines, the principallest persons in all his kingdom, the which he doth keep and maintain within his palace so long as he doth live. But after that he is dead and his funeral ended, as is accustomed: then doth the heir or successor of the kingdom apparel these thirty women marvelous gorgeously with many jewels, then doth he cause them to set in an Estrado, or rich pallet gallantly dressed and furnished in one of the three halls (as shall be declared in the second chapter of the third book) with their faces covered, in such sort as they may not be seen nor known: and being set in this order, then doth there enter in thirty gentlemen of the principallest of the kingdom, (those whom the king left named in his testament) the which goeth by antiquity, or according unto order set by the king: and either of them doth take one of these Ladies by the hand, and look how they found them, so they do carry them with their faces covered till they bring them home to their houses, whereas they have them for their wives, and do maintain and keep them all the days of their lives: towards the maintaining of them the king doth leave in his testament great revenues, and the successor in the kingdom doth accomplish and perform the same with great diligence and care. In old time when that the kings of China would marry any of his children or kinsfolks, he did make in his palace a great and solemn banquet, to the which he did invite all the principallest Lords and gentlemen of his court, commanding to bring with them their sons and daughters, who did accomplish the same, striving who should apparel their children most richest and most gallantest. The banquet being done, the young princes do go whereas are these young Ladies, every one placed in order according to their age, and there he doth choose his wife according to his own will or desire, and where he liketh best. Likewise the infants or kings daughters do the like in choosing their husbands amongst the young lords and gentlemen. But at this time, this custom is left off, for that the princes and gentlemen do marry with their kinsfolks, so that it be not in the first or second degree: yet many times they do not keep the second.   

CHAP. X. How that in all this mighty kingdom there is no poor folks walking in the streets nor in the temples a begging, & the order that the king hath given for the maintaining of them that cannot work.  
Many things of great government hath been and shall be declared in this history worthy to be considered: and in my opinion, this is not the least that is contained in this chapter, which is such order as the king and his counsel hath given that the poor may not go a begging in the streets, nor in the temples whereas they make orations unto their Idols: for the avoiding thereof the king hath set down an order, 
A good order to avoid idle people.  upon great and grievous penalty to be executed upon the said poor, if they do beg or crave in the streets, and a greater penalty upon the citizens or towns men, if they do give unto any such that beggeth, but must incontinent go and complain on them to the justice: who is one that is called the justice of the poor ordained to punish such as do break the law, and is one of the principallest of the city or town, and hath no other charge but only this. And for that the towns be great and many and so full of people, and an infinite number of villages, whereas it cannot be chosen but there is many borne lame, and other misfortunes, so that he is not idle but always occupied in giving order to remedy the necessities of the poor without breaking of the law. This judge the first day that he doth enter into his office, 
I would the like were with us.  he commandeth that whatsoever children be borne a créeple in any part of his members, or by sickness be taken lame, or by any other misfortune, that incontinent their fathers or mothers do give the judge to understand thereof that he may provide for all things necessary, according unto the ordinance and will of the king and his counsel, the which is, the man child or woman child, being brought before him, and seen the default or lack that it hath, if it be so that with the same it may exercise any occupation, they give and limit a time unto the parents, for to teach the child that occupation ordained by the judge, and it is such, as with their lameness they may use without any impediment, the which is accomplished without fail: but if it so be that his lameness is such, that it is impossible to learn or exercise any occupation, this judge of the poor doth command the father to sustain and maintain him in his own house all the days of his life, if that he hath wherewithal: if not, or that he is fatherless, than the next rich kinsman must maintain it: if he hath none such, then doth all his parents and kinsfolks contribute and pay their parts, or give of such things as they have in their houses. But if it hath no parents, or they be so poor, that they cannot contribute nor supply any part thereof: then doth the king maintain them in very ample manner of his own costs in hospitals, very sumptuous, that he hath in every city throughout his kingdom for the same effect and purpose: in the same hospitals are likewise maintained, all such needy and old men, 
A very good order.  as have spent all their youth in the wars, and are not able to maintain themselves: so that to the one and the other is ministered all that is needful and necessary, and that with great diligence and care: and for the better accomplishing of the same, the judge doth put very good order, and doth appoint one of the principallest of the city or town, to be the administrator, without whose licence. There is not one within that hospital that can go forth of the limits: for that licence is not granted unto any, neither do they demand it, for that there they are provided of all things necessary so long as they do live, as well for apparel as for victuals. Besides all this, the old folks and poor men within the hospital, do bring up hens, chickens, and hogs for their own recreation and profit, wherein they do delight themselves. The judge doth visit often times the administrator by him appointed. Likewise the judge is visited by an other that cometh from the court, by the appointment of the king and the counsel to the same effect: and to visit all such hospitals as be in the provinces limited in his commission, and if they do find any that hath not executed his office in right and justice, than they do displace them, 
A mirror for us to look upon.  and punish them very rigorously: by reason whereof all such officers have great care of their charges and live uprightly, having before their eyes the strait account which they must give, and the cruel reward if to the contrary. The blind folks in this country are not accounted in the number of those that of necessity are to be maintained by their kinsfolks, or by the king: for they are constrained to work, as to grind with a querne wheat or rice, or to blow smiths bellows, or such like occupations, that they have no need of their sight. And if it be a blind woman, when the cometh unto age, she doth use the office of women of love, of which sor●e there are a great number in public places, as shall be declared in the Chapter for that purpose. These have women that do tend upon them, and do paint and trim them up, and they are such that with pure age did leave that office. So by this order in all this kingdom, although it be great, and the people infinite: yet there is no poor that do perish nor beg in the streets, as was apparent unto the austin and barefoot friars, and the rest that went with them into that country.    

The third book and history of the great and mighty kingdom of China, in the which is contained many notable things worthy to be considered of touching moral and politic matters.  

CHAP. I. How many kings hath been in this kingdom and their names.  
IN the fourth Chapter of the first book, I did promise, particularly to declare, how many kings have been in this kingdom, and their names. Now to accomplish the same, I will begin and declare the succession of them from Vitey, 
Vitey the first king of China.  (who was the first that did reduce the kingdom to one empire government) unto him that doth reign at this day, remitting that which shall lack unto the Chapter aforesaid: whereas shall be found the number of the kings, and how many years since the first beginning of this kingdom, and the manner of the succession.  
This Vitey was the first king of China (as it appeareth by their histories, where as they do make particular mention.) But amongst other things that they do declare of the kings person, they do say that he was in height so much as seven measures, which is accustomed in China: and every measure is two thirds of a Spanish vare, 
Which is four yards quarter and half.  which is by good account four vares and two terses in length: he was six palms broad in the shoulders, and was as valiant in his deeds as in bigness of his body: he had a Captain called Lincheon, who was not only valiant, but politic and of great wisdom, by reason whereof with his valour and strength he did subject unto Vitey, all the whole country that he doth now possess, and caused all people to fear him. They do attribute that this Vitey, did first invent the use of garments for to wear, 
The first invention of garments and dying o● colours.  and the dying of all manner of colours, of making of ships: he likewise invented the saw● to saw timber, but above all things he was a great Architector, and an inventor of buildings, whereof he made very many and very sumptuous, which do endure unto this day in the remembrance of his name: he did also invent the wheel to turn silk, the which is used to this day in all the kingdom: he was the first that did use to wear gold, pearls and precious stones for jewels, and to wear cloth of gold, silver and silk in apparel: he did repart all the people of the country into cities, towns and villages: and did ordain occupations, and commanded that no man should use any other but that which his father did use, without his particular licence, or the governors of his kingdom. And that should not be granted without great occasion for the same.  
All of one occupation were put in streets by themselves, the which order is used unto this day throughout all the kingdom: so that if you do desire to know what occupation is in any street, it is sufficient to see the first house thereof, although it be very long: for it is very certain that they be all of one occupation and not mingled with any other. Amongst all other things he ordained one thing of great consideration, that was, 
No women to be idle.  no woman to be idle but to work, either in her husband's occupation, or in sowing or spinning. This was a law so general amongst them, that the Queen herself did observe & keep it.  
They say that he was a great Astrologician, and had growing in the court of his palace a certain herb, the which did make a manner of demonstration when that any did pass by it, 
A strange kind of herb.  whereby it did show if any were evil intentioned against the king. Many other things they do declare which I let pass because I would not be tedious unto the reader, referring the dreams and fondness of these Idolaters, unto the judgement of your discretion: for unto the discreet is sufficient to touch of every thing a little. He had four wives, and by them five and twenty sons, he reigned a hundredth years: there was betwixt this king, and he which did build the great wall (that was spoken of in the ninth chapter of the first book) one hundredth and sixteen kings, all of the lineage of this Vitey. All the which did reign, as appeareth by their histories, two thousand two hundredth and fifty seven years. I do not here declare their names, because I would not be tedious, although they be particularly named in their histories: but here I will set down them that I find necessary to be spoken of for the succession unto him that now reigneth. The last king of the lineage of this worthy Vitey, was called Tzintzon: this did make the mighty and great wall aforesaid: finding himself to be greatly troubled with the king of Tartary, who did make war upon him in many places of his kingdom: he did ordain the making thereof, and for the furnishing of the same, he did take the third man of the country to the work: and for that many people did die in this tedious work, by reason they went so far from their own houses, and in divers climes clean contrary unto that where as they were bred and borne: it grew that the king was hated and abhorred of all people, in such sort that they did conspire his death, which in effect they did accomplish and slew him, after he had reigned forty years: and also his son and heir who was called Aguizi. After the death of this Tzintzon and his son, they did ordain for their king, one that was called Auchosau, a man of great valour and wisdom, he reigned twelve years: a son of his did succeed him in the kingdom, called Futey, & he reigned seven years. After the death of this king, who died very young: his wife did reign and govern, and was of his own lineage: she did marvelously govern that kingdom for the space of 18▪ years, and for that she had no issue natural of her body, a son of her husband's that he had by an other wife did succeed in the kingdom, and reigned three and twenty years: a son of his did succeed him, called Cuntey, and reigned 16. years & eight months: a son of his called Guntey, did reign 54. years: a son of his did succeed him called Guntey, and reigned thirteen years: his son called Ochantey, did succeed him and reigned 25. years and three months: his son called Coantey succeeded him & reigned 13. years & two months. After him reigned his son Tzentzey, 26. years & 4. months: then succeeded his son called Anthey, and reigned no more but 6. years, his son Pintatey, did inherit & reigned 5. years: this Pintatey when he died was not married, and therefore a brother of his did succeed him called Tzintzumy, & reigned but 3. years & 7. months: after him succeeded a younger brother called Hue hannon, & reigned six years: his son called Cubum did succeed him & reigned 32. years: his son Bemthey, did inherit & reigned 18. years: after him his son Vnthey, & reigned 13. years: O they succeed him & reigned 17. years, his son called Yanthey reigned but 8. months, and left a son called Antey, who reigned 19 years, whose eldest son called Tantey, died incontinent after his father, and reigned only 3. months, & his brother called Chytey reigned one year, his son called Linthey reigned 22. years, his son called Yanthey did succeed him, & reigned 31. years. This Yanthey (the history saith) was a man of small wisdom which was the occasion that he was abhorred and hated of those of his kingdom. A Nephew of his called Laupy did rebel against him, he had two sociates for to help him, gentlemen of the court, they were two brethren & very valiant, the one was called Quathy, the other Tzunthey, these two did procure to make Laupy king. His uncle the king understood thereof, and was of so little valour & discretion, that he could not, neither durst he put remedy in the same: which caused commotions and common rumours amongst the people. But in especial there was four tyrants joined in one, and all at one time, they were called, Cincoan, Sosoc, Guansian & Guanser. Against these Laupy did make war under colour to help his uncle, but after a while, that the war endured, he concluded and made peace with Cincoan, and he married▪ with one of his daughters, who strait ways made war against the other three tyrants with the help of his father in law. At this time this mighty kingdom was divided in three parts and began the tyranny as you shall understand: the one and principal part fell unto Laupy by the death of his uncle, the other to Sosoc, & the other unto Cincoan his father in law. In this sort remained the kingdom in division a while, till such time as Cuythey son unto Laupy did reign in his father's steed. Then did there a tyrant rise up against him called Chimbutey and slew him: he by his great valour did bring the kingdom all in one as before, after that it had been in division 41. years, and reigned after that alone 25. years: his son named Fontey, did succeed him and reigned 17. years. And to make short of this lineage, there was 15. kings, and reigned 176. years, against the last of them who was called Quioutey▪ there did arise against him tyrannously Tzobu. Of this lineage▪ there was eight kings, who reigned 62. years: against the last of them called Sutey, there arose one called Cotey, of whose lineage there was five kings, and reigned twenty four years, the last of them called Otey, was slain by Diana▪ There was of this lineage four kings that reigned 56. years: against the last of them rose up Tim, and there was of his race, five kings: and reigned one and 30. years: against the last of this house rose up Tzuyn. And there was of this lineage three kings, and reigned seven and thirty years, against the last of these rose up Touco. This and all the rest of his lineage did govern marvelous well: which was the occasion that they endured the longer time. There was of them one and twenty kings, and reigned 294. years: the last of them called Troncon, did marry with one that had been his father's wife, called Bausa▪ a very fair woman: he took her out of a monastery where she was a Nun, only to marry with her: she used such policy that he was slain, and did govern the kingdom after alone one and forty years. The history saith that she was dishonest, and that with extremity, and used the company of the best and principallest of the realm, and not content with that, she married with one of base lineage, one fit for her purpose, because she was so vicious. They say that before she did marry, she caused to be slain the sons she had by her first husband, for that she had a desire that a nephew of hers should succeed her in the kingdom. Then those of the kingdom perceiving her intent, and weary of her, by reason of her ill living, sent out to seek a bastard son of her husbands, who was fled away, and with a common consent, they raised him for king. He was called Tautzon, he caused cruel and rigorous justice to be done upon his stepmother, as was reason for her evils, and an example to all those of the kingdom, who by a precedent of her ill living began to straggle: there was of his lineage seven kings, that reigned 130. years: against the last called Concham arose Diana, of this lineage there were but two kings and reigned eighteen years. Against the second and last arose Outon, and was of his lineage three kings and reigned but fifteen years: against the last there arose Outzim of this there was but two kings and reigned nine years and three months, there arose against the last Tozo: he and his son reigned four years: with the son of this one Auchin did fight and slew him in the combat, and succeeded him in the kingdom: he with other two of his lineage reigned ten years, against the last of these arose up one of the lineage of Vitey the first king, and slew him, he was called Zaytzon, there was of this lineage seventeen kings and reigned with all peace and quietness, three hundred and twenty years: the last of this lineage was called Tepyna, with whom did fight the gran Tartaro called Vzon, who entered into China with a mighty army, and got all the kingdom, and it was possessed with nine Tartarus kings, the which reigned 93. years, and entreated the inhabitants with great tyranny and servitude: the last of these was called Tzintzoum, this was more cruel unto the Chinos then any of the rest, which was the occasion that all the kingdom did join together in one, and did elect a king, called Gombu, a man of great valour, and of the lineage of ancient kings passed, who by his great worthiness, and joining much people together, did so much that he did drive all the Tartaros out of the kingdom, with the death of many thousands of them, who obstinately and without justice, did with all tyranny keep that kingdom in possession: there was of this lineage twelve kings with this that now reigneth: the eleven kings passed reigned two hundredth years: he that now possesseth the kingdom is called Boneg, who by the death of his elder brother that died by a fall he had from his horse, did inherit the kingdom: he is of 23. years of age (as they say) and hath his mother alive, of whom as yet there is nothing written: so that I can write nothing in particular, but that they say, he is a gallant gentleman, and well-beloved of his subjects, and a great friend unto justice. He is married with a cozen of his, and hath one son.  
Those of his lineage hath got of the Tartars many countries since they were driven out of China, the which are on the other side of the mighty wall. God for his mercy's sake bring them to the knowledge of his holy law, and accomplish a prophesy that they have amongst them, by the which they are given to understand that they shall be ruled and brought in subjection by men with great eyes and long beards, a nation that shall come from countries far off, by whom they shallbe commanded, which signifieth to be Christians. The king of this country is had in so great reputation amongst his subjects, that in all the provinces where he is not resident, in the chief cities whereas are the vizroyes or governors, they have a table of gold in the which is portrayed the king that now reigneth, and covered with a curtin of cloth of gold very rich, and thither goeth every day the Loytias, which are the gentlemen, men of law, and ministers of justice, and do by duty reverence unto it, as though▪ the king were personally present. This table and picture is discovered the first day of their feasts which they do celebrate, and is at the new moon of every month, on the which day all people do repair and do reverence unto the picture, with the same respect as they would do if he were present: they do call the king, Lord of the world, and son of heaven.   

CHAP. II. Of the court and palace of the king, and of the city where as he is resident: and how that in all the kingdom there is not one that is Lord over subjects by property.  
THe habitation of this king, and almost of all his predecessors hath been and is commonly in the city of Taybin or Suntien: the occasion is (as they say) for that it is nearest unto the Trtarians, with whom continually they have had wars, that they might the better put remedy in any necessity that should happen, or peradventure for that the temperature or clime of that place is more healthful than the other provinces, or the dwelling to be of more pleasure, as it is given to understand by that word Suntien, which in their language is as much to say the celestial city. it is of such bigness, 
A city of a days journey long.  that for to cross it over from gate to gate, a man must travail one whole day and have a good horse, and put good diligence, or else he shall come short: this is besides the suburbs, which is as much more ground. Amongst the Chinos is found no variety in the declaration of this mighty city, and of the great riches that is in it, which is a sign to be of a truth, for that they agree all in one. There is so much people in it, what of citizens and courtiers, that it is affirmed that upon any urgent occasion, there may be joined together two hundredth thousand men, and the half of them to be horsemen. At the entering into this city, toward the orient, is situated the mighty and sumptuous palace of the king, where he remaineth ordinarily, although he hath other two: the one in the midst of the city, and the other at the end towards the West. This first palace they do testify is of such huge bigness and so much curiosity, that it is requisite to have four days at the least to view and see it all. First it is compassed about with seven walls very huge: and the space that is betwixt one wall and another, doth contain ten thousand soldiers which do watch and guard the king's house daily: there is within this palace three score and nineteen halls of a marvelous rich and and curious making, wherein there are many women that do serve the king in the place of pages and squires: but the principallest to be seen in this palace is four halls very rich, whereas the king giveth audience unto such ambassadors as come unto him from other kingdoms, or provinces, or unto his own people, when they call any court of parliament (which is very seldom) for that he is not seen by his commons out of his own house but by great chance, and yet when they do see him, for the most part it is by a glass window. 
Four curious halls.  The first of these hals is made all of metal very curiously wrought with many figures: and the second haththe ceiling and the floor wrought in the order of masons work, all of silver of great valour: the third is of fine gold wrought and inamiled very curiously. The fourth is of so great riches, that it much exceedeth all the other three: for that in it is represented the power and riches of that mighty kingdom: and therefore in their language they do call it the hall of the king's treasure, and they do affirm that it deserveth to have that name: for that there is in it the greatest treasure that any king hath in all the world, besides many jewels of an inestimable price, and a chair (wherein he doth sit) of great majesty, made of ivory, set full of precious stones, and carbuncles of a great price, that in the darkest time of the night, the hall is of so great clearness, as though there were in it many torches or lights: the walls are set full of stones of divers sorts very rich and of great virtue wrought very curiously: and to declare it in few words, it is the richest and principalst thing to be seen in all the kingdom, for therein is the principallest thereof. In these four halls are heard such ambassadors as are sent from other countries, according unto the estate and quality of the king, and provinces from whence they come: so that according as they are esteemed, so are they entertained into one of these four hals. If that from whence they come is from a king of small power, he hath audience in the first hall: if he be of a reasonable power, in the second hall, and in this order in the rest. Within this mighty palace, the king hath all that any human understanding can desire or ask (touching this life) in pleasures for to recreate his person, and for their queen: for that never (or by great chance) they go forth of the same: and it hath been a customable use amongst the kings of that country: that it is as a thing inherited by succession never to go forth. They say, their reason why they do keep themselves so close & not to go abroad, is to conserve the mighty estate of their estade, and also to avoid for being slain by treason (as many times it falleth so out) for which occasion you have had kings, that in all the time of their reign have not gone out of their palace, but only the day of their oath and crownation: and besides this their close keeping, yet have they ten thousand men continually (as aforesaid) in guard of the palace both day and night, besides others that are in the courts, stairs and halls, and other places. Within the gates and walls of this mighty palace they have gardens, orchards, woods and groves, whereas is all manner of hunt, and foul and great ponds full of fish. And to conclude, they have all manner of pleasures and delights, that may be invented or had in any banqueting house in the field. In all this kingdom, there is not one that is lord over any subject or vassals (as they of Turkey) neither have they any jurisdiction proper: but that which is his patrimony and movables, or that which the king doth give them in recompense of good service or government, or for any other particular respect: all the which doth end with the person, and is returned again unto the king, except he will give it into the son of him that is dead, in courtesy more than by obligation or duty: giving to understand that it is to avoid inconveniences, and occasions of treasons, which might grow if that there were any lords that were rich, or of power, & not for covetousness or any other intent. Those whom he doth put in authority, whether they are vizroyes, governors, or captain generals, or whatsoever they be, he giveth unto them large wages, sufficient to sustain them in their office, in so ample sort, that it is rather overplus unto them then lack, for that he will not that their necessity compel them to take presents or bribes, which thing doth blind them, that they cannot do justice uprightly: 
Punished for taking bribes  and unto him that doth receive or take any such (although it be but of small prize) he is cruelly punished.   

CHAP. III. The number of such subjects as do pay unto the king tribute in all these fifteen provinces.  
Understanding the greatness of this kingdom of China, and the infinite number of people that is therein, it is an easy thing to be believed: the number that every province hath of such as do pay tribute, as is taken out of the book that the officers have, whereby they do recover that tribute: and it is affirmed, that there are as many more, such as are free and and do pay no tribute. The Loytians and ministers of justice, all sorts of soldiers both by sea and land (which is an infinite number) are free and do pay nothing, the number as followeth.  
The province of Paguia hath two millions seven hundred and four thousand that doth pay tribute to the king.  
The province of Santon 3. millions and 700. thousand tributers.  
The province of Foquien, two millions four hundred and seven thousand tributers.  
The province of Olam, two millions two hundred & four thousand tributers.  
The province of Sinsay, three millions three hundred & four score thousand.  
The province of Susuan, two millions and fifty thousand.  
The province of Tolanchia, there where as the king is resident, and is the biggest of them all: six millions fourscore and ten thousand.  
The province of Causay, two millions three hundred and five thousand.  
The province of Oquiam, three millions and eight hundred thousand.  
The province of Aucheo, two millions eight hundred and four thousand.  
The province of Gonan, one million and two hundred thousand.  
The province of Xanton, one million nine hundred forty and four thousand.  
The province of Quicheu, two millions thirty and four thousand.  
The province of Chequeam, two millions two hundred and fortiefoure thousand.  
The province of Sancii, which is the least of all the provinces, hath one million six hundred threescore and twelve thousand tributers.  
By this account it is found, that the tribute payers are very many: and it is approved in many places of this history, whereas they do treat of the greatness of this kingdom, that it is the mightiest and biggest that is to be read of in all the world. God for his mercy's sake, bring them to the knowledge of his law, and take them out from the tyranny of the devil, wherein they are wrapped.   

CHAP. four The tribute that the king hath in these fifteen provinces, according unto the truest relation.  
ALthough this kingdom is great and very rich, yet there is none that doth pay so little tribute ordinarily unto their king as they do: neither amongst Christians, moors nor gentiles that we know. The extraordinary and personal service is very much, that in some respect we may say that they are more slaves then free men, for that they do not possess one foot of land but they pay tribute: in respect whereof, as also for the great misusing of them by their governors, will be a great part and occasion to invite them to receive the law of the gospel, and that with great facility to enjoy the the liberty of the same.  
The ordinary tribute that every one doth pay that doth keep house, is two Mases every year, which is as much as two spanish rials of plate. This tribute is very little, yet the Loytians (which is a great part of the kingdom) do pay none, neither their governors nor ministers, captains nor soldiers: the multitude of the people is so great, and the kingdom so big, that alonely that which they give for expenses of the king and his court is wonderful, with customs, duties, portages and other rents: not accounting that which is paid unto garrisons and soldiers of that kingdom, neither in that which is spent in repairing of walls of particular cities, and in men of war at sea, and camps by land: to governors and justices, which doth not enter into this account.  
The rent which remaineth unto the king ordinarily is this that followeth, 
The rent of the king.  and is taken with great regard out of the book of his exchequer. Yet the Chinos do say that it is much less than that they do pay at this time: for that this is of old antiquity when as the tributes were less: the tributes as followeth.  
Of pure gold from seventeen to two and twenty killates they give him four millions, 
Puregold.  and two hundred fiftiesixe thousand and nine hundred Taes: every one is worth ten rials and four and twenty maravadies' spanish money.  
Of fine silver, 
Fine silver.  three millions one hundred fifty three thousand two hundred and nineteen Taes.  

Pearls.  The mines of pearls, whereof you have many in this kingdom (although they are not very round) is worth unto him commonly two millions six hundred & thirty thousand Taes  

Precious stones.  Ofprecious stones of all sorts, as they come from the mines, one million four hundred three score and ten thousand Taes.  

Musk and amber.  Of musk and amber, one million and thirty five thousand Taes.  
Of earthen dishes and vessel fourscore thousand taes. Besides all this the king doth put forth very much ground to his subjects, and they do pay him with part of the crop that they gather, or with the cattle that they bring up on the same ground. The quantity that they pay him is as followeth.  

Rice.  Of clean rice (which is a common victual throughout all the kingdom, & of the countries adjoining to them) they pay him threescore millions, one hundred three score & eleven thousand eight hundred thirty and two hanegges.  

Barley.  Of barley twenty nine millions, three hundred four score and eleven thousand nine hundred fourscore & two hanegges.  

Wheat.  Of wheat like unto that in Spain, thirty three millions one hundred twenty thousand and two hundred hanegges.  

Salt.  Of salt twenty five millions three hundred and forty thousand four hundred hanegges, which is made in his own salt pits, and is of a great rent.  

Mayz.  Of wheat called Mayz, twenty millions two hundred and fifty thousand hanegs.  

milo.  Of Millio twenty four millions of hanegges.  

Panizo.  Of Panizo, fourteen millions and two hundred thousand hanegges.  

Other grain  Of other different grain and seeds, forty millions and two thousand hanegges.  

Pieces of silk.  They do pay him in pieces of silk of fourteen vares long, the piece, two hundred five thousand and five hundred ninety pieces.  

Raw silk. Cotton wool.  Of raw silk in bundles, five hundred and forty thousand pounds. Of cotton wool, three hundred thousand pounds.  

Mantles.  Of mantles wrought of all colours, eight hundred thousand & four hundred mantles of Chimantas. Made of raw silk that weigheth twelve pound a piece, three hundred thousand six hundred and eighty of them. Of mantles made of cotton, of forty vares, six hundred seventy eight thousand, eight hundred and seventy. Of Chimantas of cotton three hundred & four thousand six hundred forty & eight. All this aforesaid is for expenses of the court, which is great. The Chinos that come unto the Philippinas do affirm the same, & do not differ in the report, which is a sign to be true: likewise they do receive of it in his treasury, whereas is many millions, & cannot be otherwise, considering his great rents.   

CHAP. V Of the men of war that are in the fifteen provinces, as well footmen as horsemen, and of the great care they have in the guard of the kingdom.  
Look what care and diligence this mighty king hath, that justice should be ministered with right & equity: so likewise (yea & much more) he hath touching matters that may prevent wars, which be offered, by princes adjacent unto him, or any other whatsoever. But in especial with the Tartarians with whom they have had continual wars many year. (Although at this day) that the Tartarians do fear him very much: in such sort as he thinketh it best to keep him for his friend, and doth acknowledge unto him a certain manner of vassalage. And although at this present, and long time since he hath been and is without any occasion of wars, that should come upon a sudden: yet hath he the self-same care & diligence of prevention, as though he had many & grievous enemies to defend himself from, or to offend them: as you shall perceive in this that followeth. For besides that he hath in every province his precedent & counsel of war, captain general, and others ordinary to take up people, and ordain their camps & squadrons as well by sea as by land, to serve at all assays when that occasion shall serve. So likewise he hath in every city captains and soldiers for their particular guard & defence, 
Great care for to defend their country.  and do range & watch to set their guard in order both day & night, as though their enemies were at the gates. This military order they do use and maintain, in such sort that no nation known may be compared unto them. Although speaking generally, (according unto the relation of certain spanish soldiers that were there, and did many times see them) there be other nations that do exceed them both in valiantness, courage, and worthiness of mind.  
They have at the gates of all their cities, their squadrons, who let the entry and going out of any whatsoever, except he have licence of the justice of that city or town, brought them in writing: the which gates they do shut and open by order and licence of their captains, which is sent unto them every day, written in whited tables, and their fine unto it. These gates are the force of all the city, and thereon is planted all the artillery they have: nigh unto the which gate, is ordinarily the house whereas they are sounded or made. At night when they do shut their gates, they do glue papers upon the joinings of them: then they do seal the papers, with the seal that the governor or judge of that city doth wear on his finger, the which is done by himself, or by some other in whom he hath great confidence and trust: and they cannot open them again in the morning until such time as it be seen and acknowledged, that it hath not been touched since the night that it was put on. So that if any have any journey to ride very early in the morning, he must go forth of the city over night, before the gates be shut, and remain in the suburbs: for out of the city it is not possible to go until the gates be open, which is not till the sun be up ordinarily.  
They do not use any castles nor forts, but great bulwarks and gun banks, whereas they have continual watch, and do change by quarters according as we do use: and the officers with a great number of soldiers do range throughout the city, and bulwark: and commonly the captains be natural of those provinces, whereas they have their charge given them: in consideration that the love they have to their country, do bind them to fight to the death for the defence thereof. And for that there should be more quietness and rest in the cities, it is not permitted that any do wear weapons, defensives, nor offensives, but only such soldiers as have the kings pay: neither do they consent they should have them in their houses, neither use any in travail by sea nor land. Besides all this, the king hath in the city of Taybin and Suntiem, (whereas he is resident) and in such cities lying there about, a great number both of horsemen and footmen, always in a readiness for to go with him into any place, for the safeguard of his person in time of necessity.  
The soldiers of this kingdom are in two sorts and manners: the one sort are such as be and are naturals of the city whereas they have their charge, and these be called in their language Cum: in this place the son doth succeed the father, and for lack of an heir, the king doth provide one in the dead man's place. Every one of them hath his name written upon the post of his door, and the place appointed whither he shall go when occasion shall serve, (enemies being against that city or town.) The other sort of soldiers are strangers, and are consorted for years or months to serve. These be they that ordinarily make their watches, musters, and join companies for the receipt of the captains: these be called in their language Pon. These go from one place unto another, whereas they are commanded to go. One captain and ancient hath charge of a thousand, and a meaner captain with his ancient a hundredth, that do depend upon the other. So that for to know the number of people that is in a great camp, it is done with great ease, in accounting the ensigns of a thousand men, which are easily known. Every chief or petty captain of these, hath his house upon the city wall, and his name put on it, and there he dwelleth so long as the wars endureth. These captains every month do exercise their soldiers in marching and putting them in order: sometime with quick speed, and other times more slower, and to give assault and retire as they are taught by the sound of the drum: this they do use continually in the time of peace, as well as in the time of war: Also how to use their weapons, which are ordinary, hargabuses, pikes, targets, faunchers, brushebilles, holbards, dagars and armour. The horsemen do use in the wars to carry four swords hanging at their saddle bows, and do fight with two at once, with great dexterity and gallant to behold. These do accustom to go into the wars accompanied with many servants, and familiar friends on foot, all well armed after the gallantest manner that possible they may, These footmen be marvelous full of policy and ingenious in warlike or martial affairs: and although they have some valour for to assault and abide the enemy, yet do they profit themselves of policies, devices and instruments of fire, & of fire works. Thus do they use as well by land in their wars, as by sea many homes of fire, full of old iron, and arrows made with powder & fire work, with the which they do much harm and destroy their enemies. The horsemen do fight with bows and arrows, and lances, and with two sword (as I have said before) and some with hargabuses. They cannot govern their horses very well, for that they have but one piece of iron that is cross in their mouths that serveth for a bridle: and for to make them stay, they pull but one rain, and with clapping their hands together and making of a noise before them. 
Very ill horsemen.  They have very ill saddles, so that they be all very ill horsemen. The like provision hath the king for the sea: he hath great fleets of ships, furnished with captains and men, that do scour and defend the costs of the country with great diligence and watchings. The soldiers as well by land as by sea are paid with great liberality, and those that do advantage themselves in valour, are very much esteemed, and have great preferment and rewards. When these Chinos do take any prisoner in the wars, they do not kill him, nor give him more punishment, but to serve as a soldier in that country in the farthest parts from their natural: the king paying him his wages as other soldiers are paid. These for that they may be known do wear red bonnets, but in their other apparel they do differ nothing from the Chinos. Likewise such as be condemned by justice for criminal offences, to serve in any frontier (as is used much amongst them) they also wear red caps or bonnets: and so it is declared in their sentence, that they do condemn them to the red bonnet.   

CHAP. VI More of the men of war which are in all these fifteen provinces, and how many there be in every one of them as well horsemen as footmen.  
IN the chapter past you do understand what care these Chinos have in the time of peace as well as in war, for to defend their cities: and what preparations they have generally throughout all the country. Now lacketh to let you know particularly the number that every province hath in itself, the better to understand the mightiness thereof. They have in every province in their chief or metropolitan city, a counsel of war, with a precedent and four counsellors: all the which are such as have been brought up from their youth in the wars, with experience of the use of armour and weapon: so that unto them is given the charge for the defence of their province.  
These counsellors do ordain captains, and provide other officers and all necessaries for the wars, and send them unto such cities and towns, whereas they see it is needful. And for that in the accomplishing thereof there shallbe no lack, the treasurer is commanded to deliver unto them, whatsoever they do ask, without any delay.  
The number of the soldiers that every province had in the year 1577. 
The number of soldiers in all China.  at such time as friar Martin de Herrada and his company entered into China (having no wars but great peace and quietness) is as followeth.  
The province of Paguia, whereas ordinarily the king is resident, hath two millions and one hundred and fifty thousand footmen, and four hundred thousand horsemen.  
The province of Santon hath one hundred and twenty thousand footmen, and forty thousand horsemen.  
The province of Foquieu hath eight and fifty thousand and nine hundred footmen, and twenty two thousand four hundred horsemen.  
The province of Olam hath three score and sixtéene thousand footmen, and twenty five thousand five hundred horsemen.  
The province of Cinsay hath eighty thousand three hundred footmen, but of horsemen very few or none, for that this province and the other that follow, are all mountains, and full of rocks and stones.  
The province of Oquiam hath twenty thousand and six hundred footmen, and no horsemen, for the reason aforesaid.  
The province of Susuan four score and six thousand footmen, and four and thirty thousand and five hundred horsemen.  
The province of Tolanchia, which is that which doth border upon the Tartarians, with whom the kings of China have had wars (as aforesaid) hath two millions & eight hundred thousand footmen, & two hundred & ninety thousand horsemen, & are the most famous and best in all the whole kingdom: for that they are brought up in the use of armour from their youth: and many times exercised the same in times past, when they had their ordinary war with their borderers the Tartarians.  
The province of Causay hath fifty thousand footmen, and twenty thousand two hundred and fifty horsemen.  
The province of Aucheo, (there whereas the friars were) hath four score and six thousand footmen, and forty eight thousand horsemen.  
The province of Gonan forty four thousand footmen, and fourteen thousand five hundred horsemen.  
The province of Xanton hath fifty two thousand footmen, and eighteen thousand nine hundred horsemen.  
The province of Quincheu hath forty eight thousand and seven hundred footmen, and fifteen thousand three hundred horsemen.  
The province of Chequeam thirty four thousand footmen, and thirteen thousand horsemen.  
The province of Saucii, which is least of them all hath forty thousand footmen, and six thousand horsemen. All these people aforesaid, every province is bound (by an order set down in parliament) to have in a readiness, the which is an easy thing to be done: 
The soldier is royally paid  the one is for that the king doth pay them royally, the other for that they do dwell in their own natural countries and houses, whereas they do enjoy their patrimonies and goods: leaving it unto their sons, who do inherit the same and his office as aforesaid. In the time of wars they are bound to assist the place that hath most necessity. By this account it plainly appeareth that all these provinces (which may better be called kingdoms) considering their greatness) have five millions & eight hundred forty six thousand & five hundred footmen, 
The number of footmen & horsemen.  & nine hundred forty eight thousand three hundred & fifty horsemen. All the which, if in valour and valiantness might be equalled unto our nations in Europe, they were sufficient to conquer the whole world. And although they are more in number & equal in policies, yet in their valiantness & courage they are far behind. Their horse for the most part are little, but great travelers: Yet they say, within the country there are very great & excellent good horse. I do not here declare the industry that might (with the favour of God) be used to win and overcome this people, for that the place serveth not for it: and I have given large notice thereof, unto whom I am bound. And again my profession is more to be a means unto peace, then to procure any wars: and if that which is my desire might be done, it is, that with the word of God which is the sword that cutteth the hearts of men, wherewith I hope in the Lord to see it.   

CHAP. VII. Of a law amongst the Chinos, that they cannot make any wars out of their own country, neither go forth of the same, neither can any stranger come in without licence of the king.  
ALthough in many things that have been seen in this kingdom is showed and declared the sharp and ripe wits of these men, and with what wisdom and prudence they do govern their countries: yet wherein they do most manifest the same (in my judgement) is in that which shallbe declared in this chapter. They without all doubt seem to exceed the Greeks Carthagenians & Romans, of whom the old ancient histories have signified to us, & also of those later times: who for to conquer strange countries did separate themselves so far from their natural, that they lost their own countries at home. But these of this kingdom being forewarned (as the proverb saith:) Felix quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum, By the hurt of another etc. they have found by experience that to go forth of their own kingdom to conquer others, is the spoil and loss of much people, and expenses of great treasures, besides the travail and care which continually they have to sustain that which is got, with fear to be lost again: so that in the mean time whilst they were occupied in strange conquests, their enemies the Tartarians and other king's borderers unto them did trouble and invade them doing great damage and harm. And more considering that they do possess one of the greatest & best kingdoms of the world, as well for riches as for fertilty: by reason whereof, and by the great abundance of things that the country doth yield: many strange nations do profit themselves from them, and they have need of none other nation, for that they have sufficient of all things necessary to the maintaining of human life. 
They have no need of other nations.  In consideration whereof they called a general court of parliament, whether came all vizroyes and governors and other principal men of all the fifteen provinces: and there they did communicate, to put remedy in this great inconvenience in the best manner possible. Then after they had well considered of the same with great care & diligence, taking the judgement particular of every one, & in general by common consent they found it requisite for their quietness & profit, & a thing most convenient for the common wealth to leave all that they had got & gained out of their own kingdom: but specially such countries as were far off. And from that day forwards not to make any wars in any place: for that from thence did proceed a known damage & a doubtful profit: and being altogether conformable, they did request the king that was at that present that he would call home all such people, as he had in other kingdoms bordering there about under his obedience, persuading him that in so doing, he should remain a mighty prince, more richer, more in quiet and in more security. Then the king perceiving the request and petition of his kingdom & subjects, and being fully satisfied that this persuasion was requisite to be put in execution: he straightways set it a work, and commanded upon great penalties, that all his subjects and vassals natural that were in any strange countries, that in a time limited, they should return home to their own country and houses: and likewise to the governors of the same countries, that they should in his name abandon & leave the dominion and possession that he had of them: excepting such as would of their own good will acknowledge vassalage, and give him tribute, & remain friends, as unto this day the Lechios & other nations do. This law was then established and is inviolably kept to this day: in the which it is first commanded that none whatsoever upon pain of death, shall make or begin war in any part without his licence. 
Strait laws.  Also on the said penalty, that no subject of his shall navigate by sea out of the kingdom without the said licence. Also that whosoever will go from one province to another within the said kingdom, to traffic in buying and selling, shall give sureties to return again in a certain time limited, upon pain to be disnaturalled of the country. Likewise that no stranger whatsoever shall come in by sea nor by land, without his express licence, or of the governors of such ports or places whereas they shall come or arrive. And this licence must be given with great consideration, advising the king thereof. All which laws have been so inviolably kept and observed, that it hath been the occasion that this mighty kingdom hath not come to notice and knowledge but of late years. All the which that is said, seemeth to be true, for that it is clearly found in their histories and books of navigations of old antiquity: whereas it is plainly seen that they did come with their shipping unto the Indies, having conquered all that is from China, unto the farthest part thereof. Of all the which they endured possessers in great quietness, till such time as they ordained the law of abandoning, of their own good will, as aforesaid. So that at this day there is great memory of them in the islands Philippinas, and on the cost of Coromande, which is the cost against the kingdom of Norsinga towards the sea of Cengala: whereas is a town called unto this day the soil of the Chinos, for that they did re-edify & make the same. The like notice & memory is there in the kingdom of Calicut, whereas be many trees and fruits, that the naturals of that country do say, were brought thither by the Chinos, when that they were lords and governors of that country. Likewise in those days they were of Malaca, Siam and Chapaa, & other of their borderers: Also it is to be believed of the islands of japon, for that there are many tokens of the Chinos unto this day, & the naturals of the country are much after the fashion of the Chinos, and many particular things that do give us to understand: and some laws that are observed and kept in China. But now in these days the governors of the sea ports do dispense with the law, that forbiddeth the going out of the kingdom, by certain gifts which is given them by merchants, to give them secret licence, that they may go and traffic in islands bordering there about, as unto the Philippinas, whither come every year many ships laden with merchandise of great riches, of the which is brought many times into Spain. Likewise they do travail unto other parts and places, whereas they understand they may profit themselves. Yet they do not give any such licence until they have given sureties to return within one whole year.  
The desire of gain hath caused them to travail to Mexico, whither came the year passed in anno 1585. three merchants of China, with very curious things, & never stayed till they came into Spain and into other kingdoms further off. Likewise the said judge and governors do give licence unto strangers (in the order aforesaid) for to enter into their ports to buy & sell, but first upon examination and charge, that they should have a great care not to demand any licence but to the same intent. Then have they their licence with a time limited, and with condition that they shall not procure to go about their cities, neither to see the secrets thereof. And this is given in writing upon a whited table, which is set upon the fore parts of their ships, that when they come to an anchor in any port it may be seen of the keepers and guards that they sink them not, but let them peaceably to enter and to traffic in buying and selling, paying their ordinary customs due unto the king.  
In every port there is a scrivener or notary, put there by the governors, that doth set down in memory the day and hour that any ship doth enter in, in order: that whether he be a stranger or natural to take in his lading and dispatch, according unto the old custom of those ports, the which is inviolably kept: which is the occasion that they do lad and dispatch in so short time, and with so great quietness, as though there were but one ship, although many times you shall see in one port two thousand ships small and great. In this sort with a bought licence did the Portugals traffic from the Indies in Canton a province of this kingdom, and in other parts of that kingdom, as they themselves have declared, and likewise the Chinos.   

CHAP. VIII. Of the king's royal counsel, and the order they have to know every month what doth pass in all the kingdom.  
THe king hath in the city of Taybin, whereas he is resident a royal counsel of twelve counsellors, and a precedent: chosen men throughout all the kingdom, and such as have had experience in government many years.  
For to be one of the counsel, it is the highest and supremest dignity that a man can come unto: for that (as aforesaid) in all this kingdom, there is neither Prince, Duke, marquess, Earl nor Lord, that hath any subjects but the king only, and the prince his son. These counsellors, and the governors of these provinces by them appointed be such personages, that they are respected and esteemed for the time of their continuance in the same estimation, as is the other, where as they have these titles.  
For to be one of this counsel, it is not sufficient that they be expert and learned in the laws of the country, 
counsellors must be expert in sciences.  and in moral and natural Philosophy, and commenced in the same: but they must be also expert in Astrology and judgements. For they say, he that must be of this supreme counsel, by whom is governed all these fifteen provinces: it is requisite that they know all this that is said, for to prognosticate what shall succeed and happen, the better to provide for all necessities that shall come. These twelve do sit in counsel ordinarily in the kings palace, for the which there is a hall appointed marvelous richly trimmed: and in the same thirteen chairs, six of them of gold, and six of silver: both the one and the other of great price, wrought with great curiosity: yet the thirteenth is more richer, for that it is of gold and set full of precious stones of great value, & that is placed in the midst of them under a canopy or cloth of estate, of cloth of gold: in the which is embroidered the kings arms, and is as it is said, certain serpents wrought with gold wire: in this chair the precedent doth sit when the king is not in presence: but if he be there (as seldom he is) then doth the precedent sit in the first and highest of the chairs on the right hand, which be of gold: in the which, and in the other of silver, they be placed according unto their antiquity: in this sort, that if the precedent do die, then do the most ancient proceed and inherit his room, and in his chair doth the fift person rise on the side of the golden chairs: and so from the fourth unto the fift: and in this order all the rest arise in the chairs of silver, passing into the other chairs of gold. This may the precedent do, preferring every one in order (if any do die) without the consent of the king. And if any of these chairs be void, then doth the counsel choose an other by voices: the which is done by uprightness, and he which hath the most is preferred: but the chiefest in this preferment is merit and sufficiency. If he that is chosen be absent in any government, then do they send for him: but if he be present in the city, then do they carry him before the king: giving him to understand of their election, in whose power it is to accept, or to make it void: which never doth happen. Then the king himself on his own hands, according unto their custom, doth make him swear a solemn oath that he shall do upright justice according unto the laws of the country: and that he shall likewise do uprighly in the choosing of viceroys and governors or any other justices, and not be led with affections nor passions, neither receive any bribes himself, nor any other for him: with many other things in this order and effect: and above all things he shall not be partaker, neither consent to any treason at any time against the king: but rather if that he do understand of any such directly or indirectly: he shall strait ways give the king to understand thereof or his counsel of all that he doth know or understand, alway favouring with his industry and force▪ the preservation of peace and life of the king.  
This oath of homage being done, they do carry him unto the chair which is on the left hand in the hall, and do give him the possession with great solemnity: for the which, certain days after there is great feasts in the city as well by them of the counsel as by the citizens and courtiers: during the which time, the merchants do leave their contractions and trafickes, and handicraft men their occupations.  
If any occasion be requisite to talk with the king there is none that speaketh with him but the precedent, and if it so fall out that he be sick, than the most ancient and uppermost in the golden chairs doth talk with him at all times when need requireth: but when he talketh with him he is on his knees, and his eyes inclined to the ground, and never moveth although the talk endureth two hours. He is paid with the same money that all viceroys, governors, justices and captains of the kingdom are. when they will talk with the precedent it is in the self same order.  
In this royal counsel every month they do know all things that do happen in all the kingdom worthy to be advised of, and this is without fault: for that those which do govern the provinces have express commandment to send notice unto the court of all things that do happen in any of their provinces, touching wars, the estate of the country▪ the kings rents, or any other thing: the which is accomplished with so great care, that although it be a province distant five hundred leagues from the court: yet the post doth not miss his day appointed. And those which do first come, do tarry till the last or furthest off do come, and then upon the day appointed they do all together give their relations. Those which are far off for to be at the court so soon & at the instant as those which are nigh at hand do send posts daily, that the one may overtake the other. They do run post after the use of Italy & Spain with a horn, but they were wont to have a collar of bells, the better to be heard: so that the postmasters when they do hear the horn or bells, do strait ways bridle their horse to be in a readiness. Likewise, if their journey be to pass by water (as many times it happeneth) then the boat-men do make their barks ready.  
Then when the counsel hath taken relation of all the posts in effect, the precedent incontinent doth give a strait account thereof unto the king: then he or the counsel by his order (if any such need requireth) do put remedy for that that is needful for the time. And if it be requisite to send any justice about the same, he is strait ways appointed, and dispatched and sent in all haste and with great secrecy: and this justice doth make inquiries in such sort that it is not known, no not in the city where the fault is committed.  
And for that, touching this matter it shall be spoken of more at large in chapters following, I will conclude with this: that this king will have such dominion over his kingdom and subjects, that although it be great with so many Provinces, Cities and Towns, yet not one viceroy, Governor nor justice can put any man unto death, without his sentence be first confirmed by the king and his royal counsel, except it be in the wars actually, for that there in the delaying thereof may grow some peril: therefore they do permit the captain general or his lieutenant to behead or hang what so ever soldier that shall offend or do any ill thing, this may they do without consentment of the king or his counsel, only with the consentment of the kings Treasurer, or of the general of the field: the which be both of them grave personages, and they must be both conformable in their judgements or else they cannot execute death.   

CHAP. IX. Ofsuch precedents and ministers as the king doth put in every province, and the order that they have in their govenment.  
YOu do understand how the two provinces. Paguia and Tolanchia are governed by the supreme counsel of the king: and such ministers as they do send to govern. The other thirteen provinces that do remain, have either of them a viceroy or governor, 
Every province hath his viceroy.  whom the common people do call Insuanto: who is continually resident, and doth dwell in the metropolitan city, whereof the province doth commonly bear the name. And although all the kings officers and justices of what sort of administration they are, be generally called by the name of Loytia: yet every one hath a special and a particular name besides, according unto his office that he doth execute: of the which and of their proper names I will give you to understand, for that it doth differ from our purpose. The vizeroy that is in every province principal and supreme magistrate in place of the king, they do call him Comou. Th● second in dignity is the governor of all the province, and he is called Insuanto, who hath very little less majesty than the viceroy: then the Corregidor or governor that is resident in any city: where as is neither viceroy nor governor, is called Tutuan, all of this degree. Of any thing that is of importance of what city so ever they be, they do give relation thereof unto the higher governor called Insuanto, and likewise this Insuanto unto the viceroy or Common, whose charge is to give the king to understand thereof or his royal counsel, by the posts that we have spoken of before. The third in dignity is called Ponchasi, this is the precedent or counsel of the kings revenues, who hath under him a counsel and many ministers and officers, as sargents and others which do recover the rents in every province. This state doth give account of all his office unto the Tutuan: after that he hath paid all kind of wages and charges ordinary and extraordinary, due to any officer of the kings in all that province.  
The fourth degree or dignity is called Totoc, 
Captain general.  and this is captain general of all soldiers as well footmen as horsemen. The fift is called Auchasi, he is precedent and governor over justices both criminal and civil: and doth determine with his counsel all matters in difference, whatsoever that do appeal unto him from other meaner justices. The sixth is called Aytao: this is general puruier and precedent of the counsel of war: whose office is to provide soldiers when that it is requisite or necessity demandeth, and to provide ships, munitions and victuals for any fleet that shall pass by sea: as that be requisite by land, and for the supplement of garrisons in cities and coasts. To this is given the charge to examine such strangers that do come to any province, to know of whence they are, and wherefore they do come, and of all other things, that after being known, to give the viceroy to understand thereof, and of all things needful.  
These six offices or charge are of great authority and they that have the execution thereof are had in great reverence: every one of them hath in society or counsel, ten, which are men chosen of great experience and diligence, and they do help him in the exhibition and dispatch of matters touching that office. When they are in place of counsel, which is in the palace of the viceroy (whereas every office hath his place appointed, garnished in very good order) their sociates are divided in two parts, five of them do sit on the right hand of the precedent, and five on the left hand: those which do sit on the right hand are the most ancients and have the more pre-eminence, and do differ from the other that be on the left hand in this thing only, for that they do wear wastes or girdles embossed with gold, and yellow hats: and they on the left hand have their girdles embossed with silver, and wear blue hats: the which girdles, with gold and silver, and hats yellow and blue, there is none that is permitted to wear but only the counsellors. Likewise these and the precedents do wear the kings arms on their breasts and backs, embroidered with gold without the which, they can not go forth to any place where they must be seen: neither sit in justice to determine any thing whatsoever. If they do, they are not only disobedient, but are severely punished at the time of their visitation.  
If the Precedent of any of these counsels do die, than one of the ancientest of the counsellors doth succeed him in the office, observing in all things the order, as I have said in the Chapter passed of the royal counsel. 
A very good property of justices.  All these justices generally have a marvelous moral virtue, and that is, they be all very patiented in hearing any complaint, although it be declared with choler, and proud speech. It is the first thing that is taught them in their schools, they are very well nourtered, and courteous in their speeches, although it be with them that they have condemned by law. If that upon any necessity they must go into any part of the province to make any information of importance, then is appointed one of the counsel, and he goeth alone, but he hath with him the authority of them all.  
Besides these six Counsellors or judges aforesaid, there be others of less dignity (although greatly respected, as all ministers of justice be in this kingdom) and they are called as followeth: Cautoc, this is the chief ancient-bearer, Pochim, the second treasurer: Pochinsi, he that keepeth the seal royal: Autzatzi, he is as the mayor or bailiff of any city or town. There be also other three officers which are called Guytay, Tzia, Tontay, these do keep court and have audience in their houses once a week: and when they do open their doors, there is shot off four pieces of artillery, to give all men to understand that they are in place ready to hear, and to do justice. If they do find any that is culpable or faulty, they do strait ways send them with a Sergeant unto the ordinary justice of the City, which is called Zompau, with a bill or note in the which is signified the punishment that he must have.  
Every ordinary justice hath committed to his charge, a thousand soldiers. He can not exceed his limit nor jurisdiction, neither can any other have to do in his charge. 
A very good order.  Every night they do range their circuit, and do cause that every one may be quiet in his house, and to put out their candles and lights in time, to avoid fires, which hath happened amongst them very great, by reason that their houses are so near one to an other, and all the upper parts of their houses wrought with timber, according unto the use of Byskaye: and all such as they do find with light after the hour limited, they are punished very asperly. From these there is no appellation but unto such justices as are sent from the court: and besides them unto none but unto 〈◊〉 that do come ordinarily, who do undo and make satisfaction of all griefs or wrongs done by the other, and these are called in their language Gomdim, which is as much to say, a righter of all grief: this man is respected more than all the rest.  
Besides all these there be other particular officers, which be called Tompo: these have the charge to see the provision of victuals, and to put a price on them, an other is called Tibuco, he that doth arrest and punish vagabonds and idle persons. quench is the chief Sergeant, Chomcan, is the keeper of the prison: this is one that they have in great reverence, for that he hath a privilege above all the rest: that after he hath done his duty upon his knees at his first entry, he may tell his tale on foot, and so can not the rest do, but kneeling.  
When that these governors or justices do newly come into these Provinces or Cities, ordained and sent by the supreme counsel: they do send two or three days before they come themselves their letters patents and provisions: the which being seen and obeyed, there goeth forth to receive him all the Loytias and men of war with their soldiers and ensigns military, and other officers making great feasts and pastimes.  
Likewise the citizens at this time do hang their streets with clothes of silk and other things very richly, and trimmed with flowers, bearing him company unto his lodging with much music and sound of instruments.  
Above all these dignities & offices there is one which is called Quinchay, which is to be understood in their language (the golden seal) this goeth not from the court, but upon weighty matters and of great importance touching the quietness of all the kingdom. The order they have in the choice of these justices and officers, and of other matters touching good government, shall be declared unto you in the Chapter following.   

CHAP. X. Here is prosecuted the manner how they do choose their governors and justices, and how they do execute the same.  
ALl such officers as I have declared unto you in the Chapter past, the king doth ordain them by consent of his counsel, who do inform themselves with a particular diligence of the quality and behaviour of the person that shall be elected. The principal matter that they do advertise themselves, is: that the viceroy, governor or counsellor, be not a natural of that country that he is provided for: and that for to prevent the inconvenience that might happen in the executing of good justice: 
A very good consideration  which many times chanceth, either for the love of his friends and kinsfolks, or else for the hate he hath to his enemies. All such as are provided in these offices, after that they do departed from the court whereas the charge is given them, till they come to the province, city or town, whereas they shall remain in justice, they do spend nothing on their own horses, for that in all places whereas they do travail or come, the king hath houses appointed, whereas they are received and lodged, and served of all things necessary, as well for horses for themselves, as horses for them that come with him: likewise of barks and boats, if that his journey be by water, all is of free cost: it is all appointed what they shall have to eat, which is conformable unto the quality of his person, and the office he hath in charge. And when they do come unto such houses as are appointed by the king to receive and cherish them: they of the house do ask him if he will have his pittance or ordinary in money, or in victuals: who if he have any kinsfolks or friends in that place that will invite him, then doth he demand it in money, and keep it to himself. These houses are marvelously well provided of beds, and all other things necessary: for that the Ponchas, who is precedent of the kings revenues, hath a particular care to see all these things well furnished, by a commandment from the king and the supreme counsel. When they do come unto the city or town whereas they take the charge of government, after they have given the entertainment unto them with feasts & pastime as is declared in the Chapter past, then do they bring him and lodge him in the king's house, and do provide him of servants & all things necessary that belongeth unto him, and ministers needful for the execution of justice, who likewise have their abiding in the same house, as sergeants and notaries, and other ministers of less authority. The king doth pay them all sufficient wages, for that it is forbidden upon great penalties, to take bribes or any other thing of any client. Likewise the judges be straightly charged & commanded, & that is one of the chiefest articles that is given them from the counsel, not to consent to be visited of any clients in their houses, neither can they pronounce any sentence but in the place of public audience, & in the presence of all the officers, and it must be done in such sort that all men that are in place of audience may hear it, and is done in this sort following: The judge doth set himself in the seat of justice, then do the porters put themselves at the entering or doors of the hall: who do name with a loud & high voice the person that doth enter in to demand justice, & the effect of that he doth 〈◊〉. Then the plaintiff doth kneel down somewhat a far off from the judge, and doth with a loud voice declare his grief or demand, or else in writing. If it be in writing, than one of the scriveners or notaries doth take the petition & doth read it, the which being understood by the judge, he doth straightways provide upon the same that which is agreeable unto justice, & doth firm the petition with his own firm with red ink, and commandeth what is needful to be done. These judges are straightly charged and commanded by the kings authority, that they must go fasting into the hall of audience, or judgement hall, without drinking of anywine, and they must give no sentence with wine, and that is such a custom amongst them, that whosoever doth break it is severely punished. By way of physic they do permit before they do go to give any sentence to comfort themselves with some conserves or such like. But wine in no manner of wise, although they be sick of any infirmity, & the lack thereof to be hurtful unto them, for they esteem it a less evil to leave of the hearing of any matter, then to give any sentence after that they have eaten or drunk. These matters being executed in public (which is marvelously observed & kept) it is not possible that any of the officers should take any bribes, but it must be discovered by one of them: and for that they are used with great rigour in their residence, every one is afraid of his companion, and are one to an other (in this case) great enemies. The sergeants and notaries & the other officers are marvelous precise in the executing of their office: if that any do not his duty in his office, they take him and put a little banner in his hand, & he remaineth with the same, kneeling on his knees till the court of audience be ended. Then do the judge command the bedelles to give him so many whips as he doth deserve for the neglecting of his office. This same is little esteemed amongst them, for that it is a common thing used amongst them, when that any of these judges will go abroad into the City (as seldom times they do for the reserving of their authority) they are accompanied with the officers and ministers of justice, and that in so good order, that the first two do carry silver mazes, after the manner as they do in Rome carry the mazes before the Cardinals. They do carry them upon long rods, which doth signify that in the name of the king they are in those offices: then after them followeth other two, and they do carry each of them in his hand a long cane and very strait, which doth signify the upright justice that ought to be done, and is done by that judge that there's goeth: then followeth them other two, and they do trail each of them a cane upon the ground with long red laces, and at the ends, tassels, which doth signify the instruments wherewith they do whip the faulty or malefactors: then followeth them other two with tables, like unto white targets, in the which is written the name of the judge, with his title & office. The rest, which be many in number, do accompany him to do him worship and honour. Those two that we spoke of before, that do carry the ma●es, do cry out and make a noise unto the people to apart themselves, and to make room that the judge may pass: the which is straightways accomplished, for that by experience they know that he that doth neglect the same, is incontinent punished in the street without remission: and the respect they have unto him is such, that not one of what state or degree soever he be, that dare move himself at such time as he doth pass by, neither cross the streets (except it be some superior judge, unto whom the inferiors doth the like reverence). If any man do offend therein, he is then straightways punished. In all matters of law as civil as criminal, the judges do nothing but by writing, and do pronounce the sentences, and examine witnesses in public, before all the rest of the officers, because no subtlety nor falsehood shallbe used in their demands, neither in their writings, to set down other than the truth. Every witness is examined by himself, and if he do double in his declaration, then do they join together, and make their demand from one to an other, till by their striving they may come to a better knowledge of the truth. But when by these means they cannot bring it to light, then do they give them torment, for to make them confess: (believing that without it such persons as have experience and knowledge will tell the truth.)  
In matters of great importance, and such as do touch grave personages, the judge will not trust the scrivener or notary to write any information: but they with their own hands will write the declaration of any witness, and will consider very much of that which is declared. This great diligence is the occasion that few times there is any that doth complain of any ill justice done, the which is a great and notable virtue: and aught to be imitated of all good justices, for to avoid many inconveniences which do happen for the not using the same, the which these Gentiles have great care to perform: who beside the prosecution of right justice, without respect or exception of any person, do use certain preventions worthy to be suffered.  
First these judges in all cities & towns of their jurisdiction, do number the households, and do repart them in ten and ten households, & upon the tenth house they do hang a table or sign whereon is written the names of those ten householders with a commandment in the which generally they are commanded & every one by himself particular, that having any knowledge or notice that any of those ten householders have committed any trespass or fault against any of the rest, or against himself, that is hurtful unto his neighbours or to the commonalty, to go strait way & give the justice to understand thereof, that the fault may be punished with a mendment unto the offender, & an example to all other. And unto him that doth know any such offence and will not declare it, is allotted the same punishment that the offender should have, 
An occasion of amity betwixt neighbours.  which is the occasion that one neighbour hath a care of an other, & liveth under fear, lest they should give occasion to be complained of. And again, that their enemies may not this way take any advantage. When that any of these ten neighbours doth remove into an other street or into any other city or town to dwell, or will make any long journey, he is bound to ring a bell, or play on a copper kettle amongst all the neighbours for the space of ten days before he doth remove or departed, and to advise them all of his departure, and whether: for that if he do owe any thing, or any thing be lent, that they may come and demand it before their departure, because that none shall lose that which is theirs. And if it so fall out that any shall departed without using this diligence, the justice doth compel the rest of his neighbours that are written on the sign, to pay his debt, because they did not advise the justice or his creditors before his departure. Such as do owe money or debts and will not pay: (proving the debt they do execute their goods:) if they have none, they put them in prison, and limit a time for him to pay the same. But if it pass, and the debt not paid nor his creditor contented: For the first time they do whip them moderately, and do appoint him the second time limited, for to pay the same: if he do then miss, they do whip him more cruelly, and do appoint him on other time, and so do prosecute the same till he die with punishments, which is the occasion that every one doth pay that he oweth, or procure amongst his friends to pay, or else give himself for a slave unto his creditor, to shun the trouble of the prison, and the pain of whippings, which is a thing not to be suffered.  
These judges do use two manner of torments, to make them to confess the truth, when by fair means they can not, or by policy, the which first is procured with great care and diligence: the one is on their feet, and the other on their hands, and is so terrible that it cannot be suffered, but of force they do confess that which the judge doth pretend to know: yet do they execute none of them except first they have good information, or at the least, Semiplena, or else so many inditions that it is a sufficient information for the same. The torments on the hands is given with two sticks as big as two fingers, and a span long, turned round, and full of holes in all places, wherein are put cords to pull in & out: their fingers of both their hands are put into the cords, 
Cruel torments.  and little and little they do pinch them till in the end they do break them at the joints with an incredible pain unto them that do suffer it, and that causeth them to give great shrieks and groans that will move any man to compassion. And if it so come to pass that by this cruel torment they will not confess, and that the judge do understand by witness and by inditions that he is faulty and culpable, then doth he command to give him the torment of the feet, which is a great deal more cruel than that of the hands, and is in this sort: they take two pieces of wood four square of four spans long and one span broad, and are joined together with a gin, and holes boored through, 
A more cruel● torment.  and put through them cords, and in the midst of these boards they do put the whole foot, and strain the cords, and with a mallet they do strike upon the cords wherewith they do break all the bones, and cause them to suffer more pain and grief than with the torment of the hands. At the executing of these torments, the supreme judges are always present, the which seldom times doth happen: for that such as be culpable will sooner confess than suffer those torments, desiring rather to die some other death that is not so cruel, than to suffer the pains of this torment.  
The prisons that they have are no less cruel and rigorous as you shall understand in a chapter by itself hereafter.   

CHAP. XI. Of the visitors that the king doth send every year to visit the in●●rior judges of his provinces, and of the punishing of such as they do find culpable.  
IT is to be wondered at the great and vigilant care that this heathen prince hath, in that his ministers and judges as well viceroys, 
A great care to do true justice.  governors▪ precedents as any other officers should execute their offices well and uprightly, as they ought to do: for in the end of three years that their government doth endure, they do take of them in residence, strait account by the judges thereof who be called Chaenes. Likewise they do dispatch every year in great secrecy into every province, other judges and visitors that be called Leachis, the which are persons of great confidence, and proved by experience of long time to be of good life, good customs, and have done good service in the administering of justice uprightly. These as they travail do inquire in every city and town that they come in, (not being known, and in very ●●cret manner) all griefs and injustice that is done in that province: which is the occasion that every one doth live (as the proverb saith) with their face discovered. These do carry from the king so great authority in their commissions given them, that without returning to the court, if they find any delict culpable they may apprehend the judges and punish them, suspend, and reprieve, and do any thing touching their commission at their own pleasure, so that it be not to take away the life of any man. This (as it is said) none can do without the consent of the king.  
And because they should execute their office the better in this visitation, and with justice and equity, they do make them to swear to be loyal, 
Ceremonies in performing of their oath.  true and secret. The which oath, is executed in this order: they do give him to drink three times of a certain beverage which they do use, & that is the confirming of their oath. And for that their departure should be with more secrecy, the counsel doth command their secretaries to make their provisions▪ leaving in blank a space for his name that shall have the provision, and for the name of the province, whether he shall go, declaring nothing but that which is their ordinary, that wheresoever the Loytia or judge (being so dispatched) shall come, that they shall obey him as the king himself. But when soever it is in secret determined who shall go, ●hen doth the precedent of the counsel command the provision to be sealed, than he himself doth write his name in, and the province whether he doth go. And therewithal he doth departed from the court in great secrecy, and unknown of any who it is, nor whether he doth go, nor wherefore.  
Then when he doth come to the province, city or town, whether he is sent, he doth with like secrecy make his inquiry how the viceroy or governor doth use himself in his government, and how all other officers do execute their offices, without knowing from whence he came, nor whether he will, neither what he doth pretend. So after that he hath passed throughout all the province, and is fully certified of all his desire, then doth he go unto the chief or metropolitan city, whereas are resident all those judges against whom he hath made his visitation, and there he doth remain and abide till such time as the Tutam or viceroy doth make a general counsel, which is once a month at the least: and at such time as they are in their counsel hall, (and peradventure without thought of any such judge that should come) than this Uisitor doth go unto the door, and saith unto the porter, go and tell them of the council, that here is a Ui●itor that must, and will come in, to notify unto them a commandment from the king: then the viceroy (understanding by these words what he might be) doth command the doors to be open, and doth himself and the rest that are with him, rise up from their seats, and doth go and receive him as their superior judge: who doth enter with his provision open in his hands (which doth not cause a small fear amongst them all, but in especial unto such as their own conscience doth accuse them): he doth read his provision in the presence of them all, and at the instant of the conclusion, the viceroy doth arise from his place, and doth unto him great reverence and complements, and so do all the rest, acknowledging their duties.  
Then doth this Uisitor place himself in the principallest seat of counsel, and maketh his oration as the common use is amongst them, wherein he doth give them to understand the cause of his coming, and with what care and diligence he did use in his visitation to search out the truth of matters: after which, with well pondered words, he doth laud and praise all such as have well executed their offices, and according thereunto he doth strait ways place them in their counsels in the higher seats, and promising them to give the king & his counsel large account of their good service, that they might be rewarded according as they do deserve. Likewise he doth sharply reprehend all such as have neglected their bounden duties. Then doth he read there before them all, the sentence pronounced against them, declaring in sum, all such things wherein he hath found them culpable, which hath caused him to pronounce that sentence against them, the which, although it be never so rigorous, it is forthwith executed without any replication or appellation: for from these visitors there is no appellation.  
All such as shallbe punished or reprehended, th●y do first take away from them the ensigns of justice, which be as I have told you, the girdle, bonnet, or narrow brimmed hat: with the which they can neither punish nor hurt him: and if that any will absolutely do it, he shall for the same be deprived of his office▪ and lose his head. So being clear of these things, then do they execute the rigour of the sentence pronounced against the malefactor. But if there be any doubt in the sentence given, then doth he strait ways (upon the same doubt) ordain nine judges to sit upon it, admonishing them (with the present before their eyes) to use well their offices, wherewith he doth charge them in the name of the king. Many times these visitors do carry power for to reward all such as do well execute their offices, in giving them rooms and offices of greater honour: so that the present and known reward which is done unto the good, and the rigorous punishment for the malefactors, is the occasion that this mighty kingdom is one of the best ruled and governed, of any that is at this time known in all the world: weighing the government of the one, (as in many places of this history it is expressed) and join it unto the long and great experience which we have had in the other, and then you will say as I say. Many times these visitors do visit the colleges and schools, such as the king hath ordained of his own cost in every province, (as in the process of this book you shall understand) & do examine the schoollers of the same, animating them to promotion all such as do profit themselves in their studies: and do whip and put in prison, yea and thrust them out of the schools all such as are to the contrary. Of all the which and of their commencing and rewards, which is given unto such as they do find sufficient, shall be at large declared unto you in a particular chapter for the same.   

CHAP. XII. Of their prisons they do use, and the order they have in the executing of justice upon the culpable.  
Even as the judges and ministers are severe and cruel in punishing, even so they are in putting them in prisons, the which are as terrible and as cruel, with the which they do keep in peace and justice this mighty kingdom: and as there is much people, so have they many prisons and very great. There are in every principal city throughout all these provinces, thirteen prisons enclosed & compassed about with high walls, 
Thirteen prisons in every great city.  and of so great largeness within, that besides the lodgings of the keeper and his officers, and for a garrison of soldiers that are there continually: there are fish ponds, gardens & courts, whereas the prisoners do walk and recreate themselves all the day, such as are in for small matters. Likewise there are victualling houses and shops, 
Uictualing houses in the prisons and shops.  whereas is sold all manner of such things as the prisoners do make for to sustain themselves: which if they did not use, their whole substance were not sufficient for their maintenance, the time is so long that they lie there, although it be for a small matter: the occasion is for that the judges take deliberation in their sentences: and again their cities are great and full of other matters. Likewise they are slow in the execution of any sentence. So that many times it doth fall out, that men being condemned to die, do remain so long in prison after their condemnation, that they die with pure age, or some other sickness or infirmity, or by the cruelty of the strait and asper prison. Of these thirteen prisons aforesaid: always four of them are occupied with prisoners condemned unto death, and in every one of them there is a captain over one hundred soldiers which are reparted, and doth keep watch and ward day and night: every one of these condemned prisoners hath a board tied about his neck that hangeth down unto his knees, a third of a yard broad: it is made white with a certain whiting, and written upon it the occasion wherefore he was condemned to die. The keeper of the prison hath a book, wherein is written all the names of them that are condemned, and the occasion wherefore: for to be accountable of them at all times when they shallbe demanded of him by the judges or vizroys. They are shackled and manakled, and put in wards that do answer into the court, whereas the officers of the prison do make them to lie with their face downward upon a floor made of boards for the same purpose, and do draw over them iron chains, drawn through great iron rings that are placed betwixt prisoner and prisoner, wherewith they are so straight crushed that they cannot move nor turn them from one side to another: also they do lay on them a certain covering of timber, wherein remaineth no more space of hollowness, than their bodies doth make: thus are they used that are condemned to death. This prison is so painful and grievous, that many do despair and kill themselves, because they cannot suffer it. In the day time they do take them forth and take off their manacles, that they may work for to sustain themselves▪ all such as have nothing to maintain themselves, nor any other that will help them, them the king doth give a pittance of rice to sustain them. Likewise they do work what they may to better the same.  
There is never no execution done upon such as are condemned to die, but at the coming of the visitors or judges of residence, whom they do call Chenes and Leuchis, the which do● make their visitation in secret (as you do understand in the chapter where I spoke of them) These do visit the prisoners and demand a note of the names of all them that are condemned, and the cause wherefore: and although that some of their sentences are confirmed by the king and his counsel, yet they will see them again in the presence of these judges that did condemn them, or such as did govern in their absence, for to be informed of them the faults of every one: whereby he may see and understand whether his sentence of condemnation be done with justice or not. This diligence being done, they do choose out among them fifty condemned men, such whose faults are most odious, and command the jailer to put all things in order for to do execution on them: the which being done, they do examine them a new, and look upon the causes and faults, to see if by any means they can save them. And if they do find in any of them any jot of discharge, they do apart them from the rest, and straightways command three pieces of ordinance to be shot off, which is to give warning to bring forth them that shallbe executed. Then again, when they do bring them forth, they do a new enter in counsel, to see if they can save any of them: and when not, they command other three pieces of ordinance to be shot off, to cause them to be brought out into the field, and yet before they do break up their counsel, they do turn and see once again all their faults, to see if that by any means possible there might be some remedy to save them. If they do find any, or any suspect of indition, they do return out of the field that person, and send him again to the prison. Some do return with an evil will, for that they had rather die at once, then for to suffer the straightness and cruelty of the prison: In the mean time while they are perusing their causes, and concluding the same, they do cause these condemned prisoners to sit upon heaps of ashes, and do give them to eat. So when all that these diligences are concluded, and they can find no remedy to save any of them according unto justice, they do command three pieces of artillery more be shot off, then do they execute justice according unto their sentence given them.  
The deaths that they do execute is hanging, setting upon stakes, quartering and burning: but there is none that is burned, but such as are traitors to the king. When the last three of artillery is shot off, than the bells do ring, and a great rumour is in the city, for that this execution is done but seldom. The day of execution all their shops are shut in, and there is none that doth work until sun be set, which is after that the executed men are buried, the which is done with the company of much people. The next day after this is done, the visitors do make the second visitation, which is of the thieves (a thing very much abhorred amongst them: and such as they do find culpable, he is whipped throughout the common streets with great shame, with a board hanging about his neck (as aforesaid) whereon is written his fault: and therewith they are carried throughout the streets three or four days. They do beat them on the calves of their legs, with a broad and thick cane of four fingers broad, and as thick as a man's finger, the which they do lay in water before, the more for to torment them: they are bound with their hands behind them, and their faces downwards to the earth: two hangmen do execute this whipping of them, the one at one leg and the other at the other, and it is done with so great cruelty, that after they have given six blows, they cannot stand upon their feet: and many times it chanceth that with fifty blows they die. The most part of these thieves do die in the punishments, and many times there is whipped together of thieves two hundred. So that with these and others that are punished in the prisons (is of a very truth) that there do die every year in one of these principal cities of the province, more than six thousand persons. At these punishments the judges are always in presence, and for that they should not be moved to compassion, in the mean time that execution is done, they do occupy themselves in banquetings or other pastimes. 
Adultery is death.  Adulteries are death, and such as do consent to be coockoldes (which is never found but amongst them of the basest sort) are punished with exemplar punishments, ordained for the same.   

CHAP. XIII. Of the characters and letters that the Chinos do use, and of the colleges and schools that are in this kingdom, and of other curious things.  
The king hath in every city colleges or schools at his own cost, in the which they do learn to write, read & count, as well as to study, natural or moral philosophy, Astrology, laws of the country, or any other curious science. They that do teach in these schools be such persons as excel in every faculty, such as may be found none better, but specially in writing and reading: for that there is none, although he be never so poor, but doth learn to write and read, because amongst them, he is accounted infamous that cannot do both. Unto higher studies come a great number of students, and do travail all they may possibly to profit, for that it is the best course and surest way to obtain the name of a Loytia, or gentleman, or other dignity: as more plainly shall be showed you in the chapter following, where the order how they do give them the title Loytia shall be spoken off: and is amongst us after the fashion of proceeding or commencing doctor.  
Unto the Colleges, as well Majors as Minors, the king doth send every year Uis●ters, for to see and understand how the students do profit: and what the masters be, with other matters touching their good government. In their usitation they do honour in words those whom they find of ability, animating them to persever in the same: and do put in prison and punish such as they know to have ability, and do not profit themselves thereof: and such as have none, nor will not learn, they put out of the Colleges that others may occupy their places that better will employ themselves. 
Paper made of the film of canes.  They have great abundance of paper, the which is made of the film of canes, and with great facility: it is very good cheap: their printed books are made thereof: the most part of it can be written but on the one side, for that it is so thin: 
Pens made of canes.  they do not write with pens as we do, made of quills, but with pens made of canes, and at the end like a fine brush, like unto a painter's pencil: and although this be their order, yet have they amongst them excellent Scriveners, that grow thereby to be very rich. When they writ letters unto any principal person, they gild the margin of the paper, and limb it, and they put the letter written into a purse made of the same paper all guilt and painted, the which they shut and seal, so that the letter is only contained therein.  
This they do use very much, that although one go to visit another in person, yet they do carry a letter written in their sleeves, and possible there shall not be written in the same ten letters, and that signifieth that they do come to kiss their hands: these things are to be sold at the bookbinder's of all sorts, as well for principal persons and men of authority, as for others of meaner estate, for to desire, reprehend, or discommend: and to conclu●e, for all things that they will desire or have need of: yea if it be to defy any body, so that the buyer hath no more to do, but to close it up and seal it, so send it whither his pleasure is. These and many other curiosities they do use as you have heard and shall hear in the discourse of this small history: or at the least somewhat touched, for that the brevity that I do pretend and will use, will not permit that I should enter so far for to declare at large, but to be brief in that I shall declare.   

CHAP. XIIII. Of the examination of such whom they prefer to the degree of Loytia, which is with us the degree of a doctor: and how they do commence them, and how they do bear him company.  
THese Uisitours of whom we have spoken, the king and his counsel do send them to visit his provinces: and amongst the greatest things that are given them in charge, is the visitation of the Colleges and schools which the king hath in all the principal cities as is said, the which visitor hath a particular authority for to commence or graduate such students as have finished their course, and are of ability and sufficiency to perform the same. They do make them Gentlemen, if they be capable of any charge of justice or government. And for that the use of their ceremonies is a thing worthy to be known, I will here declare the same order which Friar Martin de Herrada, and his companions did see in the city of Aucheo, at the time of their commencement.  
At such time as the visitor hath concluded the visitation of his province, and hath punished the malifactours, and rewarded the good: in the metropolitan cities, he doth strait ways cause proclamation to be made that all students and scholars that do find themselves sufficient, and have a courage to be examined to take the degree of Loytia, the which although amongst them is understood to be made a gentleman, yet amongst us is a doctor.  
The day appointed being come, they are all presented before the visitor, who taketh all their names in a scroll, and appointeth another day for their examination. This day for honour of the feast, the visitor doth invite all the learned Loytias that are in the city, who jointly with him do make the examination with great rigour, always putting forwards and preferring those that are skilful in the laws of the country, by which they do govern all other faculties whatsoever, and that they be therewithal good, and virtuous. And all those that they do find with these properties, they do write their names in an other scroll, and do appoint the day of commencement, the which is done with great ceremonies and much people, in whose presence, the visitor in the name of the king, doth give unto them the ensigns of degree and dignity to be a Loytia, that is a waste or girdle bossed with gold or silver, and a hat with certain things on it, as shall be showed you in the chapter following: which is a sign and token that doth make the difference from the vulgar people: without the which none can show himself in public.  
And although all be called Loytias, I mean, those that come to it by letters or learning, and others by the wars, and others by a gift of the king, yet they differ the one from the other in estimation. For that those of the royal counsel, viceroys, governors, and visitors, are made Loytias by disputation in learning. And the general Captains, Majors, bailiffs and Testators, are a gift of the kings in recompense of some good service that they have done. These have no more pre-eminence, but only that they have the benefit of their privileges, and have the dignity of that vocation, but these are never preferred to greater honours, as the other Loytias are, of these you have in every city very many.  
There be others likewise of great estimation, and are put in the second degree, and are those that are made by desert in the wars, and are elect and chosen by the generals, by authority of the king for some act or worthy deed done in the wars by force of arms or such like, approved by witness of great credit: unto whom besides the title and honour given unto them, they do give them great livings, for that no valiant or worthy deed but is had in estimation, and gratified with great liberality, 
Any good thing gratified.  which is the occasion that those which are mean soldiers, are animated to imitate those that be most principal and valiant. According unto my promise I will here with as much brevity as may be, declare unto you the order of their commencements, and how they do accompany them after that they are made Loytias, for that it is a thing worth the hearing.  
The day appointed being come, for to commence or give degrees, all the Loytias with the visitor, do enter into the royal hall, whereas they were examined, all richly appareled, 
The order of their commencement in schools.  and being assembled, then do enter in all those that shall receive degrees, gallantly appareled without any upper garment, and before every one of them, go the Padrines, and after them the Graduates with garments very finely made, riding on Gennets very sumptuously covered with cloth of gold and silk, that do carry the ensigns that shallbe given unto him, the which he doth demand of the visitor kneeling upon his knees with great humility. Who first swear them, that in all offices committed unto them, they shall with all care and diligence do justice equally unto all men, and that they shall not receive ●anie bribes or presents whatsoever: that they shall be true and loyal unto the king, and that they shall not conspire in any confederacy or treason against him, and many other things: which ceremonies he standeth long about.  
This oath being taken, the visitor, who presenteth the king's person, doth put on them the ensigns aforesaid, with the faculty belonging thereunto, and then he and all the Loytias embrace them presently. This done, they depart out of the hall in very decent order, at which instant all the bells in the city are rung, and great store of ordinance and artillery discharged, which continueth a good space. Then they carry these new Loytias throughout the city, accompanied with a multitude of people in manner following.  
There go first before them, many soldiers, marching in good order with drums and trumpets and other musical instruments very melodious: after them are borne many Maces, then follow all the Loytias, some on horseback and some are carried in litter chairs, in most gallant order, after which follow the Padrines. Then the new commenced Loytias, with out any upper garment as before is said, all mounted upon white horses very richly covered with cloth of Gol●e: having every one of them a tippet of taffeta upon his shoulder, and on his head a hat with two small tippets hanging down behind, much after the fashion of those that hang on the bishop's mitre, this is permitted unto none, but unto those of their orders abovesaid: upon their hats they have two branches of gold or of silver and guilt, made like unto a bunch of feathers: Before every one of them are carried six frames, covered with ●atten, and every one is carried by four men: in these frames are written in letters of gold, their disputation, faculty and title given them for the same, and their arms, with many other things, which I omit for brevity sake, because this marching and passing holdeth eight hours together. The Citizens there keep this day festival, and do ordain many dances and sports. And the better sort do celebrate three or four days after, banqueting the new made Loytia, and giving him joy of his new preferment, every man seeking his good will and favour. From this day forwards he is of ability to take upon him any office and government whatsoever: and therefore strait ways he goeth unto the court, to procure the same, and carrieth with him the ensigns of his commencement, and is appareled so that he may be known, wherefore they do him great honour in the way as he goeth, and lodge him in such houses as the king hath appointed in every town for such as they be. When he cometh to the court, he goeth and doth his duty unto the precedent and unto the rest of the royal counsel, who every one a part, do give him joy of his new dignity, and with many words of great courtesy & praise, promise him, as occasion shall serve to provide him a place, as they by their examination do understand his ability, and again as they see his discreet dealing and care in such matters as they do give him in charge, so will they prefer him to better dignity and honour. So the next day following they register him in their book of memory, which is always in the counsel chamber: and they remain there waiting and serving them until they have provided them of some government (which is not long after, for that the kingdom is great with many provinces and Cities, as by this history you shall understand.   

CHAP. XV. How that with them they have had the use of Artillery long time before us in these parts of Europe.  
AMongst many things worthy to be considered (which have been and shallbe declared in this history, & amongst many other which of purpose I omit, because I would not be tedious unto the reader, no one thing did cause so much admiration unto the Portugals, when that they did first traffic in Canton, neither unto our Spaniards, who long time after went unto the Philippinas: as to find in this kingdom Artillery. And we find by good account taken out of their histories, that they had the use thereof long time before us in Europe. It is said that the first beginning was in the year 1330. by the industry of an Almane, yet how he was called there is no history that doth make mention: 
The first inventing of armour.  but the Chinos say and it is evidently seen, that this Almain doth not deserve the name of the first inventor, but of the discoverer, for that they were the first inventors, and from them hath the use thereof been transported unto other kingdoms, where it is now used. The Chinos say that their first king called Vitey, did first invent the same, and that he was taught the manner how to make them by a spirit that came out of the earth, for to defend himself and his kingdom from the Tartars that did much molest him with wars: for according unto the tokens given him, (as it doth appear in their histories) and the industry for the same, it appeareth that it was some spirit enemy unto mankind, only for to destroy them, as in these days the experience thereof is apparent unto us. All the which carrieth a similitude of the truth, for that this king was a great sorcerer & enchanter, as you may well understand by the herb that he had growing in the court of his palace, whereof before I have told you. And if this be not credible because so many years are passed since this king's reign, yet it is of truth, 
Artillery 1300. years before us.  that when these Chinos went to the kingdom of Pergu, & to conquest the east Indies more than 1500. years since, they carried with them the like instruments of war, which did serve them in their conquest: the which conquest being ended, they left behind them certain pieces of artillery, which were found afterwards by the Portugals, whereon were graven the arms of China, and in what year they were made, agreeing just with the time, of the conquest.  
Such Artillery as the Friar Gerrada, and his companions did see at their being there, they say it was of antiquity, and very ill wrought, and was for the most part pieces to shoot stones, or murderers: but it was given them to understand that in other provinces of the kingdom, there be that be very curiously wrought and fair: which may be of such which the Captain Artieda did see: who in a letter that he wrote unto king Philip, giving him to understand of the secrets of this country, amongst which he said, the Chinos do use all armour as we do, and the artillery which they have is excellent good. I am of that opinion, for that I have seen vessels there of huge greatness, and better made than ours, and more stronger.  
In every City they have certain houses where they make their ordinance, and artillery continually: they do not plant them on Castles (for that they have not the use of them in all the kingdom) but upon the gates of their cities, which hath mighty great and thick walls, and deep ditches, which they do fill with water out of the next river at all times when need requireth, which they account the greatest strength in all the kingdom. At every gate of the City there is a Captain with many soldiers, that keepeth watch and ward, night and day, to suffer no stranger to enter in without especial licence of the governor of the City or town. By this that I have already said, as seemeth unto me, is apparently showed and declared the antiquity of Artillery in this kingdom: and how that they there were the first inventors thereof. Likewise it doth plainly appear that there was the first invention of printing, a thing as strange as the other, whose antiquity in that kingdom, shallbe showed in the Chapter following.   

CHAP. XVI. Of the antiquity and manner of printing of books, used in this kingdom, long before the use in our Europe.  
THe admirable invention, and the subtle ingeny of printing is such, that for lack of the use thereof, should have been forgotten the worthiness of many excellent men, and of their deeds done in the happy days and times long passed: and many in these our days would not trouble themselves so much as they do, in learning to get honour and promotion, or in feats of wars, if that their fame should no longer continue in writing then their lives on the earth. Leaving apart the wonderful effects of this subtle invention, least speaking thereof I should be over tedious, I will here only go about to prove that which this Chapter doth propound, with some ensamples, whereof many are found in their histories, and likewise in ours. It doth plainly appear by the vulgar opinion, that the invention of printing did begin in Europe in the year 1458. the which was attributed unto Toscan called john Cutembergo: and it was said of truth, that the first mould wherewith they do print was made in Maguncia, from whence an Almain called Conrado did bring the same invention into Italy: And the first book that was printed, was that which saint Austin did write, entitled De civitate Dei: wherein many authors agree. But the Chinos do affirm, that the first beginning was in their country, and the inventor was a man, whom they reverence for a saint: whereby it is evident that many years after that they had the use thereof, it was brought into Almain by the way of Ruscia and Moscovia, from whence, as it is certain, they may come by land, and that some merchants that came from thence into this kingdom, by the red sea, and from Arabia Felix, might bring some ●ooks, from whence this john Cutembergo, whom the histories doth make author) had his first foundation. The which being of a truth, as they hau● authority for the same, it doth plainly appear that this invention came from them unto us: and for the better credit hereof, at this day there are found amongst them many books printed 500 years before the invention began in Almanie: of the which I have one, and I have seen others, as well in Spain and in Italy as in the Indies. The Friar Herrada and his companions, when they came from the China unto the Philippinas did bring with them many printed books of divers matters, which they did buy in the City of Aucheo, the which were printed in divers places of the kingdom. Yet the most part of them were printed in the province of Ochian, whereas is the best print: and as they did report they would have brought a great number more, if that the viceroy had not disturbed them, for they have great libraries, and very good cheap, but he suspected that those books might be a mean to give them to understand the secrets of their kingdom, the which they do endeavour to keep close from strangers. The viceroy used a policy, and sent them word, how that he was certified, that they went about buying of books for to carry them into their country, and how they should not spend their many on them, for he would give them for nothing so many books as they would have, which afterward he did not perform, possible for the reason aforesaid, or else he did forget his promise,  
At such time as this commandment came unto them, they had bought a good number, out of the which are taken the most things that we have put in this small history, for to give a brief notice of them, and of that kingdom till such time as by a true certificate the experience of many shall cause more credit thereunto: for that unto this day, by reason of the small notice we have, we cannot with so great authority make it so credible, as we hope that time hereafter will do. The which hath moved me, yea and constrained me to leave to entreat of many things, which in those parts are to be credited, yea and are most true: and for the same I have been blamed and reprehended by such as have had perfit notice thereof.  
And now for that I will not go from my purpose, you shall understand in the Chapter following▪ whereof these books that they brought do entreat, that the better you may give credit unto the curiosity and policy of that kingdom, as in many places I have declared and hereafter will declare.   

CHAP. XVII. The substance and manner of those books that Friar Herrada and his companions brought from China.  
THey brought with them a great number of books as we have said, that did entreat of divers matters, as you shall perceive in the sequel.  
Of the description of all the whole kingdom of China, and the placing of the 15. provinces, and the length and breadth of every one of them, and of other kingdoms bordering upon them.  
Of all tributes and rents belonging unto the king, and of all the orders of his royal palace, and of his ordinary pensions that he giveth, and the names of all officers in his house, and how far every office doth extend.  
How many tributaries every province hath, and the number of such as are free from tribute, and the order and time, how and when they are to be recovered.  
For the making of ships of all sorts, and the order of navigation, with the altitudes of every port, and the quantity of every one in particular.  
Of the antiquity of this kingdom of China, and of the beginning of the world, and in what time, and for whom it began.  
Of the kings that have reigned in this kingdom, and the order of their succession, and government, with their lives and customs.  
Of the ceremonies they use in doing sacrifice unto their idols (which they hold as gods) and the names of them: of their beginnings, and at what time they should make their sacrifices.  
Their opinions of the immortality of the soul, of the heaven, of hell, of the manner of their funerals, and of their mourning apparel that every one is bound to wear, according as he is alianced unto the dead.  
Of the laws of the kingdom, and when and by whom they were made: and the punishment executed on those which violate the same, with many other matters touching their good government and policy.  
Many Herbals or books of herbs for physicians, showing how they should be applied to heal infirmities.  
Many other books of physic and medicine, compiled by authors of that kingdom, of antiquity and of late days, containing in them the manner how to use the sick, and to heal them of their sickness, & to make preservatives against all sicknesses and infirmities.  
Of the properties of stones and metals, and of things natural that have virtue of themselves, & wherefore pearls, gold, & silver, and other metals may serve for the utility of man, comparing with the one and the other the utility of every thing.  
Of the number, and movings of the heavens: of the planets and stars, and of their operations and particular influences.  
Of such kingdoms and nations as they have notice off, and of particular things that are in them.  
Of the life and behaviour of such men, whom they hold for saints, where they lead their lives, and where they died and were buried.  
The order how to play at the tables, and at the chests, and how to make sports of legerdemain and puppets.  
Of music and songs, and who were the inventors thereof.  
Of the Mathematical sciences, and of Arithmetic, and rules how to use the same.  
Of the effects that the children do make in their mother's wombs, and how they are every month sustained, and of the good and bad times of their birth.  
Of Architecture, and all manner of buildings, with the breadth and length that every edifice ought to have for his proportion.  
Of the properties of good and bad ground, and tokens how to know them, and what seed they will bear every year.  
Of Astrology natural, and judiciary, and rules to learn the same, and to cast figures to make conjectures.  
Of Chiromancia and Phisiognomia, and other signs and tokens, and what every one doth signify.  
The order how to write letters, and how to give every one his title, according to the dignity of his person.  
How to bring up horses and to teach them to run and travail.  
How to divine upon dreams, and cast lots when they begin any journey, or take any thing in hand, whose end is doubtful.  
Of apparel worn in all the kingdom, beginning with the King, and of the ensigns or coats of arms, of such as do govern.  
How to make armour, and instruments of war, and how to firm a squadron.  
These books and many others that the Friars brought, out of the which (as afore said) have been taken all such things as have been and shall be declared in this history, interpreted by persons naturally borne in China, and brought up in Philippinas with the Spaniards that dwell there, who affirm that they have seen great libraries in Cities where they abode but especially in Auchea and Chincheo.   

CHAP. XVIII. The order that these Chinos observe in making banquets, and in celebrating their festival days.  
FOr that in some parts of this history we have touched the banquets that the Chinos do make, it shall not be amiss to declare here the order they use therein, for that they are curious, and differ very much from our order and use in their banqueting, the which we have perceived as well by their feeding as by many other things.  
Amongst these Chinos, more than amongst any other people of the world, are used banquets and feasts, for they are rich and without care, and also without the light of heaven, albeit they do confess and believe the immortality of the soul, and the reward or punishment in an other world, according unto their works in this life (as we have said,) all that ever they can, they do give themselves unto the contentment of the flesh, and unto all manner pastimes, wherein they live most delicately, and in very good order. Their custom is, although they have a hundred guests, yet every one must sit and eat at a table by himself. Their tables be very fine, gilt and painted full of birds and beasts, and other varieties very pleasant unto the eye. They do not use to put table clothes on them: but only a forefront of damask, or some other silk on every one of them, which hangeth down to the ground, and on the four corners they do set many little baskets curiously wrought with gold and silver wire, full of flowers and knacks of sugar, made with great curiosity, as Elefantes, grayhounds, hares, and all other kind of beasts and fowls, guilt and painted: in the midst of the table they do set the victuals in marvelous good order, as ●lesh of diverse sorts, fowl, and fishes: of the which they make diverse manners of broths passing well dressed, and are served in fine earthen dishes of great curiosity and of silver, (although these they use very seldom, except for the viceroys:) they have no need of table clothes nor napkins, for they eat so delicately, that they do not touch the meat with their hands, but with little forks of gold or silver, with the which they eat so cleanly, that although it be very small that they eat, yet will they let nothing fall: they drink often, but a little at a time, and therefore they use very little cups.  
At these banquets and feasts, there are present always women jesters, who do play and sing, using many pretty gests to cause delight, and make mirth to the guests: besides these they have diverse sorts of men with other instruments, as tumblers and players, who do represent their Comedies very perfectly and naturally: in these banquets they spend the greatest part of the day, by reason of so many diversities of meats that they serve in. They pass many times a hundredth sundry dishes, when that the estate of the person that is invited, or of him that maketh the banquet doth require. As may show the report of the Augustine Friars in the beginning of the second part of this history: where one doth tell of banquets that were made him by the Insuanto, a Governor of the province of Chincheo, and the viceroy of Aucheo, and of the gallant devices they had to drive away the time so long as the banquet lasted. Unto every one of their guests they do set a table, every table standing one along by an other, making a difference of the number of them according unto the quality of the persons: upon the first table (where sitteth he that is invited) they set the victuals ready dressed, sweet meats, or marchpanes, which is the last service: and on the rest, although they be twenty, they set great store of diverse kinds of meats, all raw, as capons, ducks, teals, hens, pieces of salt & martlemas beef, gammons of bacon, and many other things. All these do remain upon the tables till the banquet be ended, and the guests departed: then do the servants of him that made the banquet, take all these raw meats, and carry them before their guests till they come unto their houses or lodges, where they do leave it with great ceremonies. When they do make any banquet to a viceroy or to any Ambassador, it is with so great cost and sumptuousness that they spend a great substance therein. These banquets do commonly endure twenty days together, continuing until the last day as royally and as plentifully as at the first day.  
They do celebrate all their festival days in the night▪ which is ordinarily their new moons, and they do solemnize them with much music, and new inventions. But more particularly they do celebrate the first day of the year, which is after their account, the first day of the month of March: on this day they apparel themselves very costly and sumptuously, both men and women, and do adorn themselves with all their jewels and new toys, and do hang their houses and doors, with carpets and clothes of silk and cloth of gold, and dress them up trim with Roses, and other flowers, for at that time there is great store in that Country: likewise they do set at all their doors great trees, on the which they do hang many lights, and all the triumphal arckes that be in the streets (which be very many as we have said) are decked with bows this day: wherein they put many lights, and set full of canopies of cloth of gold, damask, and many other sundry sorts of silks.  
Their Priests do assist them in these ●eastes very richly appareled, and do offer sacrifice upon their altars unto the heaven, and unto their idols, and they sing many songs.  
This day doth all people generally sport themselves with great singing and sounding of instruments, in the which they are very cunning. Such instruments as the Augustine friars did see, were lutes, gytternes, vials, rebbukes, weights, virginals, haps and flutes, and other instruments which we do use, although they do differ something in the fashion of them, but yet easy to be known. They do tune their voices unto their instruments with great admiration: they have all commonly very good voices. In these feasts they do make many representations of great pastime according unto nature, with vestiments that they have for the purpose. All the days that these feasts do endure, their tables be full of diverse sorts of meats, as well of fish as of flesh, and of all sorts of fruits, and excellent good wine, the which they make of the palm tree with certain mixtures, which maketh it have an excellent good taste. All the day they and their Priests do eat & drink so much till they can no more. They have it for a thing most certain amongst them, that look how they are in disposition that day, so shall they pass the whole year, either sorrowful or merry. I omit the feasts which they make at marriages, and at any good success, though they be in great number and very sumptuous, because I would not be tedious: in all things they covet to avoid melancholy.   

CHAP. XIX. How they salute one an other in this country, and of some part of their ceremonies.  
THere is no nation in all the world, be it never so barbarous that hath been found out until this day, without a manner of courtesy, or some ceremony of salutation in their meetings and visitings, or when they do assemble in any particular business: whereof we have large notice by ancient histories, and sufficient experience in that we have seen and understood in these kingdoms and provinces which in our days hath been discovered: although herein (as I am fully persuaded) those of this kingdom do exceed all nations of the world (as is affirmed by them that have had the experience) for they have so many ceremonies and usages of courtesy and civility amongst them●, that they have books to teach them only how they should behave themselves in making difference of persons. Of all the which, such as shall seem expedient to give notice of, I will declare in this chapter, using therein the brevity that this history requireth.  
They esteem it a great discourtesy, not to salute one an other when they see or meet one an other, although the acquaintance betwixt them be but small.  
The salutation that the common people do use, is when they do meet the one with the other, to shut the left hand, and to cover it with the right, joining therewith their breasts together, with much bowing their heads downwards, signifying, that love and amity is as firm between them as their hands are fast. And that their friendship is not alonely in the ceremony but also in the heart: the which they give them to understand by words, at the same time. But amongst Courtiers and Gentlemen they use an other manner of courtesy, which seemeth unto them of much more curiosity, that is: at such time as they do meet, they make a little stay, than they cast abroad their arms, and clasp their fingers together remaining in compass, humbling themselves many times and contending one with an other about their parting for to prosecute his way, and the higher estate they are of, the more is their contention. When that any mean person doth meet with a principal man, who for dignity or for any other occasion doth acknowledge superiority, strait ways he doth stay with great silence, declining his head till such time as he is passed by, although the most part of them doth it more for fear than for courtesy: for that experience hath taught them, that he that doth it not, is straightways punished and whipped cruelly.  
When that any of these cometh to speak with any Loytia, at the entering in at the hall whereas he is, ●hee kneeleth down, declining his head and looking upon the ground: and on this sort he goeth upon his knees till he come into the midst of the hall, and there he stayeth and declareth his petition by word of mouth with an humble and meek voice, or else presenteth it by writing: and having received answer, he doth return on his knees backwards without turning his back to the Loytia until he be quite out of the hall. And if they which do meet or visit one an other be equal in dignity, they show great courtesy on both sides, contending who shall surpass in courtesy and words: wherein they are very ceremonious. When one doth go to visit an other, he that is visited, after the visitation done, doth bring the other unto the street door. This custom is used most amongst the common people being equal in degree, or differing little. Likewise they use one thing very strange, and never heard of amongst other nations, that is: if that one do come out of the country to visit an other that is in the city or town (although he be a nigh kinsman and long time acquainted) if that knocking at the door or in the street he do meet with him whom he doth come to visit (he being not well appareled) although he speak unto him, 
A strange kind of courtesy.  yet will he not make any answer nor any resemblance that ever he saw or knew him before: but straightways returneth home to his house in all ha●te possible, and doth apparel himself with the best apparel that he hath, and then he goeth forth and receiveth his guest and friend, dissembling as though he had not before meet nor seen him.  
This Ceremony amongst them is infallibly kept, for that it is amongst them an ancient tradition and founded upon their religion. They give great entertainment unto their guests, and make them straightways a beaver or collation with many sorts of conserves and fruits, and good wine, and an other kind of drink that is generally used through out the whole kingdom, and is made of diverse physical herbs good to comfort the heart, the which they warm when they drink thereof.  
These Ceremonies they use when that one neighbour doth visit an other. But when that one of the Town doth meet with a stranger that he doth know and hath been in the town certain days, and he not seen him: then he of the town doth ask of the other if that he hath eaten any thing, if he answer no: he doth by and by without any delay, carry him to the next victualling house, whereas he doth banquet him deliciously: for in every town, there is good opportunity for the same, by reason that in the market places and streets, and in the suburbs there is great store of victualling houses, that do keep tabling very orderly, and for little cost: for there (as we have said) all kind of victuals are very good cheap. But if the stranger doth answer that he hath eaten, then doth the Citizen or townsman, carry him to an other kind of victtualing houses, where are to be had all sorts of conserves and iunkettes, fruits and marchpanes, and there doth he make him a banquet with great love and good will. Of the women as well strangers as towneborne, or of what degree soever, they have great respect, but especially of the married women: unto whom if any man give an ill or dishonest word, he is accounted infamous: and likewise if he do not offer to them courtesy, and give them place or way when they pass the streets, which is seldom seen. But when they do pass, they behave themselves so discreetly that they give no occasion that any should misuse them: towards strangers they use very great courtesy: but especially the principallest: as you shall perceive in the relation of the second part of this history, where it shall be declared by experience.   

CHAP. XX. Of the great closeness that the women of this kingdom do live in, and with what condition they permit common women.  
THe principal intent that this king & his governors have, as is gathered by their laws, is to preserve their common weal from vices: for the which he doth set down great penalties, & executeth the same without any remission, and lest any should offend they use great vigilancy: and do judge that the liberty and dishonesty of the women is most prejudicial thereunto, & is the occasion that their common wealth falleth to decay, being never so well governed: therefore they have ordained many preservatives and remedies by their laws & customs to prevent the same, which is the only occasion (that although it is so long since this kingdom first began, and again being so great as you may understand,) yet in this one point there is less inconvenience or prejudice than in any other country of less antiquity and fewer people. So that a dishonest woman is known by name, although it be in a great city, the which is seldom seen, and a rare thing. And the best way they have to prevent this, is: that all people that have daughters are commanded by express order, that they shall bring them up (after they have the use of reason) in their own houses very close, and not be seen, but always to do something to avoid idleness, for that it is the mother of all vices, whereby it may take no roo●e in them. This law doth comprehend married women, and is kept in such sort, that the wives of the viceroys and governors do observe it, yea they say that the Queens themselves do observe it: and that they are always spinning gold, silk or flax, or doing some other exercise with their hands, esteeming all idle persons worthy to be hated and contemned: so that the children being brought up in this manner, seeing the good example of their mothers, is the occasion that this virtuous exercise worthy to be imitated, is converted unto a daily and perpetual custom, in such sort, that they think it a perpetual torment to command them to be idle. These ordinary and voluntary exercises have the women of this kingdom in such sort, that it is news and a strange thing to meet a woman in the streets of any city or town, neither at the windows, which is a sign that they live honest. If it so fall out that of force they must go abroad, as to the burial of parents and kinsfolks, or to visit any one being sick, or upon any like occasion, then are they carried in litt●r chairs where they are seen of none, as we told you before: but other superfluous visitations or meetings of gossips are not there used. Albeit tendering the conservation of this honest crew, and to eschew greater evils in the common wealth, they permit common women as a necessary thing: yet they do allow them in such sort, that their evil example may not be hurtful unto the honest state of them which live chaste. And therefore they do build for them houses out of the cities and towns in the suburbs, giving them strait commandment there to remain in the said houses, & not to straggle & go abroad at all. And whilst they live there they are prohibited upon pain of death to enter into the gates of the City or any part thereof.  
Such women as do use this faculty, are nothing esteemed amongst them, for they are for the most part of the basest sort: as strangers, slaves, or such as have been bought of their mother's being yoonge, which is a kind of perpetual bondage, yea a great cruelty which is used amongst them there, and yet suffered amongst them. You shall understand that such as are poor widows, and driven by necessity, cannot sustain themselves, they may for the supplying of their want, sell their children and bind them to perpetual servitude, the which is permitted in such sort, that there are amongst them rich merchants that deal in no other thing: and all the maiden children that they buy so▪ be brought up with great care, and taught to play and sing, and other things appertaining unto pleasure. Then after, when they are of years, they carry ●hem unto the houses aforesaid ordained for common women. The first day that they do dedicated her to this ill office, before she is put into this common house, they carry her before a judge, which the king hath ordained for every house appertaining to any city or town, appointed to be their keeper, and see that there be no evil rule kept amongst them: and this judge doth place her in the house himself, and from that day forwards her master hath no more to do with her, but to go every month unto the judge to recover his tribute, which is a certain sum set down by the judge, by agreement made between them both, & he appointeth besides this the time when he shall be paid for her, and for that was spent in her bringing up and teaching.  
These women be very much haunted, and pass away the time marvelous pleasantly by reason of their singing and playing, which they do with great cunning: and according unto the report of the Chinos, they apparel themselves with great curiosity, and paint themselves. They have amongst them many blind women, that are free and not bond: these are trimmed, dressed and painted by others that have their sight, and such as have spent all their youth in these houses, can not go forth so long as they live, as is commanded by a law public, least by their dishonest demeanour they should be an occasion of some harm and an evil example to others. Whatsoever profit doth remain unto these women when they have paid their master they give unto the judge their superior, who doth keep it faithfully and carefully, and giveth a good account thereof every year unto the Uisitors. And afterwards when these women wax old, it is repaid unto them again by order of the said judge. But it is bestowed in such sort, that they shall not lack: neither have urgent necessity. But if it so fall out that they should lack, they will give them a stipend to maintain them, only for to dress and trim the blind women, or else they will put them into the kings hospital, a place ordained for such as can not help themselves.  
The men children which they buy, and are sold to supply their necessity, in the order aforesaid, of the women, they put to learn some occupation, and after that they are expert therein, they do serve a master in the same trade for a certain time: the which being expired, their masters are not only bound to give them their liberty, but also to provide them of wives and to marry them, providing also for them houses, and necessaries wherewith they may get their living. Which if they do not of their own free will, they are compelled by justice to do, whether they will or no. And they for a token of gratefulness must come unto their masters the first day of the year, and other days appointed and bring him some present. The children of these be all free, and subject to no bondage for the benefit ●oone unto their father for their bringing up.   

CHAP. XXI. The fashion of their ships, aswell of those that pass the seas, as of those that do road rivers, which are many and great: and how they do provide themselves of fish for all the year.  
THere is in this kingdom a great number of ships and barks, with the which they sail all a long their coasts, and unto Islands near hand, and into their rivers, the which do run clean through the most part of all their provinces: and there dwelleth so much people upon these rivers in ships and barks, that it seemeth to be some great City, there is so many of them, that they do esteem that there is almost as many people that dwell upon the water, as upon the land.  
They make them slightly and with small cost, for they have in all parts of this country great abundance of timber, iron, and other things necessary for this use: but in especial a kind of glue, wherewith they do ●awbe and trim their ships, that is much more tougher and stronger than the pitch which we use, which after it is laid on, sticketh fast and maketh their shipping as hard as stones: the abundance whereof, and the great number of shipwrightes, and again for that there is not on the land room enough for the people to inhabit, being so many in number, causeth them to build so great a number of ships and barks. They use their ships and barks of many fashions, every one hath his proper name. Such ships as they have to sail long voyages be called, juncos but for the war they make huge & mighty vessels, with high castles, both on the prow and stern, much after the fashion of them that come out of the Eastern seas, and unto those with which the Portugese's sail into the east India. They have these in so great number, that a general may join together in 4. days an army of more than 600. Those which they do commonly use for burden and to lad, are made much after the same fashion & greatness, and small difference there is between them, but that they are lower both before & at the stern. There is an other sort of lesser vessels, & are much like unto p●nases, & have four great oars on each side, whereat row six men at every ore & four at the least. These are excellent good to row in and out over their hard havens, or into any place where is little water, they do call them Bancoens. There is an other sort that is more broad than these, which they call Lanteas, & carry eight oars on a side, with six men at every ore. Of these two last sorts of vessels pirates & rovers at the sea do commonly use (for in those seas there be very many) for that they be very nimble to fly & to give assault as occasion doth serve. They have an other sort of vessels that are long like unto a galley, but more square being very broad & need little water: they do use them likewise to transport merchandise from one place to an other: they are swift & run up the rivers with small force of the arms. Many other sorts of barks they have, besides the aforesaid, some with galleries & windows painted and guilt, but chiefly those which the Uiceroyes and Governors do make for their recreation. Of those sorts of shipping afore said, which they call juncos, the king hath in all his provinces great armies, and in them soldiers with their Captains to defend the coasts, that as well all ships of their own Country, as those that do come from other places to traffic with them, may go and come in safety, and not be spoiled and rob of the rovers that be there abouts. In the rivers there are pynases well equipped appointed for the same purpose. And the king doth out of his rents pay all these ordinary soldiers, and that with great liberality.  
The pitch wherewith they do trim their ships (as we have said) is found in that kingdom in great abundance, it is called in their language, japez: and is made of lime, oil of fish, and a paste which they call Vname: it is very strong and suffereth no worms, which is the occasion that one of their ships doth twice out last one of ours: yet doth it hinder much their sailing. The pumps which they have in their ships are much differing from ours, and are far better: they make them of many pieces, with a wheel to draw water, which wheel is set along the ships sides within, wherewith they do easily cleanse their ships, for that one man alone going in the wheel, doth in a quarter of an hour, cleanse a great ship, although she leak very much.  
Many men be borne and brought up in these ships and barks (as is aforesaid) and never in all their lives have been on land, and do know none other occupation wherewith to live, but that which they do inherit of their fathers, which is to go in one of these ships or barks, carrying and recarrying of merchandise from place to place, or to ferry people over the rivers. They have in them their wives & their children, and have like neighbourhood amongst them on the rivers, as in their cities and towns, of whom they stand in little need for they do bring up within their ships all things necessary for their sustenance, as hens, ducks, pigeons, and other fowls good to be eaten: and if they do lack any thing, they have it in victualling houses & shops which they have amongst them on the same rivers in great abundance: and of other superfluous things such as may be found in a city, they are well furnished: as of many sorts of silks, amber and musk, and other things more curious than needful. They have also in their ships, pots with little orange trees and other fruits, and gardens with flowers, and other herbs for their recreation, and in the wide ships pools of water, wherein they have great store of fish alive, and yet do daily fish for more with nets. This kingdom is the best provided of fish of any that is known, by reason of the great number of these barks, as also because they have many fisher men at Sea and in the rivers, that continually fish with nets, and other engines for the same purpose: and do carry the same fish (in infinite number) alive into their pools five hundredth leagues up into the land by the rivers, which they do with great ease in shifting the water every day, and do feed them with things fit for the nature of the fish.  
The chief and principallest time of fishing in this country, is in three months of the year, which is, February, March, and April, at such time as are the spring tides, which do bring the fish out of the main sea into the rivers, and there they do spawn and leave their young: then these fisher men, who do live by that faculty, do take them, and put them into their ponds, and feed and nourish them in the ships till they come to bigness to be sold.  
Unto these fishermen repair many barks, from diverse parts of the Country to buy their fish, and do bring with them wicker baskets lined with a certain thick paper for that purpose, and anointed with oil, so that the water can not go out: wherein they do put their fish, and do shift them every day, and feed them as aforesaid. All people do buy of this fish, although they be very small and lean, and do put them in their ponds which every one hath in his house (as common use in all that country is) whereas in a small time they wax great, fit to be eaten. They do feed them with a paste made of cows dung, buffs dung, and pigins dung.  
Likewise they do throw of these small fishes into the mo●tes of their Cities, which is the occasion that they are so full of fish. But all that breed in them do appertain unto the Governors or judges of the cities, so that none without their express commandment dare fish for them. These Governors and judges do use much to recreate themselves upon the rivers, and have for the same purpose barks made close, & chambers in them very curiously wrought, with windows and galleries likewise hanged with rich clothes, and many other things for their contentment and pleasure.   

CHAP. XXII. A curious order that these Chinos have to bring up ducks in great abundance, and with small cost: and of a pleasant and ingenious order of fishing which they use.  
THe great number of people that is in this country, and not permitting any idle people to live therein, is the occasion that it doth stir up the wits of poor men (being constrained thereunto by necessity, the inventor of many things) to seek new inventions to get their living, to relieve and supply their necessities. So that many of this kingdom, seeing the whole country so thoroughly inhabited & tilled, that there is not one foot without an owner, they do take them unto the rivers, (which are very great) and there they do make their dwellings in ships and barks (as is aforesaid,) where they have their whole families under board to defend them from the sun and rain, and inclinations of the heavens. There they do use the occupation that they do know, or that which they did inherit of their father, and many mysteries to live by, very strange: whereof the most principal is to bring up in some of their barks so great quantity of ducks, that they sustain a great part of the country therewith, and the use thereof is as followeth.  
They have cages made of canes so big as the upper most hold of the bark, in the which may be four thousand ducks at once. They have in certain places of these cages made nests where these ducks do almost every day lay eggs, the which they take: and if it be in the summer they do put them in buffs dung, or in the dung of those ducks, which is very warm, where they leave them so many days, as experience hath taught them, that they will come forth. Then they do take them out of the dung, and do break them one by one and take a little ducklin, the which they do with so great cunning▪ that almost none of them doth perish, which is that which causeth great admiration unto some that go to see it: although they be but few, for that it is an ancient custom used of long time in that country. And for to have the fruition of this benefit all the year, in the winter they must use an artificial help to give a little warmness unto the dung for the bringing forth of their eggs, they do use them an other invention as ingenious as the first, & that is this: they take a great number of canes tied one by another, whereon they do lay the dung, then upon that they do lay their eggs, and do cover them very well with the same: this being done they put under the canes, straw, or some other like thing, and set it on fire, but in such sort that it doth not burn, but keepeth a natural heat, all the time till they think that they are ready to be taken out. Then do they take and break them, as aforesaid, so that their poultry doth increase in such number as though they were ants. Then do they put them into an other cage for the same purpose, whereas be old ducks brought up for no other purpose, but to cover the little ones under their wings and keep them warm: and there they do feed them every day till such time as they can feed themselves, and go abroad into the fields to profit themselves in the company of the old ducks. Many times they have in number above twenty thousand, yet do they maintain them with a small-cost, and it is in this order: every morning they do give them a small quantity of boiled rice, then do they open a door of the cage, which is towards the river, and do put a bridge of canes that doth reach unto the water: then do they come forth with so great haste one upon an other, that it is a pastime to see them. All the day after they do pass the time upon the water, and in the fields of rice upon the land, whereas they do feed: the owners of the rice do give unto the owners of the ducks somewhat to let their ducks go into their fields, for that they do destroy all the grass and other weeds in it. And hurt nothing of the rice.  
When that the evening draweth on, than they of the bark do make a sound with a taber or such like, that which being heard of his ducks, they throw themselves with great speed into the water, and swim strait unto their own bark, whereas their bridge is ready put for them, and every flock doth know his own bark by the sound without missing at any time, although there be many flocks together. For every bark doth use a different sound the one from the other, to the which the ducks are used, and their ears full thereof, so that they never fail their own bark.  
This manner of living is greatly used in all that country and very profitable, for that it is a victual most used amongst them, and is esteemed as a thing of great sustentation and of small price, by reason that at all times there is breeding of them and of small cost.  
Likewise in this Country they do use a kind of fishing, that is of no less industry, than the bringing up of these ducks, and a thing to be seen. The king hath in every City founded upon the rivers, houses, wherein every year is brought up many cormorants, or sea Ravens, with whom they do fish, in those months that the fish doth spawn and that is in this manner following. They take the cormorants out of their cages, and carry them unto the river side, whereas they have many barks ordained for their fishing, and they are half full of water. Then they take their cormorants, and with a cord, they do bind their maws, in such sort, that no fish can fall into it: then they do cast them into the river to fish, the which they do with such good will and covetousness, that it is a wonder to see, they throw themselves into the water with great swiftness, and dive, whereas they do fill their throat with fish. Then they come forth and with the like hast they go unto the barks that are half full of water, and the fish which they have taken they put in that water which is put there for that purpose that the fish may not die, the which being done they return again unto their fishing as they did before.  
In this order they do endure their fishing four hours together, in such sort, that the one doth not trouble the other, and when that their boats with water are full of fish, then do they unbind them, and turn them again into the river for to fish for themselves, for they have need thereof, for that always the day before that they will fish, they keep them from their ordinary victuals, which is a little Millio that they may the better do their office. So after a while that they have filled their bellies and recreated themselves, they take them out of the water and carry them unto the ordinary places, whereas they art kept, and every third day during the time of this fishing, they do take them forth for the same exercise, which for them is so great pastime, that they would it should endure all the year.  
In these three months they do take so much fish, that they do provide the whole kingdom for all the year: as in the chapter past it hath been told you, which is the occasion that they are as well provided of fish, as of any other thing: so that if they please, they may eat every day fresh fish, although they are far from the sea.   

CHAP. XXIII. Of the courtesy that the king of this mighty kingdom doth unto the Ambassadors that come to him from any other king, prince, or commonalty.  
WE should in the chapter following entreat of the embassage that king Philip of Spain, with the Christian zeal that he had, to send unto the king of this kingdom, who being moved by certain causes and reasons, did refer it till a better occasion, and we do believe that it will be offered shortly. Therefore now it shall not be from our purpose to declare in this chapter the honour and courtesy that this king doth unto the ambassadors of kings, princes, or any other province that doth come unto him in what sort so ever it be, and for that it is of great curiosity, it shall be necessary to declare it with the circumstance wherewith it is done.  
All such as do enter into this kingdom, with the title of ambassador, be it from a king, that is a friend or enemy: they are respected, entreated and made of, with so great care and diligence, as though they came themselves in person that do send them: Unto whom, besides the observing the law of nations which is observed & kept among all kings in the world, in especial that their persons shall not receive neither incur any danger, although their embassage bringeth discontent, or harm unto the king, besides all the which there is granted unto them great and particular privileges. When that he doth enter into the kingdom by any of the provinces whatsoever. The judge or governor of the first town doth in person go forth to meet and receive him, and give him his welcome, with great complement of words & ceremonies: all the Loytias, Captains, soldiers and the inhabitants of the town, do accompany the judge or governor, when that they go to receive him. But at his disembarking to come a shore they will not suffer him to set his feet upon the ground (although it be but a little way that he should go) but hath at the water's side in a readiness eight men, with a chair made of ivory, or of some other precious thing, with the curtains of velvet, damask, or cloth of gold: which for the like opportunity, they have in every city or principal town appointed by the king, wherein they do carry him to his lodging. Likewise they have in every city and great town throughout all the kingdom, a principal house, and sufficient for to lodge such like personages. It is also used to lodge such judges as are sent by the king to execute his commandment when they pass by any of such cities or towns. There is in every one of these houses a Lieutenant, & he hath in it marvelous and excellent household stuff, as hangings, beds, servants, and all other necessaries, not 〈◊〉 to lodge one ambassador, but many if they should there meet, and not one to disturb an other. So as aforesaid, they do bear him company (either on horseback, or in a chair, which is the ordinary carriage amongst them) till he come unto this house, whereas they do leave him with much courtesy and many ceremonies, alonely with them that wait upon him and serve him. And also a Captain with a thousand or two thousand soldiers for to guard him continually, and to bear him company till he return again out of the kingdom. Then the next day following the judge or governor that did receive him doth go and visit him. And after that they have demanded of him such ordinary things, as is used in such like visitations: then do they learn of his estate, and of the prince that hath sent him, and in sum, the effect of his coming and embassage: then do they straightways at the hour dispatch a post unto the governor or viceroy of the province, who is always resident in the chief or metropolitan City thereof, and he at the same instant doth dispatch another post with that message unto the king and his royal counsel. And he doth send order unto the ambassador, either to stay, or a safe conduct for him to go unto the place whereas he is. Likewise he sendeth order unto the judge, how he shall entreat that ambassador, which is given according unto the relation sent him, wherein he did understand the state of the king and prince that sent him. Likewise the number of soldiers that shall bear him company, and of all other things needful for him in his journey: all the which is set down in order, and in particular, as what they shall give every man to eat for him and his servants, and in what towns, and how he shall be lodged. His safe conduct is brought him, written upon a whited table (after the fashion as we have told you here before in many places) and is with great l●tters, wherein is contained from what king that ambassador is sent. This table is borne always before him, wheresoever he doth go. But that passport, which is sent him afterwards from the royal council, with faculty, that he may go unto the court, is after another sort: for that it is written in parchment and gallantly limned, and with the kings seal of Gold hanging at it, which is never given but at such like occasion▪ or for some provision given to a viceroy.  
Look what is spent upon this ambassador in all his journey, and upon them that do bear him company for all necessaries, is upon the king's cost and charges, and is paid by the kings treasurers in every place where as they do go. Generally in all parts, they do make him great feasts and banquets with pastimes and presents, that day that he doth enter into the City of Ta●bin, or Paquin whereas the king is.  
There goeth forth to meet him without the city, all the Gentlemen of the court, with the royal council and precedent, who according unto the saying of the Chinos, goeth forth with little less majesty and company than the king: who, if the ambassador be from a king that is mighty, they give him the right hand, if not they give him the left hand: and in this sort they go either talking with himself, or by interpreters demanding of him of his health, and of his travail in coming, and other things till he come into the court of the palace, whereas he is lodged▪ and there they do leave him, with some to bear him company, and he doth return unto his house with all this company aforesaid. But when they do departed from him they do give him power in the name of the king, to make a certain number of Loytias, and to set at liberty a certain number of prisoners, such as are condemned to die, and other good deeds particular.  
Those that do enter in this kingdom with the title of an ambassador, they cannot do him any grief, for any delight or evil that he doth, although they can make good proof thereof. And for that it is of a truth: you shall understand the proof by experience. There was sent unto this king, one Bartholomew Perez a Portugal and his company, by order of the viceroy of the India with an embassage from the king Don Manuel of Portugal, & they were accused before the viceroy of the province of Canton, by the ambassadors of the king of Malaca that were there present, who were bound unto the court to treat of matters of their king: they did testify that the embassage that the Portugal did bring was false, and they were spies sent from the viceroy of the India for to view the fortresses of the city, that they might come afterwards and take it, as they had done in many places of the India: they persevering still in the evil and mischievous intent, did will the viceroy to apprehend them, and to punish them as such spies did deserve, offering themselves to give good information for the same.  
Who after that he had well considered thereof, and consulted with the Loytias of the city, and with his counsellors, they commanded that they should be apprehended, and put in strait prison, whereas their declarations were taken with great care deceit and policy: and by reason that in them they found contrarieties: some for fear confessed much more than that which was demanded: and other said that it was of truth, so that by their confessions according unto the laws of the country, they were condemned to die, and sent their judgement unto the royal council for to confirm the same, with intent and great desire for to execute the same. The which being seen by the royal council, and considering with what title they entered into that kingdom, did not only make void the sentence and would not confirm the same, but did send commandment unto the viceroy to set them at liberty, and to return freely back again unto the India from whence they came, and that he should furnish them with all things necessary in abundance, till they were entered into the same, although in this time the ambassadors of the king of Malaca, who were in the court, did still persever in their malicious intent.  
In which commandment, although it were true, all that which the foresaid ambassadors did testify, and that they for fear of death did confess it, yet it is sufficient that they entered into this kingdom the title of ambassador, whereby they should receive any harm. But now let us return t● our purpose. So after this ambassador hath refreshed himself of his journey, and received many banquets and orations of the Gentlemen of the court: upon a day appointed he goeth to speak with the king, accompanied with all the Gentlemen of the court, and with the precedent of the council, who doth give him audience in one of the three rich hals aforesaid, at all times as his business doth require. So when that all his business is dispatched, and gratified with many gifts, he returneth back again from whence he came, and look with what courtesy they did receive him at his coming, the like they do unto him at his return.  
But if an ambassador do come from any common wealth of the said kingdom, they do not give him the entertainment abovesaid, but clean contrary thereunto, for that he doth enter into the city, accompanied only with the justice, whose charge it is to lodge him in such houses as the king hath ordained to the same effect: and to give him all that is necessary, taking of him the sum and effect wherefore he doth come: and he doth give relation thereof unto the precedent of the council, and the precedent doth give the king to understand thereof: then do they appoint the day of audience, with this condition, that when he doth go thither, he must go on foot, or else on horseback without a bridle, with only a halter on his horse head, in token of humility, and acknowledging to be a subject. The day of his audience, he cometh forth observing the order and condition aforesaid, accompanied with the justice. And when he doth come into a great place, which is right against the palace of the king, he stayeth there till an officer of the king doth come unto him (who is master of the ceremonies) and he doth cause him to proceed forwards, and doth show him the place whereas he must first kneel down, with his hands joined together in token of adoration or worship: and all the time of this ceremony, his eyes must be fixed on that part where as they say the king is. In this sort he goeth onwards his way, making in it other five adorations like unto the first, until such time as he do come into the first hall of the palace which is at the stairs head, whereas the precedent is set with great majesty, and doth represent the king's person: who after that he hath heard the effect of his embassage, doth send them away without answering one word at that time: but after that he hath given the king to understand, he doth send him answer by that justice, who hath the charge to lodge him, and to provide him of all things necessary for the time that he is in the court.   

CHAP. XXIIII. Of the embassage that the king of Spain did send unto the king of this kingdom, and the occasions that did move him thereunto, as also wherefore it was declared.  
FOr to conclude this small history, in the which I have declared in sum, all such things as I have understood of this kingdom of China unto this, I mean such as I might well set forth, leving a great number more, (of the which I have particular note: some for that they are unknown, and others for that they will cause admiration, because they have not been seen. And according unto the counsel of the wise, they should not be entreated of, until that time that experience doth make them more credible. And again, I do hold it for a less evil, to be reprehended, for brevity (as some have been) then to be prolix and tedious in the declaring, although it be hurtful unto this work, from the which I do take away much that I might put in. Now letting all pass, I will in this last chapter declare, of the letter present, and embassage, wherewith the king of Spain did send me in the year of our Lord one thousand one hundred and fourscore: for that in company of other religious men of my order, I should pass from his mighty kingdom of Mexico to China, and to present it unto the king of that country in his name: of all the which I will declare that which I do understand and know, not exceeding the limits of fidelity, by reason that the embassage was not ended, nor no conclusion in effect of that which was pretended, but do hope in the divine majesty, and with the care and diligence that is put therein by the king of Spain, shortly to have a conclusion of that they desire, for the which the letter and the rest was sent.  
Being considered of by the Spaniards (such as were dwellers in the islands Philippinas, which by another name are called the islands of the Ponent or West) the things of great valour and riches, as of gold and silks and many other things which is brought from the kingdom of China, and out of their ports, and how those which brought it, did sell it for a small quantity in respect as they did esteem it, and being certified by the said Chinos of many other things which were in the firm land, whereof some of them have been made mention in this history: being moved with the converting of these souls, and with the profit that might come of traffic that they might have with the Chinos: it was concluded by the governor and principals of the City of Manila, with the judgement of the provincial of the order of saint Augustine, and of many other religious men that were both grave & wise, such as were the first, that in those parts did preach the Gospel, and did baptize a great number of the dwellers therein, and did many other things, of the which I might say much, if it were to my purpose, and that my part were not therein: so that I say it was concluded amongst them to send unto the Catholic king grave personages, unto whom entire credit might be given, for to give relation what they understood of that kingdom, and also of the evident necessity (that all those islands that were his) had for their conservation to hold to friends the Chinos their borderers, whereof might grow unto them great benefits and profits: and likewise to request him (if it were his pleasure) to send an ambassador to the king of that kingdom the better to confirm their friendship & to carry with him some things which be used in his country, which would be marvelous well esteemed of the Chinos, & be a way unto the preaching of the gospel, and be a beginning that a farther contraction may grow betwixt the Christians and the Chinos, of the which shall follow the aforesaid profit unto other countries, by the great quantity of things, as well of riches as of other curiosities that shallbe brought from thence. After they had well considered with great deliberation, who should be the person that they should send upon so long a journey, for to request his majesty of the aforesaid: in the end they did agree upon, for to desire the provincial of the Augustine friars, who was called Friar Dilho de Herrera, a man of great learning and of great experience touching matters of those islands, for that he was one of the first discoverers of them: they requested him for the love of God, and the good service to his majesty, and the benefit that might come thereby unto these islands that he would take upon him to go with this petition, for they were fully persuaded for that he had travailed so many places of those islands, as also for his office and vocation, there was none that better could put in effect their desire, and persuade with his majesty the great importance of that embassage: and many other things necessary touching the government of those islands. This determination was liked well of them all, and that they had chosen well in sending of the provincial, who incontinent departed from the islands in a ship that was pepared for Nova Hispania, which was in the year of Christ 1573. At his inbarking, he was accompanied with the governor, and all those of that city, of whom he was marvelously well beloved for his holiness and good condition. Desiring him with all diligence to procure to return, with as much brevity as was possible, unto those islands, whereas they so much loved him, and had need of his presence.  
He did promise them to make all the speed possible, and in payment of the travel that he did take upon him, for the benefit & profit, he requested them all that they would pray unto God to give a good voyage: they promised him to do it, the which they did perform with particular care. Then did the master command to weigh anchors, and to set sail, which was in the month of November the same year: and with reasonable whether they arrived at the new Spain, and came unto the city of Mexico, and from thence they went and embarked themselves in the North seas, who with prosperous winds the xiii, day of August, the year following they arrived in San. Lucar debarameda in Spain, and carried me in his company. From thence the day following we departed from Syvel, from whence we departed forthwith toward Madrid, whereas his majesty was at that present, and we came thither the fifteenth day of September in anno 1574. the same week that they had news of the loss of the Goleta. We went straightways to kiss the king's hands, and carried the letters which we brought from his governor and city: by whom both we and the letters were received with his accustomed benignity, and did hear the petition with great satisfaction, for that the desire was holy and profitable, and told us that he would command his counsel to understand in the same with a particular consideration, and with so much brevity as the thing required: and gave us thanks for the great travel and long journey, which we took upon us in his service, for to give him notice of the discovering of this great kingdom, and of other things touching the islands Philippinas. He straightways commanded that we should be provided for of all things necessary for our sustentation, for the time that we should there remain: and that we should go and give account of all things, (for the which we came thither) unto the counsel of the Indies: who was Don ivan de Obando, unto whom his majesty did recommend the consideration to be done with great care, and to consult upon the same. After that they had communed with the royal counsel of the Indies touching that which should be requisite and convenient: which was done as it appeared in effect, for that they gave us faculty in a few days after, of all things that was requested from the said islands, except that which did touch the embassage unto the 〈◊〉 of China, as a thing of greater importance, and requested lon●●r time to consider of the same: so that they did refer it till they ●●d a better occasion. So that with this resolution and with forty religious men, and many commissions from his majesty touching the good government of that new kingdom, we departed from Syvell in the month of januarie, the year following in 1575. whereas I remained by his order and for certain respects. But the aforesaid Provincial did embark himself with his forty religious persons, and departed in the month of july with a fair wind and merry passage, till they came unto new Spain, and from thence into the South sea, until they came in sight of the islands: whereas the wether did alter, and they were forced by the fury thereof to arrive at an Island inhabited with Gentiles, by whom they were all slain, and none escaped but only an Indian natural of the islands, which we carried from thence in our company for Spain. He afterwards came unto Manilla and gave them to understand how they were all slain, and how the Gentiles did tear all the papers and commissions in pieces, and of all that happened to them.  
This being known by the governor, and by the rest that dwelled in the islands (after that they had done the rites, with the funeral griefs, as justice required in such a case) they finding themselves in the same necessity, that before they were in by reason of the loss of the aforesaid Provincial and his companions, and also of the letters and provisions sent from his majesty: they forthwith in the same determination, did write new letters, in requesting that which in part the king had granted, (although they had no knowledge thereof) they did also therein write touching the embassage that they did request for the king of China, adding thereunto new occasions, whereby they should be moved to do them so much favour as to send the ambassador afore requested: which was a thing of great importan●s for all those islands. When that these letters came in conformity with the others before sent, the king did ordain for governor of those islands, a Gentleman, who was called Don Gonsalo de Mercado, y Ronquillo, a man of great valour & discretion, one that had served the king as well in the Peru. as in Mexico, with great fidelity: who understanding the earnest request wherewith those of the islands did ask the embassage, & how much it did import to have it (as a man then elected for governor of those islands, & a matter that touched him very much,) did put the king and his counsel in memory of the same: and in conclusion they answered that he should forthwith departed with the soldiers that were provided for those parts, for that it was convenient so to be done by reason of great necessity that they had of them in the said islands: and as for the embassage, for that there was no such great necessity nor haste, it should be entreated of at more leisure, when that the counsel will advertise themselves of all that shallbe convenient touching that matter, & that they would consult and confer with his majesty, that he may as the right owner of them, command that which should be to the service of God and his benefit. So with this answer the said governor departed. It happened that in the month of August, in the year following, before that this governor was arrived at the islands, there came new letters from thence, of supplications, requesting with greater instance, that which before at other times they had requested, sending with their petition the whole relation of the entry of friar Martin de Herrada, provincial of the Augustine Friars and his companions, into the kingdom of China, and of such things as they had seen and heard of (as may be seen at large in the said declaration, which is in the second part of this book.) This being seen by his majesty, he was resolved to send the embassage which so many times they have requested: this chanced at that time that he began to go upon Portugal, a time of trouble, but yet a great token that it was the will of God, in whose hands (as the wise man saith) are the hearts of kings. For the appointment of one for to go on this embassage, the king did remit it unto his royal counsel of the Indies, whose precedent was Don Antonio de Padilla y menese, who had communicated with me divers times, touching matters of that kingdom & of Mexico, whereas I was always resident ever since I was seventeen years of age, and by reason of matters that was committed unto me, out of that country, was the occasion that I did use to visit him the oftener: the which large conversation and the good will that he did bear me, did persuade him that I could put in execution the embassage of his majesty, for that his will was that some religious person should do it: and they being fully persuaded that my good will and desire was for the salvation of those souls, and in all respects willing to serve his majesty: all the which with the knowledge that I had of that large navigation, and the quality of that country and people, was a great help to the accomplishing in effect the will of his majesty and desire of those that dwelled in Philippina.  
So after this charge being committed unto me, and his majesty read●e to departed on his voyage for Portugal as aforesaid, he did remit my dispatch unto the lords of the royal counsel, who were at that time, the Liceneiado gasca de salaca● and doctor Gomez de Santisteuan, the Licenciado Espadero. The Licenciado done Diego de Zuniga, the doctor Vaillo, the Licenciado, Euao, the Licenciado Gedeon de Hinonsosa. By whose commandment I depart from the court unto Syvell, where as order was given, that all such things should be provided that I should carry unto the king. Whereas I was, procuring the same certain days: and for that they were many the which I should carry▪ it was not possible by any means that they should be made ready against the departure of the fleet. Then the Licenciado Gasca de Salacar aforesaid, who was at that present resident in the contractation house of Syvel gave his majesty to understand thereof, who was at Badaioz, occupied in matters touching the kingdom of Portugal, as aforesaid, and requested him to give order what his pleasure was to be done therein: who commanded that the fleet should departed, and that I should stay till such time as all things were made and concluded that I should carry with me for the king of China, as in ample manner as he had commanded. And when that all things were in good order, that they should cause ● ship or galleon to be made ready, wherein I should make my voyage, ●or to overtake or meet at the new Spain such ships as every year doth departed for the islands Philippinas, which is at Christmas time, this commandment was delayed until the beginning of Lent, as well for that the things were many that should be made, and could not be dispatched in the time, as also for a general sickness that was amongst them in Spain, called the Cattarre or murr. Then after that all things were in order by the commandment of the Licenciado Gasca, he delivered unto me the kings letter, and all other things. The which for that they were many, and again I have been tedious in this Chapter, I do not declare it, for that the prudent lector, may of himself conceive, if he do weigh the magnanimity of the Catholic king that doth send them, and the mightiness and richness of him to whom it is sent, of the which we have declared enough in this small history, I would I could particularly declare it unto you, as also the copy of the letter that his majesty did send unto that Heathen or Gentile king, a thing worthy of the author: but for that it came not to effect, neither had I any licence of him that all only might grant it: and again in place whereas I could not ask it, therefore I dare not, for that I will not exceed the limits of fidelity, which I own unto my prince. But it is sufficient that the letter, and the present sent by his majesty unto the king of that country, was to no other intent, but to procure him and all his subjects to acknowledge the true God, and to exhort them to receive our catholic faith, and to give them to understand the error wherein they are, and how ignorant they are of the knowledge of the true God, the creator of h●au●n and earth, and of all the creatures of the world visible and invisible, saviour and redeemer of all such as with a true knowledge do believe in him and obey his holy law, declared by his word, and confirmed by his divine tokens, and other things in effect.  
So being dispatched, I prosecuted my journey, and order till I came unto the kingdom of Mexico, whereas I found a certain inconvenience, touching a matter needful in that voyage, whereof his majesty, in the commission he gave me, willed me to be well advertised, and if it were needful to give him notice thereof before I did pass any farther.  
The viceroy of that kingdom, who was the Earl of Coruma, thought it good that I should return unto Lysborne, whereas the king was at that instant, and to give him to understand of the difficulty that was found, in a meeting that the viceroy had caused to be made of the most gravest personages of all that kingdom, about the prosecuting of that embassage.  
With this resolution I departed from that kingdom and returned for Spain, and left the present in Mexico in the power of the king's officers, till such time as order was given what shoul● be done therewith.  
I found his majesty in Lisbon, whereas I did deliver him the letters that were written touching the same matter, and did declare unto him my judgement touching the meeting aforesaid: who incontinent did take the charge upon him to seek occasion for to put in effect his most christ●an intent and zeal, the which I do believe he hath procured, and will by all ways possible: and that very shortly we shall see in that kingdom planted the Catholic faith, and their false idolatry banished. And I hope in God it will be very shortly, for that there be within that kingdom religious men of the order of saint Augustine, and barefoot friars of saint Francis: and of the order of jesus or jesuits, who are called there the fathers of Saint Paul: of whom there is plac●d five or six in the city of Xauquin, whereas the viceroy doth dwell, and hath erected a covent in that city ever since the year 1583. with a Church, whereas they do say mass ordinarily. And it is said of a truth that they have got licence of the said viceroy for to pass freely through out all the whole kingdom of China▪ But if it be so, you must think that he did it after that he had consulted with the king, and done by his authority: otherwise I am persuaded he durst not grant any such licence.  
At this present doth there go out of Spain by the order and commandment of his majesty, and his royal counsel of the Indies, a company of religious men, of the order of saint Dominicke for to aid and help the rest that are there to conclude this enterprise, from whom can proceed nothing but that which tends to great effect: by reason of their great zeal & learning, and the better if that they do ioy●e together in charity, as servants to one Lord and master: and as they which are bound● to do all one work. By which means, with the favour and help of Almighty God, putting to their diligence and industry they shall easily conquest their hearts & good wills, & shall frustrate the devil, from the possession that so long time he hath possessed in that kingdom, and reduce them to their true Lord by creation and redemption. It will not be a small help, the many and evident tokens which the Chinos do give of desire of their salvation. For as it is said, that they have read in their books, that from the Occident shall come the true and perlite law to di●ect them to heaven, where they shallbe angel●. And they seeing that those religious people which are c●me into their kingdom, do come from the Occident, they are persuaded without doubt, that the law that they do declare unto them, is the truth: by which means shall redound unto them great goodness. They are greatly affectioned unto the commandments of the Catholic faith, and unto the catechism, which is translated into their language, and is abroad in many parts of that kingdom, which is the occasion (as the fathers of the company that are in the city Xuquien doth write) that many principal persons are converted unto the catholic faith, and others being helped by the heavens, and encited by the ensample of them, do demand the holy baptism: which is left undone because they will not cause any uproar in the country. And again, when they shall better conceive thereof, they may receive it with more firm faith.  
God for his mercy cause to go forwards, and with his divine favour, this good work, for his honour and glory, and exalting his holy faith: and that so great and infinite a number of souls redeemed by his precious blood might be saved, and to put in the heart of christian kings to proceed forwards in that which he hath begun: putting always in their breasts a greater augmentation to the concluding of the same, and to put apart from him all such persuasions as should cause him to leave it off, which the devil will procure by all the ways and means that he may. But against God and his divine will, there is neither power nor wisdom.    
The end of the first part.   

The second part of the history of the mighty kingdom of China, that is divided into three parts. 

The first containeth such things as the fathers, friar Martin de Herrada provincial of the order of Saint Augustine in the islands Phlipinas, and his companion friar Geronimo Martin, and other soldiers that went with them, did see and had intelligence of in that kingdom.  
The second containeth the miraculous voyage that was made by friar Pedro de Alfaro of the order of S. Francis, and his companions unto the said kingdom.  
The third containeth a brief declaration by the said friar, and of friar Martin Ignacio, that went out of Spain unto China, and returned into Spain again by the oriental India, after that he had compassed the world. Wherein is contained many notable things that he did see and had intelligence of in the voyage.    

The Argument of the first part.  
Wherein is declared the cause that moved Friar Martin de Herrada, and Friar Geronimo Martin, and such soldiers as went in their company, for to pass from the islands Phillipinas, unto the kingdom of China, in the year 1577 and of the entry they made therein, and what they did see there for the space of four months and sixtee●e days that they remained: and of what they understood, & of all things that happened unto them, till they returned again unto the islands from whence they went: all the which are notable and strange.  

CHAP. I. The Spaniards depart from Mexico unto the Islands Philippinas, where they had intelligence of the mighty kingdom of China.  
Governing in the kingdom of Mexico, done Lewis de Velasco, who was viceroy, and lieutenant in that place for the Catholic king done Philip king of Spain, was commanded by his majesty to prepare a great army in the south sea, and to levy soldiers necessary for the same, and to send them to discover the islands of the west, those which that famous captain Magallanes did give notice of, when he did compass the world in the ship called the Victory.  
The viceroy with great care and diligence did perform the kings commandment. This fleet and army being prepared ready (which was not without great cost) he caused them to departed out of the port at Christmas time in the year of 1564. and sent for general of the same fleet and for governor of that country which they should discover, the worthy Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, who afterwards died in the said Island with the title of Adelantado, a year after that the father's Friar Martin de Herrada and Friar Geronimo Marin and their companies did enter into China.  
So after that our Spaniards had discovered the said Islands, and some of them populared to the use of his Majesty, but in especial that of Manilla which is five hun●red leagues in circuit: in the which is situated the city of Luson, and is also called Manilla, and as the metropolitan of all the Island, whereas the governors have ordained their place of abiding ever since the first discovery. They have also founded in that city a cathedral Church, and erected a bishopric.  
And for Bishops of the same, his majesty did ordain the most reverend friar done Domingo de Salazar of the order of preachers, in whom was comprehended some holiness, good life and learning, as was requisite and necessary for that province: and was consecrated in Madrid the year of 1579.  
At this present there be three monasteries of religious men in that Island, the one of the order of S. Austen, and were the first that by the commandment of his majesty did enter into this islands, preaching the law of the gospel, which was great profit unto those souls, yet great travail unto them, and cost many of them their lives in doing it: the other monastery is of barefoot Friars of the order of S. Francis, of the province of S. joseph, who have been great examples, with great profit unto them of those ports. The third are of the order of S. Dominicke or preachers, who have done their duty in all things so well as the other. These three orders were alonely in those islands for certain years, till now of late time have gone thither Jesuits, which have been a great aid and help unto their religion.  
When these Spaniards were come unto these islands, they had straightways notice of the mighty kingdom of China▪ as well by the relation of them of the islands (who told unto them the marvels thereof) as also within a few days after, they did see and understand, by ships that came into those ports with merchants that brought merchandise and other things of great curiosity from that kingdom, & did particularly declare the mightiness and riches thereof: all which have been declared unto you in the first three books of this history. This being known unto the religious people of S. Austin, who at that time were alone in those islands: but in especial unto the provincial, Friar Martin de Herrada, a man of great valour, and well learned in all sciences: who seeing the great capacity or towardness which the Chinos had more than those of the Islands in all things, but in especial in their gallantness, discretion and wit: he straightways had a great desire to go thither with his fellow to preach the gospel unto those people, of so good a capacity to receive the same: who with a pretended purpose to put it in ure & effect, he began with great care & study to learn that language, the which he learned in few days: & did make thereof a dictionary. Then afterwards they did give great entertainment & presents unto the merchants that came from China for to procure them to carry them thither, & many other things, the which did show their holie-zeale: yea they did offer themselves to be slaves unto the merchants, thinking by the means to enter in to preach: but yet none of these diligences did take effect, till such time as the divine majesty did discover a better way, as shallbe declared unto you in this chapter following.   

CHAP. II. A rover of this kingdom of China called Limahon, doth make himself strong at the sea, and doth overcome an other rover of the same country called Vintoquiam.  
THe Spaniards did enjoy their new habitation of Manilla in great quietness, v●ide of all care of any accident that might disquiet them, or any strange treasons of enemies for to offend them, for that those Islands were in great quietness, and in obedience unto the Christian king Don Philip, and in continual traffic with the Chinos, which seemed unto them a sufficient security, for the continuance of the quietness they lived in. And again, for that they understood that they had a law amongst them (as hath been told you in this history) that it was forbidden to make any wars out of their own country. But being in this security and quietness, unlooked for, they were beset with a mighty & great Armada or fleet of ships, by the rover Limahon, of whose vocation th●re are continually on the coast, the one by reason that the country is full of people, whereas of necessity must be many idle persons: and the other & principal occasion, by reason of the great tyranny that the governors do▪ use unto the subjects. This Limahon came upon them with intent to do them harm as you shall understand. This rover was borne in the city of Trucheo in the province of Cuytan, 
Where Limahon was born●.  which the Portugeses do call Catim. He was of mean parentage, and brought up in his youth in liberty and vice, he was by nature warlike and evil inclined. He would learn no occupation, but all given to rob in the high ways, and became so ●xp●rt that many came unto him and followed that trade. He made himself Captain over them which were more than two thousand, & w●re so strong that they were feared in all that province where as they were. This being known unto the king and to his council, they did strait way command the viceroy of the province where as the rover was, that with all the haste possible he should gather together all the garrisons of his fraontiers, to apprehend and take him, and if it were possible to carry him alive unto the City of Taybin, if not his head. The viceroy incontinent did gather together people necessary and in great haste to follow him.  
The which being known unto Limahon the rover, who saw, that with the people he had, he was not able to make resistance against so great a number as they were, and the eminent danger that was therein, he called together his companies, and went from thence unto a port of the sea, that was a few leagues from that place: and did it so quickly and in such secret, that before the people that dwelled therein, could make any defence (for that they were not accustomed to any such assaults, but lived in great quietness) they were lords of the port and of all such ships as were there: into the which they embarked themselves straightways, weighed anchor and departed to the sea, whereas they thought to be in more security than on the land (as it was true.) Then he seeing himself lord of all those seas, began to rob and spoil all ships that he could take as well strangers as of the natural people: by which means in a small time he was provided of mariners and other things which before he lacked, requisite for that new occupation. He sacked, rob and spoiled all the towns that were upon the coast, and did very much harm. So he finding himself very strong with forty ships well armed, of those he had out of the port, and other that he had taken at the sea, with much people such as were without shame, their hands imbrued with robberies and killing of men, he imagined with himself to attempt greater matters, and di● put it in execution: he assaulted great towns, and did a thousand cruelties: in such sort, that on all that coast whereas he was known, he was much feared, yea and in other places farther off, his fame was so published abroad. So he following this trade and exercise, he chanced to meet with an other roover as himself, called, Vintoquian, likewise naturally borne in China, who was in a port void of any care or mistrust, whereas Limahon finding opportunity, with greater courage did fight with the ships of the other: that although they were threescore ships great and small, 
One rover rob an other.  and good soldiers therein, he did overcome them, and took five and fifty of their ships, so that Vintoquian escaped with five ships. Then Limahon seeing himself with a fleet of ninety five ships well armed and with many stout people in them, knowing that if they were taken, they should be all executed to death: they therefore setting all fear a part, gave themselves to attempt new inventions of evil▪ not only in robbing of great Cities, but also in destroying of them.   

CHAP. III. The king of China doth arm a fleet of ships against the rover Lymahon▪ who withdraweth himself to Tonzuacaotican, whereas he hath notice of the Philippinas.  
THe complaints increased every day more and more unto the king and his counsel, of the evils done unto the Chinos by this rover Lymahon. For the which commandment was given straightways unto the viceroy of that province (whereas he used to execute his evil) that with great expedition he might be taken (for to cut off this inconvenience, 
One hundred and thirty great ships of war with forty thousand men. ) who in few days did set forth to sea, one hundred and thirty great ships well appointed, with forty thousand men in them, and one made general over them all, a gentle man called Omoncon, for to go seek and follow this Rover with express commandment to apprehend o● kill him, although to the executing of the same he put both ships and men in danger. 
They do more est●eme honour than loss of ships or men.   
Of all this provision, Lymahon had advertisement by some secret friends, who seeing that his enemies were many, and he not able to countervail them, neither in ships nor men, determined not to abide the coming, but to retire and departed from that coast: so in flying he came unto an Island in secret called Tonznacaotican, which was forty leagues from the firm land, and is in the right way of navigation to the islands Philippinas.  
In this Island was Lymahon retired with his army a certain time, and durst not return to the firm land, for that he knew that the kings fleet did lie upon the coast to defend the fame. And although he did send forth some ships a robbing, yet did they not do any thing of importance, but rather cam● flying away from the mighty power of the kings. From this Island they did goefoorth with some of their ships robbing and spoiling all such as they met with ambergris & other things that they carried from one Island to an other, and from the Island unto the firm, & coming from thence amongst them all they caused to take two ships of China which came from Manilla, and were bound to their own country. And having then in their power they searched them under hatches, and found that they had rich things of gold, and spanish rials, which they had in truck of their ambergris the which they carried to the Islands. They informed themselves in all points of the state and fertility of that country, but in particular of the Spaniards, and how many there were of them in the city of Manilla, who were not at that present above seventy persons, for that the rest were separated in the discovering and populing of other islands newly found, and understanding that these few did live without any suspicion of enemies and had never a fort nor bulwark, and the ordinance which they had (although it was very good) yet was it not in order to defend themselves nor offend their enemies, he determined to go thither with all his fleet and people, for to destroy and kill them, and to make himself lord of the said Island of Manilla and other adjacent there nigh the same. And there he thought himself to be in security from the power of the king, which went seeking of him. And so as he was determined, he put it in ure with as much expedition as was possible.   

CHAP. four This rover Limahon goeth to the islands Philippinas, and cometh to the city of Manilla.  
THis Rover Limahon determining to go and to take the islands Philippinas, and to make himself lord and king over them all, but first to kill the Spaniards, which he thought easily to be done, for that there was so few. And there he pretended to live in security without fear that before he had of the kings great fleet, for that it was so far distant from the firm land. So with this determination he departed from those Islands whereas he was retired, and went to sea, and sailing towards the Islands Philippinas they passed in sight of the Islands of the Illocos, which had a town called Fernandina, which was new founded by the Captain john de Salzedo, who at that instant was in the same for lieutenant to the governor. Four leagues from the same they met with a small galley, which the said john de Salzedo had sent for victuals. There was in her but 25. soldiers besides the rovers, so that with the one & the other they were but a few in number, for that as they thought they did travail in places of great security, and without any suspicion to m●ete enemies. So soon as Limahon had discovered the galley, he cast about towards her, and with great ease did take her, and did burn and kill all that was in her, and pardoned one of them.  
This being done, he did prosecute his voyage according unto his determination, and passed alongst, but not in such secret but that he was discovered by the dwellers of the town of Fernandina, who gave notice thereof unto the lieutenant of the governor aforesaid, as a wonder to see so many ships together, and a thing never seen before at those islands. Likewise it caused admiration unto him, and made him to think and to imagine with great care what it might be, he saw that they did bear with the city of Manilla, and thought with himself, that so great a fleet as that was could not go to the place which they bore in with, for any goodness towards the dwellers therein, who were void of all care, and a small number of people as aforesaid. Wherewith he determined with himself with so great speed as it was possible, to join together such Spaniards as were there, which were to the number of fifty four▪ and to departed and procure (although they did put themselves in danger of inconvenience) to get the forehand of them, to advertise them of Manilla, and to aid and help them to put their artillery in order, and all other things necessary for their defence.  
This determination the Captain did put in ure very speedily, which was the occasion that the city and all those that were in it, was not destroyed and slain: yet they could not eschew all the harm, for that the ships that carried them were small, and a few rovers & not very expert, for that the suddenness of their departure would not afford better choice, as also they went from one place to an other procuring of victuals: all which was the occasion that they did not come thither in such time as they desired, and as was convenient.  
This Lymahon was well provided of provision and all other things necessary, and having the wind fair, he was always in the fore front, and came in the sight of Manilla upon saint Andros eve, in the year 1574. whereas he came to an anchor that night with all his whole fleet. And he seeing that the end of his pretence consisted in expedition before that they should be seen of those of the city, or discovered by them on the coasts. The nights at that time being very dark, which was a great help unto them: he choose four hundred of his best soldiers▪ such as he was fully persuaded of their valour and stout courage, and put them in small vessels, and charged those that went with them for Captains, to make such expedition that they might come unto the City before it was day, and the first thing that they did was to set fire on the City, and not to let escape one man living therein, promising them that at the break of the day he would be with them to give them aid and secure if need did require, which they did. But for that nothing is done without the will and permission of God, it went not with Limahon and his four hundred soldiers according as he did make reckoning: for that all that night the wind was of the shore, and the more the night came on, the more the wind increased, which was such a contradiction unto their expectation, that they could not by night disembarke themselves, although they did procure by all means possible by policy and force for to do it, Which of certainty and without all doubt, if this had not b●ene (at great ease) they had brought to a conclusion their evil pretence, with the spoil and loss of the city and all that dwelled therein: for their pretence was for to destroy and beat it down, as it might well appear by the commandment he gave unto his Captains.   

CHAP. V Limahon doth send 400. soldiers before for to burn the city of Manilla, and they were resisted by other men.  
FOr all the contradiction of the wind this same night the four hundred Chinos did put themselves within a league of ●he city, upon S. Andrew's day at eight of the clock in the morning, whereas they left their boats and went a land, and in great haste began to march forwards in battle a ray divided in two parts, with two hundred hargabuses afore and immediately after them other two hundred pickemen: and by reason that they were many and the Country very plain, they were straightways discovered by some of the City, who entered in with a great noise, crying, arm, arm, arm, the enemies come. The which advice did little profit, for that there was none that would believe them: but believed that it was some false alarm done by the people of the country for to mock them. But in conclusion the enemies were come unto the house of the General of the field, who was called Martin de Goyti, which was the first house in all the City that ways which the enemies came. And before that the Spaniards and soldiers that were within the Town could be fully persuaded the rumour to be true, the enemies had set fire upon his house, and slew him and all that were within, that none escaped but only the goodwife of the house, whom they left naked and very sore wounded, believing that she had been dead: but afterwards she recovered and was healed of her wounds. In the mean time that they were occupied in their first cruelty, they of the City were fully resolved of the truth, although all of them, with this success unlooked for, were as people amazed and from themselves: yet in the end they sounded to armour, and did provide to save their lives. Some soldiers went forth upon the sands, but in ill order as the time did permit, and slew all the Chinos that they did meet, and none escaped: which was the occasion that the rest did join themselves together, and put themselves in order to make some resistance against their enemies, who with great fury entered into the City, burning and destroying all before them, and crying victory.  
This is the proper resistance of the Spaniards when they do find themselves in such like perils: and this was done with such great courage, 
A good praise of others.  that it was sufficient to stay the fury of those which unto that time had the victory, and to make them to retire, although there was great difference in number, betwixt the one and the other.  
The Chinos in retiring lost some of their soldiers, but unto the Spaniards no great harm, and in this their defence, did notable a●tes. This being considered of the Chinos, and that their boats were far off, for that time would not give them place to bring them any nearer, they did resolve themselves to leave assault in the state that it was in, and put themselves in covert, and there to refresh themselves of the travail past, and afterward to return with their general Captain Lymahon, to prosecute their intent, which they thought to be comprehended with great ease. So when they came unto their boats to avoid any danger that might happen, they embarked themselves and returned unto their fleet whereas they left them. And not l●ng after they were departed, they might see them row with great fury towards their ships, and when they came unto their Captain Limahon, they did advertise him in particular of all that had happened, and how that by reason of the contrary wind, they could not come thither in time as he had commanded them, and according unto their desire, which was the occasion that they could not bring to pass their pretence, and that by reason of his absence they had referred it, till a better occasion did serve. Their Captain did comfort them, and gave them great thanks, for that which they had done, promising them in short time to bring to effect their evil intent: and strait way commanded to ●eigh anchor, and to enter into a port called Cabin, which is but two leagues from the City of Manilla Thither they of the city might plainly see them to enter.   

CHAP. VI The governor of Manilla purposeth himself to abide the assault of the Chinos, to whom they gave the repulse: then Limahon returned and planted himself upon the plain nigh the river Pagansinan.  
AT this time, by the order of his Ma●●●●ie was elected for Governor of these Islands Philippinas, Guido de Labaca●es, after the death of Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, who understanding the great fleet and power of Lymahon the Ro●er, and the small resistance and defence that was in the City of Manilla, with as much speed as was possible he did call together all their Captains and dwellers therein: and with a general consent they did determine to make some defence for to resist them as well as they could (for the time that the enemy did remain in the port aforesaid): for to the contrary the Spaniards should lose great credit, if that they should forsake and leave the town, so long as their lives did endure. For in no other place in all the Islands th●re about, they cou●d have any security. With this determination they put this work in execution, and spared no person of what quality and degree so ever he was, but that his hand was to help all that was possible, the which endured two days & two nights, for so long the Rover kept his ships and came not abroad: for these worthy soldiers understood, that remaining with their lives their labour and travail would soon be eased.  
In which time of their continual labour, they made a fort with pipes and boards filled with sand and other necessaries thereto belonging, such as the time would permit them: they put in carriages, four excellent pieces of artillery that were in the city. All the which being put in order, they gathered together all the people of the city into that little fort, which they made by the providence of God our Lord, as you may believe, for that it was not his pleasure that so many souls as were in those islands baptized and sealed with the light and knowledge of his holy faith, should return again to be overcome with the devil: out of whose power he brought them by his infinite goodness & mercy: neither would he that the friendship should be lost that these Islands had with the mighty kingdom of China. By which means we may conjecture that the divine power had ordained the remedy of salvation for all that country. The night before the enemy did give assault unto the City, came thither the Captain john de Salzedo lieutenant unto the Governor of the Towns of Fernandina, who as aforesaid, came with purpose to aid and help the Spaniards that were then in Manilla. Whose coming, without all doubt with his companions, was the principal remedy, as well unto the City, as unto all those that were within it: for considering that they were but few, and the great pains they took in making the last resistance, and the labour and travail they had in the ordaining of the fort for their defence with other necessaries against that which was to come, joining therewith the fear that was amongst them of the assault past: surely they had need of such a succour as this was: and surely by the opinion of all men, it was a miracle of God, done to bring them thither. So with the coming of this Captain with his people, they all recovered new courage, with great hope valiantly to resist their enemies: for the which incontinent they did put all things in good order, for that the Rover the morning following, before the break of the day▪ (which was the second day after he gave the first assault) was with all his fleet right against the port, and did put a land six hundredth soldiers, who at that instant did s●t upon the City, the which at their pleasure they did sack and burn (for that it was left alone without people, as aforesaid by the order and commandment of the governor, which for their more security were retired into the fort.)  
So having fired the City, they did assault the fort with great cruelty, as men fleshed with the last slaughter, thinking that their resistance was but small. But it fell not out as they did believe, for that all those that were within were of so valiant courage, that who so ever of their enemies that were so bold as to enter into their fort, did pay for their boldness with the loss of their lives. Which being seen by the Chinos they did retire, having continued in the fight almost all the day, with the loss of two hundredth men, that were slain in the assault, and many other hurt, and of the Spaniards were slain but only two, the one was the Ancient bearer, called Samho Hortiz, and the other was the Bailiff of the City called Francisco de Leon. All which being considered by Lymahon the Rover, who being politic and wise, and saw that it was loss of time and men, to go forwards with his pretence against the valiantness of the Spaniards, (which was clean contrary unto that which had proved unto that day) he thought it the best way to embark himself and to set sail, and go unto the port of Cabite from whence he came. But first he gathered together all his dead people, and after did bury them at the Island aforesaid, where as he stayed two days for the same purpose.  
That being done, he straightways departed from thence and returned the same way that he came, till they arrived in a mighty river, forty leagues from the City of Manilla, that is called Pangasinan, the which place or soil did like him very well, and where he thought he might be sure from them, who by the commandment of the king went for to seek him.  
There he determined to remain, and to make himself lord over all that country, the which he did with little travail, and built himself a fort one league within the river, where as he remained certain days, receiving tribute of the inhabitants there abouts, as though he were their true and natural lord: and at times went forth with his ships robbing and spoiling all that he met upon the coast. And spread abroad that he had taken to himself the Islands Philippinas, and how that all the Spaniards that were in them, were either slain or fled away: wherewith he put all the Cities and Towns bordering there abouts in great fear, and also how that he had settled himself upon this mighty river Pangasinan, whereas they did receive him for their lord, and so they did obey him, and paid him tribute.   

CHAP. VII. The General of the field called Salzedo, doth set upon Limahon, he doth burn his fleet, and besiege his fort three months, from whence this Rover doth escape with great industry.  
THe Governor understanding by the Islanders, and of those that dwelled in the City of Manilla, of the fame that the Rover Limahon did publish abroad in all places where as he went, how that he had overthrown and slain the Spaniards: and being of them well considered, that if in time they did not prevent the same, it might be the occasion of some great evil, that afterwards they should not so easily remedy as presently they might: and those which were their friends and subjects in all those Islands, giving credit unto that which the Rover declared, might be an occasion that they should rebel against them, by reason that the natural people were many and they but a few: for that unto that time they had sustained themselves only by the fame to be invincible. With this consideration they entered into counsel, and did determine to join together all the people they could, and being in good order, to follow and seek the Rover, for that they understood of necessity he must abide and repair himself in some place nigh there abouts, for that he durst not go unto China for fear that he had of the king's fleet, and fearing that they should use such policies as he hath used, they might come on him unwares, and destroy him as he had done others. And seeming unto them (that although they could not destroy him altogether) yet at the least theyshould be revenged of the harm that they had received, & thereby to give to understand that the fame that he hath given out of himself was a lie, and should be an occasion for to remain in their old security, & also had in better estimation and opinion of the dwellers there abouts, as also to cause great friendship with the king of China, for that it is against a traitor and one that hath offended him.  
This determination they put in ure and effect according as the time would permit: in which time they had certain news how that the Rover was in the river of Pagansinan, and there did pretend to remain. These news were very joyful unto the Spaniards. Then the Governors commanded to be called together all people bordering there abouts, and to come unto the City where as he was. Likewise at that time he did give advice unto such as were Lords and Governors of the Islands called Pintadoes, commanding them to come thither, with such ships and people as they could spare as well Spaniards as the natural people of the country. All this was accomplished and done with great speed, the people of the country came thither with great good will▪ but in especial those of the Islands of the Pintadoes. After the death of Martin de Goyti, who was slain in the first assault of the Chinos as aforesaid in the City of Manilla, the Governor did ordain in his room for general of the fiel●, in the name of his majesty, john de Salzedo, who with all this people, and with those that were in the city went forth (leaving the governor no more aid than that which was sufficient for the defence of the city & the fort that they had new made, which was very s●rong) and carried in his company two hundred & fifty spanish soldiers, & two thousand five hundred Indians their friends. All which went with great good will & courage, to be revenged on the injury received, or to die in the quarrel. All which people were embarked in small ships and two foygattes that came from the Islands there borderers, for that the shortness of time would not permit them to provide bigger shipping, neither should they have found them as they would, for that at such time as the inhabitants thereabouts did see the rover in assalt against the city, they did set fire on a small galley and other big ships that were in the same port, and did rise against the Spaniards, believing that it had not been possible for them to escape so great and mighty a power: although since the first entry of the Spaniards in those Islands they were very subject. The General of the field with the people aforesaid, did departed from Manilla the three & twentieth day of March Anno 1575., and arrived at the mouth of the river Pagansinan upon tenable wednesday in the morning next following without being discovered of any, for that it was done with great advice, as a thing that did import very much. Then straightways at that instant the general did put a land all his people and four pieces of artillery, leaving the mouth of the river shut up with his shipping in chaining the one to the other, in such sort that none could enter in neither yet go forth to give any advice unto the Rover of his arrival: he commanded some to go and discover the fleet of the enemy, and the place whereas he was fortified, and charged them very much to do it in such secret sort, that they were not espied: for therein consisted all their whole work. The Captains did as they were commanded, and found the Rover void of all care or suspicion to receive there any harm, as he found them in the City of Manilla when he did assault them.  
This security that he thought himself in did proceed from the news that he had from his friends at the China, that although they did provide to send against him, yet could they not so quickly have any knowledge where he was, neither find out the place of his abiding: and again he knew that the Spaniards of the Philippinas remained without ships, for that they had burnt them as you have heard, and that they had more need to repair themselves of their ill entreaty the year past, then to seek any revengement of their injuries received.  
The General of the field being fully satisfied of his negligence and void of care, and given to understand of the secretest way that was to go unto the fort whereas the Rover was: he commanded the Captain Gabriel de Ribera, that straightways he should departed by land, and that upon a sudden, he should strike alarm upon the enemy, with the greatest tumult that was possible. Likewise he commanded the Captains Pedro de Caves and Lorenzo Chacon, that either of them with forty soldiers should go up the river in small ships and light, and to measure the time in such sort, that as well those that went by land, as those that went by water, should at one instant come upon the fort, and to give alarm both together, the better to go thorough with their pretence: and he himself did remain with all the rest of the people, to watch occasion and time for to aid and secure them if need required. This their purpose came so well to pass, that both the one and the other came to good effect: for those that went by water, did set fire on all the fleet of the enemy: and those that went by land at that instant had taken and set si●s on a trench made of timber, that Lymahon had caused to be made for the defence of his people and the fort: and with that fury they slew more than one hundredth Chinos, and took prisoners seventy women which they found in the same trench, but when that Lymahon understood the rumour, he took himself straightways to his fort which he had made for to defend himself from the kings navy, if they should happen to find him out: and there to save his life upon that extremity, he commanded some of his soldiers to go forth and to skirmish with the Spaniards who were very weary with the travail of all that day, and with the anguish of the great heat, with the burning of the ships, and the trench which was intolerable, for that they all burned together.  
The Captains seeing this, and that their people were out of order, neither could they bring them into any, for that they were also weary (although the general of the field did secure them in time, the which did profit them much) yet did they sound a retreat & did withdraw themselves with the loss of five Spaniards and thirty of the Indians their friends, and never a one more hurt. Then the next day following the General of the field did bring his soldiers into a square battle, and began to march towards the fort, with courage to assault it if occasion did serve thereunto: he did pitch his camp within two hundredth paces of the fort, and found that the enemy did all that night fortify himself very well, and in such sort that it was perilous to assault him, for that he had placed upon his fort three pieces of artillery, and many bases, besides others engines of fire work. Seeing this, & that his pieces of artillery that he brought were very small for to batter, and little store of munition for that they had spent all at the assault which the rover did give them at Manilla, the General of the field, and the captains concluded amongst themselves, that seeing the enemy had no ships to escape by water, neither had he any great store of victuals for that all was burnt in the ships, it was the best and most surest way to besiege the fort, and to remain there in quiet until that hunger did constrain them either to yield or come to some conclusion▪ which rather they will then to perish with hunger.  
This determination was liked well of them all, although it fell out clean contrary unto their expectation, for that in the space of three months that siege endured, this Limahon did so much that within the fort he made certain small barks, and trimmed them in the best manner he could, wherewith in one night he and all his people escaped, as shall be told you: a thing that seemed impossible, and caused great admiration amongst the Spaniards, and more for that his departure was such that he was not discovered, neither by them on the water nor on the land. What happened in these three months, I do not here declare, although some attempts were notable, for that my intent is to declare what was the occasion that those religious men and their consorts did enter into the kingdom of China, and to declare of that which they said they had seen: for the which I have made relation of the coming of Limahon, and of all the rest which you have heard.   

CHAP. VIII. Omoncon captain of the king of China cometh to seek Limahon, and doth meet with Spaniards.  
IN the mean time that the siege endured at the fort, as you have understood, there went and came certain vessels which brought victuals and other necessaries from the city of Manilla, which was but forty leagues from the mouth of that river of Pagasinan, as hath been told you. It happened upon a day that a ship of Myguel de Loarcha, wherein was Friar Martin de Herrada Provincial of the Augustine Friars, who was come unto the river Pagansinan for to see the General of the field, and in the same ship returned unto Manilla to hold Capitulo, or court in the said Island and port of Buliano. Seven leagues after they were out of the mouth of Pagasinan, they met with a ship of Sangleyes, who made for the port, and thinking them to be enemies, they bore with them (having another ship that followed them for their defence) and had no more in them but the said provincial and five Spaniards besides the mariners. This ship of Sangley seeing that he did bear with them, would have fled, but the wind would not permit him, for that it was to him contrary, which was the occasion that the two ships wherein the Spaniards were, for that they did both sail and row, in a small time came within Cannon shot. In one of the ships there was a Chino called Sinsay, one that had been many times at Manilla with merchandise, and was a very friend and known of the Spaniards, and understood their language, who knowing that ship to be of China, and not to be a rover, did request our people not to shoot, neither to do them any harm until such time as they were informed what they were in that same ship.  
This Sinsay went strait ways into the fore ships, and demanded what they were, and from whence they came: and being well informed, he understood that he was one of the ships of war that was sent out by the king of China, to seek the rover Limahon, who leaving the rest of the fleet behind, came forth to seek in those islands to see if he could discover him to be any of them: and the better to be informed thereof, they were bound into the port of Buliano, from whence they came with their two ships: from whom they would have fled, thinking they had been some of the rovers ships. Being fully persuaded the one of the other, they joined together with great peace and friendship: the Spaniards straightways entered into their boat and went unto the ship of the Chinos, and carried with them the aforesaid Sinsay for to be their interpreter, and ●o speak unto the Chinos. In the said ship came a man of great authority who was called Omoncon, 
The captain general of the king of China.  who brought a commission from their king, and showed it unto the Spaniards and unto the father Provincial: in the which the king and his council did pardon all those soldiers that were with Limahon, if that forthwith they would leave him and return unto the king's part: and likewise did promise great gifts and favour unto him that did either take or kill the aforesaid rover. Then did Sinsay declare unto him of the coming of the rover unto the islands, and all that happened in the siege of the City, as aforesaid: and how they had him besieged in the river of Pagansinan, from whence it was not possible for him to escape.  
The captain Omoncon rejoiced very much of these news, and made many signs of great content, and did embrace the Spaniards many times, and gave other tokens whereby he di● manifest the great pleasure he received, and would therewith straightways depart unto the rest of the fleet. And for that they looked every day for the death or imprisonment of the rover, the better to inform himself: he determined (for that it was so nigh hand) to go and see the General of the field in Pagansinan, and carry with him Sinsay one that was known both of the one and the other: by whose means they might treat of such things that best accomplished the confirmation of the peace and friendship betwixt the Chinos & the Spaniards, as also of the death or imprisonment of Limahon. With this resolution▪ the one departed unto Pagansinan whereas they arrived the same day, and the others unto Manilla whether they went for victuals.   

CHAP. IX. Omoncon is well received of the General of the field, and lodged in Manilla with the governor, whereas they do conclude the going of the fathers of Saint Augustine to China.  
WHen that the General of the field understood wherefore the coming of Omoncon was, he did entertain him with great courtesy: and after that he had given him to understand in what extremity he had brought the rover (which was a thing impossible for him to escape, except it were with wings) he did counsel him, that for the time till he brought his purpose to effect (which could not be long) that he would go unto Manilla, which was not far from thence, and there to recreate and sport himself with the governor and other Spaniards that were there, for that he alone was sufficient to accomplish his pretence, without the coming thither of the kings fleet, neither for to remove out of the port whereas they were in security. And for his going thither he should have a ship of his the which did row, and was for to bring victuals and other provision, and he should go in the company of the Captain Pedro de Chaues that was bound unto Manilla, and promised him that within few days he would give him the Rover alive or dead, which unto the judgement of all men could not be long.  
Omoncon considering that this offer might come well to pass, did put it straightways in ure, & did embark himself in the company of the captain, & sent his ship wherein he came alone by sea, because it was big & drew much water: the which was constrained to turn back again into the part from whence he went, by reason of stormy winds and wether, and was no impediment in the other with Oars, for that he went alongst the shore and was shrouded with the land from the force of the wind, so that in few days they arrived in the port of the city of Manilla, whereas they were well received and feasted of the governor. Omoncon remained there certain days, after the which he seeing that the siege did long endure, and that his staying might cause suspicion of his death: and again, that the whole fleet did tarry his coming to his intelligence of the rover, being fully persuaded and certain that he could not escape the Spaniards hand: they had him in such a strait, & that they would without all doubt send him unto the king alive or dead (as they promised him) he was determined to return unto China with the good news that he had understood, with a determinate intent, to return again and carry the rover after that they had him prisoner. With this resolution in the end of certain days he went unto the governor▪ certifying him of his pretence, whereby he might give him licence to put it in execution. The governor did like well of his pretence, and did promise him the same the which the general of the field did offer unto him: and which was, so soon as the rover should be taken prisoner or slain, to send him unto the king without any delay, or else to put him whereas he should be forth coming, and to give them advertisement to send for him, or come himself: and did offer him more, that for his voyage he should be provided forthwith of all things necessary, without lacking of any thing. Omoncon did give him great thanks for the same, and in recompense thereof did promise unto the governor, for that he understood and had intelligence of the fathers of S. Augustine, that his honour, and his antecessor, and the Adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, had desired many times to s●●d unto the kingdom of China some relig●ous men, to entreat of the preaching of the Gospel, and to see the wonders of that kingdom, and how that they never could put this their desire in execution, for that those Chinos which came thither although they did offer them whatsoever they would demand, fearing the punishment that should be executed on them according unto the laws of the kingdom: 
Omoncon promiseth to carry the friars unto China.  he did promise him that he would carry them with him unto China, such religious men as his honour would command, and some soldiers such as would go with them: hoping with the good news that he carried, to run in no danger of the Law, neither the viceroy of Aucheo to think evil thereof, and for a more security that they should not be evil entreated, he would leave with him pledges to their content.  
The governor rejoiced very much at this his offer, for that it was the thing that he and all those of the islands most desired of long time since, and did straightways accept his offer: saying that he did clearly discharge him of his pledges, for that he was fully satisfied of his valour and worthiness, and that he would not do the thing that should not be decent unto his person and office. The governor being very joyful of these news, did therewith send for the provincial of the Augustine friars, who was elected but few days past: his name was Friar Alonso de Aluarado, a man of a sincere life, and one of them that was sent by the Emperor in the discovery of the new Guinea, unto whom he declared the offer that the Captain Omoncon had made unto him: whereat he rejoiced so much that being an old man, he would himself have gone thither: to which the governor would not consent in respect of his age, and other particularities: but entered in counsel who were best to go, and to find one that were fit to execute that which they had pretended (which was as we have said, 
A good pretence.  to bring in and plant in that kingdom the holy Catholic faith:) they determined that there should go but two religious men, by reason that at that time there was but a ●ewe of them, and two soldiers in their company. 
The friars names that went to China.  The religious men should be Friar Martin de Herrada of Pamplona, who left off the dignity of Provincial, and was a man of great learning and of a holy life: and for the same effect had learned the China tongue, and many times for to put his desire in execution did offer himself to be slave unto the merchants of China, only for to carry him thither: and in company with him should go Friar Hieronimo Martin, who also was very well learned, and of the City of Mexico: the soldiers that were appointed to bear them company, were called Pedro Sarmiento chief sergeant of the City of Manilla of Vilorado, and Miguel de Loarcha, both principal men, and good Christians, as was convenient for that which they took in hand. These fathers did carry them for this purpose, that if they did remain there with the king preaching of the Gospel, than they should return with the news thereof to give the Governor to understand of all that they had seen, and happened unto them: and likewise unto the king of Spain, if need did so require.  
This offer of the captain Omoncon, and the appointment which was made by the governor and the provincial, was known throughout all the City, and after that they had made great rejoicings and feasts for the same, it was approved of all men, that those that were named, were principal persons, as aforesaid, and were fully certified, that there should nothing be neglected of that they did command them: neither let pass any occasion, for that it was that which they did all desire, but in particular, for the service and honour of God, and for the benefit and profit that should redound unto them all by the mutual contractation betwixt the one nation & the other: and also give the king to understand of so good news as this is. The Gouern●● did straightways call those persons that were named and appointed to come before the captain Omoncon, and told them what was determined: the which they did accept with great joy, and gave great thanks, and the governor in token of gratitude, did give unto the Captain Omoncon in the presence of them all, a gallant chain of gold, 
A token that fine cloth is esteemed.  and a rich rob of crimson in grain: a thing that he esteemed very much, and much more esteemed in China, for that it is a thing that they have not there. Besides this, they did ordain a reasonable present for to send unto the governor of Chincheo, he that dispatched Omoncon by the commandment of the king to go and seek the rover: also another present for the viceroy of the province of Ochian, who was at that present in the city of Aucheo.  
And for that Sinsay should not find himself aggrieved (who was a merchant well known amongst them, and perhaps might be the occasion of some ●uill and disturbance of their pretence) they gave unto him also another chain of gold, as well for this, as also for that he was ever a sure and perfit friend unto the Spaniards. Then straightways by the commandment of the Governor there were brought together all such Chinos as were captive and taken from Limahon out of the fort aforesaid, at Pagansinan, and gave them unto Omoncon to carry them free with him: and gave likewise commandment that the General of the field, and all such Captains and soldiers that were at the siege of the fort, should give unto him all such as did there r●maine: binding himself to pay unto the soldiers, to whom they did appertain, all whatsoever they should be valued to be worth: all the which being done, he commanded to be put in a readiness all that was necessary for the voyage and that in ample manner, the which was done in a short time.   

CHAP. X. Omoncon departeth with certificate, in what perplexity he left Limahon the rover, and doth carry with him the Fathers of S. Augustine.  
THe twelfth day of june, in the year of our Lord, 1575. being sunday in the morning: the aforesaid Governor and all that were in the city did join and go together unto the monastery of saint Augustine, where was devout prayers made unto the holy ghost, and after they had all of them requested of God so to direct the voyage, that it might be to the honour and glory of his divine majesty, and to the salvation of the souls of that kingdom, whom lucifer hath so long possessed, Omoncon and Synsay did take their leave of the Governor, and of the rest, giving them thanks for their good entertainment that they made them, and did promise them in recompense thereof to be always their assured friends, as shall appear by his works: and to carry them, whom he did request of his own good will, with security as unto himself, & that he would first suffer wrong himself, before any should be done unto those whom he had on his charge. The Governor and all the rest did thankfully accept his new offer, giving him to understand that they were fully persuaded that his word & deed should be all one, and therewith they took their leave of them and of the religious men with the two soldiers their companions, not lacking tears to be shed on both parts.  
Then did they all embark themselves in a ship of the islands which was made ready for the same effect, and went out of the port in the company of another ship with merchants of China that were at Manilla, into the which Sinsay put himself with all their victuals, for to carry it until they came unto the port of Buliano, whereas was the great ship of Omoncon, wherein they should make their voyage: which was that which was forced to return back again by reason of foul wether: they arrived at the same port the sunday following, for that the wind was somewhat contrary, and had lost the ship that carried their victuals: but after found her at an anchor in the port, for that she was the bigger ship and sailed better: they found also in her, two Spanish soldiers, whom the general of the field had sent from Pagansinan, for that from the place whereas he was, he did see the said ship to enter into the port, with commandment for to carry them unto him. This did cause unto the religious men and soldiers a suspicion that the general of the field would procure to stay them until such time as he did see the end of the siege of the fort, which every day was looked when they would yield: for that they should carry with them Limahon the rover alive or dead. Upon the which almost every one gave his judgement, that it were better to departed without obeying his commandment, neither to take their leave of him, but to prosecute their voyage so much desired, for they thought every hour of their staying to be a whole year: fearing that every thing would be an impediment to disturb their intent and purpose: but better persuading themselves, knowing the good condition and great Christianity of the general of the field, whom Friar Martin had always in place of his son, for that he was nephew unto the Adelantado Legaspi, the first governor and discoverer of the said Philippinas whom he brought with him from Mexico being but a child: they were agreed to go unto him, and show their obedience, and to take their leave of him and of all the rest of their friends that were in the camp. So with this determination they put their ship into the river Pagansinan which was but seven leagues from the said port. They had not sailed three leagues but a contrary wind so charged them, that they were constrained to return into the port from whence they came, and there concluded amongst themselves to send Pedro Sarmiento in the bark, wherein came the two soldiers aforesaid, for that it was little & went with Oars, they might with less danger enter into the river of Pagansinan, rowing under the sho●re: and that he in the name of them all should confer with the general of the field, and so take his leave of him and of all the rest of their friends, whom they did request that they would not forget them in their prayers, to commend them unto God to be their aider and helper in this their pretence, so much desired of them all: and gave him great charge to bring with him the interpreter that they should carry with them, which was a boy of China that was baptized in Manilla, and could speak Spanish very well: he was named Gernando. This Pedro Sarmiento came thither, and did accomplish all that was commended unto him very faithfully: but the General of the field was not therewith satisfied, neither the Captains and soldiers that were with him, for that the father friars were very well beloved of them, for they deserved it: so they determined to send for them, and to request them to come thither and see them being so nigh as they we●e. They being understood by the Friars (not without the suspicion aforesaid) and seeing that they could not excuse to go unto them to accomplish their commandment and gentle request: they departed out of Buliano with a fair wind, for that the storm was done, although the sea was a little troubled: and therewith they arrived at Pagansinan whereas they were well received of the general of the field, and of all the rest with great joy and pleasure. Their suspicion fell out clean contrary as they thought, for that the General of the field would not stay them, but did dispatch them with all speed possible, and did deliver unto them at the instant all such captives as the governor had commanded, and the soldiers that had them did with a very good will deliver them, seeing to what intent it did extend, and also the interpreter with all other things that was necessary and requisite for the voyage: and writ a letter unto Omoncon who remained in Buliano, that he would favour and cherish them as he did not think to the contrary: and did ratify that which the governor had promised him, for to send the rover alive or dead, after they had ended their siege by one means or other. He also requested of friar Martin de Herrada that he would carry with him one Nicholas de Cuenca a soldier of his company for to buy for him certain things in China, who did accept the same with a very good will, and promised to entreat him as one of his own, and have him in as great regard: and therewith they departed and w●nt unto the port of Buliano from whence they came, taking their leave of the general of the field, and of all the rest of the camp, with no less ●●ares than when they departed from Manilla. He sent to bear them company till they came unto the port, the sergeant mayor, who carried with him a letter unto the captain Omoncon, and a present of victuals and other things: and other two letters, the one for the governor of Chincheo and the other for the viceroy of the province of Ochian, wherein he doth give them to understand how that he hath burnt all the fleet of Limahon, and slain many of his companions, and how that he hath besieged him so straightly that it is not possible for him to escape, neither endure long without yielding of himself: and then either alive or dead he would send him, as the governor of Manilla had writ & promised. These two letters were accompanied with two presents wherein was a basin and an ewer of silver, and certain robes of spanish cloth, the which the Chinos do esteem very much, as also other things of great value that they have not in their country: & craving pardon because he did not send more. The occasion was for that he was in that place, and all his goods in the city of Manilla. The same day with a fair wind they came unto the port Buliano, whereas they found Omoncon abiding their coming, and received all such things as the sergeant mayor did carry him in the name of the general of the field, and rendered unto him great thanks, and made a new promise to accomplish that offer made unto the governor.   

CHAP. XI. The Spaniards do departed with the captain Omoncon from the port of Buliano, and arrive at the firm land of China.  
THe desire was so much of this father friar Martin de Herrada to be in China, as well for to preach in it the holy gospel, as also for to see the wonders that have been reported to be in that country: that although he was dispatched by the governor and general of the field, yet he thought that their voyage would be interrupted: and therefore to see himself free from this fear and suspicion, so soon as he came unto the port of Buliano to the captain Omoncon, he requested him with great vehemency, that he would straightways set sail, for that the wind served well for their purpose. Then Omoncon, who desired no other thing, but thought every hour that he tarried to be a whole year, commanded forthwith the mariners to make all things in a readiness to set sail, and to bring home all their anchors, and ride apicke, r●die to departed after midnight: the which was done as he had commanded. So upon a sunday at the break of day, being 25. of june, they took a Spaniard soldier into their company, who was called john de Triana, and used him in their service, for that he was a mariner. So at the same time after they had prayed unto God to direct their voyage, 
They departed towards China.  they set sail with a prosperous wind: there was with the Friars, soldiers and men of service, twenty persons besides the Chinos that were captives, and the people of the Captain Omoncon. They were not so soon off from the cost, but the wind abated and they remained becalmed certain days: but afterwards they had a lusty gale, that carried them forwards. The Chino● do govern their ships by a compass divided into twelve parts, 
Their compasses divided into 12. parts.  and do use no sea cards, but a brief description or Ruter wherewith they do navigate or sail: and commonly for the most part they never go out of the sight of land. They marveled very much when that it was told them, that coming from Mexico unto Philippinas, they were three months at the sea and never saw land. So it pleased God, that although it was very calm and little wind stirring, that we made but little way, yet upon the sunday following, which was the third of july, we had sight of the land of China: so that we found all our voyage from the port of Buliano, from whence we departed, unto the firm land to be one hundred and forty leagues, & twenty leagues before they came in the sight thereof, they had sounding at three score and ten, and fourscore fathom, and so waxed less and less until they came to the land: which is the best and surest token they have to be nigh the land. In all the time of their voyage the Captain Omoncon with his company showed such great courtesy and friendship to our men, as though they had been the owners of the said ship: and at such time as they did embark themselves he gave his own cabin that was in the stern to the friars, and unto Pedro Sarmiento and to Miguel de Loarcha, he gave another cabin that was very good, & commanded his company in the ship that they should respect them more than himself: the which was in such sort, that on a day at the beginning of their voyage, the fathers found them making of sacrifice unto their Idols, and told them that all which they did was a kind of mockage, and that they should worship but only one God: and willed them to do so no more. Who only in respect of them did leave it off, and not use it after in all the voyage: whereas before they did use it every day many times. 
They leave the worshipping of one Idol to worship another.  Besides this, they would worship the images that the Friars did carry with them, and kneel upon their knees with great show of devotion: who now having sight of the firm land, in so short time, and passed that small gulf so quietly, which was wont to be very perilous and full of storms: they did attribute it unto the orations of the Friars, their companions and soldiers. The like courtesy was showed unto them by Sinsay, who was the second person in the ship, and he that did best understand that Navigation and voyage. So as they drew nearer the land, they might discover from the sea a very gallant and well towered City, that was called Tituhul, whereas the king hath continually in garrison ten thousand soldiers, and is under the government of the province of Chincheo. So the next day following, we came unto a watch tower, which was situated upon a rock at the entry into a bay, who had discovered our ship, and knew the standard or flag to be the kings: and made a sign unto seven ships which were on the other side of the point, which was part of a company ordained for to keep and defend the cost, which were more than four hundred. Straightways the Captain of the seven ships came forth to know what we were: and what chanced shallbe told you in this chapter following.   

CHAP. XII. The Captain Omoncon is come to the province of Chincheo, but before he doth come unto an anchor, he doth pass some trouble with another Captain of the sea.  
THis Captain Omoncon, when he saw that the ships did make towards him, he cast about his ship and passed alongst by the watch tower, making his way towards the town, where he was a natural subject and nigh at hand, being but two leagues from the point: which being perceived bythe general of that bay which was in a readiness, who imagined by his working that it should be some ship of evil demeanour and their enemies, without any delation he issued forth from behind the point, with three ships that did row with Oars very swift: and gave them chase, cutting them off from their pretence: and when he came nigh unto them, he shot at them to make them to amain: the which Omoncon would not do, for that he supposed (as afterwards he did confess) that he should be some man of little estimation, and not the general of the cost. But as he drew nigher unto him, he did know him by the flag he bore on the stern, in the foist wherein he was himself with his soldiers, & straightways caused to amain his sails, and tarried for him. The general did the like, and stayed behind, sending a boat for to bring the captain unto him and to declare what he was, and from whence he came. Omoncon did forthwith embark himself into his boat without any resistance, but rather with fear that he should be punished for that he did fly from him. The general when he saw him, did straightways know him, (and in that the fathers did understand by signs) he was very glad of his coming, and gave him good entertainment.  
This general was a goodly man of person, and was very well appareled, and did sit in a chair in the stern of his ship, the which was all covered to keep away the sun: he commanded the captain Omoncon to sit down by him upon the hatches, without chair or any other thing, who did obey him, although first he did refuse it with great modesty, as not worthy to have that honour, which was not esteemed a little. After that he was set, he gave him to understand in effect of all his voyage and success, and in what extremity he left Limahon, and also how that he carried with him the Friars and other Spaniards, which went to carry the news, and to entreat of peace with the viceroy of Aucheo: unto whom, and unto the governor of Chincheo he carried presents, sent from the governor and general of the field of the islands Philippinas. When the general had heard this relation, he commanded the ●oate to return and to bring them before him, that he might see what manner of men they were of person and the use of the apparel: and likewise to satisfy himself of other desires that came into his mind by that which Omoncon had said of them. The fathers and their companions did obey the commandment, and did embark themselves in the boat● (although it were with some fear) and came unto the ship whereas the general received them with great courtesy after his fashion, and showed them a good countenance, and tokens that he very much rejoiced to see them and the use of their apparel they ware. But after a while he commanded that they should be put under hatches, which was the occasion to augment the fear they conceived when they were sent for: and the more when they saw that they were commanded to be shut up in a cabin, with the interpreter that they brought with them.  
This being done, they were in great care how they might understand the General's pretence: and at a close door that was before the cabin whereas they were, upon a sudden they might see that all those that were in the ship did arm themselves in great haste, and the captain Omoncon amongst them: then they heard bases and hargubus shot, with a great noise of people, which did very much alter them: in such sort that they looked every moment when they should come and cut of their heads. Whilst that our people were in this agony and great fear, Omoncon considered of them and of the charge that he had to bring them thither: therewith he sent one of his servants to give them to understand of all that they had heard and seen, wherewith they did quiet themselves, and put away all the fear that they had conceived with their sudden putting down in the cabin, and the shooting off of those pieces. The which the better to give you to understand, I will first declare unto you the occasion (and then after the rest.) Limahon had not so soon taken his course towards the islands, but straightways it was known in the kingdom of China: And the viceroy of Ochian by the order that he had from the royal counsel, did command all governors of such cities that were nigh unto the coast, to dispatch away shipping for to go follow and seek him, with advertisement that he who did accomplish this diligence with the first, should be very well rewarded and esteemed, for that they feared that if the rover should join with the Castillas (for so they do call the Spaniards in that country, 
They call the Spaniards Castilians.  of whom they have had great notice) might thereby grow some great harm and inconvenience, which afterwards could not be well remedied: which was the occasion that they made the more haste, for that if it were possible to take him, or else to spoil his shipping before that he should come unto the said islands. In accomplishing of this commandment the governor of Chincheo did provide shipping and did send the Captain Omoncon with them: but yet he could not provide them of soldiers and other necessaries till certain days after that he was gone forth: so he went till he came and met with the Spaniards, nigh unto Buliano (as aforesaid). About the same time the general of the bay that was there to defend the cost, did dispatch another ship for to inquire and know where the rover was, and to bring relation thereof, that straightways they might go and assault him with all the whole army. This ship was the fathers of Sinsay, he that was friend unto the Castillas, who came in company with the Friars from the islands (as it is said,) and he went in the said ship for Pilot: who although he went out of the port with great speed, yet with greater haste he returned again without masts or yards, for that they lost them in a great storm and torment that took them in the gulf, whereas they thought to have been lost. At the same time that the Friars departed from Buliano to Pagansinan, being requested to come thither by the master of the field (as aforesaid) there was in the same port a ship of China that came unto the islands to traffic and being well informed of all things, as well in what extremity the Spaniards had the rover, as also of the going of Omoncon, and how that he carried unto the firm land the foresaid Friars and their companions. The said ship departed in a morning very secretly, ten days before that Omoncon did make sail, & came to the firm land the said ten days before, & gave notice thereof unto the governor of all that they had understood, as well by relation as by sight: and how that there came with Omoncon & the Spaniards, Sinsay, who was he that in all things touching Limahon was the doer, & that whatsoever shall happen good in this relation, they ought to give the praise and thanks unto him, and not unto Omoncon. This he spoke for the good affection he had unto Sinsay by way of friendship, for that he was of the same profession, a merchant.  
The Governor of the bay being very desirous to have the reward and thanks of the king, with occasion to say that the son of him whom he sent to follow and seek Limahon was the chief and principal means of that good success. Strait ways so soon as he heard the news of the ship that arrived there ten days before (as aforesaid) he commanded six ships to go forth of the bay to the sea, with order and commission to bring the ship to an anchor in the said bay, and not to suffer him to go into any other place: and otherwise they could not, at least ways they would bring with them Sinsay, for that they would send him post unto the viceroy, for to declare unto him all that had passed particularly. These six ships came very nigh unto that wherein was the General aforesaid, at such time as our Spaniards were with the General, and they never could perceive it, for that there were many in the bay, some going and some coming: but when that he had discovered them, than he caused our people to be put under hatches because they should not be seen, & commanded those that were in the ship to arm themselves for their defence if need required. In the mean time that they made resistance with this ship, one of the six ships did board that ship wherein came Omoncon, pretending to take her, and believed to do it with great ●ase. But it happened unto them clean contrary, for that the soldiers that were within did defend their ship valiantly. Sinsay with a very good will would have suffered the ship wherein his father came to have carried away the other, if the soldiers of Omoncon would have consented thereunto. They did not only miss of their purpose, but also many of them were hurt in the attempting to enter the ship: the said ship did fall aboard there whereas was their captain Omoncon, who at that instant did call our Spaniards in his ship, out of the generals ship whereas they were: which was dooone with such speed, that it was accomplished before any of the other ships could come unto them, although they did procure it. Then did Omoncon arm himself to the war, for to defend himself, his ship, and all that were therein, or to die there. The Friars and their companions when they understood the cause of their strife and fight, partly by suspicion in that they had seen, as by that which Omoncon did send them word, did offer themselves unto him, promising him to die with him i● need did so require, and requested him to appoint them what they should do, and they would accomplish it with a very good will. At this time all the ships were about that of Omoncon, who was not idle, but put forth his artillery for their defence, ask powder of the Spaniards, for that they had little left: the General did not departed from the ship from the time that the Spaniards went unto him, neither did he remove out of his chair, although all the rest that were in the ship were armed.  
At this time the Captain of the six ships of Chincheo did put himself in a boat and came towards the ship of Omoncon for to have commoned with him, but he would not suffer them to come nigh, but shot at them, and caused them to departed against their wills, and called them all to nought from the poop of his ship, with many reproachful words, saying that they came to steal the honour that he with so great travail and peril had gotten. Then the general seeing that he could not go thorough with his purpose he determined to leave him, and therewith to cast about with his ships, and returned into the port of the bay from whence they came. This brought in his ship a son of Sinsay, to give occasion unto his father for to come unto him, and likewise his own father, whom they did straightways put in prison and his wife and mother: which is a thing commonly used in that country, the children to pay for their parents▪ and to the contrary the parents for the children.  
Sinsay who feared the same, would not go unto his own house till such time as he did carry commandment from the viceroy, for to deliver out of prison those that were put there without desert: the which was granted by the viceroy, with other favours, and great honour as shall be declared unto you.   

CHAP. XIII. Omoncon doth disembarke himself with our Spaniards in the port of Tanfuso, and are very well received by the justice, and made very much of by the order of the Insuanto of that province.  
WIthin a little while after that the Captain of the six ships departed for Chincheo, Omoncon and his company arrived at the port of Tanfuso hard by, upon wednesday in the evening, being the fift day of july. This Tanfuso is a gallant and fresh town of four thousand householders, and hath continually a thousand soldiers in garrison, and compassed about with a great and strong wall, and the gates fortified with plates of iron, the foundations of all the houses are of lime & stone, and the walls of lime and earth, and some of brick: their houses within very fairly wrought with great courts, their streets fair and broad all paved. Before that Omoncon did come unto an anchor, they saw all the soldiers and the people of the town were gathered together upon the rocks that were joining unto the port, all armed ready unto the battle, amongst whom there was a principal captain, & three more of his companions, that were sent him by the Governor of Chincheo, whom they do call in their language Insuanto, who had understanding of the coming of Omoncon & his company by the ship (aforesaid) he sent them thither before, that in his name should entertain them & cherish them all that was possible. When the ship entered into the port Omoncon did salute the town with certain pieces of artillery & discharged all his hargubushes six times about, & therewithal took in their sail, and let anchor fall. Then straightways the captain whom the Insuanto had sent, came aboard the ship, who had express commission, not to leave the company of our people after that they were disembarked till such time as they came whereas he was, but to bear them company, and to provide them of all things necessary: the which he did accomplish.  
All these captains and ministers of the king do wear certain ensigns for to be known from the common people, who are not permitted to wear any such, and they can not go abroad in public without the same, neither will they if they might, for that by them they are obeyed and reverenced, as well in the streets as in any other place where they come: all such generally be called Loytias, which is as much to say in our language (Gentlemen): 
Ensigns to know the justices.  the particular ensigns which they do use, be broad wastes or girdles embossed after diverse manners: some of gold and silver, some of the shell of a Turtuga or Turtell, and of a sweet wood, and other some of ivory, the higher estates hath them embroidered with pearls and precious stones, and their bunnets with two long ears, and their buskins made of satin and unshorn velvet, as we have declared more at large in the first three books.  
Then after, so soon as they were come to an anchor in the port, the justice did send them a licence in writing for to come forth of the ship, as a thing necessary, for that without it the waiters or guards of the water side, will not suffer them to put foot a land. This licence was written upon a board whited, and firmed by the justice, whose charge it is to give the licence. Then when they came a shore, there were the soldiers that were appointed by the Insuanto in a readiness to bear them company, 
●e first lan●ing of the Friars.  and did direct and lead them unto the kings houses of the said City: the like hath every City almost throughout all the kingdom, & there they did lodge them. These houses are very great and very well wrought and gallant, with fair courts below, and galleries above: they had in them stanges or ponds of water full of fish of sundry sorts.  
The Insuanto had given order unto the justice of Tansuso, wherein he had ordained what he should give them to eat▪ and all other things that should be done particularly by itself without lacking ofany thing, and appointed the Captain that he with his soldiers should not departed from them not a jot, but always to bear them company whethersoever they went, and not to departed till he had farther order from him: in accomplishing whereof they remained with them that night in the king's house. The justice of the city when that he had lodged them, went himself in person to the waters side, and caused all their stuff to be unladen out of the ship, and caused it to be carried with great care and diligence unto the Friars, whereas they were.  
The people of the city did press very much to see these strangers, so that with the press as also with the great heat they were marvelously afflicted: which being perceived by the justice, he gave order that they might be eased of that trouble, & caused sergeants to keep the door, and their yeomen to make resistance against the people. Yet notwithstanding, though they did not trouble them so much they ranged round about the house, and climbed upon the walls to procure to see them, as a rare thing, for that they came from countries so far off, and appareled very different from that they do use, or otherwise have seen. So when that the night was come, the justice of the city did make them a banquet according unto the fashion of the country: and it was in this manner following.  
They were carried into a hall that was very curiously wrought, wherein were many torches and wax candles light, and in the midst thereof was set for every one of the guests a table by himself, as is the use & fashion of that country, 
The use of their banquets  (which more at large shallbe declared) every table had his covering of damask or satin very well made, the tables were gallantly painted, without any table clothes, neither do they use any, for they have no need of them, for that they do eat all their victuals with two little sticks made of gold and silver, and of a marvelous odiferous wood, and of the length of little forks as they do use in Italy, with the which they do feed themselves so cleanly, that although their victuals be never so small, yet do they let nothing fall, neither foul their hands nor faces: they were set down at these tables in very good order, and in gallant chairs, in such sort that although they were every one at his table by himself, yet they might see and talk one with an other, they were served with diverse sorts of cates, and very well dressed both of flesh and fish, as gamons of bacon, capons, geese, whole hens, and pieces of beef, and at the last many little baskets full of sweet meats made of sugar, and marchpanes all wrought very curiously. They gave them wine of an indifferent colour and taste, made of the palm tree, 
Wine of a palm tree.  (whereof there is no other used in all that country) our Spaniards did use it, as that which was made of grapes. All the time that the supper endured, there was in the hall great store of music of divers instruments, whereon they played with great consort, some one time and some an other. The instruments which they commonly do use are hoybuckes, cornets, trumpets, lutes, such as be used in Spain, although in the fashion there is some difference. There was at this banquet (which endured a great while) the captain that was ordained for their guard, and the captain Omoncon and Sinsay. When supper was done, they were carried into very fair chambers, whereas were fair beds, where they slept and eased themselves.  
The next day following in the morning, was brought unto them their ordinary victuals, and that in abundance, as we●l of flesh as of fish, fruits and wine, to be dressed unto their own content, and according unto their manner: they would take nothing for the same, for so they were commanded by the Insuantes. This was brought unto them every day so long as they were there, and in the way when as they went unto Chincheo. The same day arrived a Captain of forty ships in the same port, and so soon as he was a shore, he went straightways unto the palace for to see the strangers: who being advertised of his coming, came forth and received him at the palace gate, where as was used betwixt them great courtesy. The Captain came with great majesty, with his guard of Soldiers and mase bearers before him, with great music of hoybuckes, trumpets and drums, and two whifflers, or typp staves, that made room putting the people aside: also there came with him two executors of justice or hangmen, having each of them in their hands a set made of canes, which is an instrument wherewith they do whip and punish offenders, and is so cruel that who soever doth receive sixty strokes with the same, although he be a very stout man and strong hearted yet it will kill him, for that he is not able to abide it. They do beat them upon the thighs and calves of the legs, causing the offender or patiented to lie down upon his breast or stomach and command their heads and legs to be holden. The judges, Captains, and Loytias have ordinarily these officers before them, for to beat such as will not go out of the way when as they do pass the streets, and such as will not alight from their horse, or come out of their close chairs when they do meet with them. When this Captain came unto the Palace gate, whereas the father Friars and their companions did receive him, he was brought on the shoulders of eight men very richly appareled, and he in a chair wrought of ivory and gold, who stayed not till they came into the inner chamber, whereas he did a light from the chair, and went strait under a cloth of estate, that was there ordinarily for the same purpose, and a table before him: there he sat down, and straightways arose up, and standing he did receive the strange guests, who did courtesy unto him according unto their fashion, which is to join their hands together, and to stoop with them and their heads down to the ground: he gratified them again, with bowing his head a little, and that with great gravity. Within a little while after he spoke unto them with great majesty, bidding them welcome into his kingdom, being glad of their coming, saying that himself was come to see & cherish them for that they should receive no discontent, as the proof shall show. These speeches being finished, there was brought forth certain pieces of black silk of twelve vares long a piece. And his officers did put on the friars shoulders each of them two, which was for either shoulder one, and was brought about their bodies & girt therewith: the like was done in order unto the spanish soldiers and unto Omoncon and Sinsay and to their interpreter. But unto Omoncon and Sinsay was given unto either of them a branch or nosegay made of silver which was set upon their heads, which is accustomable honour that is done unto such as have done some great enterprise, or such like.  
After that this ceremony was done, they played upon the instruments afore said which came with the Captain. In the mean time of their music, there was brought forth great store of conserves, marchpanes and things made of sugar, and excellent good wine: and so being on foot standing, he caused them to eat, and he himself from the chair whereas he sat did give them to drink every one in order, without rising up, which is a ceremony and token of great favour, and of love.  
This being done, he arose from the chair under the cloth of state, and went and sat down in that which was brought on men's backs, and with declining of his head a little he departed out of the hall and out of the house, and went unto his own house, whereas by the counsel of Omoncon and Sinsay within an hour after they should go and visit him, the which they did: he received them marvelously well and with great courtesy: who marveled at his great majesty and authority, for that Omoncon and Sinsay when they did talk with him were upon their knees, and so did all the rest: yet that which they did see afterwards done unto the Insuanto and viceroy, was much more.  
He gave them again in his own house a gallant banquet, of diverse sorts of conserves and fruits, and excellent wine of the palm tree, and did talk and reason with them in good sort, and was more familiar than at his first visitation, demanding of them many things in particular, and beholding their apparel and garments, with show of great content and rejoicing.   

CHAP. XIIII. The Spaniards depart from Tansuso to visit the Governor of Chincheo, who awaited their coming: where they saw notable things by the way.  
AFter that the fathers with their companions had remained two days in the port of Tansuso, whereas they were marvelously well entertained and feasted at the commandment given by the Insuanto, as you have heard, the third day they departed in the morning towards Chincheo, whether they were commanded to be carried with great speed and good entertainment.  
At their going forth of the town they were accompanied with a great number of soldiers, both hargubushes and pikes, and before them a great noise of trumpets, drums, and hoybuckes, till such time as they came unto the rivers side, whereas was a brigandine provided and made ready in all points to carry them up the river: all the streets alongst whereas they went, there followed them so much people that it was innumerable, and all to see them. So when they were embarked, the which was done with great speed to avoid the press of the people, there came unto them the Captain of the ●ortie ships, of whom we made mention in the Chapter past, with three byrgandines, one wherein he was himself, and was marvelously well trimmed: and in the other two were soldiers that did bear him company. As soon as he came unto them, he strait ways entered into the brigandine whereas the religious men were with three Spaniards, and brought with him great store of conserves, and made them a gallant banquet, the which did endure so long as he was with them, which was the space of rowing of two long leagues, in which time their pleasure was such that they thought it but a quarter of a league. From thence he departed from them and returned, but left many things behind him for their comfort in their journey, and made great offers, with an outward show, that it was a grief unto him to departed from out of their company.  
All alongst the rivers whereas they went, was seated with villages very gallant and fresh, both on the one side and on the other. Some of them did content our people very much, who asked the names how they were called, and the captains answered them and said, that those were villages that did not deserve the honour of a name, but when you do come there whereas the king is, you shall see Cities, that it shall be a worthy thing to know their names, the which towns have three and four thousand soldiers, such as in Europe are esteemed for reasonable Cities.  
At the end of the two leagues, there whereas the Captain did leave the company of our Spaniards in the river, they came unto a great bay, whereas was at an anchor a fleet of more than a hundredth and fifty ships men of war, whose General was this Captain, whom we have spoken of, that did bear the Friars and the rest company. At such time as the fleet did discover them, they began to salute them, as well with great pieces of artillery, as with hargubushes, and other kind of pastimes, which commonly they do use at such times: and that is done by the commandment of their General.  
At such time as they had made an end of shooting and other pastimes, than did he take his leave of them with the ceremony aforesaid, and went out of the brigandine whereas the Friars were and went into his own, which carried him unto the Admiral wherein he embarked himself. Our Spaniards after his departure did travail up the river more than three leagues, having continually both on the one side and on the other very many and fair towns, and full of people. In the end of the three leagues they went a land half a league from the Town of Tangoa, whereas straightways all such things as they carried with them were taken upon men's backs, and carried it unto the town before them, whereas they were tarrying their coming, for to give them great entertainment. At their going a shore, they found prepared for the two religious men little chairs to carry them upon men's backs, and for the soldiers and the rest of their companions, was ordained horse. The fathers did refuse to be carried, and would have gone a foot, for that the way was but short and pleasant, full of green trees, and again for humility, refusing to be carried in so rich chairs and upon men's backs of so good a vocation as they seemed to be. But Omoncon and the other Captain would not consent thereunto, saying, that it was the order given by the Insuanto, and that they could not by any means break but perform in all points, or else to be cruelly punished for the same, I mean such captains as had the charge for to guard & bear them company: and that no excuse could serve them, and again that it was convenient so to be done, for that from that time the Chinos should respect them and understand that they were principal persons, for that they were carried upon men's backs, as they do their Loytias. The fathers obeyed their reasons, and entered into the chairs & were carried with eight men a piece, & the other their companions with four men a piece, according unto the order given by the governor. Those that carried the chairs, did it with so good a will, that there was striving who should first lay hands to them. This town of Tangoa hath three thousand soldiers, and is called in their language Coan: at the entering in, it hath many gardens & orchards & a street where through they carried the Spaniards unto their lodging, they affirmed it to be half a league long, & all the street whereas they went, it was full of boards & stalls where on was laid all kind of ambergris very curious, and things to be eaten, as fresh fish & salt fish of divers sorts, & great abundance of ●oule, and flesh of all sorts, fruits and green herbs in such quantity that it was sufficient to serve such a City as Seville is. The press of people was so much in the streets, that although there were many typstaves, & soldiers that did make way whereas they went, yet could they not pass but with great difficulty. So they were brought unto the king's house, which was very great, marvelously well wrought with stone & brick, and many halls, parlours, and chambers, but none above but all below. So soon as they were afoot, there was brought from the Captain or justice of the town, whom they do call Ticoan, a message, bidding them welcome, & therewith a present which was great store of capons, hens, teals, ducks, geese, flesh of four or five sorts, fresh fish, wine, and fruits of divers sorts, & of so great quantity that it was sufficient for two hundredth men. All the which they would have given for a little cool air, by reason that it was then very hot wether, & again the great number of people that came thither to see them did augment it the more. So in the evening the two spanish soldiers went forth into the streets to walk abroad, & left the two Friars within their lodging, unto whom afterwards they did give intelligence of all things that they had seen, which did cause great admiration: the wall of the town was very broad, & wrought with lime and stone, full of loop holes and watch towers. And as they passed through the streets there came forth of a house a very honest man as it seemed, who was very well appareled & stayed them for that in the same house there were certain dames principal personages, that did see them a far off, and not content therewith, they did request them with great courtesy for to enter into the house that they might the better see than: the which they did straightways accomplish, and entering in, they were brought into a court, whereas was set chairs for them to sit down, and the Ladies were there a little from them beholding them with great honesty and gravity. Then a little after they sent them a banquet with marchpanes and sweet meats made of sugar, which they did eat without any curiosity & drunk after the same. The banquet being done, they made signs and tokens unto them, that they received great content with their sight, and that they might departed when that their peasure was, the which they did after that they had made great courtesies with thanks for their friendship received of both parts. So after they had taken their leave they went to see a house of pleasure that was hard by the town wall, wrought upon the water, with very fair galleries & open lodges for to banquet in, made of masons work, & therein many tables finely painted, & round about it sesterns of water wherein was store of fish, & joining unto them tables of very fair alabaster, all of one stone, and the least of them was of eight spans long: and round about them were brooks of running water, that gave a pleasant sound in the mean time they were banqueting, and nigh thereunto many gardens full of all sorts of flowers. And a little from that place they saw a bridge all of Mason's work, and the stones very well wrought and of a mighty bigness, they measured some of them, that were twenty and two and twenty foot long, and five foot broad, and seemed unto them that it was a thing impossible to be laid there by man's hands. Of this bigness, yea and bigger they did see laid upon many other bridges, in the discourse of their voyage going to Chincheo and Au●heo. In this town they tarried and rested themselves all that night, marveling very much at that which they had seen. The next day in the morning when they were up and ready, they found in the house all things in a readiness and in very good order, for their departure, as well their little chairs, and horse, as for men to carry their stuff and apparel, which did not a little make them to marvel, how that every one of them with a waster upon their shoulders, did divide their burden in two parts, six roves before and six roves behind, and did travail with the same with so great ease and swiftness that the horse could not endure with them. They went unto the Ticoan his house, he who sent them the present over night, to give him thanks for his courtesy, and to take their leave of him. They found him with great majesty, but yet gave them great & good entertainment, and craved pardon at their hands, if that he did not give them the entertainment and courtesy as they deserved. He did likewise put upon each of them two pieces of silk, in the same order as the governor of Tansuso did. So when they had surrendered unto him thanks, they took their leave and departed from Chincheo whereas was the Insuanto or governor, by whose order was showed unto them all the courtesy as you have heard.   

CHAP. XV. The Spaniards do prosecute their journey to Chincheo, and seethe many notable things by the way.  
FRom this town of Tangoa unto Chincheo is thirteen leagues, and so plain way that it giveth great content to travail it: in all the way they could not see one span of ground but was tilled and occupied. The like they do say is of all the ground that is in the whole kingdom: it is full of people, and the towns one so near to an other, that almost you can not judge them to be many towns but one, for that there was but a quarter of a league distant one town from an other, and it was told unto them that in all the Provinces of the kingdom, it is populared in the same order. All their ground they till is watered, which is the occasion of the fruitfulness thereof, so that they do gather fruit all the year long, and our Spaniards did see in all places whereas they came, that they were gathering of rice, some new sprung up, some with ears, and some ripe. They do plough and till their ground with kine, Bufalos, and bulls, which are very tame, and although they be great, yet be their horns but of a span long and turning backwards to the tail, in such sort that they can not do any hurt or harm with them: they do govern them with a cord that is made fast to a ring that is in their nose, and in like sort do they govern the Bufanos. They do feed them commonly in the fields of rice, for that they have no other grazings, and all the time that they are feeding a boy doth ride on every one of them to disturb them, that they do no harm therein. But to eat the weeds and grass that do grow in the rice. In this province and all the rest of the fifteen in that kingdom, they gather much wheat, and excellent good barley, péese, Borona, milo, Frysoles, Lantesas, Chiches, and other kinds of grains and seeds, whereof is great abundance and good cheap. But the chiefest thing that they do gather and a victual that is most used amongst them and the borderers there abouts is rice.  
All the high ways are covered with the shadow of very fair orchards which do garnish it very much, and they are planted in very good order: and amongst th●m there are shops, whereas is sold all manner of fruits, to the comfort of all such as do travail by the way, which is an infinite number, some on foot, some on horseback and others in little chairs. Their waters by the high ways are very good and light, although the wether at that time was very hot, especially at noon time, yet was the water of their wells and fountains very cool. The same day when they had travailed half way, they saw a far off coming marching towards them in very good order, a squadron of soldiers, which at the first caused them to marvel, and to be afraid, till such time as they drew nigher, it was told unto them, that it was the Captain of the guard unto the Insuanto or Governor of Chincheo, who came by his order to receive them with four hundred soldiers very well armed with picks and hargubushes, and well appareled. So soon as the Captain came unto them, he was mounted on a bay horse, but of small stature, as they for the most part be in all that province, he alighted and came unto the fathers, and his companions (who likewise did alight from their little chairs) and did salute the one the other with great courtesy. And the Captain told them, how that the Governor did send him with those soldiers for to receive him and to bear him company, and how that he was in the City tarrying their coming with great desire to see them, and commanded that with all speed possible they should shorten the way.  
The Captain came very well appareled with a chain of gold about his neck, a man of a good audacity and understanding. Hard unto his stirryp he had a page that went with him and carried a great Tira sol, 
A thing to keep away the sun.  made of silk that did shadow him all over. The bunnet that this Captain did wear, was like unto them that before they had seen others wear: he had before him great music of trumpets and hoybukes whereon they played in great concord. This Captain with his four hundredth soldiers did continually guard them, till they came unto the City of Chincheo, and never departed from them a jot: the which was done more for pomp, and to show their majesty then of necessity: for that although the people are infinite & without number, 
The people of the country wear no weapons, but the soldiers.  yet do they wear no weapons, for that they are commanded by the law of the country to the contrary upon pain of death, of what state or degree so ever he be, but only the soldiers such as are in every town for the guard thereof, and the garrisons that the king hath continually ready to come forth when that any occasion shall serve.  
In this high way continually there went and came many pack horses, laden with m●rchandice and other things, but the most part of them were Mules. The high ways are very broad, that twenty men may ride together on a rank and one not hinder an other, and are all paved with great stones: and they say that the ways throughout all the other Provinces be in the same order, and was done by a king of that country, who spent upon the same a great part of his treasure. And it seemeth to be true, for that our Spaniards traveling in that country over high and mighty mountains, yet did they find the ways plain, in such sort as hath been told you.   

CHAP. XVI. Our Spaniards arrived at the City of Chincheo, whereas they were received and lodged, and what they saw in that City.  
Upon a Saturday being the eleventh of july came our Spaniards unto the city of Chincheo four hours before it was night. This city is of the common sort in that kingdom, and may have seventy thousand households. It is of great traffic and well provided of all things, 
Chincheo hath seventy thousand households.  for that the sea is but two leagues from it: it hath a mighty river running alongst by it down into the sea, by which is brought by water and carried down all kind of ambergris. There is a bridge over the said river, which is supposed to be the fairest that is in all the world: it hath a draw bridge to serve in time of wars or for any other necessity: the bridge is eight hundredth paces long, and all wrought with stones of two and twenty foot long, and five foot broad, a thing greatly to be marveled at: at the entry thereof there were many armed soldiers ready to fight, who when they came within harquebus shoot did salute them in very good order. There was nigh unto the said bridge in the river riding at an anchor more than a thousand ships of all sorts, 
A thousand ships in one river.  and so great a number of boats and barks that all the river was covered, and every one full of people that had entered into them for to see the Castillas, for so they did call the Spaniards in that country, for the streets in the suburbs nor in the City could not hold them, the number was so great, yet their streets are as broad as our ordinary streets in any City in all Spain.  
This City is compassed with a strong wall, made of stone, and is seven fadam high, and four fadam broad, and upon the gates many towers wherein is placed their artillery, 
They have no use of castles.  which is all their strength, for that they do not use in their kingdom strong castles as they do in Europe. The houses of the City are all built after one sort and fashion, but fair, and not very high, 
Earth quakes in this country.  by reason of the earth quakes which are ordinarily in that country.  
All the streets (but especially that wherein they passed at their coming thither) have on the one side and on the other, sheds, 
Rich ambergris.  under the which are shops, full of rich ambergris and of great value and very curious. They have in equal distance the one from the other, many triumphant arches which do set out the streets very much, and is used in every principal street through out all the kingdom, 
Triumphant arches.  in the which they have excellent market places, whereas is to be bought all things that you will desire to be eaten, as well of fish as of flesh, fruits, herbs, comfits, conserves, and all things so good cheap, that it is almost bought for nothing. Their victuals are very good and of great substance, their hogs flesh whereon they do feed much, is so wholesome and good as the mutton in Spain. The fruits that we did see, some were like unto them we have in Spain, and others never the like seen by us afore, but of an excellent taste and savour. But in especial one kind of fruit which is bigger than a musk million, but of the same fashion, but of marvelous excellent and precious victual and pleasant to be eaten, a kind of plums that is of a gallant taste, and never hurteth any body although they eat never so many, a thing proved by our Spaniards many times. The street that they came in at, was so full of people, that if a grain of wheat had been thrown amongst them, it would scarce have fallen to the ground. And although they were carried in little chairs upon men's backs, and the Captain (of whom we speak of) before them making way: yet were they a great while before they could pass the street, and be brought unto a great house, which was a covent, wherein dwelled religious men of that country, thither they were brought and lodged, being very weary of the press of people that did trouble them very much with desire to take their ease.   

CHAP. XVII. The governor of Chincheo doth call the Spaniards before him, and showeth unto them the ceremonies that they must use to have aundience.  
THe same day that they came into the city (as aforesaid) was a good while before night, with more desire to take rest and ease themselves of their journey, and of the travel they had in the streets, by reason of the great number of people that came to see them, then to make any visitation that night: but the Insuanto or governor of the city did send and commanded that forthwith they should go unto his house, for that he had great desire to see them: the which they did more for necessity of the time, then for any good will. They went forth from their lodging on foot, whether it was for that the governors house was near hand, or else peradventure at his commandment, which they could not well understand, but did as the captain that guarded them did command. In the midst of the street, whereas was no less number of people then in the other, whereby they entered into the City, they met with a Loytia that came to entertain them with great majesty, and had carried before him many banners, maze bearers and tipstaves, and others which carried sets or whips, which they did trail after them made fast unto long sticks, which were the executioners, the which do go always making of way, parting the people before the Loytias, as you have heard. The majesty and company wherewith he came was so great, that they verily did believe him to be the Insuanto: but being certified, they understood that it was one of his counsellors that came from the governors home to his own house, which was in the same street whereas he met with them. This counsellor was carried in a chair of ivory, garnished with gold and with curtains of cloth of gold, and on them the king's arms, which are certain serpents knotted together (as hath been told you.) But when he came right against the spaniards, without any staying he made a sign with his head, and commanded that they should return back again unto his house, which was hard by: the captains did straightways obey his commandment, and returned with them. The counsellor entered into his house, which was very fair, he had in it a fair court, and therein a gallant fountain and a garden. After him entered the spaniards all alone, the rest remained without in the street at the Loytias commandment, he entertained them with very good words of semblance, and said in conclusion that they were welcome into that kingdom, with many other words of courtesy: unto the which they answered with the same courtesy, with signs and by their interpreter that they carried with them. This Loytia commanded a banquet to be brought forth, and wine to drink, he began first both to eat and drink. Then he commanded to call in the captain, unto whom was given the charge to bear them company, and did chide with him very sharply and severely, because he did carry them on foot (they could not understand whether it were done for a policy, or of a truth, although the effects wherewith he did chide seemed of a truth) he straightways commanded two rich Chairs to be brought forth for to carry the Fathers, and to give unto their companions horses: the which being done, he willed them to go and visit the governor, who did tarry their coming: and that another time at more leisure he would see and visit them.  
They followed their way all alongst the street, which seemed unto them to be more fairer than the other wherein they entered, and of more fairer houses and triumphant arks: and also the shops that were on the one side and on the other, to be better furnished with richer things than the others, in so ample sort, that what therewith, as also the great number of people which they saw, they were so amazed, that they were as people from themselves, thinking it to be a dream. To conclude, after they had gone a good while in that street, delighting their eyes with new things never seen of them before: they came into a great place, whereas were many soldiers in good order with their hargabushes, picks and other armour in a readiness, appareled all in a livery of silk, with their ancients displayed. At the end of this place, was there a very fair and sumptuous palace, the gate was wrought of masons work of stone, very great & full of figures or personages, and above it a great window with an iron grate all guilt: they were carried within the gates, the soldiers & the people which were without number, remained without and could not be avoided but with great difficulty. When they were within the first court, there came forth a man very well appareled and of authority, and made signs with his hand unto them that brought the Spaniards, that they should carry them into a hall that was upon the right hand, the which was straightways done. The hall was very great & fair, & at the end thereof there was an altar, whereon was many Idols, & all did differ the one from the other in their fashion: the altar was rich and very curiously trimmed with burning lamps: the altar cloth was of cloth of gold, and the fruntlet of the same.  
After a while that they had been there whereas the Idols were: there came a servant from the governor and said unto them in his behalf, that they should send unto him the interpreter, for that he would talk with him, and tell him some things that they ought to observe, if they would have any audience of him: they straightways commanded him to go. And the governor said unto him that he should advise the fathers and the rest of his companions, that if they would talk & treat of such business as they came for▪ that it must be done with the same ceremony and respect, as the Nobles of that province do use to talk with him: which is upon their knees (as afterwards they did see many times used) if not that they should departed unto the house whereas they were lodged, and there to tarry the order that should be sent from the viceroy of Aucheo.  
The Spaniards when they heard this message, there was amongst them divers judgements and opinions, striving amongst themselves a good while, but yet in conclusion, the religious Fathers, whom the governor of the Islands had ordained and sent as principals in this matter, and whose judgement they should follow, said that they ought to accept the condition, seeing that by no other means they could not come unto that they pretended: and not to leave it it off for matters of small importance, for that therein they make no offence unto GOD, and it may be a mean unto the converting of that mighty kingdom, whom the devil maketh reckoning to be his own, and not now to leave it off, but rather to procure all means that may be, as they had begun to do, and seeing that it is no offence unto God, as aforesaid, neither sent as ambassadors from the king of Spain, I do not know to the contrary, but that we may consent unto the will of the Insuant, and in especial being a thing so commonly used in that country. This opinion and judgement was followed, although the soldiers that were with them were of a contrary opinion: so they sent answer unto the governor with the said interpreter, that they will observe their accustomed ceremonies, and will do all that he will command them according unto the custom of the country: otherwise they could not be permitted to entreat of such things, wherefore they came thither, from far countries and with so great travel.   

CHAP. XVIII. The Spaniards have a loving and favourable audience of the governor of Chincheo, to whom they do give the letters they brought from the islands Philippinas.  
WHen that the Insuanto understood that the spaniards would enter with the reverence accustomed, and in such order as was declared unto them, he straightways commanded that they should come into the hall whereas he was, which was a thing to be seen, as well for the bigness, as for the riches that was in it, the which I do let pass because I would not be tedious. The spaniards were carried forth out of that hall whereas they were first, and after that they had passed the court whereas they came in, they entered into another hall as big as the first: whereas were many soldiers with their weapons in their hands in very good order, and richly appareled, and next unto them were many tipstaffs and sergeants, with different ensigns or badges, all appareled with long robes of silk, guarded and embroidered with gold, and every one of them had a helm on his head, some of silver and other some of tin guilt over, which was a gallant thing to see: all had long hair and died yellow, which hung down behind their ears upon their backs: they were placed in very good order, and made a lane that the Spaniards might pass through: then they came into a gallery, which was joining unto the chamber where the governor was, and there they heard such a noise of instruments of diverse sorts, which endured a good while, and was of so great melody, that it seemed unto them that they never before heard the like: which caused unto them great admiration to see so great majesty amongst Gentiles. 
Great majesty.  When the music was ended they entered into the hall aforesaid, and had not gone many steps, when as they met with the counsellor that met with them in the street aforesaid, and with him other two of his companions all on foot and bare headed before the governor, & their ensigns of majesty left off: which is generally used in all the kingdom, the inferior to make any show when that he is before his superior. Then they made signs unto them for to kneel down, for that the Insuanto was nigh at hand in a rich tower, under a canopy of great riches, and did represent so great majesty as the king himself: he did entertain them with tokens of great love, and humanity, and told them by their interpreter, that they were very well welcome, and that he did greatly rejoice to see them, with many other words of great favour. This governor was a man of goodly person, well favoured, and of a merry countenance, more than any that they had seen in all that country. He caused to be put upon the shoulders of the fathers and of the soldiers ●hat were with him, every one of them two pieces of silk, which was crossed about them like scarves, and likewise to either of them a branch of silver: the like courtesy he did unto the captain Omoncon, and unto Sinsay, and commanded to give unto all their servants every one of them a mantle of cotton painted. This ceremony is used in that kingdom unto all captains and other men that have done some valiant exploit, (as we have told you before.) This being done, the fathers did give unto him the letters which they carried from the governor and general of the field, and a note of the present that was sent him: craving pardon for that it was so small, but time and opportunity would not serve as then to send unto him a thing of greater price and valour: certifying him, that if the friendship which they pretended did go forwards, & come to be established, that then all things should be amended and amplified. He answered unto their proffers with words of great favour, and made signs unto them to arise, and to go and take their rests, there whereas they were lodged: the which they did, and sound all things in very good order and well furnished, as well of beds as of all other necessaries, which was done by the commandment of the governor. Before they departed out of the palace, the captain of the guard did carry them unto his lodging, which was within the court, and there he made them a banquet with conserves, and fruits in abundance: the which being done, he and other Gentlemen of the palace did bear them company until they came to their lodgings, which they greatly desired, for that they were weary of their journey, & also with the trouble of the great press of people that pressed on them in the streets and otherwise for to see them: the which captain of the guard did appoint a company of soldiers for to guard them both night and day, the which was done more for majesty then for necessity or security of their persons. They had a steward appointed to provide them and all their company of all things necessary, and that in abundance, and not to take of them any thing, which was given by particular commandment by the governor.   

CHAP. XIX. The Spaniards are visited by the principals of Chincheo, the governor did send for Pedro de Sarmiento and Myguel de loarcha, and giveth them particular audience, and doth well inform himself of all things touching Limahon the rover.  
THe next day following, which was sunday the twelfth of july, many of the Gentlemen of the city did go unto the Spaniards to visit them, using many ceremonies according to their custom with favourable words, promising to perform it in deeds, when as need did so require: and such as could not go themselves did send their servants, bidding them welcome and to know of their good healths, and how they did like of their cities and country. The Spaniards did make answer, and gratified them all, as well those that came in person, as the other that sent their servants: in the which visitation they spent all the whole day, having great admiration to see the good behaviour, nurture, and gallant demeanour of those Gentlemen, and the great discretion they had in the demanding of any thing they would know, as also in their answers made to our requests. The next day the Insuanto sent a commandment wherein he willed the two fathers to remain in their lodgings and take their case: but the two soldiers Pedro Sarmiento, and Miguel de Loarcha should come and speak with him, and that they should bring with them their interpreter, for that he had one there with him (who was a Chino, and understood the language of the Philippinas, but so badly, that they could not by his interpretation talk of any matter of importance. So when they came thither, they were brought whereas he was, but with less ceremony then on the first day: but yet they found him with the like majesty as before. He asked of them how the fathers did, and they themselves, and if they were refreshed of the travel in the journey, and how they did like of the country, and other things, which did demonstrate great affability. Being by them satisfied of his demands, he requested them to declare unto him the whole circumstance of the coming of Limahon the rover, unto the islands, and how the Spaniards dealt with him: that although he had been informed particularly in all things, by the Captain Omoncon and Sinsay, yet he was in a jealousy that they told him not the tr●eth. He was nothing deceived in that he suspected,) for after that our soldiers had made a true relation of the coming of the rover unto Manilla, and of all the rest as you have heard in the discourse thereof in this book, he found that they differed very much, the one from the other, for that they did attribute it wholly unto themselves to get honour and benefit: but the Insuanto like a wise man straightways understood their pretence. But when that he perceived that Limahon was neither dead nor prisoner, but only besieged, he offered unto them that if they would return again unto Pagansinan upon him whereas he was, he would give unto them five hundred ships of war, with people sufficient to serve both by sea and land, 
He offered 500 ships of war,  and more if they would request. They answered him, that all such cost and labour were but in vain, for that the general of the field who hath him in siege, with the people and ships that he hath, are sufficient to end that enterprise, and to send him hither alive or dead, and that long before that their fleet should come thither. And besides this, their islands were poor of victuals, and could not sustain so great an army many days. Being satisfied with these reasons, he gave place that the interpreter which they brought should come in where as they were, for he remained at the door without, for that he would be fully certified to avoid the suspicious doubt he had before he come in presence, yet he did help them very much. So when their interpreter was come in, the Spaniards seeing good occasion and opportunity for to declare that which passed the day before, betwixt them and the fathers, touching the speaking unto him on their knees: and seeing as it seemed unto them that he was at that time in a good mind for to hear them, 
Note the spaniards insolence.  they did utter unto him all the whole contention (after that they had declared many reasons of great consideration, to give them to understand that it was not convenient to do it, but especially to religious men, who were there as principals over the rest, unto whom the king of Spain (their lord) himself doth stand on foot, when as they do entreat of any matter, although it be but of small importance: for that they are priests and ministers of God, whom he doth worship and reverence.  
The Insuanto with a merry countenance did answer them, that unto that time he understood no more of them, then in that he was informed by the captain Omoncon, and did not acknowledge them to be any other but Castillas: without knowing wherefore they came, nor from whom, for lack of the lett●●● sent from their governor, and general of the field the first time that he spoke with them: neither had he any knowledge of the custom of their country: yet notwithstanding, that which hath passed here, without any exception of person, if they would take it in good part, in that which is to come shall be amended: and from that day forwards, at all times whensoever it were their pleasure to come of themselves, or at such time as they were sent for, for to talk with him as they do use in Castilia or Spain, unto such of their dignity and vocation, the which he granted with a very good will: although he not grant unto any that pre-eminence, no not unto a viceroy, except he were an ambassador sent from some king. With this resolution, and with many other good words they took their leave of him, and went joyful and content unto their lodgings, whereas they sound the friars weary with entertaining of such as did visit them, and with great desire to see them, to know wherefore the Insuanto did send for them, with whom they had been so long time. But after that that they understood the effect of the whole, and how that the governor did permit that they should talk with him after their own fashion, they were marvelously glad thereof, and had a very good hope to conclude their pretence, wherefore they went, and praised God for the good success of that which they pretended.   

CHAP. XX. The governor doth banquet the Spaniards, and afterwards make all things in a readiness for to go unto Aucheo▪ whereas the viceroy tarrieth their coming.  
THe next day following, the governor called a Gentleman of his house unto him, and commanded him to go and visit the Spaniards, and to inform himself of them if that that they lacked any thing, as well in their victuals as in their lodgings, and to know if they did require any thing particular to themselves to advise him thereof, and he would furnish them forthwith for the love that he bore unto them, for their good contractation, and for the great service that they had done unto the king, in the business of Limahon. And also that he should in his name invite them for the next day following to dine with him in his house. This Gentleman went unto them and accomplished his message: and the Spaniards answered, kissing his hand for the great care he had of them: saying that they were furnished in all things abundantly (as in truth they were) and how they were marvelously well lodged, cheered, and lacked nothing: and that the great care he had of them was agreeable unto the hope they had of his good presence and gentleness: accepting the inviting for the next day, the which was given them, and accomplished in this form following.  
The next day when they went unto the palace which was at dinner time, they were carried into a hall that was below in the second court, whereas were many chairs of velvet & tables that were painted with their frontals before: they had no table clothes on them, for that they do not use any in that country, as hath been told you in the first part of this history, neither is it needful for their manner of feeding. In the first chairs they caused the Friars to sit down, every one at a table by himself, and each of them other six tables, placed in order, compassing ●ounde like a circle: then were the Spanish soldiers set in the same manner, and each of them had five tables, and next unto them the captain of the guard belonging unto the governor, and two other Captains: and every one of them had three tables. For that it is the custom of that country to make a difference in the quality of the guests, by the n●mber of the tables. All these were placed in circle or compass (as aforesaid) that they might see one another. In the midst betwixt them there was a round compass, whereas was represented a comedy with much pastime, and endured all the dinnner time, and a good while after. There was also great store of very good and excellent music, accompanied with gallant voices, also jesters, with puppets and other things of great pastime, to drive the time away.  
On the first table was set to every one of the guests, little baskets wrought with gold and silver wire, full of sweet meats made of sugar, as Marchpanes, Castles, Pitchers, Pots, Dishes, Dogs, Bulls, Elephants, and other things very curious, and all guilt: besides this there were many dishes full of flesh, as Capons, Hens, Geese, Teals, gamons of Bacon, pieces of Beef, and other sorts of flesh wherewith all the tables were replenished, saving that whereat they did sit to dine, which was replenished with victuals that was dressed (for all the other was raw) and was of so great abundance, that there was at times more than fifty dishes, and they were served with great curiosity. They had wine of divers sorts, and of that which they do make in that country of the Palm tree, but of so great excellency, that they found no lack of that which was made of Grapes. The dinner endured four hours, and according unto the abundance and diversity they had in victuals, it might have endured eight hours, for it was in so good order that it might have been given unto any prince in the world.  
Their servants and slaves that they brought with them at the same time, did dine in another hall nigh unto the same, with so great abundance as their masters. When dinner was done, the governor commanded the people to come unto him, with whom he did talk and common with great friendship, and good conversation, and would not consent that they should kneel down, neither to be bare headed. So after that he had made unto them tokens of friendship, and detained them a while, in demanding of many things, lastly he told them that there was an order come from the viceroy of Aucheo, that they should go thither with great speed, so that it did require that they should departed the next day following, for the which they were very glad and joyful, for that they had great desire the one to see the other: and again with him they might treat and common tguching their coming into that country, and for what intent: and for all other things needful, for that he was a man fit for their purpose, and one well-beloved of the king. So he took his leave of us with great friendship and courtesy: who did surrender the same after our custom, putting of our caps, and making reverence, for the which he made show that it greatly contented him.  
At their going forth out of the hall, they found the captain that did dine with them, and with him many other Gentlemen that tarried their coming for to bear them company unto their lodging: going before them many servants, that did carry the raw meat, that was upon the other tables over and above that which they did eat on, the which was done for great majesty, and a ceremony very much used in that kingdom, so many times as they do make any banquet.  
So when they came unto their lodging they found that the Insuanto had sent them a very good present, in the which was for every one of them four pieces of silk, and counting chests with other things, and certain painted mantles for the servants and slaves. So after they had taken their leave of the captains and Gentlemen that did bear them company home, they began with great joy to put all things in order for their journey the next day following.   

CHAP. XXI. The Spaniards depart from the City of Chincheo, and cometh to that of Aucheo, whereas the viceroy did tarry their coming.  
THe next day in the morning before that the Spaniards were stirring, there was within the house all things necessary for their journey, as well of litter chairs, as of horses and men for to carry them, and their stuff, the which they did with so good a will (as aforesaid) that they did fall out and strive amongst themselves, who should be the first that should receive their burden. So all things being in good order, they departed, having in their company the same captain and soldiers, that unto that time had been their guard, until they came unto the city of Aucheo, whereas the viceroy was. This journey was unto them joyful, as well for to entreat of matters touching their coming, and to be resolved what they should do, as also to departed out of Chincheo, whereas they passed much trouble, by reason of the great number of people that came for to see them, who never would be satisfied: and that was in such extremity, that some days at ten of the clock in the night, the street round about their lodging were full of people, and only to see them, which caused great trouble and heat with their rumour & press amongst them. This day by reason they understood that they should departed, the press and multitude of the people was so great, that although they had tip staves before them, to beat the people away and to make room, yet was it almost night before they could get out of the city: so that they were constrained to remain in a town there hard by all that night, where as by the commandment of the governor they were very well lodged, and their supper made ready in very good order, as it was in seven days together, till such time as they came unto Aucheo without taking for the same or for any other thing necessary for their sustentation, any price or value. There went continually before them a Post with a provision from the governor, written in a great board wherein was declared who they were, and from whence they came, and commanding that there should be provided for them all things necessary in abundance, upon the king's cost, which was the occasion that so much people came for to see them, that in the high ways they were many times disturbed: so with great trouble, the third day they came unto a city which was called Megoa, which was sometimes the head government, the which was offortie thousand households, but a great part thereof was dispeopled: the occasion thereof they told us, (and was) that about thirty years past, the Iapones, who brought for their guides three Chinos, who do now dwell in Manilla, and are become Christians, and came upon that city, (to revenge themselves of an injury that was done unto them) the which they put in execution with so great secrecy and policy, that they made themselves lords of the city without any danger or hurt unto themselves: for that fifty Iapones, men fit for that purpose, did apparel themselves in Chinos apparel without being known, and came unto a gate of the City, whereas the soldiers that had the charge thereof were void of all suspicion of any enemies that would come, which was the occasion that their armour and weapon was not all in a readiness. And within a little while after that, followed two thousand that did disembarke themselves in a secret and unknown place, and came in very secret order, because they would not be discovered, and did beset that gate of the city, whereas their companions were, which they sent before: who so soon as they saw them nigh at hand, drew out their weapons the which they carried hid under their apparel, and set upon the soldiers (that were void of fear and unarmed) with so great fury and force, that they being amazed were easily slain, so that they were lords of the gate, whereas they left very good guard, and followed their victory, and made themselves lords of the City, without any danger unto their persons, and did possess the same certain days, and did sack the same in spite of them all, with great harm and loss unto the inhabitants thereof, until such time as the viceroy of Aucheo did louie an army together of three score and ten thousand men, and went upon them with courage for to be revenged on the injury received, with the death of all the Iapones: but they seeing that they could not defend themselves against so many, in one night they left the City and went unto their ships, whereas they had left them in very good order, and carried with them the spoil of the City, leaving it beaten down and dispopulated the greater part thereof: in which sort the Spaniards found it, and the injury received so fresh in their minds as though it had been done the day before.  
In this City they were lodged in the king's house, the which was of very great & fair buildings: there was given them to dine and sup in very good order, and with abundance. So soon as they came thither, the Friars remained in their lodgings, but Pedro Sarmiento and Miguel de Loarcha went to visit the governor, using the spanish courtesy with him: and he received them with great joy and courtesy. After they had taken their leave and returned unto their lodgings, the governor sent to visit them El Tyu, who is the ancientest of his counsel, who was with them a good while very friendly, and offered his service in all things that were needful, and so departed to his house marvelously well accompanied.  
The governor sent unto the two soldiers that went to visit him, e●h of them two pieces of silk.  
At their departure from this City, traveling towards Aucheo, they passed over a mighty great river, by a bridge all made of stone: the goodliest and greatest that ever they had seen, whose greatness did cause wonderful admiration, so that they stayed and did measure it from one end to another, that it might be put amongst the wonders of that country, which they took a note of. They found that it was one thousand and three hundred foot long, and that the least stone wherewith it was built, was ofseventéene foot, and many of two and twenty foot long, and eight foot broad, and seemed unto them a thing impossible to be brought thither by man's art, for that all round about so far as they could see, was plain ground without any mountains: by which they judged them to be brought from far. When they were passed that bridge, they traveled all the rest of the day till night upon a causey that was very broad and plain, and on both sides many victualling houses, and the fields sowed with Rice, wheat, and other seeds: and so full of people as in the streets of a good town or city.  
So when they came into the suburbs of the city of Aucheo, they found order and commandment from the viceroy, what should be done, as more at large shallbe declared unto you in the chapter following.   

CHAP. XXII. The entry of the Spaniards into the City of Aucheo, and how the viceroy did entertain and receive them.  
AFter they had traveled more than half a league in the suburbs of the city of Aucheo, they met with a post that came from the viceroy: who brought order that they should reremaine in a house that was appointed for them in the said suburbs, and there to be lodged for that night, for that it was late, & they could not come unto the house appointed in the city for them, or else peradventure to give content unto many that had great desire to see those strangers, for that they must pass through the City, and better to be seen in the day then in the night. So soon as they were alighted, there came a gentleman to visit them, sent from the viceroy to bid them welcome, and to know how they did with their journey, and also to see that they were well provided for that night of all things necessary, and that in abundance. After all the which being done, he told them that the viceroy did very much rejoice of their coming, and for that it was late, and the City far off, it was his pleasure that they should be lodged that night in the suburbs until the next day, then will he give order, that they may enter into the City with the authority convenient unto their persons. After this Gentleman came other Captains to visit them, and brought with them great store of conserves, wine, and fruit: which is a common custom amongst them, when that they go in the like visitation, and it is carried by their servants in little baskets very curiously wrought, or else in barrels made of earth all guilt. Within two hours after their coming thither, there came another messenger from the viceroy with many men laden with Capons, Hens, Geese, Teals, gamons of Bacon and conserves of divers sorts, and of great abundance, sufficient for one hundredth men to sup that night, and for their dinner the next day.  
The next day in the morning very early, there came much people unto their lodging, sent by the viceroy, and brought with them two rich Chairs for to carry the fathers in, and the curtains tied up, that they might the better be seen, and for their companions very good horses, saddled after the fashion which they do use. They forthwith made haste for to departed, and although they made great speed, yet were they a good hour and a half before they could come unto the gates of the City, and seemed unto them that they had traveled two leagues in the suburbs: the which was so well peopled, so fair houses, and many shops full of merchandise, that if it had not been told them, they would not have believed it to be the suburbs, but the city itself.  
Before they came unto the gates, they passed a mighty river three times over bridges that were great and very fair, and the river so deep, that great ships came up the same, but their masts stooping down, to pass under the bridges. This City is the richest and the best provided that is in all the kingdom: it is the head City of all the Province, very rich and fertile, and many towns belonging unto it, and but eight leagues from the sea, and hath mighty rivers, wherein great ships come up to it as aforesaid. At the entry of the City, they found many Gentlemen that were there at the gate tarrying their coming: who after they had saluted the one the other after their fashions, without any staying they traveled forwards on, through a great and broad street that went directly unto the viceroy his palace: upon both sides of the street, from the gate forwards was placed one by another full of soldiers with their officers and ancient, every one with his weapon in his hands, as picks, hargabuses, swords and target, all appareled in one livery of silk, and a bunch of feathers upon their crests. They all stood still and kept their places, and would not consent that any should cross the way in the street, whereas they went accompanied with the Gentlemen.  
They had no leisure to tell the soldiers, but they saw that from the gate until they came unto the vizroyes' palace on both sides, which was a good way to beefull of them, and all richly appareled and of one colour. The people that were at the windows & in the street, betwixt the houses & the soldiers were so great a number that it seemed to be dooms day, and that all the people in the world were there joined together in that street.  
So when they came unto the palace which was two hours after day, the Gentlemen that were their guides did cause the Spaniards to enter into a room which was hard by, till such time as the gate was open, for that it is open but once a day, & so continue no longer time than the audience endureth, which is done by the viceroy once every day, and that is but a small time. But first before he doth enter into audience, there is shot off four pieces of artillery, with a great noise of trumpets drums and waits. And there is no day that passeth without audience, as our people did see by experience so long as they were there, and were likewise informed of others. The hour being come, and the ceremony done as aforesaid, the gates were opened, and there was in the court many soldiers, appareled in the same livery that those were of in the street. From the midst amongst them came forth a gentleman who was as it was told them, the Captain of the guard of the viceroy, who came with great gravity and authority towards the place whereas our people were, and after they had saluted the one the other, he made signs unto them that they should go towards the gates of the palace. When they were within the first court, the which was great and wrought with mighty pillars, there was a great number of soldiers, & many sergeants that entered into an other great court, and mounted up a pair of stairs that was on the one side, whereas all the people were with great silence, saving the captain of the guard, who went with our people till they came to the gates of the hall, whereas was the viceroy, at which gate he stayed with his head discovered, and made signs unto ours that they should do the like, and to tarry there till such time as he had advised the viceroy of their coming, and he to command them to enter.   

CHAP. XXIII. The Spaniards have audience of the Viceroy of Aucheo, and are visited of some of the principal officers, who declare unto them certain things of that city.  
THen straightways came forth of the hall a man appareled in a long rob, of good parsonage, and asked of the Spaniards if they would speak with the viceroy, & they answered, yea: then asked he again from whom they came & by whom they were sent, they answered, that they were sent by the governor of Philippinas, who was servant unto the mightiest king in all Christendom. When he had this answer he returned again into the hall, and within a little while after he came forth, & bade them come in, but gave them to understand, that in entering into the hall whereas the viceroy was, that they should kneel down, & talk with him in that order till he commanded to the contrary, if they would use this ceremony, that then they should come in, if not that they should return back again. They who were certified thereof by the governor of Chincheo did not stand therein, but said that they would observe ●he order given unto them. Therewith he went in, who seemed to be the master of ceremonies, making a sign that they should follow after him, and do that which he willed them to do.  
At the entering in at the door they stayed a little, and then kneeled down right overagainst there whereas the viceroy sat in a chair very high like unto a throne, with a table before him, and was in so dark a place that almost they could not see his face very well. On the one side of him there were some like unto Heralds of arms, with sceptres in their hands, and on the other side two men of a gallant comeliness armed with Corselets made of scales of gold down to the case of their legs, with bows in their hands of gold, and quivers at their backs of the same. Both the one and the other were upon their knees. There was upon the table before him, paper and all things necessary to write: which is an ordinary use amongst them at all times, when there is any public audience, and on the one side of the board a Lion made of black wood, which was (as after they understood) the arms of that province. So straightways he made signs unto them to draw near, which they did, and kneeled down a little from the table which was whereas the master of ceremonies did will them. In this sort they began to talk with him by their interpreter, and told them the occasion of their coming into that City and kingdom, and from whom and unto whom they were sent. But he made signs unto them that they should arise, the which they did with a very good will▪ and did persever in their intent. But the viceroy did cut them off before they could make an end, and asked if they had brought any letter from their king, unto the king his Lord, whom they would go to see and talk with: but when they answered no, he straightways took his leave of them, saying that th●y were welcome, and that they should departed unto their lodgings and to take their ease, for that afterwards they should have occasion to declare their minds unto him, and he would give them their answer, for that the king was far of, and it requireth a long time to come whereas he is, but he would write unto him, and according unto his commandment he would make them answer. And therewith he took the letter, and the memorial of the present, and commanded in his presence, to put about the necks of the Friars in manner of a scarf to either of them six pieces of silk, and unto the soldiers their companions, and unto Omoncon and Sinsay each of them four pieces, and to every one of their servants two a piece, and to give unto the two Friars and the soldiers, Omoncon and Sinsay, every one of them two branches of silver, which is a thing used in that country, unto them that have done some worthy deed, as hath been told you before.  
So with the silk about their necks and with the branches in their hands, they returned out of the hall & down the stairs the way they came, and so through the court into the streets▪ from whence they saw them shut the court gate with so great a noise as when they did open it. From thence at the request of Omoncon & Sinsay they went unto the house of Totoc who is the Captain general of all the men of war & unto the house of Cagnito● who is the chief standard bearer: their houses were nigh the one the other, very fair & great. They found them with as great majesty as the viceroy, and in the same order, with a table before them, & had on each side of them armed soldiers, kneeling on their knees. Yet did they not use our men with the courtesy that the viceroy used, to cause them to stand up, which was the occasion, that straightways they made a show that they would departed and be gone, complaining of Omoncon & Sinsay for that they did carry them thither, and told them with anger that the governor of Manilla did entreat them in a different sort, who was there resident for the mightiest prince in all the world, and they but easy merchants, neither was their going thither to be equalled, unto the benefit that they cam● thither for. This discontent the which they received was the occasion that they would n●t go to make any more visitations, although the said Omoncon and Sinsay for their own interest, would have carried them to the houses of other officers and gentlemen of the court. But they made signs unto those that were their guides, to direct their way unto their lodgings for that they would go to eat somewhat, and to take their ease, the which was ordained in a great house of the kings, there whereas ordinarily the judges do sit to hear matters of justice.  
So at their coming thither they found all their stuff in good order, and their dinner marvelous well provided, and the whole house hanged and trimmed as though it had been for the kings own person, with many waiting men and soldiers those which did guard them both day and night, and hanging at the door two tables or boards (commanded by the viceroy) whereon was written who they were, that were there lodged, and from whence they came, and wherefore, and that none whosoever, should be so hardy as to offer them any wrong or disturbance, upon pain to be for the same offence severely punished. In this house they were more in quiet, than in any other place whereas they had been, 
A city of three hundred thousand households.  neither did the people give them so much trouble, by reason of the great care which the judges had in putting order for the same, by the commandment of the viceroy, yet was it the greatest town and most populed of all that province (although in other provinces there be that be much bigger) and is affirmed that the City of Taybin or Suntiem (there whereas the king and his court is resident) hath three hundredth thousand households, 

A city bigger than the other, and requireth three days to go from one gate to an other.  
seventy leagues compass.   and yet there is a bigger City in the kingdom called, Lanchin, which requireth three days to go from one gate to an other, and is in compass more than seventy leagues, the which is not far distant from Canton, that which the Portugal's hath great notice of. But of certain there is very much spoken of the mightiness of this City, and I myself have heard reported and affirmed to be of a truth, by men of authority that have been in the City of Canton, religious Friars of the order of jesus or Jesuits to whom ought to be given credit.  
This City of Aucheo hath a very fair and strong wall made of stone which is five fadam high, and four fadam broad, 
The wall of the City is five fadam high & four● broad.  the which was measured many times by our people, for that they had a gate out of their lodging that did open to the same. This wall is all covered over with tiles to defend the rain water for hurting of it, which could not to the contrary but receive damage, for that there is no lime used in the whole wall. They have not one castle in all this City, neither is there any used in all that kingdom, for all their force and strength is in their gates the which be made very strong, with a double wall within very broad, betwixt the which are continually many soldiers such as do keep watch and ward both day and night.  
Upon these gates they have much ordinance, but very ill wrought (I mean such as were seen by our men) yet they do say that in other places they have excellent good and very curiously wrought. The whole wall is full of bartilmentes, and thereon written the names of such soldiers as are bound to repair thither in the time of necessity. At every hundredth paces they have lodgings the which are very huge and great: there whereas in the time of necessity do remain and dwell their Captains, so long as their troubles do endure, all the wall is fortified with two great mots or ditches the one within and the other without, 
The city double mooted.  the which they do fill at all times when they please, by sluices which they have from the river for the same purpose, and do serve of water almost all the houses in the City, whereas they have their stanges for the most part full of fish This mighty City is situated in a great plain and compassed round about with mighty rocks and mountains, which is the occasion that it is not so healthful, and the inhabitants say, that it is by reason of the mountains, and many times it is overflown in the winter by spring tides from the river. And in that year that this doth happen it doth destroy and ruinated a great part of the city, as it was at that time when our people did see it, for that in the winter before they were troubled with these great tides, which did them much harm.  
Now to return to our purpose, you shall understand that in the kings house aforesaid, our people remained all the time that they were in this City, whereas they were made much of, and visited by the principal of the same, but in especial of the viceroy, who the very same day di● send to invite them for the next day following, who made unto them a famous banquet, as you shall understand in this chapter following.   

CHAP. XXIIII. The viceroy doth banquet our people in his own house two days one after the other.  
THe next day after that our people came into the City, the viceroy did send to invite them to dinner to his own house, whereas he made them a great banquet in the form following. At their coming unto the palace there came forth a great number of Gentlemen, servants unto the viceroy, to bid them welcome, with great store of music and tokens of mirth. Being entered into the first court, they brought them into a mighty hall that was marvelously well trimmed, wherein was a great number of tables set in such order as they were in the banquet that was made them by the governor of Chincheo, (as hath been told you) although in the number and furniture did far excel the other. But before they did sit down, there came unto them two captains principal men, unto whom the viceroy had committed the charge of the banquet, to do all things in his name, for that it is a custom in that kingdom, that noble men must not be present in their banquets they make. So the charge was given unto them, to make them be merry, and to bid his guests welcome. When they came unto them they used great courtesy, and passed away the time in gallant discourses, till it was time to go to dinner, & that they began to bring in their victuals. 
A strange ceremony.  Then before they did sit down, the captains did take each of them a cup in his hand, in manner of a Sorlue as they do use, and being full of wine, they went together whereas they might discover the heaven and offered it unto the sun, and unto the saints of heaven, adding thereunto many words of prayers: but principally they did request that the coming of their new guests might be profitable unto them all, and that the friendship which they did pretend to establish, might be for good both unto the one and to the other. This their oration and prayer being done they did spill out the wine making a great courtesy, than were they straightways filled again, and making reverence unto their guests every one by himself, they set the cups down upon the tables whereas the fathers should dine whereas they were set every one by himself. This being done, the first service was set upon the boards, and the Captains were set at other tables, which were not so many in number, nor so well furnished nor dressed as the other: the dinner was famous and of many diversities of meats, exceeding very much that which was made them by the Governor of Aucheo.  
The time which the banquet endured (which was very late) there was great store of music of divers instruments, as of vials, gitterns, and rebuckes, and with them many jesters did make them mer●y at their dinner. The which being done, the said Captains did bear their guests company out of the palace, whereas they did anew invite them to dinner for the next day in the same h●ll: they obeying their request did come, whereas was made unto them a banquet more famous than the first.  
This day at the banquet was present the Totoc, he whom they visited the first day, came in his own house, and found with so great majesty. Likewise there dined with them the Captains that were at the first banquet. 
Comedies used amongst them.  In this second banquet they had as the day before, very much music, and a Comedy that endured long, with many pretty and merry jests: there was also a tombler, 
Tumblers.  who did his feats very artificially, as well in vaulting in the air, as upon a staff that two men did hold on their shoulders. Before the comedy did begin, was told them by their interpreter the signification thereof, that the better they might content themselves in the conceiving, whose argument was, that in times past, 
The argument of the●● comedy.  there was in that country many mighty and valiant men. But amongst them all, there was in particular three brethren that did exceed all the rest that ever were in mightiness and valiantness. The one of them was a white man, the other was ruddish or high coloured and 〈◊〉 third black. The ruddish being more ingenious, and of better industry, did procure ●o make his white brother king, the which judgement was agreeable unto the rest. Then they altogether did take away the kingdom from him that did at that time reign, who was called Laupicono, an effeminate man and very vicious. This they did represent very gallantly with garments very meet for those personages.  
The banquet and play being finished, according as they did the day before, the Captains did bear them company till they were out of the palace, and from thence they went unto their lodgings, with their ordinary company appointed by the viceroy, which was that Captain that we have spoken of, with his soldiers, who neither night nor day doth not departed from their guard.   

CHAP. XXV. The Spaniards do carry their present unto the viceroy, who having received it by the hands of Omoncon doth seal it and send it unto the king: our men be forbidden to go forth of their houses to see any thing in the City: and it doth entreat of other particular things.  
THe same night our men did common amongst themselves, to see if it were good presently to give order to put in ure the thing they came for: seeing that they might treat thereof with the viceroy, he being a man that showed unto them so much favour and good will. So in conclusion they were all resolved that straightways the next day in the morning, should go unto him Michael de Loarcha, and Peter Sarmiento, and carry unto him the present which they brought, and to have with them to bear them company Omoncon and Sinsay, and being presented, to request that he would appoint a day when they might go and talk with him about principal matters.  
This accord they put in execution according unto their determination, and the two soldiers went and carried the present as it was agreed. So they came unto the palace, and having tarried till such time as they opened the gates of the audience, (which was with the ceremony spoken of in the 22. chapter) it was told unto the viceroy that the Castillos were there and had brought a present, who incontinent said that as than he ●ould not talk with them: but that the captain Omoncon & Sinsay should enter in with the present, and that they should return unto their lodgings, for that he had a care to call them when that opportunity did serve to entreat of all things to their pleasure. They did as they were commanded, and those who carried the present in, did afterward give our people to understand all that had passed with them, saying that in opening the present, there was a note thereof taken before a notary, and straightways commanded to be put in again where it was taken out before the said notary & other witnesses, the which being done he sealed it up, and sent it unto the City of Taybin unto the king and his counsel, and therewith that which the Governor of Chincheo did send him, as shall be told you: for that they have a rigorous law in that kingdom, that doth prohibit all such as have any office of government, to receive any present of what quality so ever it be, without licence of the king or of his counsel, upon pain to be deprived of bearing any office all the days of their lives, and to be banished and condemned to wear red bonnets (as we have declared the effect thereof.)  
This is conformable unto that which the governor of Chincheo did, in the presence of our people, at such time as they went to take their leave of him, for to go unto Aucheo, which was, that in their presence they commanded to take forth all that they brought him in present, and showing it unto them piece by piece. He asked if it were that which they had brought, and they answered that it was the same (although it was with troubled minds) believing that it was to check them because it was so small in respect of their mightiness: he asked them if there lacked any thing, they answered no, then straightways he commanded to put it again whereas it was taken out in their presence, and before a notary and witnesses: the which being done, was mailed and sealed and so sent unto the viceroy of Aucheo in their company, and said that he could not receive it without the licence aforesaid.  
So our soldiers seeing that they could not be suffered to enter in with the present, they took it for a great discourtesy and disfavour, and therewith departed unto their lodging, to give the fathers to understand thereof, who liked not well thereof, but yet they concluded amongst themselves to suffer for a while, and to commit unto God the direction thereof, as it best may be for his holy service.  
The next day following, the viceroy did send to visit them, and to ask of them a sword, a harquebus and a ●laske: for that he would cause others to be made by them, the which they did send, and afterwards understood, that they had counterfeited the same although not in so perfect manner.  
Then after a time our people seeing, that their being in that city seemed to be long and like to be longer, they did procure to drive away the time in the best manner they could, and went abroad into the city and did by either of them that which they thought best. 
All things good cheap.  Whereof they found great abundance, and of so small price, that they bought it almost for nothing.  
They bought many books that did entreat of diverse matters, which they brought with them to the islands (as appeareth more at large in the chapter for the same.)  
The next day they went to see the gates of the City, and all such curious things as were to be seen so far as they could learn or understand, which were many. But amongst them all they saw a sumptuous temple of their Idols, 
111. Idols in one chapel.  in whose chief chapel they counted one hundred and eleven Idols, besides a great number more that were in other particular chapels, all were of carved work, very well proportioned and gilted: but in especial three of them that were placed in the midst of all the rest, the one had three heads proceeding out of one body, the one looking on the other in full face. The second was the form of a woman with a child in her arms, the third of a man appareled after the form and fashion that the Christians do paint the Apostles. Of all the rest some had four arms, and some had six, and other eight, and other some marvelous deformed monsters. Before them they had burning lamps, and many sweet perfumes and smells, but in especial before the three above specified.  
But when that the viceroy did understand that our people did go viewing the City gates and temples (and perceiveth that they that gave him the notice did suspect it that it was to some ill intent) therewith he straightways commanded that they should not go forth out of their lodging without ●is licence: and likewise commanded the Captain that was their guard not to consent thereunto as he had done, and likewise that none should carry them any thing for to sell, for he that did it should be punished with whipping. Yet notwithstanding, they had every day very sufficient necessaries for their personages in such ample wise, that there did always remain, and not lack.  
In this closeness and keeping in, they suffered many days with much sadness, and oppressed with melancholic humours, to see that their purpose wherefore they went thither seemed to be long, and every day was worse & worse. Yet notwithstanding they did pass it over in the best wise they could, in committing it with hearty zeal unto God, for whose honour and glory they did attempt that voyage, & prayed unto him for to move their hearts to consent that the religious fathers might remain in that country, for to learn the language (as they had begun many days before) by which means their souls might be saved, and clearly delivered from the tyranny of the devil, who of truth had them in possession. So after many days that they had remained in that close estate as aforesaid, they determined for to go and talk with the viceroy, and to be fully resolved either to tarry or return from whence they came. They straightways did put it in ure, and what ensued thereof you shall understand in the chapter following.   

CHAP. XXVI. The Spaniards talk with the Viceroy, and not being suffered, they do write to him a letter, and he doth answer it by word of mouth, with other particular matters.  
IT hath been declared unto you, that the same day that the Spaniards did talk with the viceroy, he asked them if they had brought any letter for their king, they answered no: he told them that he would write unto the court, and having answer, they should be fully satisfied of their pretence and demand.  
But they seeing that his answer was long a coming and great delay made therein, and that they had them as half prisoners, they determined to go and speak with the viceroy, to be fully satisfied of his determinate will & pretence, and to have some order either to go unto the court, or to remain in that city, or else to return unto the islands, and there to tarry the time till it pleased God to open a gate in that kingdom, wherein might enter his holy gospel.  
With this their pretended purpose, they did persuade with their captain to permit them so much liberty as for to go and speak with the viceroy, who for that he bore them love and good will did consent thereunto. So they went, but when they came thither they that kept the gates would not consent that they should enter, which was the occasion that they returned unto their lodgings very sad and sorrowful, and almost without any hope to bring their matter to pass, for the which they went thither, for that it seemed unto them although they did plainly declare unto them their pretence, yet did they work in such order for to cause them to departed. In this order they remained in the city certain days, and for to conclude either to stay there or departed the kingdom, they were resolute, and determined to write a letter unto the viceroy, and therein to give him to understand particularly, that their coming thither into the country was to entreat that betwixt them & the Castillos there should be peace & friendship, and being concluded that their soldiers should with that news, depart unto the Islands from whence they came, to give the governor to understand thereof, & they to remain in that country preaching the holy gospel. They could find none that would write this letter for them, although they would have paid them very well for their pains. Till in the end, by great request and prayings the captain Omoncon did write it for them▪ and straightways departed unto the city of Ampin that was not far off, making an excuse for to go & see the visitor of the province whom they do call Sadin: he would very feign have carried with him two of our people, that he might have seen them, but none would go with him. This journey which Omoncon made, he did it to put away the suspicion they might conceive, that he did write the letter, if that peradventure the viceroy would take it in ill part.  

People in great subjection.  Their letter being written, they found great difficulty in the sending the same, for that there was n●ne that would carry it, neither would they consent that our men should enter into the palace to deliver it. But in conclusion, what with requests and gifts they persuaded their Captain of their guard to carry it, who did deliver the same unto the viceroy, in name of the Castillos, saying that he took it of them to bring it unto him, for that they did certify him, that it was a thing that did import very much. Having read the letter, he answered that he would give the king to understand thereof, as he said at the first time. And in that touching the Friars remaining in that country to preach, at that time he could make them no answer, for that in such matters it was first requisite to have the good will of the Royal Counsel▪ Yet would he make answer unto the letter they brought from the Governor of Manilla, and that they might departed, and return again at such time as they brought Limahon, prisoner or dead, the which being done, then shall the friendship be concluded which they do pretend, and to remain and preach at their will. With this answer they remained without all hope to remain there, and did incontinent prepare themselves for to departed from Manilla, and bought many books to carry with them, wherein was comprehended all the secrets of that kingdom. By reason whereof they might give large notice unto the royal majesty of king Philip. The which being understood by the viceroy, who had set spies to watch their doings, did send them word that they should not trouble themselves in the buying of books, for that he would give them freely all such books as they would desire to have: the which afterwards he did not accomplish: whether it was for forgetfulness or other occasion, as we have more at large declared unto you, we know not: yet did the viceroy send and demanded to see some of those books that the Friars had bought, who after that he had seen them, did return them again, and requested of them some writing of their own hands, who did accomplish his request, and sent them written in spanish and in their own language, the Lords prayer, the ave maria, and the ten commandments, who according unto the relation of him that did carry the same, said, that after he had read it, he made shows that he received great content therewith, and said that all which was there written was good.  
In the time that they stayed in this City, amongst all other things that they understood, to drive away the time was one, it was given them to understand that in one of the prisons, there was a Portugal prisoner, who was taken in a ship of the Iapones with others of his nation, who were all dead in the prison, and none left alive but he alone. Our people being very desirous for to see him, and to learn of him some secrets of that country, for that he had been there a great while, they did procure to talk with him, ask licence of the supreme judge and lieutenant unto the viceroy, who did not only refuse to grant it them, but did make diligent inquiry who they were that did give them to understand thereof, for to punish them, which without all doubt, should be executed with sharp and severe punishment. Yet our people would never tell them of whom they had it, although it was demanded of them diverse times, and with great entreaty. They had so great desire to know it, that they did use all means possible as it appeared in the boldness of their demands.   

CHAP. XXVII. There came news unto Aucheo that there was a rover upon the coast of Chincheo, which did much harm, and had sacked a town. The viceroy doth suspect him to be Limahon, and how that our people with Omoncon and Sinsay, had not declared unto him the truth.  
THe Spaniards remained in the City of Aucheo twenty days, in the order as hath been told you, without any hope, that the religious fathers should remain in that country for to preach the holy gospel, which was the principal occasion of their going into that kingdom. Upon a sudden there came news unto the city that the rover Limahon was upon the coast of Chincheo using his old accustomed cruelties, and how that he had spoiled and rob a town upon the sea coast. This news was throughout all the city, and appeared to be true, touching the effect of the dead: yet false touching the person, for that the rover was called Taocay an enemy and contrary unto Limahon: but a friend unto Vintoquian, of whom we have spoken of. But thereupon the viceroy and all them of the city were conformable in the suspicion that they had received, which was that our people, 
Suspicion of evil.  were come into that kingdom upon some evil pretence, and to see the secrets thereof, to some evil end, which was the occasion that from that time forwards they showed them not so good countenance as they did before.  
These news was not so soon come, but straightways the viceroy did send for Omoncon (who was then returned from his visiting) and Sinsay unto whom he had done courtesy, and given them the title of Loytias and captains, and he did reprehend them very sharply for that they had brought over people thither, and said that they had told him a lie, in saying that Limahon was besieged, in such sort that he could not escape, neither had the Castillos burned his ships, and how that all was but a made matter amongst themselves, and how that the Captains which they brought, and said that they had taken from Limahon, they had rob from other places, with other words in the same order, and said that the Spaniards were spies that came to discover the secrets and strength of the kingdom, and how that they had brought them thither by force of gifts that they had given them.  
They answered him with great humility in saying that in all that which they had said they did speak the truth, & that it should appear at such time as the news of the rover should be better known, the which if it shall appear to be contrary, they were there ready for to suffer whatsoever punishment that should be given them. The viceroy being somewhat satisfied with this their justification, bade them to departed, remitting all things unto time for the true declaration thereof. Then Omoncon and Sinsay came straightways to give the Spaniards to understand of all that had passed with the viceroy, & what they understood of him, which caused in them so great fear, that for the time which it endured (which was till such time as they understood the truth as aforesaid) they paid very well for their feasts & banquets the which they had made them. All this happened in the time that Omoncon & Sinsay were at variance, and spoke many injurious words the one of the other, discovering their intents & devices, whereby it plainly appeared that in all that which they had told unto the viceroy, they lied, but in especial Omoncon. Sinsay did dissemble, for he said and told unto all people, that by his order and industry, our people did fire the ships of Lymahon, and besieged him, with other speeches in the like sort, yet twenty days before his coming thither, all was ended and done, as appeared. The occasion of their enmity and falling out, was for that the viceroy had given unto Omoncon a title and charge of more honour than unto Sinsay having made betwixt them a consort that the reward or dignity should be equally divided betwixt them, and that the one should speak of the other the best they could, because the viceroy should do them friendship. This condition and consort (as appeareth) was evil performed by Omoncon being addicted unto self love, and seemed unto him that Sinsay did not deserve so much as he did, for that he was a base man, and of the sea, and he of the more nobility, and had the office of a captain. All this which I have said, was the occasion that the truth came to light betwixt them, and to cause the viceroy to suspect, that as they lied in this, they might also fable in the burning of the ships and besieging of Limahon.   

CHAP. XXVIII. The Governors of ●●e province do assemble together, to entreat of the Spaniards business, and are resolved, that they should return unto the Islands. They do see many curious things before their departure.  
WIth this grief and care remained the Spaniards certain days kept close in their lodgings, and were not visited so often as they were when they first came thither, which did augment very much their fear, till such time as they understood that the viceroy either of his own good will, or else by some particular order from the king & his counsel, had called together all the governors of that province of Aucheo to entreat of matters touching Limahon, as also in particular, why & wherefore the Spaniards came thither, & to resolve themselves wholly in all things requisite for the same. So when that they were all come together, which was in a short time, & amongst them the Governor of Chincheo, who by an other name was called Insuanto, they had particular meetings together with the viceroy, in the which they were all agreed to have a general meeting, whereunto should be called the Castillos, and to demand of them in public audience the cause of their coming (although notwithstanding they had given to understand thereof unto the Insuanto and viceroy) and being heard, to give them their answer according as they had determined: for the which upon a day appointed they met all together (but not the viceroy) in the house of the Cagontoc, and commanded to come before them the Castillas, who did accomplish their request with a great good will, for that they understood that they were called to entreat of their matter, either to tarry or departed. So when they came thither, they were commanded to enter into a mighty hall, whereas they were all set in very rich chairs with great gravity and majesty. The Insuanto seemed to be the chiefest amongst them, but whether it was for that he was the principallest next unto the viceroy (or as it was told them) for that it was he that sent Omoncon in the chase of the rover Limahon they knew not, but so soon as they were entered into the hall, they were commanded to draw nigh, there, whereas they were all placed, without bidding them to sit down, neither did they use any particular circumstances or courtesy.  
The Insuanto took upon him the charge, and demanded of the Spaniards (by means of the interpreter) what was the occasion of their coming into that country, and to declare their pretence, for that they would give unto them the resolute will of the viceroy, at whose commandment they were called and there assembled together. The Spaniards answered unto their request and said that their coming thither was to treat with them peace and friendship, by the order of the governor of the Philippinas, who had his authority from the king of Spain, with a particular charge ever since the said islands were discovered, who in all things that possible hath been, have showed themselves not only in words but in deeds, as unto this day the governor doth accomplish the same, in ransoming all such Chinos as they can find, or come unto their powers, and send them home free into their country with gifts, and not in this only, but in other matters, which is not unknown unto them: and more, that which lastly had happened in the destruction of the fleet, and the besieging of the rover Limahon, with which news they came ●hither to entreat and conclude between them and the Castilians a perpetual friendship: this was the principal occasion of their coming, the which if they could bring it to pass (as a thing that did accomplish both the one and the other) they would with the same news send word with the soldiers (who came with them for the same effect) unto the governor of Manilla, who sent us thither for that he might send the good success thereof to the king of Spain, and there to remain in such place as they would appoint them to study the learning of the language, and to preach & declare to them the holy gospel, which was the right way unto the salvation of their soul. Unto all the which they gave attentive ear, although with little desire to see the experience, as appeared, for that the chiefest matter in effect, they did let pass, and asked of them in what order they left the rover Limahon, and whether he might escape or not, and other questions touching the same matter which endured a good while without touching of any other matter in effect. The Spaniards answered as they thought, and supposed, that at that time it could not be, but that he was either taken prisoner or slain.  
Then did the Insuanto conclude his speech in saying unto them that they should return unto their own country to the islands, and at such time as they did bring Limahon, they would conclude all things touching the friendship they requested, as also for the preaching of the gospel.  
So with this last resolution they took their leave and went unto their lodging with pretence not to speak more of that matter, for that they saw it booted not: after they had given their censure: and again, as they understood it was by special order from the king and his counsel, and therewith they began to put all things in good order for their departure, the which they greatly desired, for that they saw little fruit to proceed of their great labour and travel, as also to see themselves clear of that manner of prison in the which they were, not to go forth of their lodgings without express licence.  
So from that day forwards they did procure with all haste for to departed, and gave the viceroy to understand thereof, who answered them and said, that they should comfort themselves and receive joy and pleasure, and that he would dispatch them, so soon as the visitor of that province was come to Aucheo, which would be within ten days, for that he had written unto him, that he should not dispatch them until his coming, for that he would see them.  
From that day forwards he commanded that sometimes they should let them to go forth abroad to recreate themselves, and that they should show unto them some particular pleasure or friendship. So one of them was carried to see the mustering of their men of war, which they have in a common custom throughout all the kingdom to do it the first day of ●he new moon, and is sure a thing to be seen: and they do it in the field which is joining unto the walls of the city, in this manner following.  
There were joined together little more or less than 20. thousand soldiers, pickemen and hargabus shot, 
The use of their mustering.  who were so expert, that at the sound of the drum or trumpet, they straightways put themselves in battle array, and at another sound in a squadron, and at another the shot do divide themselves from the rest, and discharge their pieces with very gallant and good order, and with a trice put themselves again into their places or standings: this being done, the pick men came forth and gave the assault altogether with so good order & consort, that it seemed unto the Spaniards that they did exceed all the warlike orders used in all the world: and if it were so that their stomaches and hardiness were equal unto their dexterity and number of people, it were an easy thing for them to conquer the dominion of all the world. If it so chance that any soldier should lack in his office, & not repair to his place appointed, 
Soldiers are punished.  he is straightways punished very cruelly, which is the occasion that every one of them hath a care unto his charge. 
Their mustering is one throughout the whole kingdom.   
This their mus●●r endured four hours, and it was certified unto the Spainiards that the same day and hour it is done in all cities and towns throughout all the whole kingdom, although they are without suspection of enemies.  
Five and twenty days after that the Insuanto had given the resolute answer unto the Spaniards, came the visitor thither: and the whole city went forth to receive him, who entered in with so great majesty, that if they had not known who he was, they could not have been persuaded but that he had been the king.  
So the next day following the Spaniards went to visit him, for duties sake, as also for that he had a desire to see them They found him in his lodging, where he began to make visitation of the city.  
In their courts were an infinite number of people which came thither with petitions and complaints, but in the halls within, there was none but his servants and sergeants. When that any came for to present his petition, the porter that was at the entry made a great noise in manner of an o est. for that it was a good way from the place whereas the visitor did sit, then cometh forth straightways one of his pages, and taketh the petition and carrieth it in unto him. At this time it was told him how that the Castillas were there: he commanded that they should enter, and talked with them a few words, but with great courtesy, and all was touching the imprisonment of Limahon without making any mention of their departure or tarrying. So after a while that he had beholded them and their apparel, he took his leave of them, saying, that by reason of the great business he had in that visitation, he could not show them any courtesy, neither to understand of them what their request and desire was, but gave them great thanks for their courtesy showed, in that they would come to visit him. He was set in the same visitation after the same manner and order as they found the governor of Chincheo, and the viceroy, with a table before him, with paper, ink, and other things ready to write, the which according as it was given them to understand, is a common use in all the kingdom, used with all judges, whether it be for sentence of death, or other matters of justice, as hath been told you many times before.  
Three days after the visitor was come thither, the Insuanto departed for his own house, with order that with all speed possible he should ordain ships wherein the Castilians should return unto the Philippinas.  
Likewise the same day, all those that were there assembled by the order of the viceroy departed unto their own houses. And the Spaniards were commanded for to s●ay until the full of the moon, which should be the twentieth of August, and that day they should take their leave of them: for on that day amongst them it is holden for good to begin any thing whatsoever. 
Superstition.  Wherein they do use great superstition, and do make many banquets, as upon newyear's day, as hath been told diffusedly.  
The day before the departure of the Spaniards, there came some in behalf of the viceroy to invite them, and made them banquet in the order and fashion as at the first: although this (for that it was at their departure) was more sumptuous, wherein was represented a comedy which was very excellent & good, whose argument was first declared unto them as followeth.  
There was a young man newly married, and there chanced difference betwixt him and his wife, he determined to go unto certain wars, the which was ordained in a country not far from that whereas he dwelled: whose acts and deeds was therein so valorous, that the king did show him great favour, and being fully certified of his worthiness, he sent him for chief Captain of the most importunate enterprises that might be offered, who did accomplish his charge with conclusion thereof with great content and satisfaction to the king and his counsellors: for the which he made him his captain general, and in his absence did commit unto his charge his whole camp, with the same authority that he had himself.  
The wars being done, and he having a desire to return unto his own country and house, there was given unto him three cart loads of gold, and many jewels of an inestimable price, with the which he entered into his own country with great honour and riches, whereas they received him with great honour.  
All the which they did represent so naturally, & with so good apparel and personages, that it seemed a thing to pass in act. There was not in this banquet the viceroy, but those captains which were there the first time: and another captain unto whom was given the charge to bring the Spaniards unto Manilla, who was called Chautalay, a principal Captain of that province.  
So when the banquet was ended, they were carried with great company from the hall whereas the banquet was made, unto the house of the Cogontoc, who was the king's treasurer and dwelled there hard by, of whom they were marvelously well received, with loving words and great courtesy: in saying that he hoped very shortly to see them again, at such time as they shall return with Limahon, and that as then their friendship should be fully concluded, and would entreat with them in particular of other matters. This being done he gave unto them a present for to carry unto the governor of Manilla in recompense of that which was sent unto the viceroy: the present was forty pieces of silk and twenty pieces of Burato a litter chair and guilt, and two Quitasoles of silk, and a horse. Likewise he sent the like present unto the general of the field, and to either of th●m a letter in particular: these things were put in chests which were very fair and guilt. Besides this he gave other forty pieces of silk of all colours for to be parted amongst the Captains and other officers that were at the siege of Limahon with three hundred black mantles and as many Quitasoles to be parted amongst the soldiers. Besides all these, he gave unto the friars each of them eight pieces of silk, and unto the soldiers their companions four pieces of each of them, 
To keep away the sun.  and to every one his horse and a Quitasol of silk, their h●rse were very good to travel by the way: this being done the Cogontoc took his leave of them, and willed them to go and take leave and licence of the viceroy and the visitor, that they might departed, for that all things were in a readiness for their voyage: the which commandment they did straightways accomplish, being very well content and satisfied of the great favours and courtesies, the which they received both of the one and the other: Likewise of the Totoc who is captain general, whom they also did visit & took their leave. These visitations and leave taking being done, they returned unto their lodging with great desire for to took their ease, whereas they remained till the next day following, wherein they departed unto the port of Tansuso, after they had remained in Aucheo seven and forty days.   

CHAP. XXIX. The Spaniards depart from Aucheo, and come unto Chincheo, whereas the Insuanto was: he commanded them to departed unto the port of Tansuso, whither he went himself for to dispatch them: at whose departure, he showeth great favour and maketh them great feasts.  
THe Spaniards departed from the City of Aucheo upon a Tuesday, being the 23. of August in the sight of all the people of the City, who came forth to see them with so great press and throng, as they did when they first came thither into the country: they were all carried in litter chairs, yea their very slaves, for that it was so commanded by the viceroy: the Friars were carried by eight men a piece, and the soldiers by four men a piece, and all their servants and slaves were carried by two men a piece. Look so many men as was to carry them, there went so many more to help them when they waxed weary, besides four and twenty that carried their stuff. There went always before them a harbinger for to provide their lodgings, & with him went a paimaster, whose charge was to ordain & provide men for to carry their litter chairs, & to give them for their travel that which is accustomed, & to pay all costs & charges spent by the Spaniard. After that they departed from Aucheo they made of two days journey one, which was the occasion that they came to Chincheo in four days. At their entering into the city they found a servant of the Insuanto, with order & commandment, that they should proceed forwards on their journey, & not to stay in the city, but to go unto the port of Tansuso, whither he will come the next day following. They obeyed his commandment, & made so much haste that in two days they came unto the village of Tangoa, whereas they had been before, & particular mention made thereof. In the same village they were lodged, well entertained and had great good cheer: from thence they went in one day to Tansuso, which was the first port whereas they did disembarke themselves, when as they came from the islands unto that firm land: the justice of the town did lodge them in the same house whereas they were first lodged, & did provide for them of all things necessary & needful, & that in abundance, till the coming of the Insuanto, which was within four days after, for that he could not come any sooner (although his desire was) for that it was very foul weather.  
The next day after his coming thither which was the third of September, he sent and commanded the Spaniards that they should embark themselves, for that it was that day the conjunction of the moon (although at that time the ships were not fu●ly in a readiness.) They obeyed his commandment, & the Insuanto himself went to the water side, in whose presence came thither certain religious men of their manner, & after their fashion they made sacrifice with certain Orations and prayers, in the which they craved of the heavens to give good and fair weather, and a sure voyage and favourable seas unto all those that sail in those ships.  
This ceremony being done (which is a thing very much used in that country) the Spaniards went unto the Insuanto, who was there with great company and majesty: he entertained them very friendly and with cheerful words making an outward show that he bore them great love, and that their departure was unto him a great grief. Then he requested them to give him a remembrance of such things as was necessary and needful for their provision for the sea, for that he would give order for the providing of the same, the which he did, and was with so great abundance that they had for the voyage, and remained a great deal to spare. He than commanded to be brought thither cates to eat, and drink, and gave it them with his own hands, as well the one as the other: he himself did eat and drink with them, which is the greatest favour that can be showed amongst them.  
The banquet being ended, he commanded them in his presence to go aboard their ships, because that was a lucky day, and also to accomplish that which the viceroy had commanded, which was that they should not departed from thence, until they had first seen them embarked. The Spaniards obeyed the commandment, and took their leave of the Insuanto with great courtesy and reverence, and with outward shows that they remained indebted for the great courtesy and good will that they had received: and therewith they departed to the waters side, towards the boat which was tarrying for them.  
As they passed by the religious men (that before we spoke of) they saw a great table set, 
Strange sacrifices.  and upon it a whole Ox with his throat cut, and hard by the same a Hog and a Goat, & other things to be eaten: the which they had ordained for to make sacrifice, which they do use in the like affairs.  
They being embarked in the boat, they were carried aboard the Admiral, which was the ship appointed for them to go in: then presently they began to stir the ship, from one place unto another with certain boats and cables which they had there ready for the same purpose. The ship did not so soon begin to move, but the religious men a shore did begin their sacrifice, the which did endure until night, ending their feasts and triumphs in putting forth of the city, and upon their gates many cressets and lights. The soldiers shot off all their hargabushes, and the ships that were in the port shot off all their artillery, and on the shore a great noise of drums and bells: all the which being ended and done, the Spaniards went a shore again unto their lodging: but first the Insuanto was departed unto his own house, with all the company that he brought with him.  
The next day the said Insuanto did invite them unto a banquet, which was as famous as any which had been made them unto that time. He was at the banquet himself, and the Captain general of all that province. There was abundance of meats and many pretty devices to pass away the time, which made the banquet to endure more than four hours: the which being done, there was brought forth the present which the Insuanto did send unto the governor of Manilla in return of that which was sent to him. The present was fourteen pieces of silk for the governor of Manilla, and ten pieces for the general of the field: he also commanded to be given unto the Friars each of them four pieces, and unto the soldiers each of them two pieces, and unto their servants and slaves certain painted mantles, and there with he took his leave of them very friendly, and gave unto them letters, the which he had wrote unto the governor, & unto the general of the field, answer unto those, the which they had wrote unto him, & said that all things necessary for their departure was in a readiness, with victuals for ten months put a board their ships, so that when as wind and wether did serve they might departed. Also that if in their voyage it should so fall out, that any of the Chinos that went in their ships, should do unto them any evil, either abroad or at the islands: that the governor thereof should punish them at his pleasure, and how that the viceroy will think well thereof: in conclusion he said unto them, that he hoped to see them there again very shortly, and to return again with Limahon, and then he would supply the wants which now they lacked. The Spaniards did kiss his hands, and said, that they had received in courtesy more than they deserved, & that in all things, there did abound and not lack, that they remained greatly indebted unto him for their friendship, and would give their king notice thereof, that whensoever occasion should be offered, to repay them with the like: and therewith the Insuanto departed to his own house, leaving in the company of the Spaniards five captains, those which should go with them in their company to sea, and also Omoncon and Sinsay, who were that day in the banquet, with the habit and ensign of Loytias, for that the day before it was given unto them by the Insuanto.  
Upon Wednesday which was the fourteenth of September the wind came fair, wherewith they hoist up their sails and went to sea: at their departure there was at the water's side the Insuanto and the justice of Chincheo to see them sail, the which Insuanto had conceived so great love and friendship of the Castillas, that when he saw them departed, he shed great abundance of tears, as was affirmed by divers Chinos that saw it, to which the Spaniards gave credit unto, for that they knew him to be a marvelous loving person, and humane, of a good condition, and of a gallant parsonage, and did exceed all other that they had seen in all the time of their being in that province.   

CHAP. XXX. The Spaniards depart from the port of Tansuso towards the Islands Philippinas, and every day they do harbour themselves in islands by the way, declaring what they saw in them.  
BEing departed out of the port as aforesaid, the Spaniards divided themselves into two ships, to wit, the two Friars and Michael de Loarcha, Omoncon and three other captains in one shippp. And Peter Sarmiento, Nicholas de Quenca and john▪ de Triana, Sinsay and all their soldiers in another ship, with eight other ships of war which went with them for their safeguard: they sailed forwards directing their course towards a small Island that was not far off, with determination there to take water for their ships, for that it had in it many rivers of very sweet water. Within a small space they arrived there, and it had a very fair and sure port, wherein might ride in security a great Navy of ships. All Thursday they were there recreating and sporting themselves, for that it was a pleasant Island, and full of fresh rivers. Upon Friday being the sixteenth of September, the day being somewhat spent, they made sail and took port four leagues from that place in another Island called Laulo, for to put themselves in a new course different and contrary unto that which they brought when as they came unto that kingdom, for that the Chinos had by experience proved, that in those months the winds were more favourable then in other months, and for the most part North and north-east winds: all that night they remained in that Island, and the next day following they sailed unto another Island which was called Chautubo, not far distant from that of Laulo. This Island was full of little towns, one of them was called Gautin which had five forts of towers made of lime and stone, very thick and strongly wrought: they were all four square, and six fathom high, and were made of purpose for to receive into them all the people of those little towns to defend themselves from rovers and thieves that daily come on that coast. These forts were made with battlements as we do use with space betwixt them: and for that the form and fashion of their building did like them very well, they were desirous to see that if within them there were any curious matter to be seen, wherewith they bent their artillery towards them, and went a shore. But when they which had the gard● and keeping off did see them coming, they did shut the gates, and would not consent that they should satisfy their desire, for any entreating or promises that they could make.  
They very much noted, that although this Island were rocky and sandy, yet was it tilled and sowed full of Rice, Wheat, and other seeds and grain. There was in it great store of Kine and Horse, 
Mine kine and horse.  and they understood that they were governed, not by one particular man, to whom they were subject, neither by any other amongst themselves, nor of China, but in common: yet notwithstanding they lived in great peace and quietness, for that every one did content himself with his own. Upon sunday in the afternoon they departed from this Island, and sailed their course all that night, and the next morning they arrived at another Island called Corchu, which was twenty leagues from the port of Tansuso from whence they departed. The Spaniards seeing what leisure they took in this their voyage, they requested the Captains to command the mariners that they should not enter into so many ports or harbours, for that they had no certainty of the weather, and not to detract the time, but to take opportunity before that contrary weather do come: for to sail in that order it seemed more for recreation then to achieve or obtain a voyage. The Captains answered, and requested them to have patience, for that in making their journeys as they did, they do accomplish and follow the order set down by the viceroy and Insuanto, who did expressly command them with great charge for to direct their Navigation by those islands with great deliberation and consideration, because they might in safety and health arrive at Manilla.  
The same day the North wind began to blow very strongly: in such sort, that they thought it not good to go forth of that harbour (as well for that aforesaid, 
The Chinos are fearful of the sea.  to be commanded to the contrary) as also for that the Chinos are very searefull of the sea, and men that are not accustomed to engulf themselves too far, neither to pass any storms.  
Near unto this Island there was another somewhat bigger, which is called Ancon, wholly dispeopled and without any dwellers, yet a better country and more profitable for to sow and reap then that of Corchu. The Spaniards being at an anchor there, understood by the Chinos that in times past it was very well inhabited, unto the which arrived a great fleet belonging to the king of China, & by a great storm were all cast away upon the same: the which loss and destruction being understood by another general that had the guard of that cost, suspecting that the dwellers thereof had done that slaughter, he came to the shore and slew many of the inhabitants, and carried all the rest in their ships unto the firm land, who afterwards would never return thither again, although they gave them licence after that they understood the truth of that success: so that unto that time it remained dispeopled and full of wild swine, of the brood that remained there at such time as they were slain and carried away as you have heard.  
This Island and the rest adjoining thereunto (which are very many) have very excellent and sure ports and havens, with great store of fish. These islands endured until they came unto a little gulf, which is five and forty leagues over, and is sailed in one day, and at the end thereof is the port of Cabite, which before we have spoken off, and is near unto Manilla.  
So when that wind and weather served their turn, they departed from the Island of Ancon, and sailed till they came unto another Island called Plon, whereas they understood by a ship that was there a fishing, how that the rover Limahon was escaped, whereas he was besieged at Pagansinan: the manner and form of the policy he used therein shallbe told you in the chapter following.   

CHAP. XXXI. They have news how that the rover Limahon was escaped, and how that he was in an Island there hard by: some gave judgement to go and set upon him, but they resolved themselves to the contrary, and follow the voyage to Manilla.  
BEing at an anchor in the Island of Plon, tarrying for a wind to follow their voyage, with great desire to come thither whereas they might understand what had happened unto Limahon, at the same time entered into the said harbour a ship with fishermen, they believing that he had been one of the islands, they went unto him and asked of whence they were, and from whence they came, and what news they could say of Limahon (who was known unto them all, either by some harm that they had received, or else by report of others that had received hurt.) These fishermen gave them particular and whole relation, by the which they understood that Limahon was fled and not perceived by the Spaniards: he escaped in certain barks, the which he caused to be made very secretly within his fort, of such timber and boards as remained of his ships that were burnt, the which was brought in by night by his soldiers, on that side of the fort which was next unto the river, and were not discovered by the Castillas, which which were put there with all care and diligence to keep the mouth that no succour might come in to help them. And towards the land there whereas he might escape, they were with out all suspection (they were so strong) and did not mistrust that any such thing should be put in ure, as afterwards did fall out, the which was executed with so great policy and craft, that when they came to understand it, the rover was clean gone, and in safeguard, caulking his barks at the Island of Tocaotican, the better for to escape and save himself, and they said that it was but eight days past that he fled.  
With this news they all received great alteration, but in especial▪ Omoncon and Sinsay, who returned unto the Spaniards and said, that the escaping of the rover is not without some mystery, and that it could not be done without the will and knowledge of the Spaniards, and that the rover had given unto the general of the field some great gifts for to let him go, for that otherwise it were a thing impossible for him to escape, being besieged as he was, although the Spaniards had slept: the Spaniards did give their discharge in such provable manner, that the captains of China were satisfied of the false opinion they had received, as afterwards they were fully persuaded when they came to the city of Manilla and heard the general of the field and other captains and soldiers that were at t●e siege. This Island of Tocaotican whereas the rover was mending and caulking of his barks, was distant from the Island of Plon, whereas the Spaniards were, only twelve leagues, and being by sea it seemed to be less, for that very plainly you might see the one Island from the other. The which with the great choler that Omoncon and Sinsay had for the escaping of the rover, as also with the fear they received in that which might happen unto them by reason hereof at their return unto China, which at the least might be to take away (to their great shame) the titles of Loytias, which was given them in that respect, did cause their stomachs and minds to rise, and to seek occasion to go and fight with him, for that it seemed unto them they should get victory with great ease, for that he was unprovided and wearied with the long time of his siege. Being in this determination there came unto them the Captain that was appointed general over them, and said that the viceroy of Aucheo and the governor of Chincheo had sent them only to carry those Spaniards unto Manilla, and to bring with him alive or dead the rover Limahon, if they would give him unto them, and that he would not digress from this order by no manner of m●anes, neither could they, if that they w●re so disposed, for that the ships were pestered with the horses: and again, their people they had brought with them▪ was more for to sail and govern their ships then for the sight. Moreover the sight would be very dangerous for that it was evident that the rover and his companions, would rather ●e all slain then to yield themselves in any respect, and for to put such an enterprise in effect, it were requisite to have both ships and men, and not to go so unprovided and pestered as they were. All which reasons being considered, they were all conformable unto the opinion of the General, and determined that so soon as wind and weather did serve, to set sail and to pass the gulf for to go unto Manilla, whither as they were bound, and not to come unto the Island of Tocaotican whereas the rover was.  
So after they had remained three weeks in that harbour detained with a mighty North wind, that never calmed night nor day in all that time. The eleventh day of October two hours before day, they set sail and went to sea. By reason of this great wind there was not one ship of all th●se that were in the port of Plon could go forth to give any notice unto the rover, of the going of the Spaniards, neither of the captains of China. sixteen leagues from the port, sailing towards the South, they discovered a mighty Island very high land, which was called Tangarruan, and was of three score leagues about, all inhabited with people like unto those of the islands Philippinas: they passed hard by it in the night, with a sliffe Norwe●t wind, which was the occasion that the ship wherein the Friars went, was constrained to go to sea, and the other nine which were in their company for their safeguard, shrouded themselves hard under the Island, by reason whereof they were so far separated the one from the other, that in the morning they could not see them. They were in great da●ger, because that night there was a great storm of wind, in the which they lost the rudder of their ship, and almost without any hope to escape the fury thereof.  
Being in this extremity, they commended themselves with contrite hearts unto almighty God, and put their ship before the sea, until such time as they had supplied their rudder, the which they did, although with great travel and labour: then straightways it was the will of God that this contrary wind was somewhat calmed and his fury abated, and a prosperous wind favoured them, so that upon sunday in the morning being the seventeenth day of October they discovered the Island of Manilla of them greatly desired, yet could they not reach unto it until saint Simon and judes day: by reason that they returned back unto the ri●er of Pagansinan to seek the other nine ships, for that it was concluded amongst them, that if it should so fall out, they to be separated in any storm, that they should come unto that river, and to meet together as they did.  
So they departed from thence unto the port of Buliano, & not entering therein, the captain Omoncon did set a man on shore, one that could speak the language of that Island, and gave him charge to inform himself of all that had happened with the rover Limahon, for at that time he could not believe that which had been told him. Until such time as he returned the ships being without at the sea, did play under fore sails, who did declare unto them the very same thing, the which was told them at the Island of Plon without faltering any point: the which caused Omoncon and Sinsay to receive much more grief than they did, when they heard the first news, for as then they were doubtful of the truth. The Spaniards as then suspected that they would have returned unto the firm land, and not have gone unto Manilla, but to have left them there all alone upon that Island. But it fell not out as they suspected: For although that Omoncon and Sinsay did make an outward show to do it, and said that they would send the Spaniards in a ship, for that as than they were out of all danger, and in sight of Manilla: yet was the General of a contrary opinion, and said, that for no manner of occasion that might happe● he would not differ one point from the order which was given unto him, and therewith they sailed towards the Island that they so long desired to see, and came thither the twenty eight day of October, ss aforesaid.  
So that from the port of Tansuso which is the first port of China till they came unto the Island of Manilla they were five and forty days, and is not in all full two hundred leagues, 
From the Philippinas to the China is two hundred leagues.  which may be made with reasonable wether in ten days at the most.   

CHAP. XXXII. The captains Chinos arrived with the Spaniards at the city of Manilla, the Governor and those of the city do receive them with great joy and triumphs, and after they had remained there certain days, they returned unto the firm land, being instructed and satisfied of many things touching our holy catholic faith, with great desire to receive the same.  
AFter that it was known unto the Governor of the city of Manilla and unto the general of the field as also unto the rest of the captains and soldiers of the arrival of the Spaniards, whom they with great care desired to hear of, as well for the particular love they dear unto them as also for to understand and hear the news from that mighty kingdom of China, to be declared by witnesses of so great faith and credit. They altogether went forth to receive them with great joy and pleasure, and likewise all such captains and soldiers as came in their company.  
They were straightways conveyed unto their lodgings to rest themselves of their long journey which they had by sea, for it was requisite and needful: for the which afterwards there was great feasts and banquets, which was made by the Governor, the general of the field and other particular persons unto the Chinos, in recompense of that which was done unto the Spaniards in their country.  
All which feasts did give them little content when as they did remember the flying and escape of the Rover, but in especial Omoncon and Sinsay, who continually & every moment did call upon the general of their fleet to make haste & to shorten the time that they might departed from the firm land, where giving notice unto the Governor of Chincheo of the estate of Limahon, he might give order that before he had re-edified and repaired himself they might take him (which is a thing most desired in all that kingdom). The general was very glad, and rejoiced of their good entertainment, and answered unto Omoncon & Sinsay, saying that by reason of the great storm and foul weather past, their ships had great need of reparation, and likewise the mariners to ease themselves, the which being done he would with all his heart departed.  
The general of the field was very sorrowful and much grieved for that the Rover Limahon was so escaped, and the more when he understood that he was suspected that he did consent unto his departure: for which occasion, if that the Captains had not been very much wearied with the long siege, and evil weather which happened in that time, without all doubt he would have followed him, and never to have left him till he had taken or slain him.  
Although they were fully persuaded that Limahon was so terrified with the great peril and danger in the which he was, and again with so small number of people, that rather he would desire to put himself in security then to offend or do any harm, neither to put himself in any place whereas he might receive damage of any of them to whom he had done so open wrong (who were so much desirous to be revenged) who for to prevent all that might happen (as after we understood) having made ready his barks and boats which he ordained in his fort, and put in them victuals for their journey, he departed with his small number of people, unto an Island far-off and unknown, there whereas he understood that none would go to seek him, and there he remained a time whereas he fell sick of a melancholic infirmity which grew by an imagination that he had, to remember in what state he was at that time, and how he had seen himself at other times feared throughout all the kingdom of China, which was an imagination sufficient for to bring him to his end: his companions were dispersed abroad, so that we never heard more of them.  
Now returning to our purpose, after that the China Captains had recreated themselves with the feasts and sports that was made unto them, and taken recreation many days, and tarried hoping that the weather would prove fairer to prepare themselves to departed. In the same time they did entreat of many things in particular touching Christian religion, whereof with great care they did inform themselves of our religious men, and told them some secret things that were unknown unto them of their country, for that they were strangers.  
So when as time and weather did serve, they did take their leave, with many signs and tokens of grief for to departed and leave the conversation of so good companions, and did promise unto them to procure all that was possible that the friendship begun betwixt them and the Chinos, should continue and persever, for that it was a thing that did content them all.  
Their general himself did take this particular charge unto himself, with a determinate purpose for to declare in effect to the Governor of Aucheo (whose private servant he was) the good meaning of the Castillos, and what principal people they were, and the ceremonies they used, with the which he was marvelously in love. Likewise he would give him to understand of the flying of the Rover Limahon, how and in what manner and order it was, and how that the general of the field and the other captains were in no fault thereof. This he would do in respect that if it should so fall out that Omoncon and Sinsay for their own credit should declare any thing against the Spaniards that was not true, that they might not be believed.  
Besides all this he told the Governor certain things in secret, how they might with great ease purchase the friendship they pretended. And amongst them all, one was, that he should make a supplication unto the catholic king, in requesting him to write a letter unto their king, and send him Ambassador, and such as should give unto them the light of the Catholic and Christian faith, with the which diligence ●here was no doubt, that not only the friendship betwixt the kings and their subjects should be established, but also the king and all his kingdom would receive the Catholic faith, 
The papists and ●h● Infidels ●eremoni●s much alike.  for that there are many ceremonies used amongst them which do much resemble those of our Christian religion, and again in their living morally, they do observe in many things the ten commandements of God's law, of the which in particular he did inform himself, so that the greatest difficulty was in the entering in of the preaching of the holy gospel, and being by this means over come, in a short time all the whole kingdom would turn christian's. And considering that in their worshipping, as they do worship all things in the second essence, with great facility they would change their adoration and give it unto the first, as most worthy, and unto whom it is their duties. The general did add more thereunto, and said that he was so much affectioned unto the faith of the Christians, that if it were not that he should be banished and lose his country, house and lands, without all doubt he would have been baptized: the which he could not do without losing of all, for that they have a law in their country, the which is observed and kept inviolably, by the which it is forbidden that none whatsoever, can receive any strange religion differing from theirs upon pain of death, without the consent of the king and his counsel.  
This law was made to take away novelties, and to live all in one uniformity of religion, with one manner of rites and ceremonies.  
This only was the occasion that certain merchants of China being affectioned unto the law of the gospel, were baptized at the Philippinas, and there do dwell at this day in the city of Manilla amongst the Spaniards, and are become very good Christians.  
So with these offers and with promises to be great friends unto the Spaniards, the General departed from Manilla to go unto the firm land, and with him the other Captains Omoncon and Sinsay with great hope that very shortly they should be all of one faith. So the one took their leave of the other with reasons of great affection and tokens of great love signifying that in any thing that should be offered they should find them friendly.  
They being departed, the Spaniards remained very careful in praying unto the divine majesty, desiring of him to direct all things in this their request, that it might be to his holy service, and also to inspire the catholic majesty of king Philip their Lord for to send his Ambassador unto the king of China, offering his friendship, and to admonish him to receive the faith of Christ, the which according unto the report of the Austen Friars that entered into that country (of whom we have made mention many times in this book with their companions) and also the General of China told them that there was no other means but only that for to bring their purpose to effect.  
This counsel with all the speed possible they put in ure, and sent unto his majesty one of purpose, and in the name of all them of those Islands to request him, and to declare how much it did import. They sent unto him this relation with many particular persons for to move his most Christian mind, for to send an Ambassador, as in effect he did, in that sort as hath been told you in the last Chapter of the third Book of this history, whereas it is declared in particular, and in what estate it doth remain unto this day. God for his mercy's sake direct all things, that it may be to his service and glory, and the salvation of so many souls.   
The end of the first book of the second part.   

The second book of the second part of the history of the mighty kingdom of China, In the which is contained the voyage that was into that kingdom in the year 1576. by the father's Friar Peter de Alfaro Costodio in the Islands Philippinas of the order of saint Francis of the province of S. joseph, and other three religious men of the same order, and their miraculous entering into that kingdom, and what happened unto them for the space of seven months that they there remained, and what they did see and understand of: all the which are notable and very rare.  

CHAP. I. The Friars of Saint Francis came unto the Islands Philippinas, and procured to pass unto the firm land of the kingdom of China, with zeal to preach the holy gospel.  
THe day of the visitation of our Lady in the year 1578. there came out of Spain to the City of Manilla in the Islands Philippinas, the father Friar Peter de Alfaro, who, went for Costodio of that province and fourteen more other religious persons of the same order in his company, and were sent by the king of Spain and his royal Counsel of the India's, for to be aiders and helpers of the Austen Friars, who until that time had been there alone in those Islands, occupied in the converting of the people in that country, and were the first ministers of the gospel, preaching the same with great zeal, unto the profit of their souls: of the which people, those Friars had baptized (when the others arrived) more than one hundred thousand, and the rest prepared and cathecised to receive the like. Because that at the first occasion that might be given, they might enter into the kingdom of China to preach the holy gospel. The which Friars when that they had been there the space of one year occupying themselves in the same exercise in preaching and converting the people of that country. In the same time they were given to understand by the relation of the self same Austen Friars, as also by many merchants of China, which came unto them with ambergris, of things to be wondered at of that mighty kingdom, and of the infinite number of souls which the devil had deceived and brought unto his service with false Idolatry. The which being by them well understood, they did burn with great zeal and desire of their salvation, and to go and preach the gospel, although it were to put their persons in whatsoever hazard or danger.  
So with this their great desire, they did many and diverse times communicate with the governor that was there at that time for his majesty, who was called the Doctor Francisco de Sandi, desiring his favour and licence for to go unto China in the company of certain merchants of that country, that were at that present in the port with their ships, offering themselves to get their good will, although it were to offer themselves to be slaves or otherwise whatsoever. And seeing that at all such times when as they did entreat of that matter, they found him but lukewarm, and that he did (as it were) but to detract the time, and feed them with hope. than they calling to mind, that the chiefest intent and cause of their coming out of Spain, was to enter into that kingdom, caused a new desire to grow in them, what with the contractation they had with the said Chinos, as well in conversation as in talk, and finding them to be a people of great ability and discretion, and of very good judgements, the which did greatly content their desire, they did persuade themselves that it was an easy matter to make them to understand the things appertaining unto God. So that they determined to put other remedies in practice, because that which they required with the good will of the Governor, seemed to be a large and long matter. So it happened that upon a time entreating of this matter, and having requested of God with great instance for to direct them the ready way which was best for his service, and for the profit of those souls, there came to the Islands Philippinas a Chino, who according as they did understand, was one of the priests & religious men of that kingdom (of the which priests there are a great number in every town) this priest went diverse times unto the monastery of the Friars, and did common with them of the creation of the world and other things which did open the way that they might declare unto him things appertaining unto God, unto the which he did hearken with great good will. And after that he had declared unto them in particular the mightiness and secrets of this mighty kingdom of China (whose conversion they so greatly desired) he very inquisitively asked of them matters touching the Christian faith, of whom within a few days after he desired to be baptized, for that he would be a Christian, being instructed before in many matters touching our catholic faith.  
Our religious men did accomplish his desire, the which was an incredible joy unto all the dwellers of the City, and a content unto himself.  
So after that he was made a Christian he remained in the monastery amongst the other, but yet would he never eat any other thing but cold herbs: 
The Spaniards rise at they midnight matins and whip themselves.  and he seeing that all the religious men did arise up at midnight to matins and discipline themselves, spending the greatest part of the night in prayer before the holy sacrament, he did not fail one point, but did imitate them in all their doings, with outward shows of a very good will. All the which did incite the Friar Costodio and all the rest of his companions to put in execution their great desire they had, according as it hath been told you. Whereupon he went once again unto the governor to entreat him by fair means that which before they had commoned with him of▪ and that he would procure some order or means, that those religious men might go to the kingdom of China to preach the law of God, offering himself to be one of them, with protestation that if he would not give them leave, they would procure to go without it, with that authority the which he had of God and of his superiors, for to teach and instruct these poor Infidels their neighbours: and this should be done with the first opportunity they might find or have.  
But neither this, nor yet the example of that good Chino, which was new christened was sufficient to persuade the governor to consent unto their request, but pesevering in his first opinion, he answered and said, that it was too timely, and that the friendship which they had with the Chinos, as yet was very small. And how that the fathers of S. Austen had many times attempted the entry into that kingdom, and yet never could obtain their desire. And how that the Chinos that did carry them did deceive them, and left them in certain islands, till such time as they heard farther news of the Rover Limahon, and of the return of the Captain Omoncon, who did carry them with the good news of the strait siege in the which they had the rover: and yet for all that they commanded them to return from Aucheo, without giving them any licence to remain in the country to preach the holy gospel, and now to attempt the same, was but to give occasion unto the Chinos every day to mock and make a jest of the Spaniards, and willed them to stay till such time, as it were the will of God to give way unto the same, which could not be long.  
This Friar Costodio understanding the answer of the Governor, persevering still in his first opinion, and did not go about to seek any means to accomplish their desire for the entering into the firm land, he straightways began secretly to procure by all means possible to attempt and accomplish that journey, although it were without the order and consent of the Governor (when that it might not be done otherwise) the which incontinent they began to put in ure, for that the Friar Costodio and Friar Steven Ortiz (who was a religious man that for the great desire he had, did learn the China tongue, and at that time did speak it reasonably) they both together did give to understand of their desire and pretence unto a devout soldier of their religion and one that they made great account of, who was called john Dias Pardo, who often times had made manifest unto them and said, that he had a great desire to do some especial service unto God, although it were to hazard his life in the same, who at that instant did accomplish his desire, and did promise them to bear them company unto the death.  
So with this conformity they went straightways altogether to speak with a Captain of China that was in the same port in a ship of his own, who many times did repair unto their covent, to ask of them things appertaining unto God, and the heavens, with show of a very good understanding, who unto their judgement did consent and accept all with great pleasure and delight.  
Unto this captain they did give to understand the effect of all their desire, requesting him of his aid and help in the prosecuting of the same. Who straightways did offer himself to accomplish their request and to carry them unto China, so as they would then give him some thing for to bestow amongst his mariners. The soldier john Diaz Pardo did promise to give them all that they would ask, and gave them in earnest certain rials of plate. And for that all things should be done in good order, and in such sort that the Governor nor any other should have any suspicion or knowledge, it was ordained amongst them that the Captain of China should with all speed dispatch himself and departed to the port of Bindoro, which is twenty leagues from the city of Manilla and there to tarry for them, and to carry in his company the Chino that was new baptized as aforesaid.  
The captain made haste▪ dispatched himself and departed unto the port appointed, & within a few days after the father Costodio and his company with the soldier his friend did follow them. But when they came thither they found the captain Chino in an other mind, in such sort, that neither gifts nor fair entreaty was sufficient to persuade him, to perform that which he had promised in Manilla, but returned unto them their earnest before received, affirming that for any thing in all the world he would not carry them, for that he know very well, if he should so do, it would cost him his life and goods.  
The new baptized religious Chino seeing that, wept bitterly, with discontentment to see how the devil had changed the mind of the Captain, for that in that kingdom the holy gospel should not be preached. The father Costodio did resolve himself to return unto Manilla and there to abide a better opportunity, as in effect they did, whereas they remained certain days, till such time it happened as followeth.  
Upon a day the Governor sent and called unto him the father Costodio, and requested of him, that he would let him have some Friar for to send unto the river of Cagayan, whether not long before he had sent certain Spaniards for to inhabit.  
The friar Costodio promised him one, and that he should go with him in company till he came to the province of Illocos whether he went, and that from thence he would dispatch him unto the river of Cagayan, according unto his worship's commandment, requesting of him to have in his company to keep watch & ward in that journey the ensign Francisco de Duennas & john Diaz Pardo the soldier his friend as aforesaid, with pretence to departed from thence unto China, as in effect they did, as shall be told you. The governor being very willing for to pleasure him, did grant his request. So with great speed he departed, and carried with him the foresaid soldiers, and for companion a religious man called Friar Austin de Tordesillas (he who afterwards did put in memory all things that passed with them in China) out of the which hath been taken this small relation. So when they came unto the Illocos, they found friar john Baptista and friar Sebastian of S. Francis, of his own order, occupied in the teaching and instructing the people of that province, which was the fourth day of june. The next day following they called a counsel, where it was concluded that all those that were there present would venture themselves for to go unto China, to convert those Gentiles or else to die in the quarrel. And the better to bring their purpose to pass, they thought it good to speak unto an other soldier that was there with than called Pedro de villa Roel, not telling unto him their pretence because they would not be discovered (but asked him in this manner) if he would bear him company & the other two soldiers, who altogether went about a business of great honour and service of God, and the benefit & saving of many souls, and that he would declare unto them whether he would go or not, without ask whether nor from wh●t place, for that as than they could not give him to understand, till time did serve. His answer was, that straightways he would bear them company, and would never leave them to death.  
So forthwith they all together with singular joy went to the ship wherein the father Costodio and his companion with the other two soldiers came in from Manilla to the place with a reasonable Frigate, although but with few mariners, & they not very expert. So being altogether in the ship, with all such things as they could get together in that small time for their provision in that journey, they made all things in a readiness to set sail the same day which was the twelfth day of the say● month of june. So after they had said mass and commended themselves unto God, requesting him ●o direct their voyage that it might be to his glory and service, they set sail upon a friday in the morning, with intent to go forth of that port, but they could not by no means possible, for that the sea went very lofty upon the bar, and contending with the sea for to get forth they were in great danger to have been cast away, which was the occasion that with great sorrow they returned into the port, whereas they remained all day.   

CHAP. II. The Friars and their companions depart from the port of Illocos, after they had committed unto God the direction of their voyage. They pass great dangers and troubles, & do overcome them all with the confidence they have in God, and came unto the kingdom of China miraculously.  
SO the next day after they had committed themselves to God with great devotion▪ they embarked themselves and made sail, and by the will of God they went out of the harbour although with great danger, & they carried with them an other bark a stern their ship, in the which they did determine for to set a land such Indians as they carried with them from the Esquipazon, to help them out of the harbour. the which they did not for fear they should be drowned. So when they were out of that river, they sailed towards the little Island, that was but one league from that place, and there they put the Indians a shore, & with them a young man a Spaniard that they brought from Manilla to serve them. So those which should go on that voyage remained there the same night, who were the friar Costodio, friar Peter de Alfaro borne in Sivel, friar john Baptista, borne in Pe●aro in Italy, friar Sebastian de sand Francisco of the city of Boecia, and friar Augustin de Tordesillas, of the same town whereof he hath his name, all these four were priests of the mass.  
The Friar Costodio would with a very good will have carried more of them, but he durst not for two causes, the one for that he would not have been discovered, and the other (which was the principal occasion) because he would not leave that province of the Illocos without such as should instruct them, whereas were many baptized: for which respect, he left some behind him, which afterward he would have been very glad that they had been in his company. There were three Spaniards soldiers that did bear them company, the one was called the ancient, Francisco de Duennas, of Velez Malaga, the other john Diaz Pardo of Saint Lucas de Barameda the third Pedro de Villa-roel of the City of Mexico. Besides these they had a boy of China, who could speak the spanish tongue, and was one of them that were taken at the siege of Limahon the Rover, and other four Indians of Manilla.  
They departed from this little Island, upon a monday the first quarter in the morning, which was the fifteen day of the said month of june, and sailed that way, so nigh as they could guess to be the way unto China, without pilot or any other certainty, more than that which God did show and put into their minds, with their great desire, which seemed unto them to comprehend and bring it to pass. This day the wind was contrary and against them, which was the occasions that they sailed but little. Towards the evening the wind changed and blewe at the north (the which wind upon that coast is very dangerous) which made them greatly afraid: yet was that fear driven away by an other fear much greater than that, which was that they should be discovered, and that they should be pursued by the commandment of the governor of Manilla: for which occasion whereas they should have shrouded themselves under the land, they wrought contrary, and cast about unto the sea in great danger to have been cast away, but it was the will of God that when as night came the wind did calm (which commonly falleth out to the contrary) but the sea remained very rough and lofty that they thought verily to have been drowned with the fury thereof, for it tossed the Frigatta in such sort that it seemed a whole legion of devils had taken hold on both sides of the ship forcing the one against the other, that it rolled in such sort that many times the half deck was in the water, so that the mariners could not stand upon their feet, 
They were in great peril  but were driven to sustain themselves by the ropes & cavels. But the religious men trusting in God, whose zeal had caused them this great trouble, did pray and desire him with many tears that he would deliver them out of the same danger: and not to give place unto the devil for to disturb them of their voyage and enterprise.  

The Friars used certain conjurations for that S. Antony was a sleep.  Those their orations and prayers did so much prevail, with certain conjurations which they made against the devils (whom they thought they did see visibly) that after midnight the north wind ceased, and began to blow at the north east, with the which the sea began to wax calm, so that they might make their way to be east North-east, for that they had intelligence, that that course was the shortest cut to the firm land. This wind which was so favourable unto them, did increase so much in two hours, that the sea waxed lofty, and caused them to forget the sorrow past, and constrained them (for that the ship was but small) to cut their mast over board, and to put themselves unto the courtesy of the sea, with little hope to escape the danger. But our Lord, whose zeal did move them to attempt that journey, did direct their voyage in such sort that the next day following it came to be calm, in such sort that they might set up a new mast in the place of that which was cut over board in the storm, and therewith to navigate forwards with their begun voyage. So upon the friday following at the break of the day they saw land, and thinking that it had been the firm land. of China, they gave thanks unto God, and rejoiced, in such sort that they had clean forgotten the troubles of the storms and foul weather passed, so they made towards it, and came thither about noon, but when they were a shore, they found that it was but a small Island and situated four leagues from the firm land, and for that it was so nigh, a far off it seemed to be all one thing. But when they came unto this Island they did discover many ships, which were so many in number that it seemed all the sea to be covered with them. The friars, with the great desire they had for to know in what port they were, they commanded to govern their ship towards whereas they were, who when they saw them & could not know them, by the strangeness of their ship and sails they did fly from them all that ever they could. The which ou● men perceiving & could not imagine the cause thereof, they were very much aggrieved and sorrowful, and the more for that they could not learn nor understand where they were. But seeing nigh unto them to the lewarde three ships, they made towards them, and when they were somewhat nigh they put themselves as the others did. In this sort they spent all the rest of the day in going from one port to an other, unto those ships for to infirm themselves where they were, but all this diligence prevailed them nothing at all till it was almost sun set, they entered with their frigate into a gut under the shore, whereas fell from a high rock which was more than one hundredth fathom by estimation a stream of water which was as big as the bodies of two men together.  
In this gut there was three other ships and they came to an anchor in the midst amongst them, the which being done they asked of them what country that was, but they answered nothing, nor made any semblance, but looked the one upon the other, & in beholding of the Spaniards they gave great laughters. In this gut they remained all that night almost amazed to see how those people were as though they were enchanted, and they without any light of their desire, which was to know where they were. So the next day following (which was saturday) very early in the morning they set sail and went amongst a great sort of Islands always bearing unto them, which they thought to be the firm land, being greatly amarveled to see the infinite number of ships both great and small that they saw: some were a fishing, and some under sail, and other some riding at an anchor. The same day about noon there happened unto them a strange & miraculous thing, and it was, that passing through a strait that was but a quarter of a league of breadth which was betwixt the firm land and a small Island, in the which was continually four score ships of war, set there for watch and ward, they passed through the thickest of them and were never seen, for if they had, without all doubt they had sunk them, or slain them, their order and commission is so strait given them by their generals of the sea, in the which they are commanded, that whatsoever kind of people of strange nations that they do meet upon the coast for to kill them or sink them, except they do bring licence from some governor of such Cities as be upon the coast, for that such as do mean to have traficks do send to demand the same, leaving their ships a great way at sea.  
This law for to watch and ward was made and ordained (as they do say) in respect of the Iapones who did enter into certain of their ports, dissembling themselves to be Chinos, being appareled as they were and speaking their language, they did unto them great and strange hurts and damages, as is declared in the book before this. So when they were passed this strait they sailed almost six leagues forwards into a very fair and great bay, following other ships that went before them, for that it seemed that they would enter into some port, and there they might inform themselves where they were, which was the thing that they most desired. When they had sailed about two leagues in this bay they overtook one of the three ships and asked of the people that were within her (by the interpreter they had with them) whether they sailed and what land that was which they saw before them. Then the principal that was in that ship▪ did put himself into his boat, the which he had at stern, and came unto the ship where the Spaniards were, the better to understand what they did demand, for they before by reason that they were somewhat far off the one from the other, could not understand the Spaniards demand but by signs. So when that he understood their request he answered them that it was the country of China, & how that he came laden with salt from the city of Chincheo, and went to make sale thereof unto the city of Canton, which was so nigh hand that they might arrive there before night. But when that he was entered into the spanish ship & saw the friars & the rest that were in their company & saw that their apparel & speech was strange unto him, he asked of them what they were and from whence they came, & whether they went (and when the he understood that they were Castillos, & of the islands Philippinas & came from the said islands, & were bound unto China, with intent to preach the holy gospel) he asked them whose licence they had, to conduct them unto the firm land. But when he understood that they had none, he asked them how they passed and escaped the fleet of ships that was in the strait aforesaid. The Spaniards answered that they found no impediment nor let. So he being greatly amazed as well of the one as of the other, entered into his own boat, and with great fury departed from their ship, and went into his own, but at his departure the Spaniards did request him, that he would conduct them unto the city, who gave them to understand by signs that he would, although he feared the rigorous punishment that in that kingdom is executed upon all such as do bring into the same any man of a strange nation (as hath been told you in the first part of this history.) So he fearing that if he should enter with him into the port, the fault would be imputed unto him, therefore at such time as he came within half a league of the rivers mouth, he cast about his ship and sailed to sea, and went so far that in a short time the Spaniards had lost the sight of them, who when they saw that they had no guide, they followed the course of another ship that they had discovered before the other did cast about to sea, for which occasion the other two ships that we spoke off before were departed. So a little before the sunset they discovered the mouth and entry of a great and mighty broad river, out of the which came two great streams or arms, and in them many ships entering in and going forth, and considering how they had the wind which served them well, they entered into the same, but when they had sailed forwards a quarter of a league, they discovered so great a multitude of barks, that it seemed unto them a grove, or some inhabited place, and as we drew nigh unto them, they not knowing our ship, all began to fly and run away with so great noise, as though they should have been all set on fire or smoke in that place. The Spaniards seeing that they were the occasion of this fear amongst them, they withdrew themselves into the midst of the river▪ whereas they struck sail and came to an anchor, & there they did ride all that night, and it was in such a place that none of all the other barks and boats came nigh them by a great way.  
The next day following which was sunday, the one & twentieth day of june they weighed anchor, and went under their foresail up that arm of the river, the which within a little while they had sailed, did join with the other arm aforesaid and was in that place of so great wideness that it seemed to be a sea, there sailed in and out many ships, barks and boats of whom the Spaniards demanded how far the port was off from that place, but they answered nothing at all, but with great laughter and wonder to see the Spaniards and their kind of attire, they departed. But when they had sailed two leagues up the river, they discovered a high tower and very fair under the which were at an anchor a great number of ships, thither they sailed right on. So when as they came right over against the tower, they saw on shore a great mighty crane to discharge merchandise withal, whereat lay many ships: but when they came to the point, fearing that some ordinance would be shot at them, they struck all their sails according unto the use & custom in the ports of Spain. They after a while that they had remained in that sort, & saw that neither the tower nor the ships did make any motion towards them, they turned and hoist up again their sails and went whereas all the ships were, & when they came amongst them, they let fall their anchor whereas they did ride looking when they would come to demand of them any thing.   

CHAP. III. The Friars and their companions came unto the City of Canton, they went on shore, and praised God for that it had pleased him to let them see their desire fulfilled. There comes a justice to visit them, and hath with them great communication.  
THe Spaniards seeing that they were there at an anchor a good while, & that there was none that came unto them to demand any question, they hoist out their boat, & went in it on shore, whereas they all kneeled down upon their knees, and with great devotion did say Te Deum laudamus, giving thanks to God for that he had so miraculously brought them into the kingdom of China, of them so much desired, without any Pilot or other human industry: the which being done, they began to walk along by the crane aforesaid, nigh unto the which were certain houses whereas were kept ropes and tackling belonging unto the ships: so they proceeded forwards with intent to seek the gates of the City, the which after they had gone the space of four hargabus shot, they found the gate which was very great and sumptuous of a strong and gallant edifice. The people of the country seeing them at their coming a shore how they did kneel down, and how that their manner of attire was different from the people of the same, & not knowing from whence they did come, did cause in them great admiration, and to join together a great troup of people, and followed them with great desire to see the end of their enterprise.  
This great multitude of people was the occasion that they entered in at the gates of the City, without being discovered of the guards & ports that were put there for that purpose, neither were they disturbed of the entry, by reason of the great throng of people, and strangeness of the matter. So after they had gone a while in the street (the people increasing more and more to see them) they stayed in the porch of a great house, there where as the justices of the sea, or water bailiffs do keep their courts of audience: and in the mean time that they remained there, which was a pretty while, the guards of the gate understood that amongst the press & throng of the people, did enter certain strangers contrary to the precept given them upon great penalties: they straightway with great fear that their oversight should be discovered, ran & laid hands upon the Spaniards & carried them back again, & put them out of the gate of the city, without doing any evil or harm unto their persons, & willed them to stay there in that place till such time as they had given the governor of the City to understand thereof, & he to send them licence that they may enter in again. So after a good while that they had remained there whereas the guards had set them, there came unto them a man, who was a Chino called Canguin, and could speak Portugal: who knowing them to be Christians by their faces & attire, did ask them in the Portugal tongue what they sought? the Spaniards answered him, that their coming into that kingdom was for to show & declare to them the way to heaven, & to give them to understand & know the true God, the creator of heaven & earth: and that they would very feign talk with the governor to entreat thereof. This Chino by & by brought to them a man that could speak very good Portuges, who as after they did understand both he his wife & children were christened, and although they were borne in China, yet did they dwell 3. years with Portugals that were inhabited in Machao which is twenty leagues from that city of Canton. This did demand the same question of them that the other did, & wherefore they came into that country? they answered him the same as they did the other: he replied and asked them who was the Pilot that brought them thither? they answered, the will of God, they not knowing how, nor from whence. But after they had sailed at the sea certain days, they came unto that place, that according as it was given them to understand, is the city of Canton, of the which they have heard declared many strange things: the Chino asked how the guards of the sea and ships that were in the strait aforesaid did let them pass: they answered that they saw no guards, nor any other that did trouble them their passage. This last answer did cause the Christian Chino greatly to admire, who being moved with a good zeal, said unto them, that they should return again unto the ship, and not to come forth until such time as he had given advice of their coming unto the Mandelines of the sea, which be certain judges appointed to give advice of all such matters to the governor, that he may command what is to be done therein.  
So the Spaniards returned unto the ship whereas they remained a good while, and passed great heat, for that it doth exceed in that port. So after a while they saw come unto a house which was near unto the gate of the City, a man of great authority, who was brought in a litter Chair, & much people came with him: he stayed at that house, and from thence sent to call unto him the religious men, and all the rest that came in their company: before them all came one that carried a table all whited, and thereon was written certain great letters with black ink, the which (as after they understood) was the licence that the governor of the city gave them for to come a shore, without the which there is no stranger permitted. The fathers did straightways obey it, and came forth of their ship with more company than they desired (of such as came to see them) who were so many in number, that although the sergeants and officers of the judge that sent for them, did beat them for to make way, yet was it a good while before they could come unto the house whereas the judge was, although the way was but short. So when they approached nigh one of ●he sergeants bade them kneel down before the judge, the which they did with great humility without any replication. He was set in a very rich Chair with so great majesty that they were greatly astonied to see it, and the more when that they understood by the christian Chino that he was not the governor, neither of the supreme judges: he was appareled in a rob of silk, close from above down to the foot, with the sleeves very wide, and a girdle embossed, and on his head a bonnet full brooches, such as bishops do use on their mitres. Before him was set a table, whereon was paper and ink: and on the one side and the other two ranks of men, as though they were to guard him, yet without weapons. They had all of them in their hands long canes of four fingers broad, with the which (as after they did understand) they do beat su●h as are offenders, upon the calves of their legs with great cruelty, as hath been told you in the first books of this history. All these had upon their heads a manner of helmet made of black leather, and on them great plumes of Peacocks feathers, with brooches made of metal, a thing used to be worn in that country of such as are executioners or ministers of justice.  
The judge bade the interpreter to ask them of what nation they were, and what they sought in that country, and who was their guide to bring them into that port: the which being understood by the religious men, answered that they were Spaniards, and subject unto the king Philip of Spain, and came thither to preach the holy gospel, 
Mark the friars con●fession of Images.  and to teach them to know the true God, creator of the heaven and earth, and to leave off the worshipping of their Idols (who have no more power of themselves, then that which is given them by him that doth make them): the which worship is known and received by his holy law, and declared by the mouth of his only begotten son, and confirmed with divine tokens from heaven, in whose guard doth consist the salvation of all souls. And to the last, touching who was their guide unto that kingdom: they answered, that it was God, unto whose will all creature are subject, as unto the true creator: all the which (as afterward it did appear) the interpreter did not truly interpret of the interpretation of the Spaniards: understanding that if he should truly interpret what they said, the judge would forthwith send them away, which would be the occasion that he should get nothing of them. So that he made his interpretation as it best seemed for his purpose, fearing (as after he did confess) that if he shunned declare the truth of that which the Spaniards had said, it would have been very odious to the judge, & afterward both unto them and to himself might be the occasion of some great evil: but to conclude, he answered and told the judge that they were certain religious men who lived in common, a sharp and asper life, much after the manner of those of that kingdom: and that going from the Island of Luzon unto the islands of the Illocos, in a great storm and tempest that chanced them, the ship wherein they were was cast away, and all their people cast away, saving they, who escaped by using great diligence▪ and put themselves in that small ship which came in company with another greater ship, without Pilot or mariner, for that they were almost all drowned, and setting sail in the best manner they could or knew, being helped and constrained by necessity, they let their ship sail, and go whither as fortune did carry them. So after many dangers and storms at the sea, according to the will of the heavens they came unto this port, whose name as yet they knew not. The judge asked them where they had that Chino that they brought in their company for an interpreter. They answered that he was in Luzon & captive unto a Spaniard: they took him and set him free, and he understanding that they were bound unto the firm land of China which was his natural country, he requested them to carry him thither, the which they did with a very good will, for that they had need of him to utter their desire, if need did so require. All the which the other interpreter fearing, that if he should tell unto the judge how that he was captive unto the Christians, he would be offended, and therefore he did falsify the same and said, that coming unto an Island to take in fresh water, they found the boy there, where he was captive eight years before, and came thither forced with a great storm, in the which was drowned a merchant's ship that was bound to Luzon, and he alone escaped by swimming, and so he came aboard the ship, in the which were the fathers, not knowing whither they went. All these untruths he did invent for to dissemble and go forwards with his knavish pretence, and would not declare the true intent of the Friars: the which he had decreed with himself how to do before the judge did send to call them. Moreover the judge did ask them what they brought in their small ship, they answered that they brought nothing but one chest and two little farthels of books, and an ornament for to say mass. This did the interpreter declare truly unto the judge, for that experience might be made thereof. So the judge forthwith commanded that it should be brought before him, the which being done, he caused it to be undone, and he perused every thing by itself, the which being strange unto him, for that he never saw the like: he made signs unto them that he received great contentment in the seeing of them, but specially of the Images they brought: but that which did best please him, was an Ara or sopre-altar of a black stone, the which did shine so bright that they might see themselves therein, as well as in a glass. These Friars did bring the same with them out of the kingdom of Mexico, whereas you have great abundance, but specially in the province of Mechuacan. So after that he had seen all, and saw that it was dry, without any sign or token that it had been in the sea, he called to remembrance the words of the interpreter in the name of the fathers, touching the storm wherein their ship was cast away, and how that they escaped by swimming, and put themselves in that small ship in the which they came: and considering of the same, it seemed unto him that they did fable in that which they had said: so that he did reply and asked if it were true that which they had before declared, and how it should be that their books and other things were not wet at the sea, which was an evident token and plainly to be understood that they had fabled and told lies, and so he believed they did in all the rest. The interpreter fearing least by that argument his falsehood would be discovered, he fell in talk a while with the Friars, ask & answering things very different to that which the judge had commanded him. Then he with a strange & sharp boldness answered to the difficulty proponed by the judge, & said, That as all merchants at such time as their ships are ready to sink and to be lost, they do procure first to save such things as are of most estimation, forgetting all the rest: even so these religious men did procure with great care and diligence to save those books and that ornament, which is all their treasure, and yet for all their diligences done they lost a great number more. All these fables and lies, after many days the religious fathers came to have the knowledge of.  
The judge did ask them if they brought any armour or weapons in their ship, they answered that they were no men to bring them, neither according unto their profession they could not wear nor use them, for that they were religious, and professed other matters contrary unto the use of armour or weapon, promising and avowing unto God perpetual poverty and chastity, and unto their superior prelate's obedience all the days of their lives. The judge returned and asked them if they had any money, and where withal they did eat and apparel themselves, and bought those books and ornaments: they answered, that all that which they had was given them by secular Christians for God's sake, whom they did serve, for that they should pray for them and for the salvation of their souls.  
The judge when he heard this, was greatly astonished for that the interpreter did declare the truth, and made signs that he received grief and had pity on them, although he gave not full credit to that which he heard, but said that he would go aboard their ship to see if they did say the truth, in not bringing any armour or weapon, neither silver nor merchandise. This did he straightways put in ure, and commanded them that brought him in the litter Chair, upon their shoulders to go thitherward: all those people did bear him company, as also a great number that were there joined together to hear the examination of those strangers, and also the Spaniards he commanded to go next unto him.  
So when that he was in their ship set in his Chair, his ministers began to search the ship in all places, both above and below, and could find nothing but a little Rice, which was left of tha● which they brought with them: they gave the judge to understand thereof, who looking upon the Spaniards, said, that all they that were in the ship might hear him: these do speak the truth, and they do seem unto me to be good people, and without any superstition: and without all doubt they do come and will be after the manner of our religious men, according as is to be seen in the uniformity of their aprarell, as also in their heads and beards. Then he began to demand of them certain things, more of curiosity then of suspection: who answered him, casting up their eyes unto heaven (for that their talk was thereof) & they saw that the judge did greatly rejoice and had pleasure therein, for that it seemed that they had the heavens for their God, as they have, by reason they did so much look upwards. After this the judge came forth of the ship, but the religious men remained behind at his commandment with his companions: and likewise he commanded certain of those officers that came with him to remain about their ship at the water's side, for their guard, more for that none should do to them any harm, then for any evil suspicion they had of them.  
All that day that the Spaniards were in their ship, the country men came down to the water side to see them, and that in so great number, that they did wonder to see them, and on the other side they greatly rejoiced to see so many souls there joined together, hoping that when it should be the will and pleasure of GOD, to give them opportunity, to baptize them all.  
The next day following in the morning, they saw another Mandelin or judge coming towards their ship, accompanied with much people, and with little less majesty than the other had, who entered into their ship, and commanded to search both above and below to see whether they brought any armour, weapon, or any other kind of merchandise, and seeing that they could find nothing else but their books and their ornament aforesaid, he commanded it to be brought before him, who did peruse the same, piece by piece with great admiration, and showed great contentment that he received to see their books and Images: although that which did most content him was to see the Ara of black stone, as was said before. Then he commanded one of the Fathers for to read in one of the said books, and for to write, the which was done before him with so great facility, that the judge received great contentment to see it. Then he asked them if that with the said letters they could write any other language that were different unto theirs. The Fathers answered yea, that they could write any language: and for a plainer proof, they wrote on a piece of paper certain reasons in the judges language, the which did cause him greatly to marvel, and said (turning his face to some of them that came with him) these men are not barbarous nor of any evil condition so far as I can see.  
With this he departed out of their ship, and went to give the governor (who sent him) to understand of that he had seen and could understand of the Spaniards in this his visitation, who straightways did send them a licence upon a table, that they should come on shore, and be suffered to enter into the city freely at their will.   

CHAP. four The Spaniards go forth of their ship, and go into the City, unto the christened Chinos house, and are carried before another superior judge in common audience, and many other pass with them.  
SO soon as they had their licence, they went forth of their ship and entered in at the gate of the City, although with great trouble, by reason of the great number of people that came to see them, as a thing never seen before: then they went to the christened Chinos house, he that served for their interpreter, who made very much of them, and giving them to understand that he had made a true report of all that they had commanded him, and did offer himself, to do so much with the justices that he would procure to get licence of the governor for them to remain in the country, and to give them a house wherein to remain and dwell: and did admonish them that at that time they should not deal for to make the Chinos Christians, until such time as they were better known, and could speak the language, and then should they do it with a great deal more ease. All these promises, with the falsifying of that the Spaniards spoke before to the judges, was to content the Friars (as in discourse of time they did understand) and only to get money from them, for that it seemed unto him, that it could not be but that they should have good store, for that they came from a rich country, whereas it was: and again to come about business of so great importance, about the which they should remain there a long time (as aforesaid) as they afterward did more at large understand. If that interpreter had declared in fidelity all that which they had spoken, without all doubt they would not have suffered them to have come on shore, else have put them in some prison, for that they came on land without licence, and to have showed them the most favour, they would have caused them to return from whence they came, whereas the guards of the strait (of whom we have spoken off before) would either in secret or public sink them at the sea, for that they were all greatly in hatred against them: the reason was that the Aytao, who is (as is declared in the first book of this history) the precedent of the counsel of war▪ and had understanding how that they passed through the fleet and were not seen, which was a thing that they all wondered at.  
This Aytao did forthwith make secret information of the same, and found it to be true, whereupon he did judge the Captains to perpetual prison, where they were well whipped, and did secrest all their goods: for the which all their kinsfolks and the rest of the guards had great indignation against the Spaniards, and would with great ease have been revenged on them, but that they did fear the punishment that should be done on them, after that it should be known. In the which they do execute their justice in this kingdom more than in any place in all the world.  
In the house of this Christened Chino they dined that day as they did many more afterward, but every night they returned to their fregat to bed: for that they durst not leave their things alone, neither to lie out of their ship, for that one of the judges had so commanded.   

CHAP. V The Spaniards are called before a judge, who doth examine them, and offer them great favour: he doth write unto the viceroy, giving credit unto the persons, who sendeth commission unto a judge called Aytao, for to examine their cause: the chief captain of Machao doth accuse them, in saying that they were spies, and doth entreat of other strange matters.  
Upon Saint john baptist day they were called before a judge, who (as after this did understand) was a superior unto the other past: but when they came whereas he was in place of audience, his ministers did strait ways command them to kneel down at such time as they came in sight of the judge, which was unto the religious men no small torment. He demanded of them the same that the others did, and they answered in brief, that they came to preach the holy Gospel, and requested him to give them licence to execute the same, and to remain in that City of Canton for to learn the China tongue, whereby they might give them to understand and know the truth of the heaven. The interpreter did falsify their words, as he had done unto the other judges, and said no more, but for so much that fortune and fowl weather had driven them into that port, they would live amongst them, although it were to serve them as slaves, for that if they would return unto the Island of Luzon, or by another name called Manilla, they could not, for that they knew not the way, neither had they any Pilot to conduct them.  
The judge had pity on them, and commanded that such things as they had in their ship should be brought on land, for that he would see them: amongst the which, the thing which caused him most to marvel at, was when he saw the Images, and Ara (or Altar stone) of black jasper stone (of the which we have made large mention:) he requested of the Spaniards that they would give them two Images, which when they had given them, they made show to esteem greatly of the present, for that they were things that they have not amongst them. He talked with them very friendly, & caused them to arise from the ground whereas they did kneel, and to show them the more favour, he caused to be given them to drink in his presence a certain beurage which they do use, made of certain herbs, and use it for a comfortable thing for the heart, & is commonly used amongst them, although they are not dry: and amongst the Chinos is a show of particular favour.  
This judge did more understand the intent of the Spaniards then any of the other past, for their interpreter had told unto him that they would remain in the country for to cure sick persons and to bury the dead, the which they could do excellent well. When the judge heard these words, he gave with his hand a great stroke upon the table that was before him, and said with shows of great wonder unto other inferior judges that were with him: Oh what good people are these as it seemeth: it would be unto me a great joy, if that I could of mine own authority accomplish that which they do desire, but our laws do forbid the same, and that with great rigour. All this did their interpreter tell them afterward. At this time there entered into the place of audience whereas they were, a man of China, one of the common sort, all embrewed with blood, crying out and making a great noise, without any consort, who prostrating himself upon the ground did complain of other Chinos with whom he had fallen out, and was beaten and buffeted in cruel sort.  
The judge when he saw him, did strait ways command his officers to bring the offenders before him, 
The Chinos most upright in all their judgements and in execution of justice  the which was done with a trice, & they returned with the plaintiff, bringing three other Chinos bound together by the arms, and as it seemed they were men of base sort. The judge incontinent made information wholly of all that passed, and condemned them without writing any letter, in twenty sotes or strokes a piece: the officers forthwith took them with so great cruelty as though they had been devils, & threw them upon the ground with their bellies downwards to execute the sentence given by the judge, and when they had pulled off their hose, they began to whip them upon the calves of their legs with a sot made of canes, in manner as hath been told you before. The religious people who were present all this while: and taking pity on these condemned men, fell down at the feet of the judge, and by signs and tokens did crave of him for the love of God, that his sentence might not be executed: who straightways commanded the executioners to cease, condescending unto the petition of the Friars, and did pardon the offenders fifteen sots or strokes of the twenty, wherein they were condemned.  
The judge did very much wonder at the poverty of these religious men, and at the sharp and asper apparel that they wear: but the chiefest thing that he did marvel at, was when that he understood how they had passed the fleet of ships that were put in the strait for to defend and keep the coast, and were never seen, which seemed unto him a thing impossible, except it were by permission of the heaven.  
So when this examination and talk was finished, he commande●●hem to return unto th●ir ship, promising them for to write unto the viceroy (who was thirty leagues from that place) and to give him to understand that they were men without any suspection, and that he might well give them licence for to come to his presence: upon which relation he would command what should be done, either to tarry or to go unto him.  
Within few days after they understood that the judge had accomplished his promise, for that the viceroy had committed the matter unto another judge called Aytao, whose office is for to examine and inquire the causes of strangers: the words of the commission were as followeth.  
I am written unto from Canton how that there are come thither certain men appareled very sharp and asper, 
The vizroies' commission.  after the fashion of our religious men in the wilderness, who bring no weapons, neither any other thing that might seem to pretend any evil intent: and for that they are thy charge, examine them with care and diligence, and provide to do therein that which shall be most requisite and convenient: giving us to understand the large and true relation of that which shall happen.  
The very same day of Saint john, the Spaniards being very merry and unmindful of any thing, for that they had all that day received the Sacrament: there came unto them aboard their ship or frigate the interpreters, and did evidently declare their evil purpose and intent (saying) that it was apparent what they had done for them, and in what peril they did every day put themselves in for their matters, and that it was reason that they should pay them for the same, and if not, they would not help them any more, neither interpret or take pains in their business: certifying them that if they did fail to satisfy them, that they should not find any that would do it with so great good will and diligence (as they should find by experience) and how that they had been put in prison if they had not been, for entering into that kingdom without licence: and for that they enterpreted for them with great courtesy and favour they had also been commanded to return back again from whence they came, which by their means, was the cause that the judges did entreat them so friendly as they did. The Father Costodio when he understood their intent, and did evidently see that it was wholly grounded upon gain: considering also the urgent necessity that they had of them, and not satisfying them, it was difficult to find any for to help them in that their necessity: of two evils he chose the best, and delivered unto them a pawn for their contentment, one of the two Chalices they brought with them, 
A sacred thing no doubt of it.  giving them great charge to use and keep it as a sacred thing, and dedicated for to consecrate the blood of Christ. The principal interpreter did take it with great content, and presently gave it a new master in selling it unto a goldsmith for as much as it was worth, who did melt it, and made things thereof according to his trade: yet they not being content therewith, and that it seemed unto them that those fathers could not but bring with them much riches, they inquired of the China boy whom they brought to be their interpreter, with fair words to know if they had any g●lde or silver, or precious stones, or any other thing of valour: but when they understood that they brought none of those things but only their books and some other ornaments to say mass, they straightways imagined in their minds and that with great care and diligence, to procure some way to get from them the other Chalice which they had seen: and the better to put it in execution, they repeated again unto the Friars that which before hath been told you, augmenting thereunto many words and reasons, affirming that they had spent upon them in giving them to eat twelve Taes more then the Chalice which they had given them did weigh or amount to, which was twelve ducats of Spain: having before given them to understand at such time as they did eat, that they did it of alms and for God's sake, and with so great content, that many times it happened when they saw that the Spaniards would not eat any dainty thing, but would feed and content themselves with base victuals) he would say unto them, that they should eat without any grief or care, that when it should so fall out that his substance did sail him, he would then pawn one of his sons to buy victuals.  
The father Costodio plainly seeing and understanding that their intent & purpose was wholly grounded for to get from him the other chalice, he answered that he had not for to give them, & how that he had given the other chalice in pawn of that which they had spent in victuals, and for their travel that they had taken for them. The interpreter did reply, saying, that if they had nothing, that they should seek it, seeing that they ought it for their victuals which they had eaten, and that it was the use of that country, that when any man did owe any thing, & hath not for to pay the same, for to sell their children, or else to become slaves unto their creditor they demanded the other Chalice that remained, for that the other which they had given than did weigh but sixteen Taes, which was but a small matter in respect of their desert, only for their travel in their enterpretations. This Friar Costodio did pacify them in the best manner he could, promising to pay both the one and the other, having opportunity for the same, and that they would procure it with as great care as was possible: and requesting him for to keep the Chalice (that he had given him in pawn) in great veneration, for that he did esteem it, much more for the consecration and dedication unto the divine Colto, then for the value of that it weighed: and more promised him upon his word to write unto the Portugals that were in Machao, signifying unto them their necessity, and to demand their alms & charity, and look whatsoever they did send them, being little or much, should be given him. Then the interpreter who had his eyes fixed upon gain, said, that they should forthwith write, and that he would give him a messenger for to carry the letter, and to bring answer of the same, as he had done the like not many days before. The Father Costodio did write unto the Bishop that was in Machao, giving him to understand of his coming, and of his companions unto the City of Canton, and how that his coming thither was only to procure for to preach the holy Gospel, and for to convert and turn to God those blind Idolaters. The which letter being received by the bishop, he made answer, praising their intent and purpose, animating them with godly words of exhortation, and therewith did send and demand the copy of such authority as they brought from the holy father touching that the which they pretended. This he did for that all the said country unto the land of japon was committed unto him by the holy father.  
Unto this letter the father Costodio answered, that having opportunity he would obey his commandment, and show unto him the faculty he brought, and also would himself in person go thither for to kiss his hands, and to satisfy all the inhabitants of that town (for that it was given him to understand that they reported evil of them, and said that they were vagabonds and lost men, and not true religious men, neither sacerdotes nor priests, and how that they had requested certain Chinos, which at that time came unto Machao, that at their return again unto Canton, they should tell the judges and advertise them with good advisement, how that there were ceratine Castillos come into their City, whom they did certainly know not to be of their nation but of an other, and subjects unto a different & strange king, whom they did believe to come thither for some ill intent and purpose in counterfeit attire, and came for spies from the Castillos of Luzon, and that they did believe that after them did come some army to do hurt in some part of that country, and that they should prevent it in time, for that if so be that any thing should happen, the fault should not be imputed unto them.  
All this the Portugese's did (as afterward they did plainly understand) for fear that the Castillos should take from them their contractation and gain which they had in that city: by which occasion their intent did so proceed forward, that they did certify the Chinos, that the chief Captain of Machao (who was put there by the king of Portugal) had presented a petition unto a City that was joining to Canton, advertising the judges of that before spoken of, and protesting that i● any harm or damage should come to that country in admitting the Castillos, that it should not be imputed unto them.  
But the judge understanding their evil intent, and that their accusations were more upon malice and envy, then of any truth, he answered unto the same, that he was particularly informed of those religious persons, against whom they did complain, how that they were men of whom they needed not to fear, and without any suspicion, as it did plainly appear when they did visit their ship wherein they came, where they found nothing, but only a few books, and some other things, which did more signify devotion than to make any war. This judge (notwithstanding the answer he made) for that afterwards the chief captain should not raise up some invention, took the original petition, and sent it with great security unto the viceroy of the province of Aucheo, that he might see & peruse it: who when that he had easily perceived it, and understood the intent of him that presented the same, and the innocency of them that were therein complained of, he sent & commanded the governor of Canton for to give them good entertainment, and not to permit any harm or hurt to be done unto them, & that he should send them unto the city of Aucheo, for that he would see them, for that it was told him that they seemed to be holy men, and although that they had their apparel in though same form, of the Austin friars (whom he had seen) yet their garments were of an other colour and more asper.  
The chief captain seeing that his intent fell not out well with the judges of China, he commanded to be proclaimed public in Machao that none should write unto them, nor communicate with them upon pain of banishment and to pay two thousand ducats. All this was not sufficient for to cool the minds of some devout persons of the religion of the glorious saint Francis, but were rather incited to offer their favour & help, seeing they had need thereof, but in particular the bishop did help them always with his alms, and also an honourable priest called Andres Cotino, who making small account of the proclamation did write unto them diverse times, although secretly, and sent their letters with alms, and many exhortations to proceed forward with their holy zeal & intent. Besides this they sent unto them a spaniard called Pedro Quintero who had dwelled there many years amongst the Portugeses, and having opportunity they sent him many times with comfortable things and letters, but not signed, for if happily they should be met with all, they might deny them to be theirs.  
Now returning to our purpose, the interpreter with desire to be paid of that which he said he had spent and laid out, did bring the messenger that he promised them to go unto Machao to carry their letters unto such religious men as they knew: in the which he craved their alms and help for to pay their interpreter, and praying them for the love of God to send them likewise so much as should redeem their chalice (who at this time knew not how it was sold and broken).  
This messenger went with all diligence and secrecy, and returned with the like, & brought with him that which they sent for, & other junkets of great content, the which came in very good season, for that one of the said friars called friar Sebastian of S. Francis was very sick of a strong ague, whereof in few days after he died, very well & with a strange desire to suffer martyrdom for God's sake. When this messenger came, there was come thither the Aytao who is judge of the strangers and was without the city, unto whom was committed the examination of the Spaniards, who after that he had concluded other matters commanded them to be brought afore him with great love & gentleness, for so the viceroy of Aucheo had commanded him.   

CHAP. VI The Spaniards seeing themselves in great necessity, having not to maintain themselves, they go into the streets to ask alms, the governor understanding thereof commandeth to give them a stipend out of the king's treasure, the interpreter goeth forwards with his covetousness & deceit: they be carried before the judges of the city, with whom they do entreat of divers matters: they do advise the the viceroy of all, who commandeth to send them to Aucheo.  
BEcause they would not see themselves in the like danger with the interpreter, as that which was past, they would not go any more to eat at his house, but rather to give an example unto those of the city, they went forth every day by two and two to ask alms: and although they were infidels, yet they gave them with great contentment and joy, because it was a rare thing in that kingdom to see them beg in the streets, by reason (as hath been told you) that they have no poor folk, neither are they permitted if there be any to ask in the streets nor in their temples. When that the Governor understood thereof, and how that they did it for pure necessity, and had no other ways to maintain themselves, he commanded to be given them every day a certain stipend upon the kings cost, the which was with so great abundance, that maintaining the soldiers that came with them and all the rest, yet had they to spare, for that their stipend was given them in money, which was six Mayesses of silver, whereof they had to spare, for that all things in that country is so good cheap, (as hath been told you in many places.)  
Their interpreter seeing the good news that was brought from Machao for the Spaniards, by a bill that a certain devout man had sent him in secret, whereupon would be given unto him all that was needful, with protestation to pay all that should be given unto them although it should amount unto a great sum (with the which he wrote a letter unto the Friar Costodio of great comfort, in strengthening him and all the rest to persever in their intent which God had put in their minds for the salvation of those souls) the Interpreter (I say) began to imagine, that for to profit himself it was convenient for to delate and detract the departure of the Spaniards, and did exact upon them every day in the buying of their victuals, the half of the money that was given them.  
So upon a day he came very much out of order and feigned that the Aytao had commanded that they should forthwith departed out of the kingdom: but yet notwithstanding he would present a petition in their name, saying, that for as much as time did not serve them to navigate, neither was their ship in plight for to make their journey, that it would please them to get them a house whereas they might remain three or four months, in the which time they might provide them of all things necessary for their voyage, and possible it may so fall out that in this time, they seeing their manner of living to be good, and to show good examples they may let them to remain in the country liberally and to learn the language, and then begin to preach and declare the right way unto heaven. All this he spoke with great dissimulation, for to profit himself, for he knew very well that the Aytao had willed him to tell them, that they could not remain in that country with the pretence they had, for that there was a law ordained to the contrary, without express licence from the king, the which will last of all be granted unto the Spaniards or Portugeses, for that there is a prophesy amongst them, spoken by the mouth of the devil, and esteemed amongst them for a very truth, for that other things which he spoke when that was spoken hath been verified, in the which he doth pronounce, 
A prophesy.  that a time shall come, that they shall be subject unto a nation whose men shall have great beards and long noses, and sharp broad eyes (as we would say cats eyes (in the which they do differ from them. For it is a great marvel to find a man amongst them, with more than twenty hears in his beard, little more or less, flat noses, and their eyes very little, so that when they will mock a man, or do him any injury by word, they will call him, cats eyes.  
Now for that the desire of the Spaniards was nothing else but to remain in that country, for to bring to effect their good zeal, they did gratify the interpreter for the great favour he showed them, and did earnestly entreat him for to present the petition, thinking thereby their desire should be understood, and God's cause justified, so that they first would enter into them by the way of preaching. He presented the petition when that all the judges were together, who had great pity and compassion over the Spaniards, and willed that they should come before them, for that they would see and understand the root and foundation of their will. They obeyed their commandment with great joy, and when they were come into the hall, one of the judges, who was superior over all the rest, and a man of great authority, did ask of them by way of the interpreter, what was their pretence in that they did ask a house to dwell in, the Friar Costodio did answer, that he did desire it for to learn the language well, by which means they might the better learn them to know the true God, and to set them in the true way to go and glory with him, because it was his office and his profession.  
The Interpreter told all this truly, the which few times before he had done, as hath been told you. Then the judge in name of all the rest, said, that in that their demand they could not grant, neither had they any such authority to give licence. This being spoken, the Interpreter replied, without tarrying to hear what the Spaniards would say, and said, that at least ways they would give them licence to remain there till such time as the Portugeses did come thither for to lad their ambergris, which would be within few days, with whom they would go, for that they were all of one law & faith. The judge did again ask them if that the Portugeses & Spaniards were all one. The father Costodio answered, that in religion & laws there was no difference, but the one were subjects to one king & the other to another, although they were kinsmen and tha● very nigh. This last petition seemed to the judge to be more reasonable and just than the first, and that they might grant it them with less difficulty, although he answered them and said, that he could not grant it unto them, but he would write unto the viceroy for to grant it them. For that the Portugals would be there at the farthest within four or five months, & that in the mean time he would give them a provision that they may go freely abroad, and none to hurt nor harm them.  
So the next day following which was the second of August he did accomplish his word and promise and sent unto the viceroy their petition, and therewithal his judgement and of all the rest that were there with him, what they thought touching that matter. The answer stayed many days after & came not, but in the end there came a commandment from the viceroy unto the governor of Canton, in the which he willed that the Spaniards should be sent unto Aucheo whereas he was, and that there should be carried with them all such things as they brought with them, which was their books and ornaments. The judge did straightways send & gave them to understand of this new order, because they should make themselves ready for to travail: the which they did with great joy and diligence, as you shall understand in the chapter following.   

CHAP. VII. The Spaniards take their journey towards Aucheo, & declare what happened in the way thitherward.  
THe next day following, which was the sixteenth day of August, the Spaniards departed from Canton towards Aucheo to see the viceroy, with great hope and confidence that he would give them licence for that which they pretended. But at their departure they would have left there two Indians for to keep their ship or frigate: but the judges that were present, said, that it was not needful for them to have any such care, for that they would take the care upon them to see all things in good order. So presently they sent certain writing in papers, and commanded them to be glued upon the hatches of their ship in such sort that they could not be open, but they must be perceived. Then presently was brought for the Spaniards four barks very gallant and wide with very fair galleries and windows, and being embarked, they charged them very much to make all haste possible to accomplish the commandment of the viceroy, and sent with them convenient persons for to be their guides, and to give them all things necessary for their journey. They travailed continually in a mighty river against the current, in the which they did see many things worthy to be noted for the space of four days that their journey endured.  
There was alongst the river side many Cities and towns very great, which were so many in number that they could not make any memory of them, by reason that they passed many of them by night. To observe the tides, and to avoid the heat, which was great upon the water. alongst the river side (whereas it was not inhabited) was full of corn fields, whereas they saw them go to plough with many Bufalos much different unto the use of Spain, for that one alonely buff did draw the plough, with one upon his back, who did govern and guide him with great ease whether he would they should go, with a cord made fast to a ring at his nose which served in steed of a bridle.  
They saw also flocks of geese, in the which were more than plenty thousand, with whom they did weed and took away the grass which did grow amongst the rice, and other grain and seeds, driving them in the midst of their fields, & it seemed that they had the use of reason, considering how they did separate and make a distinction betwixt the good seed and the bad, and the great care they had to feed and do no harm, neither to pluck up the good plant, which was a thing that they wondered at above all the rest. All the country is very populous, and the towns one so near an other, that it may better be said, to be all one town and not many, and might with more property be called the City of China, and not the kingdom of China. In all the whole country there is not one foot of ground unoccupied, by reason of the great abundance of peo-people that there is, and they permit amongst them no idle people (as more at large it hath been declared unto you) and the country being fertile, is the occasion that they have all things in great abundance and at a low price.  
Now to return to their voyage the which they made very well and with great recreation as well in the towns alongst the river side, as upon the river, whereas they were cherished with great care: in the end of four days, which was the twentieth day of August, they entered into the suburbs of the City of Aucheo, but so late that they were constrained to remain there till the next day: whereas they found all things necessary and in good order, aswell for their bedding as for their supper, to pass away the night. The next day very early in the morning he that was their conduct and guide made great haste, for to go and see what the viceroy would command.  
They travailed through a great and long street, which seemed unto them to be more than a league, and thought that they had gone through the city. So when they had passed that street they came unto the gate of the city, and there they understood that the rest which they had gone and passed was the suburbs. The mightiness of this city, and the great admiration they had, with the multitude of people, & a wonderful great bridge the which they passed, with many other things of the which they made mention, we do let pass, for that it is declared unto you more at large in the relation given by the Augustin friars in the book before this, at their entry into the said city.  
So when they came to the palace of the viceroy, he was not stirring, neither was the gate open, for as it hath been told you, it is open but once a day. Their guide seeing that it would be somewhat long before that they would open it, he carried the Spaniards into a court of an other house, which was joining unto that of the viceroy.  
In the mean while they were there, came all the judges to sit in audience, but when they understood of the coming of the strangers, they commanded that they should be brought before them: who greatly marveled at the aspernesse of their apparel, and not at any other thing, for that they had seen there before the Austin friars. Straightways the gate of the palace was open with great noise of artillery and musical instruments, as trumpets, bagpipes, sackebuttes and hoybukes, with such a noise that it seemed the whole city would sink. At the entry in the first court, there were many soldiers armed, and had hargubushes and lances, and in a very good order. In an other court more within, which was very great, & railed round about with timber, painted black and blue, which a far off seemed to be iron, and was in height a man's stature, there they saw also many other soldiers, placed in the same order, and in livery as the others were, but they seemed to be men of a gallanter disposition. When they came into this court, there was brought unto them a commandment from the viceroy, in the which they were commanded to return and come thither again in the after noon, for that he could not speak with them before, by reason of certain business he had with the Lords of the counsel, which could not be deferred. With this answer they departed out of the palace, and returned again in the after noon, as they were commanded, and into the same court aforesaid, out of the which they were carried into a mighty great hall, very richly hanged and adorned, at the end thereof was three doors, that in the midst was great, but the other two but small, the which did correspond unto other three doors, that were in an other hall more within, wherein was the viceroy, right over against the door in the midst, in at that which there is none permitted to enter nor go forth. He was set in a marvelous rich chair wrought with ivory and gold, under a canopy or cloth of state all of cloth of gold, & in the midst was embroidered the king's arms, which were (as we have said) certain serpents wound in a knot together. He had also before him a table whereon were two candles burning, for that it was somewhat late, and a standish with paper. Right before the viceroy the wall was very white, whereon was painted a fierce dragon, who did throw out fire at his mouth, nose, and eyes, a picture (as was given them to understand) that all the judges of that country commonly hath it painted before their tribunal seats whereas they sit in justice, and is there to the intent to signify unto the justice, the fierceness that he should have sitting in that seat to do justice uprightly without fear or respect to any. The order they have in giving audience is with the ceremonies in all points as it hath been showed you in the relation of the fathers of S. Augustin. All people when they talk with the viceroy are kneeling on their knees, although they be judges or Loytias, as the Friars did see them many times.  
This day they seeing that the Spaniards remained looking always when they should be commanded to enter in: the viceroy gave audience unto the scriveners or notaries, to certify himself if they did their offices well, & commanded fifty of them at that present to be sotted or beaten for that they were found culpable in their detaining of matters, and others the like for that they had received gifts & bribes of their clients▪ the wh●ch is prohibited and forbidden under gréeveous penalties, for that the king doth give unto them all sufficient stipend for their maintenance, for that they should not encroach nor demand any thing of their clients. The sets or stripes which were given them were with great cruelty, and executed with certain ca●es, and in that order as in other places it hath been told you. The viceroys guard were in number more than two thousand men, placed all on a rank, all appareled in one livery of silk, & on their heads helmets of iron very bright & glistering, and every one his plume of feathers. These soldiers made a lane from the gate of the hall there whereas the viceroy was, unto the principal gate of the palace whereas they did first enter. Those which were in the hals & upon the stairs had swords girt unto them & they in the courts had lances, and betwixt every one of them a hargubusher. All this guard (as was given them to understand) were Tartaros and not Chinos: but the reason wherefore they could not learn, although they did inquire it with diligence.   

CHAP. VIII. The Spaniards are brought before the viceroy: he asketh of them certain questions, and doth remit them unto the Timpintao his deputy, who receiveth them well, and giveth them good speeches.  
AT that present came forth a servant of the viceroys, a man of authority, and made sign unto the Spaniards to enter into the hall instructing them that at the first entry they should kneel down on their knees: the which they did presently, from that place unto the seat of the viceroy was more than a hundredth foot in length: yet did the viceroy himself make signs with his hand that one of the religious men should come nearer him, the which the father Costodio did, and kneeled down again when he drew nigh unto the table that was before him. The viceroy did consider and behold him a good while, and that with great gravity & majesty, and then asked him of whence he was, and what he came to seek in that kingdom, into the which none might come upon pain of death, without express licence of some of the judges alongst the sea coast. The father Costodio answered, that he and the rest of his companions were Spaniards and that they were come into that kingdom, moved with the zeal of God, for the salvation of their souls, & for to preach the holy gospel, & show them the way unto heaven. Having declared the interpreter this (although they did not understand whither he did use fidelity in the declaration or not, but rather by that, which the viceroydid forthwith demand, it is to be believed, that he did it with falsehood as he had done many times before) for the without replying unto that which he had said of the preaching of the gospel, he asked them what ambergris they brought with them: the said father answered, that they brought none, for that they were not men that did deal in any ambergris, but in declaring of things appertaining to heaven, & to direct their souls to that place. Hearing this answer (or that which the interpreter would imagine to be better for his purpose) the viceroy did bid them departed, & commanded them to return again the next day and to bring with them their Images, & the other things whereof he was certified from Canton, that were found in their frigate, for that he would see it all They did accomplish his commandment, & returned the next day in the morning at such time as it was told them that the palace gates would be opened: the which was done in the same manner & order as the day before, with the noise of music and artillery as aforesaid. So when that the viceroy was given to understand how that the Castillos were come, he commanded that one of them with alonely the interpreter should enter there whereas he was, and to bring in such things as he had commanded to be brought. the which was presently accomplished. He straightways began to look upon the images every one by itself, and the books: & made a stay betwixt every one, to consider well thereof, and made a show of great content he received in the sight of them. Although above all the rest, the Ara of black jasper did most content him, and caused a marvelous strangeness in the rest of the judges that had seen it. All this while was the father Costodio upon his knees, and the interpreter by him, and he never asked of them any question, neither did they say any thing. They that did bring those things unto him for to see them, seemed to be principal and ancient men, who when they gave it him into his hands they did it kneeling.  
So after that he had seen them all at his pleasure, he commanded to put them again in the place that they were taken out, and made sign unto the father Coistodio & to the interpret●r that they should departed and to carry with them all those things which they had brought. One of the ancient men that were with him, did go forth with the Spaniards, & told them when they came into the second hall, that the viceroy did rejoice much to see them, and all those which they brought, & said that they should repair unto the Timpintao, who was his deputy, & he would dispatch all such matters as were asked of the viceroy by petition following the same till it was concluded, & that he would consult with the viceroy, who would set down such orders as should be observed. They straightways did put in execution this order, & coming unto the house of the deputy unto the viceroy, the which was very great & fair, they found that he had a guard very little less than that of the viceroy, & almost with as great majesty. So after they had remained in the court a good while, abiding his commandment (to whom it was given to understand that the viceroy had sent them unto him) he commanded them to ascend into the place whereas he was, which was into a hall very well dressed, in the which was almost all such things as they had seen in the hall of the viceroy, and he himself in the same manner sat in a rich chair, with a table before him. He commanded to take out those things which they brought in their chests, and did behold them with great consideration piece by piece, as the viceroy had done, and rejoicing much to see the Images, he did demand of them with curiosity the signification of some of them, but in especial a crucifix, that after that he had considered with great attention, he asked what man was that, which was upon the cross, and what those letters did signify that were tituled over his head. But when the father Costodio had declared it unto him, he began to laugh thereat, as though he had heard some foolish fable. He came and féeled the habits of our religious men, and made signs of great wonder to see the aspernesse thereof.  
The father Costodio seeing his affability, and as it seemed by outward show that he did very much pity them, he requested to help and favour him with the viceroy, & that he would ask licence that they might remain and dwell in that country, in any place where his pleasure was to appoint, for that they were men without any hurt, and would put all their care and diligence to do works of charity, and to procure the men might go to enjoy the happy estate to the which they were borne.  
The interpreter dealt here in his office with as great fidelity as at other times, in saying that which the fathers did request of him, was that he should be a means unto the viceroy that he would let them to remain in that country two or three months, for that as then it was an ill time to navigate the sea, and that without great danger of their lives they could not return unto the islands Philippinas. The judge answered that they should not fear, but remain with content, for that he would procure that there should be given them a house for those three or four months, with a commandment that none whatsoever should do them any harm. The Interpreter told them that the deputy to the viceroy was very glad that they would remain in that country, for that they seemed unto him men of good example & necessary in their common weal, & that they might freely learn the language (as they said) for to show & instruct them the way unto heaven. The Spaniards having heard this, if made them very much to marvel, & from that time forwards they had good hope to prosecute that which they did pretend. So with this & with great spiritual & corporal joy they took their leave of the judge, and went unto their lodging, whereas they gave thanks unto God, for the good directing of their business, & did pray unto him to help them, that they might see a final conclusion of their desire. All this falseness that the interpreter did use, was by the divine permission (as afterwards they did gather) when that by himself they were put out of all doubt, and did declare what he did pretend by the way & order he took. For without all doubt, if that the judges had plainly understood that they would have there remained, they would not have suffered them to have entered and seen the country. And the viceroy being advertised thereof, would have caused them to departed in that troublesome wether, whereas possible they should have been all drowned, for that the months of july, August and September, in that country are ordinarily full of storms and tempests.   

CHAP. IX. The Spaniards remained certain days in Aucheo: they go to visit the beauty of that city, but in especial the captain general of the sea, who was so affectioned unto the Ara of black stone they brought, that he did with all care and diligence procure it of gift.  
ALl the time that they remained in Aucheo, they did occupy themselves in visiting of the principals of that court, amongst whom he that did most rejoice to see them was the captain general of the men of war of that province, who after that he had entreated them very friendly and lovingly, he desired them that they would return the next day to visit him, & to bring with them the Ara of black stone, which they had showed unto the viceroy, that he might see it, for that he had praised it very much: and to bring also of their painted Images. They did obey his commandment, and came unto him when that he was at dinner with great majesty. Then so soon as he had dined he commanded that they should enter into the hall there where he was. The interpreter when he drew nigh unto him did kneel down, and made signs unto the Spaniards to follow him and do the like, but the captain commanded them to arise & to cover their heads, & did very much behold the Ara or (altar stone) making a show of great admiration to behold it: he demanded of the Friars many things of great curiosity, and asked them if they would sell him that stone, and he would give them for it what they would demand. The father Costodio answered saying, that they sold nothing, and much less that, for that it was consecrated and dedicated to the divine colto (or sacrifice.) The Captain replied and said, that if they would not sell it, that they should give it him, and he would be grateful unto them in some other thing, that they should think well of.  
The father Costodio answered that by no manner of means he could not do it, for that upon the same they did celebrate and say mass, at such time as they did sacrifice unto the true God. At that instant the captain did put his hands upon it to feel it, and the father Costodio made signs unto him to take away his hands, for that he sinned greatly therein. Then he seeing that they would not give it him, he took his leave, saying, that they should leave it there with him, for that he would look upon it more at leisure, promising to return it them again afterwards. The father Costodio did consent thereunto, but first he requested him, not to touch it with his hands.  
So after that he had satisfied himself in the beholding of it, his affection was then much more to remain therewith: and for to accomplish the same, not failing of his word and promise that he had made, he devised with himself a certain slight and policy, and sent for the father Costodio, who came unto him with great content, thinking verily that he would have returned their Ara. When he came unto him, he did entertain him very joyfully and said that he was upon his journey to certain wars by the commandment of the king, & that amongst those servants that he carried with him for his service, there were two christened Chinos, which had been captives unto the Portugals of the city of Machao, from whence they ran away, of whom he had had understanding in all things of the ceremonies of the Christians, and that their coming thither was to baptize such as would receive the same: and he being fully certified in many things touching the same he liked well thereof and gave great content, and hoped to be one of them that first should receive the faith when the king should grant licence for the same.  
All this (as it seemed was that they should let him have the Ara, unto the which he was so affectioned, as aforesaid. But the father Costodio used the matter in such sort that he got it out of his fingers, which was no small matter. Within a few days after, the Captain being ready to embark himself for to make his journey, he sent unto the Spaniards that two of them should come unto him, and that they should bring with them the black stone, for there were certain friends of his that would see it.  
The father Costodio did straightways accomplish his commandment and carried with him the Ara (or altar stone) for that he durst not do otherwise, yet they did believe that in giving him some pretty or curious thing, they should content him and quiet his mind: they carried also with them the Image of Marie Magdalen made of feathers, which was more worthy than the Ara, (setting a part the consecration). So when the religious fathers came whereas he was, he went forth to meet them more than ten paces, with signification of great joy: and carrying them aside, he said unto them once again, that the captives had told him so many things of their virtuous manner of living, & of other things touching the heaven: that he had great affection unto them, & desired that they might remain in the country for to baptize the inhabitants thereof, & that he would be the first: but the cause wherefore he did delay the time is for to eschew the pains that is pronounced against all those that do receive any law or strange ceremony without particular licence of the king. And for that he went in haste to go & inhabit a certain province, & that he was ready to departed: in the which so soon as it was possible, he would do so much that all they should become Christians: & for as much as he told him that the black stone (unto the which he was affectioned) was consecrated, that he would let him have it to carry with him, that he might put it in the first church that the baptized should edify being made christians: the which would be very shortly, for that he was determined before many days to send to Machao for two friars such as were there, to be fully informed of them in things touching the Christian faith. Then the father Costodio said, if that which he had spoken came from his heart, that he would forth with depart and go with him and all his company.  
The Captain answered that as than he could not do it, till such time as the Church was built, and licence had for the same of the king or viceroy, the which at that time he could not demand, for the great haste that he had to departed. The father Costodio replied and said, that his church being built, he would promise him of his word to send it him, and not to give it to any other, and in pledge and token of the same, he should carry with him the Image of Marie Magdalene made of feathers. The captain received the same with great content: greatly marveling at the subtle and fine work, wherewith it was wrought: and after did so much, that almost perforce he remained also with the Ara: and commanded to be brought forth two rich pieces of Damask, and to give them unto the Father Costodio for to make an ornament in truck and full satisfaction for the same: but the father Costodio would not receive them, but was very much grieved to see how that he did remain therewith, and with the Image of feathers. The Captain did contend with him for to take the Damask, but he would not.  
Afterward they understood that that the interpreter was bribed by a servant of the Captains, for to alter the friars words and to offer the captain the Ara, and any thing else that he would desire. For to the contrary he durst not by any means to take it against the will of the fathers. To conclude he did embark himself upon his voyage, and carried with him the Ara, and the image with great joy to himself: but unto the fathers and their companions discomfort and sorrow, for that they had lost the two things that they so much esteemed. The captain at his departure did use great things and courtesy, taking his leave of them, with signs, that signified he bore them great love and good will, and that it grieved him to departed, and could not carry them with him as they requested.  
The interpreter did comfort the Spaniards, and said that they should not be sorrowful that the captain had taken those two pieces, for that he was a mighty prince, and that he would favour and help them with the viceroy, and that he was certain that he would accomplish that which he promised, that is to become a christian, for that he did bear great good will and affection unto them: in the which the interpreter did not lie, for that it was told them by the servants of the Captain, that were christened, a I told you before.  
The Friar Costodio remained so sad and sorrowful for the carrying away of the Ara and Madlin of feathers, as though he had lost a great treasure: and being desirous to recover them again, he did recommend the same unto S. Antonio de Padua, who for things that were lost, they knew by experience to be the only saint for advocate, and did promise (the better to obtain their desire) for to celebrate unto him certain masses, when they should come into place fit for the same.  
Straightways it so fell out that the chief and principal interpreter did fall out with the other that did help him, about certain profit that was coming to him, and did threaten him that he would tell the governor, how that they had given him much silver for to conclude the matter about the Ara, for that the fathers had given it them more by force then any good will. The interpreter fearing that he should be for the same grievously punished, and finding himself culpable in the things that the other threatened him for, he went unto the captain, who was embarked and ready to departed, tarrying only for wether, and told him the falling out in all points as it passed, and of his threatenings: who likewise fearing what might succeed or happen, if it should come to the understanding of the Aytao of the city of Canton, as could not be by any means excused: he called unto him one of his servants and commanded him to take the Ara and the Image, and to carry them unto the Fathers, who accomplished his command, and they received them with great comfort, and gave great thanks unto God for the same, and S. Antonio de Padua: by whose intercession they believed that they were restored.   

CHAP. X. The Timpintao doth call the Spaniards before him, and dispatcheth them for to go to Canton: they took their leave of him, and goeth from Aucheo: and at their coming to Canton, they are commanded to make themselves ready to departed the kingdom.  
THe next day following which was the third day of September, the Timpintao did send to call the Spaniards before him: who as we have said was deputy unto the viceroy, and he gave them certain dispatches, in saying, that there was in them all that they did ask, and gave commandment to the governor of Canton that he should not neglect, but accomplish all things therein comprehended, so that they might departed when they pleased. When he took his leave of them, he did entreat them very courteously with words of great courtesy. The Spaniards departed his presence with incredible joy: believing that he had agreed and granted all that they did ask, and to remain in the country to preach, so that the next day following they made all things in a readiness to take their voyage, the which they finished in short time, by reason of their great contentment they had with themselves, as also for the good entertainment and good cheer they had by the way, which was made and given them by the commandment of the Timpintao.  
So when they came unto Canton, they went straightways to visit the governor, and to give him the dispatches which they brought, who after that he had read the same, he bade them welcome, and said that he was very glad that the viceroy had showed them so much favour, and that the same was committed to his charge, for the execution of his commission, that they should persuade themselves that he would perform it according unto his commandment, without failing any thing. And for to begin the same, he showed unto them a house of the kings which should be for their dwelling, which was in the suburbs half fallen down, and there they were lodged, with a commandment that they should not go forth, neither enter into the city without particular licence. Here they remained many days being deceived of their purpose, and marveled very much that the governor would not give them licence for to re-edify a monastery, neither for to enter into the city for to give order in that which they believed was granted them by the viceroy, till such time as they understood what was done by their interpreters, & relation given by the Chino boy which came with them from the Philippinas, who declared to them the truth in all things: how the the interpreters had never told the judges how that they would remain in the country, neither made any mention thereof, but that they came thither as lost men, & that their request was to remain in the country till it were fair wether, or the coming of the Portugal ships. And this was that which the viceroy and his deputy had granted, and no other thing. But when the father Costodio and his companions (who verily believing that their desire would take effect) understood the craft and wile of the interpreters, and the great falsehood that they had used, they were very sad, and began amongst themselves to remedy the same: so they determined to seek a new interpreter, one that should faithfulle and truly declare their will unto the governor, And although they did find some that could do it, for that they did reasonably understand the Portugal tongue, yet there were none that would accept it, for any request or gifts that they did promise them. The Father Costodio seeing this, and that the time appointed did pass away without doing of any thing, one day he and the rest of his companions did join together, & entered in counsel to see what was best to be done, according unto the necessity in the which they were driven. There was amongst them divers opinions, for that of the father Costodio and of another religious man was, that they would go unto Machao, which was not far off, and there would administer the sacraments, and preach the holy Gospel unto the christened Chinos and to learn the China language, and to tarry there and abide the first occasion that should be offered, or else they themselves to procure it, for having the language it were an easy thing to do it: & they should not have need of any interpreter, neither fear to be deceived as they had been before. And besides this, they put the Portugals out of all doubt of the false opinion that the Captain general had published abroad of them, and of other matters of like effect and purpose. The other two religious men and soldiers were of a contrary opinion: which was, that they should return unto the islands Philippinas, and not unto Machao, and said, that they had departed without licence of the governor, and did adventure themselves into the harm and damage that might happen unto them by that enterprise, and all for to plant the faith of Christ in that kingdom. And now seeing that by the just judgement of God we cannot put it in execution, we are greatly bound to return again unto him, of whom we doubt not but with ease to get our pardon for the error passed, representing the zeal we had to the honour of God, and the salvation of so many souls, who did incite us to give that great enterprise: with the which we shall remain blameless with them that had given wrong judgement of us, and accomplish our bounden duty and obedience which we do owe unto the governor. And in going unto Machao we shall run in great danger to be holden and judged for traitors to the king: and the intent wherewith we went unto China, every one will construe and interpret thereon at his pleasure.  
The resolution of these contrary opinions, was by a common consent delated certain days, in the which they prayed unto God to put into their hearts, that which was best for his divine service. So in the end the father Costodio, and the religious man, who was of his opinion, did determine to go forwards with their pretence, and to go unto Machao, as aforesaid, and the rest to return unto the islands with the first opportunity they might find: but when it should come to effect, one of the religious Friars that should have gone unto Manilla was dead of an infirmity that chanced him. They stayed there longer than they did think they should, by reason that the judges of the City were occupied with the examinations of students the which is accustomed every three years, and is in that manner and order, as hath been told you in the proper chapter for the same: the which examinations endured more than five and forty days with great feasts and banquets, without meddling in any other particular business.   

CHAP. XI. The Father Costodio sendeth a messenger unto Machao he he writeth unto the bishop and unto a priest for to bestow their alms on them for their departure. The captain general doth understand thereof, and commandeth them not to aid nor secure the Spaniards, and other matters appertaining unto them.  
IN the mean time of this their examination, the father Costodio did send a messenger unto the bishop of Machao, declaring unto him his determination, and he also did write unto the devout priest, of whom we have made mention before: and craved of them their alms wherewith they might make provision for them that would departed for the islands Philippinas, and how that he and his companion would go and see his lordship. This was not done so secretly, but it came unto the understanding and knowledge of the captain general of the Portugals, who with great choler went and demanded the letters of the priest, those that were given him by the Chino: threatening him that if he did not, he would punish him with great rigour, and banish him out of the country as a suspected person. He answered him, that of truth he had received certain letters, but that at the very instant he sent them unto the Bishop unto whom they were directed: about the which there was great hold and keep, until it came to effect that the captain did lay hold upon the priest for to apprehend him: but when the bishop understood thereof, he with all speed possible went to remedy the danger that might ensue, and to take him out of his power.  
The captain seeing that he could not persever with his intent and purpose, he made many notifications unto the bishop, requiring that he would not permit that any letters should be received from those religious Spaniards, for that he knew by very certain relation that they were spies, and no friars, and if so be that any damage should happen unto them, by their order, that he would lay the whole fault upon him as a consenter and a helper. The bishop answered that he was fully persuaded and certified that they were true religious men, and servants of God, and that he with a very good will would take upon him the burden of any damage that should happen to the country by their means, or unto the king of Portugal. With this the captain was somewhat quieted, but not so much, but that continually he did not let to imagine new matters against the poor fathers, to have occasion to apprehend them, and imagined in his mind for to write a letter unto the interpreters, in the which he did offer them great quantities of money, if that they would do so much as give order that the judges would send the religious men and Spanish soldiers that were in Canton unto the City of Machao, advertising them how and which way they should use the matter to put it in effect, and was, that he should tell the judges, that the first time when as they went to speak with the governor, whereas they did ask and say that they would departed for the islands Philippinas, that they did interpret it contrary, for that their demand was for to go unto Machao.  
The interpreters straightways (with the desire of gain) did take the charge upon them, and did use the matter in such sort that the judges did send them unto Machao, whether it were with or against their wills. But God, who would not permit those his servants and Christians to be deceived, remedied the same at such time as it should have been put in execution, in the manner as you shall understand in the Chapter following.   

CHAP. XII. A Portugal of the City of Macheo doth discover the evil intent of the captain general: he giveth the Spaniards warning thereof by a letter without seal, by the which they remedy the danger that was so nigh at hand: they are called before the Aytao of the City, & he declareth unto them such matters as have passed with him, and the licence that was granted for some of them to go unto Machao, and the other unto Luzon.  
BEing understood by a Portugal a good Christian of the town of Machao, of such things as the captain general did imagine against the poor religious fathers that were in Canton, and their companions the soldiers, of whose holy zeal, he was fully certified, and being grieved at the very soul that one Christian should hurt and harm another: and more in the disturbing of the salvation of souls, he determined with himself to give them advice thereof with all speed that was possible, as in effect he did by sending them a letter without any name: wherein he gave them to understand that the Captain general by means of the interpreters, did pretend that they should be sent thither whereas he might apprehend them, & send them unto the king of Portugal, or else to do some hurt unto their person, with some false information, and willed them to be well advised, & to keep themselves from the deceit ordained.  
The letter being seen, and well advised of all that was therein contained: they determined to give notice thereof unto a Chino, a very friend of theirs, and perfit in the Portugal tongue: whom divers times they proved by experience, and found him a very honest man, and one that had done them friendship: who promised them that before many hours, he would bring all things to light, and to know whether that were true or not.  
So with this desire he went there whereas the judge did sit in audience, and was there as one that knew nothing, until such time as he saw come thither one of the interpreters with a petition in his hand, and presented it unto the supreme judge, who was the Aytao, the which being read by a scrivener, he provided that all things should be granted and done, that was therein contained. This petition the Chino aforesaid saw, and after that the interpreter was departed with contentment, and found that in the same petition he did request (in the name of the Spaniards) of the judge to give them leave for to go unto Machao, which was more for their purpose then to go unto the islands Philippinas, which was granted by the judge, and lacking nothing but to seal or sign the petition, but was delated until the evening, by reason of certain business that chanced at that present: but sure it was the ordinance of God, for that if it had been signed, they must needs of force have accomplished the same, without any replication. So with this certainty he went straightways unto the Spaniards, to whom the interpreter had told that by petition he had asked licence for them to go to the islands Philippinas from whence they came, but the judge would not grant unto that, but for to go unto Machao, which was nearer hand, who commanded them to accomplish the same without any replication, upon pain that they should be carried thither perforce.  
The Spaniards asked council of the Chino their friend, what means might be taken to avoid the danger that the interpreter had begun to bring them in, and was already gone to conclude the same. The Chino said that he was fully persuaded that the Aytao loved them well, and that he understood he did them great favour and courtesy to grant unto the petition the which the interpreter did present in their name. But notwithstanding for so much as it was not signed, there was remedy to be had: if that they would present another which he would give them, and go presently unto the Aytao and present the same, and say when they give it him, that they would go unto Luzon and not unto Machao, and that he himself would go with them for the good will he bore unto them, if it were not for the great pain that is put upon all them, whosoever that shall speak for any stranger, without licence of the justice, or is called and ordained for the same. So they being fully persuaded in this conclusion, with the petition made & all ready, there entered in at the gate whereas they were, a servant to the Aytao, who in the behalf of his master, came to call the Spaniards to come before him, for that he would see and talk with them before their departure. They straightways went forth in his company, and came unto the gates of the city, after they had gone a good ways in the suburbs: and there they were stayed till such time as another came and brought their licence, written upon a table (in such sort as in other places it hath been told you.) So when they had passed the gate, they passed through a long street, in the which they saw so great riches, & of so great curiosity, that the father Costodio with great admiration said, I have been in the principallest cities of all Flanders and Italy, and in all them I have not seen so great curiosity and riches, as in this street alone: and according unto the report of them all, he had great reason to marvel thereat. So they coming unto the end of this street, and in sight of another gate, they saw that the soldiers which kept and guarded the same, did shut them in their presence with great haste, and let fall a portcullis of iron before the gate, and demanded to see their licence at a window out of the said portcullis: and when they had it, although they saw with them the servant of the Aytao and the interpreter, yet would they not open the gate until such time as it was acknowledged and new firmed by another judge, the which being done, they presently did open the gates & did conduct them unto the house of one which is to be compared to a judge of the court, & called in their language Tequisi, that he might go with them to the Aytao, for so it was commanded & ordained. Unto this Tequisi they gave their petition that they had made, without giving the interpreter to understand thereof, requesting him by signs & some words which they had learned of the language that he would give it to the Aytao, & to procure that he might accept & grant that which by the same they did demand: but when they gave it him, it caused great alteration in the interpreter, for that they told the judge that he was a thief & a traitor, & how that he had sold them to the captain general of Machao, & how that he had presented a petition in their name: how that they would go thither, & not to the Island of Luzon, where all their desire is to return, and this hath he done by gifts that the said captain general hath promised to give him, if that he do accomplish his desire. The Tequisi when he heard this, he forthwith departed with us from his own house, towards the house of the Aytao which was hard by, and as he went by the way he read their petition, and saw that it was different to that which the interpreter had given before unto the Aytao, he being present: whereat he made a s●ay & began to consider of the same, as also of that which the Spaniards had said unto him, at such time as they gave him their petition, for by the signs and tokens they made, as by their semblant in speech, it seemed to him, that they were marvelously indigned against the interpreter, but he did not well understand them, for that they could not plainly declare it in their language, till such time as he found the contrariety that was in the petitions & the turbation of the interpreter, whom presently he called unto him, and asked him what the matter was: he trembling for fear, answered and said that he understood that the father Costodio (whom all the rest do obey as their head, and with whom he alonely did communicate) that it was his pleasure, and gave order to go unto Machao, and that he was certain that all the rest were of that opinion, wherein he thought he had done well, and therefore he presented that petition in ask licence, whereby they might do it liberally, with this discharge: and again the Spaniards seeing how he was terrified, and how that he requested them so humbly they would not proceed any farther with their complaint, wherewith the Tequisi was satisfied, who said unto the Spaniards being in the gallery of the Aytao his house, that they should tarry there, and he entered in with the petition in his hand. So within a while after they were commanded to enter into the hall there whereas the judges were, and had seen the petition and commoned about the same. And at their entering into the hall whereas the Aytao was, there were signs made unto them that they should kneel down, the which they did almost twenty paces before they came to the table that was before him: he had in hand the petition that Tequisi had given unto him, and although that he had read it before, yet did he return and looked again upon it, and asked which were they that would go unto Machao. The father Costodio signified himself and friar john Baptista his companion, and said, that they for that they were old and timorous of the sea, they would go thither for that it was nearer hand, and how that the rest that were not of such years, neither so timorous, they would return unto the Island of Luzon from whence they came, and there dwell with other of their brethren and friends that were there. The interpreter whose evil conscience did accuse him, for the evils which he had done, was so timorous, that all men might see plainly his default, and without all doubt the justices are so right in executing the same, that if their complaint had gone forwards, they would have punished him and his companion and that very cruelly: but the religious Friars would not consent that the soldiers should declare against them although their will was good, but thought it a sufficient punishment to see in what affliction the poor men were in, and took pity on them.  
The Aytao was desirous to see their Images and book which was the chiefest occasion wherefore he sent to call them, and when he saw them he received great content, and called the Fa- Costodio to come nigh unto him, and asked the signification of some of them, such as seemed unto him most strangest, and being satisfied thereof, he commanded the Friar Costodio to read on one of these books, he hearkening unto it with great attention, and as one amazed to see those letters, and the form of them so far different unto theirs, which are all in manner of caractes, as hath been told you. So after that they had passed away the time a while in this, he said, that those which would go unto Machao should put themselves on the one side, and they that would go unto Luzon on the other: the which being done he took his leave of them very lovingly, and said that he would give them the licence which they did ask at all times whensoever they would, & although he could not grant it them without first to consult with the viceroy of Aucheo, yet he would do it within ten days, and then those which would go unto Macheo might presently departed, and those which would go unto Luzo, he would send them unto Chincheo, that from thence the governor should cause them to be sent in the first passage that goeth with merchandise.  
This Aytao was very peaceable and humane, who having compassion on the Spaniards, for that they seemed unto him to be good men: he commanded to be given to them over & above the king's allowance, a Hog and Rice and other kind of victuals. So here with they went unto their lodgings with content, and also the interpreter, who thought that he was new borne again that day.   

CHAP. XIII. The Spaniards remain certain days in Canton, whither came certain Portugals from Machao: at the first they feared them, but afterwards they were assured by the contractation they had the one with the other, that they were friends: the viceroy of Aucheo cometh to Canton, and dispatcheth the Spaniards, & giveth them good provision and entertainment.  
AFter that the ten days were passed appointed by the Aytao, and some more, & seeing that no more mention was made of them, but as though they had never seen them, they were very sorrowful, & in jealousy that the captain general of Machao aforesaid had knowledge how that his craft and subtlety was discovered, & thereupon to begin & frame some other: procuring for an instrument in the performing of the same, some judge or some other person of power and authority. So they being with this care & discontent: there came unto the city of Canton four Portugals to buy & sell merchandise, with a safe conduct which they had for the same, which was the occasion that their sorrow & trouble increased, suspecting what might happen conformable to the advise which they had from thence: but for that they did common & visit them many times which intent to discover their minds the one unto the other, they presently did forget the evil suspection that they had of them, and not only that, but they did give them great alms and charity, helping and aiding them in all things, as it was meet and reason amongst Christians. So being void of their first care, they put all their diligence and care in their departure: and seeing that there was no mention made thereof by reason that the judges were occupied in mustering the soldiers of that circuit in a great and mighty field whereas they were trained up in Military exercises, some shooting in bows, some with hargabushes, tossing the pike, running of horses, and many other exercises more: and after that they had many different proofs, as well of things past, as at that present, they ordained Captains, such as were advanced above all the rest, and most worthy: all which being finished, the Spaniards determined to put the Aytao in remembrance of his promise, & the better that they might do it, and with most brevity, they ordained a petition, and went with the same unto the house of the Aytao, therewith to ask licence to put it in ure. The first judge they met withal was the Tequisi aforesaid, who made signs that they should come unto him, and asked of them what they would have. The father Costodio answered, nothing but only to present that petition unto the Aytao, to put him in mind of their departure, the Tequisi did take the petition, promising them to give it unto him presently, the which he did accomplish in a short space. So being read by the Aytao, he made answer by the same petition, that he had a particular care of them, and tarried only for order from the viceroy, which could not tarry long: the receiving whereof he would advertise them, the which he did accomplish in few days, which came with great content unto the Spaniards, for that he commanded that they should be sent away in very good order, and to give them all that was needful for their journey, and that in abundance. The same day that this commission came, there came also news that the viceroy would come unto the city of Canton▪ and that within few days he would be there: the which did so much trouble the Aytao & the rest of the judges, that day & night they never rested, but were occupied in the preparing all things necessary to receive him, which were so many & with so great majesty as though the king in person should come thither: with great and mighty triumphal arks, rich hangings, with other things, the which I do not here make mention of, although they were very curious, because I would not be tedious, for that I have a great desire to conclude this little history: and if I should declare all that passed therein, it were requisite for the same alone to make a great volume.  
Four days after the coming of the viceroy, by his order, there was given both to the one & to the other a provision, in the which he commanded all judges and governors to receive the Spaniards into their jurisdictions, whereas they should pass & not to permit any to do them harm or injury, but to give them free passage with security till such time as they should come to the place appointed in the said provision, which was unto Machao & unto Luzon: and jointly therewith he commanded two captains to bear them company till such time as they had brought them out of all danger. And to give unto them that went unto Machao (which was three days journey) sufficient provision requisite for five days: and to them that went to Luzon, their provision for forty days, although the voyage is to be made in fifteen days, & in twenty days at the most. He also commanded them that had the charge to carry them, that they should have a special care unto their healths, in traveling not too fast but little and little. Likewise the Aytao gave order unto the interpreters for to sell the frigate, in the which the fathers came thither, and to give unto them the price that should be made thereof, to bestow it at their pleasure: the whi●h they did▪ but kept still the half of that which they sold it ●or● and with manyother things m●, which by the commandment of the viceroy was given them for their journey, and thought it well bestowed on them, for to see themselves free of their liings & crafts. At the departure of the Father Costodio, one of the soldiers mind was altered, who was called Pedro de Villa roel and was very desirous to go with him unto Machao, the which h●e did accomplish by appareling himself in the habit of a Portugal, because he had no licence to go otherwise. So all things being in a readiness for their journey, they took their leave the one of the other in shedding many tears with the grief of mind.  
The Father Costodio and his companions came safely and in health to Machao in four days, as himself did afterwards write thereof, and were very well received of the Bishop, and of all the rest: and within few days after they gave them a place for to build a monastery, wherein he and his companion might live, and all such as should take the habit of that order. They came thither the fifteenth of November.  
And those which went unto Luzon departed out of the city of Canton in a great bark, of the which there are many in all that kingdom, very well tilted and dressed, with many rooms and galleries and painted windows, as hath been told you: in the which they were very much made of by the patron of the said bark and of the passengers, which were many, and went unto divers parts with merchandise: some things that they saw by the way till they came unto Chincheo shall be told you in the chapter following.   

CHAP. XIIII. They that were determined to go unto Luzon, do departed for the city of Chincheo: in which voyage they see many rivers and towns: and other particular things.  
THe Spaniards depart out of the river of Canton, & after they had sailed by sea the space of three leagues, they entered into another mighty river, in the which they traveled four days. And sure the great number of cities and towns that they saw alongst the rivers side is incredible, and so nigh the one unto the other, that they seemed to be all one so in the end of four days they landed at one of the cities, where came so much people to see those strangers, that it seemed all the kingdom were there assembled together, & were so many in number, that before they could get to the Inn whereas they should be lodged, there passed more than four hours, and was in distance but a quarter of a league: but when they came thither they were very faint with the great thrust a●d throng of the people. They stayed in this City one day, and the next day very early in the morning was brought unto them horse, for to travel by land other two days, the which was almost continually in villages & towns, & the third day they were embarked in a small bark, wherein they passed a river which had but little water, the space of two hours, them after they were shipped in a bigger bark, and entered into another river, which seemed to be an arm of the sea, in the which they sailed five days, and saw sailing up and down the said river so many barks and boats, that it made them to be greatly amazed. These rivers were as well replenished of cities and towns, as the other river whereof we have spoken. All which is a help to believe that which hath been said of the mightiness, and the great number of people that are in that mighty kingdom. Concluding this river they entered into another, but not so broad as the last, but a swifter current, and beset with mighty trees both on the one side and the other, and were so thick that almost they could not see the sun through them: and although the country very asper there alongst the rivers side, yet was there many walled cities, & an infinite number of towns and villages, in such sort that the suburbs did almost join the one unto the other. So when they were disembarked out of this river, they traveled by land other four days, and greatly marveled to see the great fertility of the country, and many other things more, which they do pass over, for that in the relation of the Augustine friars it hath been declared unto you. In the end of those four days they came to a city ten leagues from Chi●cheo, and were lodged in the suburbs of the same, whether resorted so much people to see them, that although they did shut the gates to defend themselves from the press, yet could they not be disturbed of the entry, for that they broke the gates, & climbed up the walls & windows to see them. The host of the house where as they were lodged, when he saw that the people did spoil and destroy his house, he requested the Spaniards to go forth into a green field which was there hard by, placed amongst a company of Orchards, the which they did to satisfy him, & also to satisfy the multitude of people that were come thither only to see them. The noise of the people was so great, that the governor feared there had been some other matter, & commanded a judge to go & examine the cause and know the truth: but when that he was certified thereof, he commanded the Spaniards to come unto his house, for that he was desirous and would see them. They presently did accomplish his commandment, and went their way, and as they passed through the street, there were certain representing a comedy, but so soon as the people that were there did see the Spaniards they left the players all alone and followed them. They entered into the governors house, and found him with great majesty of servants and soldiers of his guard: he entertained them with great love, and asked them who they were, and from whence they came. The interpreter presently showed the provision they brought from the viceroy, which was in sum, their licence given by him for them to go unto Chincheo, and that none should disturb them in their journey. But to aid and give them all favour possible & that which was needful for their journey. And when that he had read the same, he said that thereby he did understand that which he desired to know, & how that the viceroy did command all governors, & him as one of them, they should offer to do all that lay in them: the which he did accomplish and showed them great favour and friendship.  
The dext day following, they departed out of this city by land, being given unto them by the governor, very good provision for the way. The same day they came unto a town that was very fresh, and five leagues from the place they departed, there they determined to tarry all that night, fearing the passage through a city which was but a league before, suspecting that they should be as much troubled with the people as they were in the other city the day before. And although this was but a small town, yet was there so great a concourse of people that came from the villages there abouts, that it caused them to departed the next morning more early than they thought, and all the night they could not sleep, because of the great noise of the people.  
So within a while after they departed from that town, they came unto the city aforesaid, the which for situation and gallant buildings, was the fairest in all that province. Through the midst thereof ran a mighty river, over the which were many bridges very great and most fair. Here were they so oppressed with much people that came to see them, that they were detained in the press a good while before they could enter into the city: and after they were within they were compassed about in such sort, that they could not go to seek to eat, but were constrained to enter into a bark and go down the river and shroud themselves amongst a company of trees, & although they did use this policy. Yet the number of people were so great that leapt into the same bark that they were ready to sink, till such time as they that had entered the bark, to avoid that peril, returned and leapt a shore, leaving them all alone with the barkemen and mariners that did row, who went to seek and bring them to eat, and they remained in the bark all that night.  
So the next day in the morning, before the people could come to disturb them, they rowed towards the great and huge city of Chincheo, and entered into the same upon a sunday in the morning being the sixth day of December.  
They remained still in the bark for their own quietness and security, and sent their interpreter with their provision unto the Governor, that he might ordain at his pleasure that which was therein commanded. The Governor when he had received commission he said unto the interpreter that he should tell the Spaniards that he was very glad that they were come thither in safety and in good health, and that he should receive great joy to see them, and to show them the courtesy that was commanded him by the viceroy, in their provision or commission. But by reason that the great number of people that would come to see them, should not be troublesome unto them, he would pass over h●s content in seeing them, & for their better commodity they shall departed in the same bark wherein they came, unto the port of Aytim, whereas were certain ships that were bound unto Luzon, and that he would command they should be received into the said ships, and to be carried with as much speed as was poss●ble: and for the accomplishing of the same he kept the commission of the viceroy, and gave an other commission unto the governor of the port whether as he sent them, in the which he commanded to be accomplished all that he had promised.  
The Spaniards, although they would very gladly have seen the city of Chincheo and the mightiness thereof, yet did they accomplish that which the governor did command without any reply, for that they considered that it should come then better to pass. So they came unto the said port the next day following in the morning, whereas they did remain in the bark, doing as they did at Chincheo, & sent their interpreter with the commission unto the governor, who presently after he had read the same, sent & commanded that the Spaniards should come a shore and come and see him: who did accomplish the same although with no less trouble than in other places, by reason of the people that came to see them. The governor entertained them with great love and fair words, and before they departed from him, he sent to call a captain of one of the ships that was there bound unto Luzon and asked of him when he would departed from that place, who answered within ten days: then the governor commanded that he should carry them in his ship and to give them the best entertainment that was possible, who promised him to accomplish the same, & therewith he took his leave of them, and sent them with the said captain, who offered them all the favour & friendship that was requisite. He presently carried them unto his ship, who after he had showed them the whole commodity thereof, he made them a collation or banquet with great friendship.  
They remained in this port more than fifteen days, whereas they suffered very much cold and seeing that the ship wherein they were appointed to go, was not ready, neither any order for them to departed in many days, considering the great desire they had to be amongst their own nation, & to take their ease, and having knowledge of an other ship that was ready & would departed, they altogether went unto the governor (who was set in audience) & said unto him with a loud voice (as is used in all that country) that the captain whom he had commanded to carry them unto Luzon, was not ready to departed, neither any sign that he would in many days, & that he would give them licence and command a captain of an other ship that was there ready to departed, and went unto the same Island of Luzon, that he might carry them, because they were so ill at ease, and suffered so much cold that they felt great grief.  
When the Governor heard this he was very angry, & with great choler he commanded one of his officers that was there with him, to go presently & bring before him that captain unto whom he had committed the carriage of the Spaniards: that which was accomplished and that in so short time, that it caused great wonder: who when he came before the governor, had so great fear, that he knew not whether he was in heaven or in earth. The governor straighwaies asked him what was the occasion that he did not departed within the ten days as he had said.  
The Captain answered, that they had had no wether, neither at that present wherewith they might navigate. He asked him again and said, seeing that the weather and time would not serve, how is it that there is an other ship ready to departed. The captain at this demand did falter in his speech, and answered frivolous words, wherefore the Governor commanded that he should be whipped in his presence, for the lie which he had told, and as they were pulling off his apparel for to execute the commandment, the Spaniards having pity & compassion of him, for that he seemed to be an honest man, they fell all upon their knees at the governors feet, and requested him to pardon his offence, who did presently consent thereunto with a good will, and commanded to let him alone, but he spoke unto him very sharp words, such as so far forth as the Spaniards could perceive by the semblance both of the one and of the other, that was as much grief unto him as though he had been whipped. Then presently he commanded to call the captain of that ship that was ready to departed, and delivered unto him the commission that he had given unto the other, with a great penalty, and charged him to carry the Spaniards unto the Island of Luzon, and charged him to bring a testimonial from thence, how that he had carried them in very good order and in safety and left them at the place that they desired. This Captain understanding what had passed with the other, and because he would not see himself in the like perplexity, did accept the commandment, and thought the time long of his departure from thence, and did promise them more than they did demand, and made haste to departed ●ut of the haven, because he would not be called back again.   

CHAP. XV. The Spaniards depart from China and go to Luzon, they do pass some storms at the sea: the mariners do call upon the devil, by lots: the religious men do reprehend them: in the end they come to their desired port, whereas they are received with much joy.  
THe second day of januarie departed out of the port of Aytim with a prosperous wind the ship wherein was embarked the Spaniards, and two other which were their safe conduct: but by reason it was winter, the fair wind endured but a while, yet came they that day unto the Island of Amoy, which was six leagues from the firm land, and there they stayed one day. The next day following they went to sea, to prosecute their voyage, whereas they were taken with so terrible and foul weather, that the ship did drive they knew not whither, and many times in danger to be drowned. This storm endured four days although more stronger at one time than at an other: in the which storm was separated the three ships the one from the other, in such sort that every one took his way, procuring to save themselves, as commonly in such cases is used, without having any care the one of the other, and God was so pleased that the ship wherein the Spaniards were, and one of the other two entered into a sure port, although with great trouble and with so great a leak, that they could scarce keep her above water: but in especial that which came in their safe conduct. And afterward they understood that the other ship had taken port fifty leagues from that place with the like peril and danger. In this port they remained certain days trimming their ships and tarrying for a fair wind. So they departed from thence the three and twenty day of januarie and to their judgements with a settled and good wind, with the which they sailed five days, in the end whereof they discovered the Island of Luzon, with a singular joy unto them all, for the which the Spaniards gave thanks unto God, by whose favour they had escaped the storm past.  
But it so fell out, as they were going alongst the coast of the Island for to enter into the port of Manilla, and being within five leagues of the entry thereof, upon a sudden there arose the north wind with so great fury, and caused so great a sea, that they found themselves in a great deal more danger than in the other storm past, in such sort that they sponed before the wind with their foresail half mast high, shaking itself all to pieces, and in every minute of an hour ready to be drowned. The Chinos for that they are superstitious and witches, began to invocate and call upon the devil, for to bring them out of that trouble (which is a thing commonly used amongst them, at all times when they find themselves in the like perplexity) also they do request of him to show them what they should do to bring themselves out of trouble.  
But when the Spaniards understood their dealings, they did disturb them that they should not persever in their lots and invocations, and began to conjure the devils, which was the occasion that they would not answer unto the invocation of the Chinos, who did call them after diverse manners (as hath been declared in the first part of this history) yet they heard a devil say, that they should not blame them because they did not answer unto their demand, for they could not do it for that they were disturbed by the conjuration of those spanish Fathers which they carried with them in their ship.  
So presently when the night was come God was so pleased that the storm ceased, and became in few hours very calm, although it endured but a while, for as they began to set sail to navigate towards the port, and almost at the point to enter into the same a new storm seized on them, and with so great force, that they were constrained to return unto the sea, for fear to be broken in pieces upon the shore.  
At this time they wanted both water and victuals which was unto them a new torment, & they were brought into so great extremity, that for ninety and six persons that were in the ship, there was not left victuals for two days.  
The Chinos began a new to invocate the devils by writing, which is a way that they never let but do answer them, as they did at this instant, and were not disturbed by the conjurations of the fathers, yet notwithstanding they lied in their answer, for that they said that within three days they should be within the city of Manilla, and after it was more than four days.  
In conclusion having by the favour of almighty God overcome all their travails by the sea, and the necessity of the lack of water and victuals, they arrived at the desired port the second day of February Anno 1580. whereas they were received by the governor and of all the rest with great joy, in pardoning them the offence they had committed in going without licence, and showed unto them particular favours, & were very sorrowful that the father Costodio and his companions remained in Machao, for that he was well-beloved of all, and that with great desert, for his understanding, learning, & holy life. Who within few days after did write a letter unto the rest of the religious men in Manilla advertising them how that in a short time they came unto Machao in good health, & how that the bishop and the Captain general with all the rest of the town were very glad and joyful of their coming, and fully resolved to the contrary of the false opinion that they had conceived of them, and that he was in g●●at hope to see his desire accomplished, for that he was daily in place whereas they did see & common with the Chinos, whom, so soon as he can speak the language, he doth pretend to instruct them in ma●ters touching the faith. Also he wrote, that he understood by good original or information (although it was committed in secret) that the kingdom or province of Cochin China, which is four days journey from Machao, whereas the Portugeses hath contraction, and port for all their ships that come from the India's, hath sent unto the bishop of Machao, & doth demand of him priests for to baptize them, with such determination & good will to be christians, that in some ports they have already timber cut down for to edify churches. This you may believe for that the bishop himself hath told him, and in the latter end of his letter was written as followeth. They have invited me to this enterprise, and (for to put myself therein) I would gladly have with me many companions, which is the treasure that we go to seek. It is a firm land, there whereas God hath prepared a great harvest. Th●y are politic people and more easy to be converted then the Chinos, for that the devil hath not put so many disturbances against the gospel of Christ, as in China, although it doth join upon it, and once entering the faith therein, with the favour of God, their great & difficult doings which now they have among them will be broken with great ease, for they are not so many nor so great, whereby we should be discomforted to see them overcome, and principally they being men of so good wisdom and understanding, as we have seen by experience in the time that we have been amongst them, and so full of mercy and pity, that although we entered into the land without licence, and for doing of the same we ran in great danger of our own lives, they did entreat us well, and gave us all that was needful, and also did suffer us to preach, if we could the language: the which with the favour of God we will quickly learn, for that we are whereas continually we do common and talk with the Chinos, we do very earnestly commit it unto our Lord to direct and guide the same, that his holy name may be exalted, and the souls of these blind Gentiles may know and believe, and believing may be saved.  
This was the substance of the letter, with the which it seemeth unto unto me great reason to conclude this second relation. And to begin the third, the which I do believe will be pleasant to the reader, and is entitled, A Commentary of the new world, in the which is contained many curious matters, as you shall perceive after the reading thereof, and is declared in substance and effect by the relation of the father, that did pass and see them all, who was named friar Martin Ignacio, a religious man of the order of S. Francis, who after that he had compassed the whole world, came hither to Rome with Martin Simion bishop of the Island of Pepper in the oriental or east India's, with whom I have had communication divers times, and is a Chalde borne, and of the city of Niniveh in Babylon, and made bishop by the patriarch of Babylon.   
The end of this book.    

A Commentary or short discourse of all such notable things as be betwixt Spain till you come unto the kingdom of China, and from China unto Spain, returning by the oriental or east India's, after that they had almost compassed the whole world. Wherein is contained all the rites, ceremonies and customs of the people, the riches, fertility and strength of many kingdoms: and the description of them.  
Made and set forth by the Author of this book as well by that which he hath seen, as also by true relation that he had of the religious and barefoot Friars of the order of Saint Francis, who travailed the same the year 1584.  

CHAP. I. A Commentary of the new world.  
SAint Lucas de Barrameda, and the City of Cadiz from whence ordinarily goeth forth all such fleets and ships that go unto the occident or west India's, are distant the one from the other only five leagues, and in thirty seven degrees of altitude: from whence unto the Islands called the Canarias is two hundred and thirty leagues, 
Canarias.  and always do Rutilio to the south-west, and is ordinarily sailed in eight or ten days. The seas are rough: which causeth great waves, for which cause it is called the gulf of the jeguas.  
These islands which in ancient time were called Fortunadas, 
Fortunadas.  are at this day called by the Spaniards the Canarias, which is derived of Canes or dogs, for that there was in them at such time as the Spaniards did discover them, great quantity of dogs, very big fierce and brave. There are of them seven islands which are called Gran Canaria, Tenerife, Palma, Gomera, Yerro, Lancarote, and Fort Ventura, and are in altitude twenty eight degrees, 
The names of the Canarias.  lacking very little, and have in them many particular things, of which I will declare some of them in brief.  
In the Island of Tenerife, at the farther part thereof towards the north west, there is a mountain called El Pico de Tereyra, which unto the judgement of them who have seen it, is the highest in all the world, and is plainly seen before you come to it three score leagues: so that a ship going from Spain unto those Islands doth discover that mountain first. None can ascend or go up that mountain but in the months of july & August, for that all other months of the year there is very much snow on it, 
Much snow.  although in all those Islands it doth never snow, and to mount the height thereof is three days work, on the top of the same there is a round & plain place, and being thereon at such tune as it is fair weather and the seas calm and in quiet, you may see all the seven islands, and every one of them will seem but a small thing in respect, yet some of them are distant from that more than fifty leagues, & it hath as much more in compass as that. In the two months aforesaid they do gather in the top thereof all the brimstone that is brought from that Island unto Spain which is much in quantity. 
Great quantity of brimstone.  This mountain belongeth to the duke of Maqueda by particular gift of the king.  
In one of these seven islands aforesaid, called the Hierco there is a continual wonder, which in my judgement is one of the greatest in all the world, and worthy to be known amongst all men, whereby they may exalt the mighty providence of God, and give him thanks for the same. This Island being the greatest amongst the seven, is a country very asper and unfruitful and so dry, 
Thedropping from a tree doth serveth whole Island with water.  that there is no water to be found in all the Island, but on the sea side, and that in few places, but very far distant from the inhabitant of that Island. But there natural necessity is remedied by the divine providence of heaven (as aforesaid) and by a strange means, which is, there is a great and mighty tree (unknown, and the like hath not been seen in any part of all the whole world) whose leaves are narrow and long, and are continually green like ivy, upon the which tree is seen continually a small cloud, which never augmenteth nor diminisheth, with the occasion that the leaves continually without ceasing, doth distill drops of water, very clear and fine, which doth fall into certain ses●ernes, which the inhabitants of the towns have made for the conservation thereof, to remedy their necessities, and to sustain thereby not only themselves, but also their cattle and beasts, and is sufficient for them all: yet do they not know the original and beginning of this continual and strange miracle.  
One hundredth leagues distant from these Islands towards the right hand, there is an other thing of little less admiration than the other that we have spoken of, which is: that many times there is seen an Island, which they call S. Borandon. Many being lost at the sea have chanced upon the same Island, & do say that it is a very fresh and gallant Island, with great abundance of trees and sustinence, & inhabited with Christian people, yet can they not say of what nation or language. The Spaniards many times have gone with intent to seek it, but never could find it, 
Opinions of this Island.  which is the occasion that there be divers opinions touching the same. Some do say that it is an enchanted Island, and is seen but certain days assigned or appointed: & others say that there is no other let or impediment for the finding thereof, but because it is so little, and is continually covered with great clouds, & that there runneth from it rivers which have so great a current that it maketh it difficult to come unto it. My opinion is (if it be any thing worth) that being true, that which so many have spoken of this Island according unto the common opinion which they have in all the seven islands of Canaria, it can not be without some great mystery: for he which can cause it to be all in a cloud, & the swift current of the rivers to be an impediment to the finding thereof, can find remedy for the inhabitants to come forth (if it be so for them that be without at the sea not to go into it) yet can it not be, for them within the Island, but at some time there should have some come forth by chance, and have been seen of some there abouts, & declared unto them the secret of the mystery: from whence I do gather, that either this Island is imagined or enchanted, or else there is in it other some great mystery, for the which to give credit unto it, or to vary from the truth, it shall be wisdom not to proceed any further, but to conclude in that which toucheth the Islands of Canarias aforesaid▪  
The clime and temperature of them all is excellent good, and hath abundance of all necessary sustenance for man's life. There is gathered in them very much wheat, and other seeds, and wine: there is also made very much sugar: there is nourished and brought up great store of cattle and that very good. But in especial camels, 
camels.  whereof there is great store. Also all kind of sustenance is better cheap there then in Spain.  
All these Islands are inhabited with Spaniards whereas they do live very pleasantly, amongst whom, at this day, there be some that be natural of the Guanchas' aforesaid, who be very much spaniard like. The principal of all these seven Islands is the Gran Canaria, in the which is a bishop and a Cathedral Church, and counsel of the inquisition and royal audience, from the which dependeth the government of all the other six islands.   

CHAP. II. They do departed from the islands of Canaria for the Island of Santo Domingo otherwise called Hispaniola, and do declare of certain things in the way thitherward.  
AFt●r that the fleets or ships had taken refreshing in the Islands of Canarias aforesaid, they departed from thence sailing by the same Rutter, until they come unto an Island called the Desseada which is fifteen degrees from the Equinoctial, 
The Island called Desseada.  eight hundredth and thirty leagues from the Canarias: all which is sailed without seeing any other land, they are sailing of the same ordinarily eight and twenty and thirty days.  
This Island Desseado, was called by that name, by reason that the gul●e is great, and so many days sailing, that when they do see it, is that after that they have very much desired the same (so that Desseado is as much to say, as desired. This Island hath nigh & about it many other Islands, one of the which is that which is called La Dominica, 
The Island Dominica.  which is peopled and inhabited by certain Indians who are called Caribes, by such as do navigate that way, which are a kind of people that do eat humane flesh: they are very expert archers, & very cruel: they do anoint their arrows with a deadly earth, & so full of poison, that the wound the which is made therewith can not be healed by any humane remedy. This Island is in fifteen degrees. It is very little and not of much people, yet notwithstanding it hath been the death of many Spaniards both men and women: such as have come thither in ships, not knowing the danger thereof, have gone a shore for fresh water, or else to wash their linen, and upon a sudden unlooked for, have been be set by the Indios, who have slain them, and after eaten them: and they say that it is very sweet flesh and savoury, so that it be not of a Friar, for of friars by no means they will eat, nor would not after that happened unto them as hereafter followeth.  
There was a ship that was bound unto the firm land, and did arrive at that Island, in the which went two religious Friars of the order of Saint Francis, and having no care as aforesaid, but very desirous to be a land, they went a shore without any fear or suspicion of any harm that might happen unto them, and being at a river side sporting themselves with great recreation, by reason of the freshness thereof, easing themselves of the long and painful navigation which they had coming from the Islands of the Canarias unto that place, when the Caribes did see them without any fear, upon a sudden they descended from a mountain, and did kill them all, without leaving any person alive. Many days they made great feasts and banquets, eating of those bodies which they had slain, some sodde and some roasted, as their pleasure was. So on a day they would amongst them eat one of the fathers, who was very fair and white, 
They which did eatefriers flesh did die mad.  but all that did eat of him in a little space did swell marvelously, and did die mad, with great gaspings that it was wonderful to see: so that from that time, they remain as warned never for to eat any more of the like flesh.  
Of these evils they have committed an infinite number, and have at this day with them many Spaniards both men and women, whose lives they pardoned for to serve their uses, or evils because they were very young, of the which they say that some have fled away. They go naked like unto the Indians, and do speak their language, and are almost converted unto their nature. This great inconvenience might be remedied, if that it did please his majesty to command some general that were bound unto the firm land, or unto the new Spain, to make abode there a few days, and to root ●ut and make clean that Island of so evil & wicked people which were a good deed, and they do well deserve it, and to give liberty unto the poor Christians that are there captive a great company of them. And it is said of a truth that some of them be of good calling. There can none go a land on this Island but straightways they are discovered by such ordinary spies as they do put to watch. And if they do see that those which do come a land are many in number, and that they can not hurt them, they do remain in the highest part of the mountain, or else amongst the thickest of woods and bushes, till such time as the ships do departed, which is so soon as they have taken fresh water or fire wood. They are great traitors, and when they see opportunity they give the assault, in the manner as hath been told you, and do very much harm.  
Nigh unto this Island Dominica towards the northwest is the Island of S. john de Puerto rico the which is in eighteen degrees: it is forty and six leagues long and five & twenty leagues broad, and in compass about an hundred and fifty leagues. 
Much kine, sugar, & ginger: wheat and gold.  There is in it great store of kine, very much sugar, and ginger, and yieldeth very much wheat. It is a land of very much gold, and is not laboured nor taken out of the earth for lack of people, it hath very good havens and ports towards the south, and towards the north only one, the which is sure and good, in respect whereof the Spaniards did give the name unto the whole Island, Puerto rico, taking the name of the port or haven. In it there is four towns of Spaniards, a bishop and a cathedral church, and he that is prelate at this day, is the reverend father done friar Diego de Salamanca of the order of S. Austin.  
When the Spaniards went first unto this Island, according unto the report of the reverend father de Las Casas bishop of Chiapa, 
Of six hundred thousand Indians there remaineth none  was in the year 1509. This Island was so full of trees and fruit that they gave it the name of the Guertas, and there were in it six hundredth thousand Indios of the which at this day there remaineth not one.  
From this Island unto the Island of Santo Domingo, is four score leagues, I say from one port unto an other and from point to point but twelve leagues. They do ordinarily go from one port to an other in three days, but to return they are more than a month, for because the wind is contrary.   

CHAP. III. Of the Island of Santo Domingo called Hispaniola and of their properties.  
THe Island Hispaniola, 
The Island Hispaniola or Santo Domingo.  which by an other name is called Santo domingo by reason that it was discovered as that day, it is in eighteen degrees, and was the first that was discovered in the India's, by the captain Christopher Colon, worthy of immortal memory, it was inhabited in the year of 1492. This Island is in compass more than six hundredth leagues, it is divided into five kingdoms, the one of them is now called the Vega, which at the time that it was discovered was called Neagua, it hath four score leagues in compass, and stretcheth all of them from the north unto the south out of the which sea, as doth testify the reverend of Ciapa in his book, doth enter only into the kingdom, 
Mighty rivers in spain.  thirty thousand rivers and running brooks, twelve of them as great, as Ebro, Duero, & Guadalquivir in Spain. The foresaid bishop doth also speak of an other marvel, which is, that the most part of these rivers, those which do distill and run from the mountains which is towards the west, are very rich of gold, and some of it very fine, as is that which is taken out of the mines of Cibao, which is very well known in that kingdom, & also in spain, by reason of the great perfection thereof: out of the which mine ha●h been taken out a piece of virgin gold so big as a twopennie wheaten loaf, 
A piece of virgin gold so big as a two penny wheaten loaf.  and did weigh three thousand and six hundred Castillianos, the which was sunk and lost in the sea, in carrying of it into Spain, as doth testify the aforesaid reverend bishop. In this Island there is greater quantity of cattle than in the other Island of Puerto rico, & there is made much sugar, 
Cannafistola.  and gathered much ginger, and Cannafistula and also many sorts of fruits, such as is in Spain, as others different of the country, & that in abundance: there are also great store of hogs whose flesh is as wholesome and as savoury as is mutton in Spain, and is very good cheap: a heyfor is bought for eight rials of plate, and all other things of that country after the rate, although that the ambergris of Spain is very dear. It is a country of very much gold, if there were people for to take it out: 
Gold and pearls.  and many pearls. In all this Island they gather no wheat, but in the bishopric of Palensuela, although in many other places the ground would yield it very well, if they would sow it. But nature, which was wont to supply necessities, doth accomplish the lack of wheat to give them in steed thereof a root, which doth grow in that Island in great quantity & abundance, and doth serve them for bread, as it did unto the natural people of that country, 
Bread of a root called Casave.  when the Spaniards went thither. It is white, and is called Casave, the which being grinded & brought into meal they do make bread thereof for their sustinence, the which although it is not so good as that which is made of wheat meal, yet may they pass therewith and sustain themselves.  
This country is very hot, by reason whereof their victuals are of small substance. The principal city of that Island is called Santo Domingo, (for the reason abovesaid) in the which is an archbishop & a royal audience, or chancery: this City is built on the sea side, and hath to it a great river, the which doth serve them for their port or havens, and is very secure. There is in it three monasteries of religious friars and two of Nuns.  
In this Island (as saith the reverend bishop of Chiapa in his book) there were when as the Spaniards came first thither three millions of men natural Indians, of the which at this day there is not two hundred left, 
Of three millions of men not two hundred left.  and yet the most part of them be sons unto Spaniards, and black mores borne of the Indians women. All their sugar mills and other places are inhabited with negroes, of the which there may be in that Island about twelve thousand. It is a wholesome country unto them that dwell therein. The sea is full of whales, and that in abundance, which are seen by such as do come in their ships, & many times they are in fear of them. But above all other there is an infinite number of great fishes called Tiburones, 
Tiburones.  & are in great skull: they are marvelously affected unto humane flesh, & will follow a ship five hundred leagues, without leaving of it one day. Many times they have taken of the fishes and do find in their bellies all such filth as hath been thrown out of their ship in many days sailing, and whole sheeps heads with horns and all: If they chance to find a man in the water's side he will eat him all: if not, all that he doth fasten on, he doth shear it clean away, be it a leg or an arm, or half his body, as many times it hath been seen, and they do it very quickly, for that they have many rows of teeth in their heads, which be as sharp as Razors.   

CHAP. four Of the way and the Islands that are betwixt this Island of Santo Domingo, and the kingdom of Mexico.  
THe first Island that is after you are departed from Santo Domingo, is that which ordinarily is called Navala, 
The Island of Navala.  the which is one hundred and twelve leagues from the city of Santo domingo, and is seventeen degrees, and is but a small Island: 
The Island of jamaica  and nigh unto that is another which is called jamaica of fifty leagues in Longitude, and fourteen in Latitude: there was wont to be about them many Vracanes, 
Uracans.  which are spouts of water, with many blustering winds. This word Vracan in the Indian tongue of those islands, is as much to say, as the joining of all the four principal winds together, the one forcing against the other: the which ordinarily doth blow upon this cost, in the months of August, September and October, by reason whereof such fleets as are bound unto the Indies do procure to pass that coast, before these three months or after, for that by experience they have lost many ships in those times. From this Island they go unto the Island of Cuba, 
The Island of Cuba, an● the port Havana,  which is in twenty degrees, in the which is the port of Havana, which is called the Cape of San Anton: they do put two hundredth and five and twenty leagues of Longitude, and of Latitude six and thirty, it is inhabited with Spaniards, who converted all the rest unto the faith of Christ: there is in it a bishop, and monasteries of religious Friars.  
When that any ships do go unto Nova Espania, they have sight of them, & likewise when they do return, all those which do come from the Peru do enter into the foresaid port of the Havana, which is a very good port and sure, and there is to be had all kind of provision necessary and belonging unto the fleets and ships, some which the Island doth yield itself, and other some brought from other places: but in particular, there is great store of very good timber, as well for the repairing of ships as for other things, with the which they do ordinarily balest their ships that come for Spain. The kings majesty hath in this a governor and a captain with very good soldiers for the defence thereof, and of a fort which is in the same harbour, the best that is in all the islands.  
This Island of Cuba was discovered in the year 1511. and was in it (being of the bigness aforesaid) a great number of natural people, and now but a very few: it hath a river wherein is very much gold, according unto the opinion of the natural people, and was told by the fathers unto their children, the which was cast into that river by the natural people in this order following.  
There was a Casique called Hatuey, who for fear that he had of the Spaniards, came from the Island Hispaniola, unto this Island with many of his people, and brought all their riches with much gold amongst them, who by the relation of other Indians of Santo Domingo (whereas he had been king) understood that the spaniards were coming unto that Island, whereupon he gathered together all his people and many of that Island, and made a parley unto them, saying: It is said of a certainty, that the Christians do come into this Island, and you do well understand by experience, what they have done by the people of the kingdom of Aytim (which was the Island Hispaniola) the like will they do here by us, but do you know wherefore they do it: they answered and said, because they were of their own nature cruel. The Casique said no, that they did it not therefore, 
The Spani●rds God is ●old.  but because they had a God whom they did worship, & because they will have him from us, they do kill us: and in saying these words he took forth a basket with gold & jewels which he brought thither in secret, and showed it unto them saying, this is their God that I spoke off, let us make unto them Ateytos, the which are sports and dances, and possible we shall please them, & then will they command their people not to do us any harm. For the accomplishing & furnishing of the same, every one of them brought that which they had in their houses, & made thereof a great mountain of wheat, and danced round about the same till they were weary: then the Casique said, 
The Indians throw all their gold and jewels into the river  I have thought with myself whilst we were dancing, that howsoever it be, these that do come will kill us: for whether we do keep our treasure or give it unto them, with covetousness to seek more from us we shall die: therefore let us throw it into this river, the which they did with a common consent and good will.  
From their point or cape of Sant Anton, 
The port of saint john de Lua.  they sail to the port of San ivan de Lua which is on the firm land of Mexico, two hundredth and thirty leagues from the said point: in all that bay there is great fishing, but in especial of one kind of fish which is called Mero, the which are so easy to be taken, that in one day they may lad not ships but whole fleets, and many times it happeneth that they bring so many to their ships that that they throw them again into the sea, for lack of salt to salt them with. 
The Island of Campeche  They pass in sight of an Island called Campeche the which is a gallant & fresh country, & nigh unto the kingdom of Mexico: in it is great store of victuals, but specially honey and wax, 
honey & waxy  and is three hundredth leagues compass: all the people of that Island are converted unto the law of our Lord jesus Christ. There is in it a bishop and a cathedral Church, a governor for his majesty, and monasteries of Friars. Within few days after they depart from this Island and come unto the port of saint john de Lua, in the which by reason that it hath many flats, it is requisite to be careful for to enter into it: his majesty hath in it a fort which is good and strong. Five leagues from this port is the City of the Vera Cruz whereas is the whole trade & traffic, 
The City of Vera Cruz,  and there is resident the king's officers: it is a hot country by reason that it is in nineteen degrees, but well replenished of all kind of victuals: it was wont to be unwholesome, but now they say it is not so much, they know not what should be the occasion, whether it be by the movings of the heavens, or by the good government and discretion of them that do dwell in it. This city is from the city of Mexico, the which is metropolitan of all that kingdom and by whom all the rest is governed, seventy leagues, all the way inhabited & full of towns both of Indians Spaniards, & so great store of provision that it seemeth to be the land of promission. It is marvelous temperate, in such sort that almost throughout all the whole year, it is neither hot nor cold neither doth night exceed the day, nor the day the night, but a very little, by reason that it is almost under the Equinoctial line. The mightiness of this kingdom, and some particularities, you shall understand of in the Chapter following.   

CHAP. V Of the bigness of the kingdom of Mexico, and of some particular and notable things that are in it.  

The kingdom of Mexico.  THis kingdom of Mexico is the firm land: on the one side it hath the North sea, and on the other side the South sea: it is not possible to declare the breadth and length thereof, for that unto this day it is not all discovered. Every day they do find and discover new countries, as in the year of fourscore and three you may perceive by the entry which was made by Antonio de Espeio, who with his companions did discover a country, in the which they found fifteen provinces, all full of towns which were full of houses of four and five stories high, the which they did name Nuevo Mexico, for that it doth resemble the old Mexico in many things. 
New Mexico  It is towards the North, and they do believe that that way, by inhabited place, they may come unto that country which is called of the Labrador (of which shall be spoken more at large hereafter.)  
This kingdom towards the Orient doth join unto the country of Peru, 

Peru. Nombre de Dios. Acapulo. Panama.  
The straits of Magellanes.   and so running by the North sea, and reacheth unto Nombre de Dios, which is a port of the said kingdom, and from thence unto Acapulco, which is a port in the kingdom of Mexico: and in the South sea it reacheth unto Panama, a port of the said Peru, and in the same sea it extendeth nigh unto the straits of Magellanes, and not far from the river of Plata and brasil.  
To conclude, this kingdom is so great that unto this day they cannot find the end thereof: but every day doth discover new countries, whereas all the Indians that they do find are very easy to be reduced unto the Catholic faith, for that they are people very docible, ingenious, and of a good understanding. There is amongst them divers languages, and very different climes, although all generally do understand the Mexican tongue, which is most common. There are many provinces inhabited by Indians and Spaniards, that every one of them is as big as a reasonable kingdom, yet the greatest and most principal is that of Mexico, whereas are many Indians and Spaniards which do exceed all the rest in number: the names of them are Honduras, Guatimala, Campeche, Chiapa, Guaiaca, Mechuacan, Nueva galicia, Nueva Viscaya, Guadiana and others more, which I leave out because I would not be tedious: in all the which, they have either a royal audience and governors, or other justices all Spaniards.  
The natural people whereof, never since they were converted have been found in any heresy, nor in any thing contrary unto the Romish faith. All these provinces are subject and do acknowledge that of Mexico as the principal: there whereas his majesty hath his viceroy, an inquisition, an archbishop and a royal audience or court of Chancery.  
This City of Mexico is one of the best that is in all the whole world, and is situated upon water after the manner and fashion of Venice in Italy: in all this kingdom almost you cannot know when it is winter, or when it is summer, for that in all the whole year, there is small difference betwixt the days and the nights, by reason of the temperature of the country, the fields are green almost all the whole year, and trees bear fruit also almost all the whole year: for when it is winter in Europa, then do their fall dews from heaven which doth cause all things to bud and flower, and in the summer it doth ordinarily rain, but especially in the months of june, july, 
It raineth almost every day.  August and September in the which months it is a marvel when it raineth not every day, and it is to be wondered at, for that almost it never raineth but from noon forwards, and never passeth midnight, so that it never troubleth them that do travel by the way, for that they may begin their journey at midnight, and travel until the next day at noon. It raineth unreasonably and with so great fury and force, that the time that it doth endure, it is requisite to fly from the showers, for that many times they are so hurtful that one sole shower taketh away the life of a man.  
Almost all the whole year in this kingdom they do sow and gather as well whea●e (whereof they have great abundance) as Maiz, which is the ordinary sustentation of all the Indians, black moors & horse, 
The best horses in all the world.  of the which they have great abundance very gallant & good, both to the eye, & indeed, as in any kingdom in all the whole world that is known unto this day. The brood of them was carried out of Spain thither, when first they did discover that country, & for that effect were chosen the best that could be found: and for that they do eat all the whole year green grass & Maiz, which is wheat of the Indians, is the occasion that they do deserve to have the praise above all other. In fine, this kingdom is one of the fertilest of victuals of all that ever we have heard off, and of riches, for that there is in it an infinite number of silver mines, 
An infinite number of silver mines.  out of the which is taken great abundance, as it is to be seen every year when as the ships do come unto Syvell. It is under the Torrida Zona, yet notwithstanding it is of the temperature as I have said, contrary unto the opinion of ancient Philosophers, who said that it was not inhabited. But now to excuse them, it shall not be from our purpose to declare the cause wherefore they were deceived, and is, that in the four months aforesaid, wherein the sun hath his most force, it doth continually rain, which is the occasion that the country is so temperate: and besides this, God doth provide that it is visited with fresh winds, which come both out from the South and North sea, and is so ordinary a thing, that it is a marvel to see it calm, by reason whereof the whole kingdom is of that property, and although the sun be very strong and causeth great heat: yet putting himself under any shadow, although it be but little, they straightways feel a fresh and comfortable wind, by reason of the temperature of the heaven in the manner aforesaid.  
The inhabitants of this kingdom throughout all the whole year, need not to augment nor diminish their apparel, neither their beds. Also the air and clime is so wholesome, that you may lie and sleep in the fields without any thing upon you, as in any house be it never so well hanged and close.  
All that is discovered of this kingdom (except it be the land of the Chichimecoes, which is a kind of Indians that liveth as the Alarbes do in Africa without any house or town) all the rest I say are in peace and quietness baptized and doctrined, and furnished with many monasteries of divers orders of religious men, as of the order of S. Dominicke, of S. Francis of S. Austen, & of jesuits, besides a great number of priests that are reparted in all parts of that kingdom, so that the one and the other are continually occupied in doctrining of the natural people and other Spaniards that are in that kingdom, of whom, although they be but a few in respect of the Indians, yet do they surmount in number more than fifty thousand. In the principal city of this kingdom, 
An University in Mexico.  which is that of Mexico as aforesaid, there is a university, and in it be many schools, whereas is red any faculty, as is in Salamanca, & that by men of great sufficiency, whose travel is gratified with great rents & honour. There be also in it many great hospitals as well of Spaniards as of Indians, whereas the sick men are cured with great charity & comfort, for that every one of them have great rents and revenues. I do not entreat of the Churches and monasteries both of Friars and Nuns which are in that city, nor of other particular things, for that thereof there is written a large history, and my intent is to declare by way of a commentary that which the said father Costodio & friar Martin Ignacio did common with me by word of mouth, and that I saw written and understood of him at his return from traveling almost the whole world, and of other things that I myself have experimented in certain parts of it: so that this my discourse may more properly be called an Epitome or Itinerario then a history. In this kingdom there are bred and brought up more cattle then in any other parts known in all the world, as well for the good climate and temperature of the heaven, as also for the fertility of the country. The kine and sheep many times bring forth twice a year, and the goats ordinarily thrice a year: so that because they have many fields in that country, and much people that do give themselves unto that kind of g●ttings (as graziers) is the occasion that there is so great abundance, and sold for a small price, and many times it happeneth that the bringers up of them do kill ten thousand head of them only to profit themselves with the skins, in sending of them into Spain, and leave the flesh in the fields to feed the fowls of the air, without making any more account thereof.  
There is great abundance of many sorts of fruits, some of them very different from those which are gathered in our Europa, & the most part of them: but amongst all notable things which are to be considered off in that kingdom (which are many) one of them is a plant called Mag●ey, and an ordinary thing in all those provinces & towns, of the which they make so many things for the service and utility of them that do dwell therein, 
A strange kind of tree.  that it is hard to be believed of them that have not seen it (although in all places you have many witnesses to it). They take out of this plant wine, which is that which the Indians do drink ordinarily, and the Negroes: also excellent good vinegar, honey, a kind of thrid or yarn, wherewith they do make mantles to apparel the naturals, and for to sow the same apparel: the leaf have certain pricks whereof they do make needles wherewith they sow their apparel, their shoes and slippers. The leaves of that plaint over and above that, they are medicinal, they do serve to cover there in the place of tiles, and being dipped in the water, they make thereof a certain thing like hemp which serveth for many things, and make thereof repass, and the trunk of this plant is so big and strong, that it serveth for joists and beams whereon they do build their houses, which commonly is covered with straw, or else with broad leaves of trees, as is that of this plant. All this although it seemeth much, yet in respect it is nothing considering the great profit that is made of this plant, as shallbe declared unto you, when we come to entreat of the islands Philippinas, where as there is great abundance of them, as I refer it unto the judgement of the reader.   

CHAP. VI This Chapter doth prosecute in the things of the kingdom of Mexico.  
THe Indians of this kingdom are marvelous ingenious and do see nothing but they imitate the same, 
Properties of the Indians.  whereof cometh that they are very good singers and players upon all sorts of instruments, yet their voices do heal them nothing. They are very much affectioned unto matters touching ceremonies of the Church, and given unto the divine culto, and therein they do very much exceed the Spaniards. In every town there are singers appointed, which repair every day unto the Church to celebrate the offices unto our Lady, the which they do with great consort and devotion. Touching the dressing and adorning of a church with flowers and other curiosities, they are marvelous politic: they are reasonable good painters in some places: they make images of the feathers of small birds which they call in their language Cinsones, which have no feet, and feed of nothing else, but of the dew that falleth from heaven, and is a thing greatly to be seen, and was wont in Spain to cause great admiration, but in especial unto such as were famous painters, 
Pictures made of feathers.  to see with what curiosity and subtlety they did make their pictures, in applying every colour of the feathers in his place. They are people of great charity, but in especial unto the Ecclesiasticals: which is the occasion that one of them may travel from sea to sea (which is more than five hundred leagues) without the spending of one rial of plate in victuals, or in any other thing, for that the naturals do give it them with great good will and affection, for the which in all their common places of resort, which is an Inn for strangers: they have men appointed for to provide for all Ecclesiastical men that do travel, of all that they have need, and likewise unto the common people for their money. They do not only receive great content with them, but they themselves do go and request them to come unto their towns, at the entry whereof they make them great entertainment: they go all forth of the town both small and great in procession, and many times more than half a league, with the sound of trumpets, flutes and hoybuckes. The principallest amongst them go forth with bows and nosegays in their hands, of the which they do make a present unto such religious as they do receive: and sometimes they cast them more flowers than they would willingly they should. Generally, they do reverence all Ecclesiasticals, but in particular, those of such religious houses, which in that kingdom were the first that did convert them, and baptize them, & they do it in such sort, that if the religious man will for any offence punish or whip any of them, they do it with such facility, as a master of a school doth beat his scholars that he doth learn.  
This great reverence and subjection, was planted amongst them by the worthy captain Hernando Cortes, 
Hernando Cortes.  marquis del Valle, he who in the name of the Emperor Charles the fift of famous memory, did get and made conquest of that mighty kingdom. He who amongst other virtues that be spoken of him (and do endure unto this day in the memory of the natural people of that country, & as I do believe his soul is mounted many degrees in glory for the same) he had one that surmounted the other in excellency, which was, that he had great reverence and respect unto priests, but in especial unto religious men, & his will was that the same should be used amongst the Indians: at all times when he did talk with any religious person, he did it with so great humility and respect, as the servant unto his master. If he did at any time meet with any of them in the street, he being on foot, a good space before he came unto them, he would put off his cap, and when he came unto them he would kiss their hands: and if he were on horseback, he had the like prevention, and would alight and do the like. By whose example, the natural people of that country do remain with the same custom, and is observed and kept in all that country unto this day, and with so great devotion, that in what town so ever that any Ecclesiastical, or religious man doth enter, the first that doth see them before they enter therein, do run unto the Church and ring the bell, which is a token known amongst them all, that a religious man is coming, so that forthwith all the women go forth into the street whereas they do pass, with their children in their arms, and bring them before the religious men, that they should bless them, although he be on horseback, and do pass a long thorough the town.  
In all this country there is great abundance of victuals and fruit, that the money being of so small estimation (by reason they have so much) a rial of plate is no more worth there then a Quartillo in Spain: you shall buy there a very ●●ire heafor for twelve rials of plate, and fifty thousand if you will at the same price, and a calf for six or eight rials of plate, a whole sheep for four rials, and two hens, such as you have in Spain for one rial, and of Ginny hens, otherwise called Turkey cocks, and in Spanish Pavos, you shall have an hundred thousand (if you please) for a rial and a half of plate a piece, and after this rate all other sorts of victuals whatsoever you will buy, although they be never so good: wine and oil is very dear, for that it is brought out of Spain, not for that the country will not yield thereof, and that in great abundance (as hath been seen by experience, but they will not consent to it for divers respects. 
Medicinal herbs.  There be through out all the whole kingdom many herbs that are medicinal, and the Indians very much experimented in them, and do always cure with them, in such sort that almost there is no infirmity but they have a remedy for the same, and do minister it, by reason whereof they do live very healthful, and do die very seldom, but of leanenes, or when the radical moistness is consumed. They use little lettings of blood, 
They use no compounds.  and less of compounded purgations, for that they have amongst them other simples which they bring out of the field, wherewith they do evacuate their humours, applying them unto the patient. They be for little travel, and do pass with little meat, and very seldom sleep but on a mat upon the ground, but the most part in the fields in the open air, which as we have said hurteth not, neither themselves nor yet the Spaniards. But now to speak in few words that which requireth a great discourse & many words, and yet notwithstanding not express well that which might be said of this mighty kingdom: I will conclude in comparing it unto the most greatest and richest of all that is now known in all the world, except that of China, of the which in this history hath been mentioned so many things, and shall be more spoken off, when as we shall come to entreat of it, for that we will entreat of the new Mexico, as I have promised in the fift Chapter, and because it is a new thing, I do believe it will be of great content.   

CHAP. VII. Of the new Mexico, and the discovering thereof, and what they do know of it.  
IN the said Chapter I said that in the year 1583. there was discovered fifteen provinces, 
New Mexico  the which the discoverers thereof do call the new Mexico upon the firm land of Nueva Espania, and I did promise to give notice of the discovering thereof, the which I will do with as much brevity as is possible, for that if I should difusely declare all that they did see and know, it were requisite to make of it a new history: the substance thereof is, that in the year of our Lord 1581. having notice there of a religious man, of the order of saint Francis, who was called Friar Austen Ruyz, who dwelled in the valley of saint Bartholomew, by the relation of certain Indians called Conchos, who did communicate with others their neighbours called Pasaguates, who said that towards the parts of the North (traveling continually by land) there were certain Islands very great, and never known nor discovered by the Spaniards, who being removed with great zeal of charity, for the salvation of those souls, did ask licence of the Count of Corunnia, Uizroy of the said Nueva Espania, and of his own superious for to go together, and to procure to learn their language: and knowing it necessary to baptize and preach unto them the holy Evangelist, having obtained the licence of the aforesaid persons, taking with him other two companions of the same order, with eight other soldiers, who of their own good will would bear them company, he departed to put in execution his Christian zeal and intent: who after a few days that they had traveled, they came into a province which was called of the Tiguas, distant from the mines of saint Bartholomew (from whence they began their journey) two hundred and fifty leagues towards the North, 
The province of Tiguas  in the which by a certain occasion the natural people thereof did kill one of the friars companions: who, as also the soldiers that went with him, seeing and perceiving the success, and likewise fearing that thereof might happen some other greater danger, they determined with a common consent to return unto the mines from whence they departed, with consideration, that the company which went with him were very few to make resistance against such successes as might happen, being so far distant from the dwellings of the Spaniards, and from their necessary succour. The two religious men which remained did not only refuse their determination, but rather seeing good occasion to put their good desire in execution, and so much ripe Mies, or dainties for the lords table, and seeing they could not persuade the soldiers to proceed forwards in the discovering thereof: they alone remained in the said province with their Indian boys, and a Mestizo that they carried with them, thinking that although they did remain alone, yet were they there in security, by reason of the great affability and love wherewith the natural people did entreat them.  
So when the eight soldiers came unto the place that they desired, they strait ways sent the news of all that happened unto the City of Mexico, unto the viceroy, which is distant from the mines of Saint Barbora one hundred and three score leagues. But the Friars of S. Francis were very much aggrieved, for the remaining there of their brethren, and fearing lest they should be slain for that they were there alone, they began to move the hearts & minds of other soldiers, that were in the company of another religious Friar of that order, called Friar Bernardino Beltran, for to return to the said province, to deliver the aforesaid two religious men out of danger, and from thence to prosecute & go forwards with their enterprise begun.  
At this time there were at the said mines by a certain occasion, an inhabitant of the City of Mexico called Antonio de Espeio, a very rich man of great courage and industry, and very zealous in the service of the majesty of king Philip: he was naturally borne of Cordova, who when that he understood the great desire of the said Friars, and how much it did import, did offer himself to go on that journey, and to spend thereon part of his substance, besides the venturing of his life. So licence being granted unto him to prosecute the same by some that did represent the king's person, and was procured by the said Friars, there was appointed and given him for captain john de Ontiveros (who was chief bayley for his majesty, in the towns which are called the four Cienegas which are in the government of the new Biscay, seventy leagues from the aforesaid mines of S. Barbora) and he to go with him, and gather together men and soldiers, such as he could, for to accompany him, and help to follow their Christian intent.  
The said Antonio de Espeio was so earnest in this matter, that in a few days he had joined together soldiers, and made provision necessary for the journey, and spent therein a great part of his substance, and departed altogether from the valley of saint Bartholomew the tenth of November 1582. and carry with him (for whatsoever should happen) one hundred and fifteen horses and mutes, great store of weapons and munition, with victuals and certain people of service in this journey necessary. He directed his journey towards the North, and at two days journey they came whereas were a great company of Indians, 
The province of Conchas.  of those which be called Conchos: they were in raches and in houses made of straw, who when they understood of their coming, by relation of long time before, they went forth and entertained them with shows of great joy. The feeding of these people & of all the rest of that province, 
Great store of Coneys, Hares and venison.  the which is great, is of conies ●lesh, Hares & venison, of the which they have great abundance. They have great store of Maiz, which is wheat of the Indians, pompines & melons very good and in abundance. They have many rivers full of fish very good and of divers sorts: they go almost all naked, and the weapons that they do use, are bows and arrows, and live under the government and lordship of Caciques, as they of Mexico: they found no Idols amongst them, neither could they understand that they did worship any thing, for the which they did easily consent that the Spaniards should set up crosses, and were very well content therewith, after that that they were informed by the Spaniards the signification thereof, the which was done by interpreters that they carried with them, & by whose means they understood of other inhabitances, whether as the said Conchos did conduct them, & did bear them company more than four and twenty leagues: all which way was inhabited with people of their own nation, and in all places whereas they came, they were received with peace, by advice that was given by the Caciques from one town to another. So having passed the four and twenty leagues aforesaid, they came unto another nation of Indians called Passaguates, 
Passaguates.  who live after the manner and fashion of the other aforesaid Conchos their borderers, who did unto them as the others did, conducting them forward other four days journey, with advice of the Caciques as afore. The Spaniards found in this journey many mines of silver (according to the judgement of them that understand that faculty) & of very rich metal. 
Mines of silver.  One journey from this they came to another nation called the Tobosoes, 
Tobosos  who when they discovered the Spaniards, they fled unto the mountains & left their towns & houses void: but more after they understood, that certain years past, there came unto that place certain soldiers for to seek mines, & carried with them captive certain of the natural people of that country, for which occasion they remain as scared & fearful. The captain forthwith gave order, that they should be called back again, with assurance that there should be no hurt done to them, & did so much that many of them returned▪ of whom they made much on▪ and gave them gifts, declaring unto them by the interpreter, that they came not thither to do hurt to any, with the which they all returned and were in quiet, and consented that they should set up crosses, and declare the mystery of them, and they made show that they were content therewith, and did accompany them, as the other their borderers did, until they had brought them into the inhabitant of another different nation, which was distant from them twelve leagues. They use bows and arrows, and do go naked.   

CHAP. VIII. Here he doth prosecute the discovering of the new Mexico  
THe nation that the said Tobosoes did conduct them to are called jumanos, 
jumanos▪  who by another name are called by the Spaniards Patara Bueyes, their province is very and full of towns with much people: their houses made of lime & stone, and their towns traced in very good order: all the men & women have their faces razed, & their legs & arms: they are corpulent people & more decent than any that they had seen until that time: they have great store of provision, and hunt, both of beasts and fowls: great store of fish, by reason of mighty rivers that cometh from the North, & some of them as big as Guadalquiviz the which doth enter into the North sea: they have many lakes of salt water which in certain times of the year do congeal, and they do make thereof good salt. 
Good salt.  They are warlike people, & made show thereof presently, for the first night that the Spaniards had placed themselves, with their arrows they slew five horse, & hurt as many more, and would have left not one alive, if they had not been defended by the guard. When they had done this mischief, they left the town, & went to a mountain which was hard by, whether as presently in the morning went their captain with other five soldiers well armed with an interpreter called Peter, a natural Indian borne, and with fair words and persuasions, he quieted them, and made peace, and caused them to descend into their town and houses and persuaded them to give advice unto their neighbours, that they were men that would hurt no body, neither came they thither to take away their goods, the which he obtained easily by wisdom, and in giving unto the Caciques certain glass beads and hearts which they carried for that purpose, & other trifles: so with this and with the good intretement done unto them, there went many of them in the company of the Spaniards many days always traveling alongst the river side aforesaid, where as were many towns of Indians of this nation, the which endured twelve days journey: in all the which the Caciques gave advice from one town to another, out of the which they came forth and entertained the Spaniards without their bows and arrows, and brought with them victuals and other provision and gifts, but in especial hides and shamway skins very well dressed, so that those of Flanders do nothing exceed them. These people are all clothed, & they found that they had some light of the holy faith, for that they made sign unto God, looking up unto heaven, and they do call him in their language Apalito, and do acknowledge him for Lord, by whose mighty hand and mercy they confess to have received life, & to be a natural man, and all temporal goods. There came many of them with their wives & children to the religious Friar (that came with the captain and soldiers, of whom we have spoken off) for to cross & bless than, of whom being demanded, from whence & of whom they had the knowledge of God: they answered that of three christians & one Negro that passed that way, & remained there certain days amongst them, who according to the signs & tokens they gave them, should be Aluar Nunnez Cabesa de Vaca & Dorantes, & Castillo Maldonado & one Negro, the which escaped out of the fleet wherewith Panfilo de Naruaz entered into Florida, & after that they had been many days captive & slaves, they escaped & came unto these towns, whereas God by them did show many miracles in healing (by the only touching with their hands) many diseases & sick persons, by reason thereof they left great fame in all that country. All this Province remained in peace and quietness, by which demonstration they did accompany and served the Spaniards certain days traveling alongst the river side aforesaid.  
Within few days after they came unto a great inhabitation of Indians, where they came forth to receive them, by news that they had of their neighbours, and brought with them many curious things made of feathers of different colours and many mantles made of cotton, barred with blue and white, like unto them that are brought from China, to truck for other things. All of them as well the men as women and children were clothed with shamway skins, very good and well dressed, yet could the Spaniards never understand what nation they were, for lack of an interpreter that understood their language they dealt with them by signs, and they showed unto them certain stones of rich metal, and being demanded if they had of the same in their country: they answered by the same signs, that five days journey from thence towards the north west, there was great quantity thereof, and how that they would conduct them thither, and show it unto them, as afterwards they did perform, & did bear them company two and twenty leagues, the which was all inhabited with people of the same country.  
So following the said river, they came unto an other inhabitant of much more people than the other past, of whom they were well received, and welcomed with many presents, especially of fish, for that they have great store by reason of certain great lakes not far from thence, wherein is bred great abundance. They were amongst these people three days, in the which both day and night they made before them many dances according unto their fashion, with a particular signification of great joy. They knew not how this nation was called, for lack of an interpreter: But yet they understood that it extended very far, and was very great. Amongst this nation they found an Indian, a Concho by nation, who told, and made signs that fifteen journeys from thence towards the north west, there was a lake which was very broad, and nigh unto it very great towns and in them houses of three and four stories high, the people well appareled, and the country full of victuals and provision, who did offer himself to bring them thither, whereat the Spaniards rejoiced, but left to give the enterprise, only for that they would accomplish their intent and begun voyage, which was to go to the north to give aid unto the two religious men aforesaid. The chief & principal thing that they noted in this province, was, that it was of a good temperature, and a rich country, great store of hunt, both of foot and wing, many rich metals and other particular things of profit.  
From this province they followed their journey for the space of 15. days, without meeting any people: they traveled amongst high & mighty pine trees like those of Spain, at the end whereof, after they had travailed to their judgements four score leagues▪ they came unto a small village of very few people, very poor, & their houses made of straw: they had great quantity of dear skins as well dressed as those that are brought out of Flanders, great store of excellent white & good salt. They gave them good entertainment for the space of two days that they remained there, after the which they did bear them company 12. leagues, unto certain great habitations, always traveling alongst the river side toward the north as aforesaid, till such time as they came unto the country which is called the new Mexico. All alongst this river side was planted full of white sallow trees, and in some place, it was four leagues broad. Likewise there was many walnut trees, and pear trees like unto those in Spain.  
In the end of two days travail amongst these trees, they came unto ten towns the which were situated alongst this river side on both parts, besides others that appeared, but farther distant. It seemed unto them to have much people, and as appeared to be more than ten thousand souls.  
In this Province they did receive them courteously, and carried them unto their towns whereas they gave them great store of provision and hens of the country, with many other things, and that with a great good will. In these towns were houses of four stories high, very well wrought and gallant chambers, 
Houses of 4. tories high.  and most of them had stews or hot houses for the winter. They are all appareled with cotton and of dears skins. the manner and apparel both of the men and of the women, is much like unto the Indians, of the kingdom of Mexico. But that which did cause them most for to wonder, was, to see both men and women to wear both boots and shoes of very good leather, with three sooles of neats leather: a thing which they have not seen but only there. The women go without any thing upon their heads, but their hair trimly kembed and dressed. Every one of these towns had Caciques by whom they were governed, as amongst the Indians in Mexico with sergeants and officers to execute their commandment, who go through the streets of the town, and declare with a loud voice the will of the Caciques, the which is strait ways put in ure.  
In this province the Spaniards sound many Idols that they worshipped, 
They worship the devil  and in every house they had a temple wherein they do worship the devil, whereas ordinarily they do carry him to eat. Likewise as amongst Christians in the high ways they do put crosses, so have they chapels, whereas they say, the devil doth recreate and rest himself, when as he traveleth from one town to an other: the which chapels are marvelously well trimmed and painted.  
In all their tyllages and ploughed grounds, of the which they have many and very great: they have on the one side of them, a portal or shed built upon four pillars, whereas the labourers do eat and pass away the heat of the day, and are people very much given to labour, and do continually occupy themselves therein: it is a country full of mountains and woods of pine trees. Their weapons are strong bows and arrows with their heads or points made of flint stone, wherewith they will pierce and pass a shirt of mail or plate coat. They use also Macans the which is a staff of half a yard long made of flint and very smooth, wherewith they may cut a man a sunder in the midst, they use also bucklers and targets made of raw hides.   

CHAP. IX. Still doth he prosecute the new Mexico, and declareth of such things as were there seen.  
SO after they had been four days in this province, they departed, & not far distant from the same, they came unto an other, which was called the province of the Tiguas, in the which they found sixteen towns, in the one of the same called Poala, they understood that the Indians had slain the two Friars Francisco Lopez and friar Augustine, whom they went to seek: and with them three boys & a Mestizo. But when they of this town & their neighbours understood, being pricked in conscience, & fearing that the Spaniards came to plague them, and to be revenged for the death of the said fathers, they durst not abide, but left their houses void, and fled unto the mountains that were nighest hand, from whence they could never cause them to descend, neither by gifts nor policy. They found in their houses great store of victuals and an infinite number of hens of the country, divers sorts of metals, and some of them seemed to be very good: they could not perfectly understand the number of people that were in that country, for that they were fled unto the mountains, as aforesaid.  
Being fully certified of the death of them that they went to seek for, they entered into counsel to determine whether they should return unto new Bizcaya, from whence they came, or to proceed forward: in the which there were divers opinions. But by reason that they understood there, that towards the port of the orient from that place, and not far distant from that province, there were very great towns and rich, and finding themselves so nigh them, the captain Antonio de Espero with the consent of the religious Friar aforesaid called Bernardino Beltran, and the most part of his soldiers & companions, determined to proceed forwards in the discovery thereof, till such time as they did see to what end it would come. that they might the better give perfect and just notice thereof unto his majesty, as witnesses that had seen it.  
So being in conformity they determined, they remaining there sentenela, or royal company, the captain with other two companions with him should go forwards in the demand of their desire, which forthwith they put in execution. So at the end of two days of their travail, they came unto a province, where they discovered eleven towns, and much people in them, which in their judgement did pass forty thousand souls. It was a country very well replenished & fertile, whose confines are joined unto the land of the Cibola, whereas is great store of kine, of whose skins they do apparel themselves and with cotton, having the use of government amongst them, as their neighbours have: there are signs and tokens of many rich mines, and found in their houses certain metals, these Indians do worship Idols: they received the Spaniards with peace, and gave them to eat. Seeing this and the disposition of the country they returned unto their sentenela from whence they departed, to give notice unto their companions of all that hath been said.  
So when they were come unto their companions aforesaid, they had notice and understanding of an other province called the Quires, which was up the river on the north, six leagues distant. So they departed thitherwards, and when they came within a league of the place: there came forth in peace a great company of Indians, and requested that they would go with them unto their towns: the which they did, and were very well entertained and had great cheer. In this province they saw but only five towns, in the which there was a great number of people, which unto their judgement did pass fifteen thousand souls, and do worship Idols as their neighbour's do. They found in one of these towns a Pie in a cage, as is the use in Spain, & Tirasoles as those which are brought from China, and painted on them the sun & the moon with many stars: and taking the altitude thereof, they found it to be in seven and thirty degrees and a half under the north pool.  
They departed from this province, and traveling by the same course or Rutter, fourteen leagues from thence, they came to an other province called the Cunames, whereas they discovered other five towns: and that which was the principal and biggest of them, is called Cia, which was of such huge bigness that it had in it eight places: their houses be plastered with lime, and painted with diverse colours, much better than they had seen in any province past. It seemed that the people that were there did pass in number twenty thousand souls: they gave presents unto the Spaniards with many curious mantles, and of victuals to eat marvelously well dressed, and judged the people to be more curious and of more estimation of themselves, than any that thitherto they had seen, and of greater government. They showed unto them rich metals, and the mountains that were hard by, 
ich metals.  whereas they did take it out. Here they had notice of an other province which was towards the north west, and determined to go thither.  
So after they departed from thence, & had travailed six leagues, they came to the said province, which was called Arneias, in the which was seven great towns, & in them according to their judgement, thirty thousand souls: they said that one of these seven towns was very great & fair, the which they would not go to see, for that it was situated behind a mountain, as also they feared some evil success, if that they should be divided the one from the other. They are people after the fashion of the other province their neighbours, with as much provision and as well governed. Fifteen leagues from this province, traveling continually towards the northwest, they came to a great town called Acoma: it had in it more than six thousand souls: it was situated and placed upon a high rock, the which was more than fifty fadam in height, and had no other entry but by a pair of stairs, the which was made & cut out of the same rock, a thing the which did cause great admiration unto the Spaniards: all the water that they had in this town was in cisterns. The principallest hereof came with peace for to see the Spaniards, & brought them many mantles, and shamwayes very well dressed, and great quantity of provision, they have their corn fields two leagues from that place, and for to water them they take water out of a small river there hard by. Upon the said river side they saw many fields with roses, like unto those that are in Spain: there are many mountains which show to have metals, although they went not up to see it, for that the Indians be many, & very warlike people. The Spaniards remained in this place three days, in one of the which the natural people thereof did make unto them a solemn dance, & came forth in the same with gallant apparel and with marvelous ingenious pastimes with the which they rejoiced exceedingly. So four & twenty leagues from this place, they came unto a province called in their natural language Zuny, and the Spaniards do call it Cibola, there is in it a great number of Indians. In the which was Francisco Vazquez Coronado, and left there erected many crosses and many other signs and tokens of christendom, which continually did remain standing. They found there three christened Indians, which were left there at that time, whose names were, Andres de Cuyoacon, Gasper de Mexico, and Antonio de Guadalaiara, who had almost forgotten their own language, & could speak very well that of this country: yet with a little use after they had talked with them they did easily understand them. Of these they understood that three score journeys from thence was there a lake very great about the which was situated many excellent good towns, & that the natural people thereof had very much gold, & it seemed to be true for that they did all wear bracelets & earrings of the same. The foresaid Francisco Vazques Coronado having certain intelligence of the same he departed from this province of Cibola, & went that way: and having traveled twelve journeys, his water did fail him, so that he determined to return back again as he did, with pretence to return an other time, when better opportunity should be had: the which afterwards he did not put in execution, for that by death all his determinations & pretences were cut off.   

CHAP. X. Still doth he prosecute the discovery of the new Mexico.  
Upon the news of this great riches aforesaid, the said captain Antonio de Espeio, determined to go thither, where were of his opinion the most part of his companions: but the religious friar was of the contrary opinion, & said that it was high time to return unto new Bizcaya from whence they came, for to give notice of all that they had seen, the which they did put in execution within few days after, the most part of them: and left the captain with alonely nine companions that would follow him. Who after that he had fully certified himself of the riches above said, and of the great quantity of good metals, that were there. He departed out of this province with his companions, and traveled towards the northwest.  
So after that they had traveled eight and twenty leagues, they came into an other province the which was very great, in the which to their judgement were more than fifty thousand souls: whose inhabitants, when they understood of their coming they sent them a messenger, which said, that if they would not be slain of them, that they should not approach any nearer unto their towns.  
Unto the which the said captain answered, that they came not thither to do them any harm as they should well perceive, and also did request them that they would not disturb them in the prosecuting of their pretence, and gave unto the messenger certain things such as they carried with them, who did praise so much the Spaniards, that he did appease the troubled minds of the Indians, in such sort, that they did of their own good will grant them licence for to enter into their towns. The which they did with one hundredth and fifty Indians their friends, of the Province of Cibola aforesaid, and with the three Indians of Mexico, of whom we made mention.  
Before they came unto the first town by a league, there went forth to meet and receive the Spaniards more than two thousand Indians laden with victuals and provision, unto whom our Captain did give things of small price: yet it seemed unto them to be of great estimation more than gold. So when they came nigher unto the town called Zaguato, there came forth to receive them a great number of Indians, and amongst them their Caciques, and made a great show of mirth and joy, and threw upon the ground much flower of Maiz that their horse might tread upon it. With these feasts, joy and pleasure, they entered into the town, whereas they were very well received, lodged, and made much of: the which the captain did partly recompense, in giving unto all the principallest amongst them, hats, and glass beads, and many other things more, which they carried with them to serve the like opportunity.  
The Caciques did forthwith dispatch and send advice unto all those of that province, giving them to understand of the coming of their new guests, and how that they were very courteous men, & did no harm. Which was occasion sufficient to cause them all to come laden with presents unto the Spaniards, and did request them for to go unto their towns to sport and recreate themselves: the which they did, but always with great care and respect of what so ever might happen. For the which t●e captain did use a policy with them, which was, that he told unto the Caciques, that for so much as his horse were very fierce and furious, and that they had told them that they would kill them, therefore for to shun the damage and harm that might happen unto the Indians, it were requisite to make a fort with lime and stone, to put them in. The Caciques did give such credit unto his words that in a few hours they had joined together so much people, that they made a fort according as the Spaniards did request, & that with an incredible brevity. Besides this when the captain said that he would departed, they brought unto him a present of forty thousand mantles of cotton, some white, and some painted: and a great quantity of hand towels with tassels at the corners, and many other things, and amongst them rich metals, which showed to have much silver. Amongst these Indians they had great notice and knowledge of the lake aforesaid, & they were conformable unto the other, in that touching the great riches & abundance of gold.  
The captain having great confidence in this people and of their good dispositions, he determined after certain days that he had been there, to leave five of his companions and the rest of the Indians his friends, that they might return unto the province of Zuny with all their baggage: and he himself with the other four that remained, would go more at quiet to discover certain very rich mines, of the which he had true notice. So according unto his determination he departed with the guides he had, and having traveled toward the northwest five & forty leagues, he came unto the said mines, and took out of the same with his own hands rich metals, and very much silver: 
Rich metals.  the mines had a great & broad vein, it was upon a rock whereas they might go up to it with great ease, for that there was a way open to that effect: nigh thereunto were certain towns of Indians amongst the mountains, who showed friendship unto them, and came forth to receive them with crosses in their hands, & other signs and tokens of peace: nigh unto the same they saw two reasonable rivers, upon whose banks there were many vines full of excellent good grapes, great walnut trees, and very much flax, like unto that of Spain, and it was told them by signs, that on the other side of the said mountains there was a river of 8. leagues broad But they could not understand how nigh it was, yet did they make demonstration, that it did run his course towards the north sea, and upon both sides thereof was situated many towns, and of so huge bigness, that in comparison those wherein they were, were but suburbs in respect.  
So after the Captain had taken all this relation he departed towards the province of Zuny, whither he had commanded his other companions to go, and at their coming thither in health, which was by an other excellent way, he found therewith his o●her five companions: the father Friar Bernardino with the soldiers that were determined to return back again (as aforesaid) for as yet they were not departed from thence for certain occasions. Unto whom the naturals of the country had given good entertainment and all things necessary, and that in abundance: and afterwards did the like unto the said Captain and unto them that came with him, and went forth to receive him with demonstration of great joy, and gave them great store of provision for their journey pretended, requesting him to return again with brevity, and to bring with him many Castillas (for so they do call the Spaniards) and they would give them all to eat: for the which (the better to accomplish the same) they had sowed that year more wheat and other grain, than they had done in any other year past.  
At this present the said religious Friar and the rest of the soldiers did ratify their first determination aforesaid, and concluded to return unto the Province from whence they came, with the pretence before spoken of, and there joined with him in that journey, Gregorio Hernandez, who was standard bearer in that attempt.  
So when they were departed the captain who remained but with eight soldiers, did fully resolve himself to prosecute his begun pretence, & to take his course up alongst the north river: which being but in execution, and having traveled about 60. leagues towards the province of Quires aforesaid, 12. leagues from thence towards the orient, they came unto a province called Gubates, whereas the Indians received them with peace, and gave them great store of provision▪ and also notice▪ that not far from thence there were certain rich mines, the which they found, and took out of them glistering metal and very good, with the which they returned to the town from whence they departed.  
They judged this province to have nigh upon five & twenty thousand souls, all well appareled with painted mantles of cotton, & shamwayes skins very well dressed. There are many mountains and woods of pine cedar trees, and their houses of four and five stories high. Here had they notice of an other province that was but one days journey from thence which was called of the Tamos, in the which was more than forty thousand souls, but when they came thither the inhabitants would not give them any victuals, neither permit them to enter into their towns▪ for the which, to avoid the danger wherein they were, being but a few soldiers (as aforesaid) and some of them sick, they determined to departed thence towards the country of christians, the which they put in execution the beginning of july in the year 1583. and were conducted by an Indian that went with them, who carried them by a contrary way and different from that they came, down alongst the river side, which they called of the Vacas. By reason that there was great store of kine all alongst the same. By the which they traveled one hundred and twenty leagues. From thence they came unto the river of the Conchas there whereas they first entered, and from thence unto the vale of S. Bartholomew from whence they departed to begin this discovery. And when they came thither they understood that many days before were arrived there in health, friar Bernardino Beltran and his companions, & were gonefrom thence unto the village of Guadiana. In this town the captain Antonio de Espeio made a certain & true information of all this aforesaid, the which presently he sent unto the Earl of Corunnia, viceroy of that kingdom: and he sent it unto his majesty, and unto the Lords of the royal counsel of the Indians, that therein they might ordain that which seemed them best, the which they have done with great care. I beseech the Lord God if it be his pleasure that it may go forwards in such order, that so many souls redeemed by his precious blood be not condemned: whose wits & understanding do far exceed those of Mexico & Peru, as by the information of those that have dealt with them appeareth, whereby we may presume that with great facility they will embrace the law of the gospel, and leave the Idolatry that the most part of them do use, which God for his mercy's sake permit, so it may be for his glory, and exalting of the catholic faith  
I have been tedious in this relation, more than a commentary doth require, but I have done it by reason it is a new thing and little abroad as yet, and it seemeth to me not to give discontent unto the reader. And now me thinketh it shall be well that I do return unto my matter first begun, and to proceed and go forwards in the voyage and description of the new world, returning unto the city of Mexico, there where as I did digress for to declare the discovery of the new Mexico,   

CHAP. XI. Departing from the city of Mexico, they go unto the port of Acapulco in the south sea, whereas they do embark themselves from the Islands Philippinas, they pass by the Islands of thieves, and do declare the rites and condition of that people.  
FRom the city of Mexico they go to embark themselves or take shipping at the port of Acapulco which is in the south sea, and is elevated from the pool nineteen degrees, and ninety leagues from the city of Mexico: in all which way there be many towns inhabited with Indians and Spaniards.  
Being departed from this port they sail towards the south west, till they come into twelve degrees & a half, to seek prosperous wind to serve their turn, which the mariners do call Brizas', and are northerly winds, which are there of such continuance & so favourable, that being in the months of November, December, and januarie, they have no need to touch their sails, which is the occasion that they do make their voyages with so great ease. So that for that, & for the few storms that happened in that passage, they do call it the mar de Damas' (which is the sea of Ladies). 
The sea of Ladies.  They sail always towards the west, following the sun when as she departeth from our hemisphery. In this south sea they sail forty days without seeing any land: at the end whereof they came to the Islands of Velas, which by an other name are called de los Ladrones: there are seven or eight of them, they do lie north and south, and are inhabited with much people, in the order as you shall understand.  
These islands are in 12. degrees, but there are different opinions of the leagues that are betwixt the port of Acapulco & those islands, for unto this day there is none that hath understood the cert●●ntie thereof, for that their navigation lieth from the east unto the west, whose degrees there have been none that ●uer could measure. Some say, this journey hath a thousand and seven hundred leagues, others a thousand and eight hundred, but the opinions of the first we understand to be most certain.  
All these islands are inhabited with white people of comely faces, like unto those of Europa, but not of their bodies, 
White people as big as giants.  for that they are as big as giants, and of so great force and strength: for one of them hath taken two Spaniards of a good stature, the one by one foot and the other by the other with his hands, & hath lifted them both from the ground with so great ease, as though they had been two children. They go naked from top to too, as well women as men, yet some of them were wont to wear an apron made of a dears skin before them of half a yard long, for honesties sake, but they are but a few in number, in respect of those that wear nothing before them. The weapons which they do use be swings, & darts hardened in the fire, and are with both the one and the other very expert throwers.  
They do maintain themselves with fish which they do take on the coast, and of wild beasts which they do kill in the mountains, in overtaking of them by swiftness of foot.  
In these islands there is one the strangest custom that ever hath been heard of or seen in all the whole world, which is, that unto the young men there is a time limited for them to marry in (according unto their custom) in all which time, they may freely enter into the houses of such as are married, and be there with their wives, without being punished for the same, although their proper husbands should see them: they do carry in their hands a staff or rod, & when they do enter into the married man's house they do leave it standing at the door, in such sort, that if any do come after, they may plainly see it: which is a token, that although it be her proper husband, he cannot enter in till it be taken away. The which custom is observed and kept with so great rigour and force, that whosoever is against this law, all the rest do kill him.  
In all these islands there is not as yet known neither king nor lord, whom the rest should obey, 
without king or governor,  which is the occasion that every one do live as he list and at his pleasure. These Islands were wont to have war the one with the other, when occasion did force them: as it happened at such time as the Spaniards were there in the port of the said Island: there came aboard their ships to the number of two hundred small barks or botes in the which came many of the inhabitants thereof, to sell unto them of the ships, hens, & nuts called cocos, patatas, and other things of that Island, and to buy other such things as our people did carry with them, but in especial iron (unto the which they are very much affectionated) and unto things of crystal and such like of small estimation. But there grew a great contention amongst them, which people of what Island should first come unto the ships, and was in such order that they fell unto blows, and wounded the one the other marvelously more liker beasts than men: of the which there were many slain in the presence of the Spaniards, and would never leave off their contention a good while, till in the end by way of peace they consented a conclusion amongst themselves, but with a great noise, which was, that those of one Island should go to the larbord of the ship, and those of the other Island should go to the starbord, with the which they were pacified, and did buy and sell at their pleasure. But at their departure from our people, in recompense of their good entertainment they threw into the ship of their darts hardened with fire, with the which they did hurt many of them that were above hatches: yet went they not away scotfree, for that our people with their hargabushes did pay them in ready money their bold attempt.  

Iron more esteemed than silver or gold.  These people do more esteem iron than silver or gold, and gave for it fruits nnames patatas, fish, rise, ginger, hens, and many gallant mats very well wrought, and all almost for nothing.  
Th●se Islands are very fertile and healthful, and very easy to be conquered unto the faith of Christ. If that at such time as the ships do pass that way unto Manilla they would leave there some religious men, with soldiers to guard them till the next year, and might be done with small cost. It is not as yet known what ceremonies and rites they do observe, for that there is none that do understand their language, neither hath any been on those Islands, but only as they have passed by, which is the occasion that they cannot be understood. The language which they do use, to any man's judgement is easy to be learned, for that their pronunciation is very plain, they call ginger asno, and for to say (take away your hargabush) they say arrepeque. The pronunciation of their words is neither in the nose nor in the throat. It is understood that they be all Gentiles, by certain signs and tokens that our people have seen them do, and that they do worship Idols, and the devil, unto whom they do sacrifice such as they do take in the wars of their borderers. It is thought that they do descend of the tartares, by some particularities that is found amongst them, the which do draw very nigh unto some that they do use.  
These Islands are south & north with the land of Labrador, which is nigh unto the new found land, and not far distant from the Island of japon. It is known for a truth that they do deal with the Tartars, and that they do buy iron for to sell it unto them. The Spaniards did give name unto these Islands as they passed by, the Islands of Ladrones (which is of thieves) for that they are very bold and subtle in their s●ealinges, in the which faculty, the Egyptians that are in our Europa may go to school with them for the very faculty thereof. I will declare unto you one thing that happened in the presence of many Spaniards, the which did cause them greatly to marvel, which is, there was a mariner commanded by the captain of the ship, to keep the sterneborde side, & not to suffer any of them to enter therein, and being as one amazed to see so many Canoes that came thither, (the which be small barks or botes made all of one piece) one of them dived down under the water, till he came there whereas the mariner was (unmindful of any such matter should happen) & upon a sudden without seeing the other, he snatched his sword out of his hand, & went under the water again therewith, the mariner made a noise & declared the knavery that the Islander had done unto him. whereupon there were certain soldiers that made their hargubushes ready to shoot at him when he appeared from under the water. This Islander perceiving it, came forth & swimmed above the water, showing his hands, & made signs that he had nothing in them, which was the occasion that they did not shoot at him.  
So after a while that he had been there resting of himself, he returned and dived under the water again, & swum so far as he thought that the bullet of the harquebus could not reach to hurt him, and finding himself in security, he took the sword from betwixt his legs whereas he did carry it in secret, and began to flourish with the same, mocking our people whom he had so easily deceived.  
This kind of stealing, and many others which they had done and that with great subtlety, is the occasion that they bear the names of thieves, and all the Islands whereas they do dwell do bear the name thereof, the which they will easily pardon, if they might ordinarily find, where as they might execute their inclination.   

CHAP. XII. They depart from the Islands of the Ladrones, and come unto them of Luzon, or Philippinas by an other name, and do declare the particular thoughts of those Islands.  
FRom this Island of Ladrones' navigating towards the west, almost two hundred leagues, till they came to a mouth called of the holy ghost, 
Archipelago.  they straightways do enter into the Archipelago, (which is an infinite number of islands) almost all inhabited with their own natural people. But many conquered by the Spaniards, either by force of war or friendship. Four score leagues from this is the city of Manilla, 
The Island of Luzon, and city of Manilla.  which is upon the Island of Luzon, there whereas ordinarily dwelleth the governor of all those Islands, & the officers of his majesty, therein is a bishop and a cathedral church. This city standeth in fourtéen degrees & a quarter, and round about the same there are so many Islands, that unto this day there is none that ever could number them: they do extend all of them northwest and south-west, & north & south, in so much that the one part stretcheth unto the strait of Sincapura which is five and twenty leagues from Malaca, and the other part unto the Malucos, & other Islands, whereas they gather a great number of cloves, pepper, & ginger, of the which there are great mountains full. The first that discovered these islands were Spaniards, 
Geeat mountains of pepper, cloves, and ginger.  which came to them in the company of the famous Magellanes, & made no conquest of them, for that they knew better to navigate then to conquer, by reason whereof, after they had discovered and passed the strait (which unto this day beareth the title of his name) and came unto the Island of Zubu, whereas they did baptize certain of the inhabitant, and afterwards in a banquet, the same Islanders did kill him, and other forty of his companions, which was the occasion that Sebastian de Guetaria, a natural Biskin borne, for to escape with his life, did put himself in a ship that remained of the voyage (which afterwards was named the victory) and in her and with a few people that helped him, with the favour of God he came unto Seville, having compassed the whole world, from the Orient unto the Ponient, a thing which caused unto all men great admiration, but in particular unto the Emperor Charles the fift of famous memory, who after he had given many gifts and favours unto the said Sebastian de Guetaria, he gave order that a new army should be made ready, and to return again in demand of the said islands, and to discover that new world.  
So when all things were in a readiness for to departed on their voyage (the which was done with great brevity) they ordained for general of all that sleet one Villa Lobos, commanding him to go by the Nueva Espania. This Villa Lobos, arrived at the islands of Malucas, and at those of Terrenate & at other islands joining unto them, the which islands were laid to gauge by the aforesaid Emperor unto the crown of Portugal.  
In these islands they had great wars by means of the Portugals, and seeing themselves with little help and small resistance, for to go forwards with their conquest, they left it off, and went to the most part of them with the aforesaid Portugals unto the India of Portugal, from whence afterwards they sent them as prisoners unto the said king of Portugal, as offenders, that had entered his islands without his licence: who did not only leave to do them any harm, but did entreat them very well and sent them unto their own country of Spain, & gave them all things necessary for their journey, and that in abundance.  
Then certain years after, Don Philip king of Spain being very willing that the discovering should go forwards, which the Emperor his father had so earnestly procured, sent and commanded Don Lewis de Velasco, who was his viceroy of the Nuova Espania, that he would ordain an army, and people for to return and discover the said islands, and to send in the said fleet for governor of all that should be discovered Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, who did accomplish all that his majesty had commanded, and made the discovery thereof in such order, as the first relation of the entry of the fathers of the order of Saint Austen into the China doth more at large appear.  
Of ancient time these Islands were subject unto the king of China, until such time as he did deliver them up of his own free will, for such reasons as were spoken off in the first part of this history: & that was the occasion that when the Spaniards came unto them, they were without Lord or head, or any other to whom they should show duty, but he which had most power and people did most command: so that this (and that there were so many of equal power) was the occasion that civil wars continued, without any respect of nature, kindred, or any other duty, but like unto brute beasts, killing, spoiling and captiving one another, the which was a great help● unto the Spaniards for to subject that country with so great ease unto the king, and called them the islands Philippinas in respect of his name. They did use amongst them to make captives and slaves such as they did take in unlawful wars, and for trifling matters, the which God did remedy by the going thither of the Spaniards: for you should have a man with forty or fifty other friends in his company, or servants, that upon a sudden would go and set upon a small village of poor people and unprovided, and take and bind them all, and carry them away for slaves without any occasion or reason, and make them to serve them all the days of their life, or else sell them to other islands. And if it so chanced that one did lend unto another a basket or two of Rice (the which might be worth a rial of plate) with condition to return it again within ten days: if the debtor did not pay it the same day, the next day following he should pay it double, and afterward to double it every day so long as he did keep it, which in conclusion the debt would grow to be so great, that to pay the same, he is forced to yield himself for captive and slave.  
But unto all such as were captived in this order, or in such like, the king of Spain hath commanded to give liberty, yet this just commandment is not in every point fulfilled and accomplished, because such as should execute the same have interest therein. All these Islands were Gentiles and Idolaters, but now there is amongst them many thousands baptized, unto whom the king hath showed great mercy, in sending unto them the remedy for their souls in so good time: for if the Spaniards had stayed any more years, they had been all moors at this day, for th●t there were come unto the Island of Barneo some of that sect that did teach them, and lacked little, for to worship that false prophet Mahomet, whose false, perverse and corrupt memory, was with the Gospel of Christ easily rooted out.  
In all these islands they did worship the sun and moon, and other second causes, figures of men and women, which are called in their language Maganitoes, at whose feasts (which they do make ve●y sumptuous, with great ceremonies and superstition) they do call Magaduras. But amongst them all, they have in most veneration an Idol, whom they called Batala, the which reverence they had for a tradition, yet can they not say what should be the occasion that he should deserve more than any of the rest, to be had in so great estimation. In certain islands not far off, called the Illocos, 
The diue●● was worshipped.  they did worship the devil, and made unto him many sacrifices, in recompense, of a great quantity of gold he had given unto them, but now by the goodness of God, and the great diligence put and done by the fathers of the order of saint Austen (who were the first that passed into those parts, and lived worthily) and also by the friars of saint Francis, which went thither ten years after, all these islands or the most part of them are baptized, and under the ensign of jesus Christ: and the rest which do remain and are not, is more for lack of ministers and preachers, then for any obstinacy of their parts. There is now gone thither certain fathers of the order called jesuits, who will be a help unto them with their accustomed zeal and labour. And now goeth thither many other religious men, very well learned and apostolic, of the order of saint Dominicke, who will do their endeavour to conu●rt them unto Christ, as it behoveth Christians to do.   

CHAP. XIII. Here is declared of some notable things that are, and have been seen in these islands Philippinas.  
THey of these Islands were accustomed to celebrate their feasts aforesaid, and to make sacrifices unto their Idols, by the order of certain women which were witches, 
Vitches.  whom they do call in their language Holgois, that were had in as great estimation amongst them, as be the priests amongst Christians. These did talk ordinarily with the devil, and many times in public, and do devilish witchcrafts both in words and deeds: into whom it is to be believed that the devil did enter, for that straightways they did answer unto all things that were demanded of them, although for the most part they would tell a lie, or else such words that might be given divers interpretations of, and of divers understandings. They did also use to cast lots, in such sort as hath been declared in the first part of this history: they were great Agorismers or observers of times: in so much that if they begin any journey, and at the beginning they meet with a Cayman or lyzarde, or any other savage worm, they know it to be a sign of evil fortune, whereupon they would straightways leave off their journey, although it did import them very much, and return unto their houses, saying, that the heaven will not that they should go forwards on that journey: but all these lies and falseness which been taught them, & they persuaded to by the devil, is overthrown and taken away by the law of the Gospel (as aforesaid) & have now amongst them many monasteries full of religious men, of the order of saint Austen, saint Francis, and of jesuits. According unto the common opinion, at this day there is converted and baptized more than four hundred thousand souls, which is a great number: yet in respect of the quantity that are not as yet converted, there are but a few. It is left undone (as aforesaid) for want of ministers, for that, although his majesty doth ordinarily send thither without any respect of the great charge in doing the same, yet by reason that there are so many islands, and every day they do discover more & more, and being so far off, they cannot come unto them all, as necessity requireth. Such as are baptized, do receive the faith with great firmness, and are good Christians, and would be better, if that they were helped with good ensamples: as those which have been there so long time are bound to do: that the lack thereof doth cause some of the inhabitants so much to abhor them, that they would not see them once painted upon a wall. For proof whereof (and for to move such as have power and authority to put remedy in the same, I will declare unto you here a strange case, the which Royally did pass of a truth in one of these Islands, and is very well known amongst them: that is, there chanced to die an Islander, a principal man amongst them, a few days after that he was baptized, being very contrite for his sins the which he had done against God before he was baptized, and after he died. So after by the divine permission of God he appeared unto many of that islands whom he did persuade forthwith to receive the baptism, with reasons of great efficacy, and declared unto them (as one that had experienced the same) the reward of that good deed which without all doubt should be given unto them, if they would receive the same, and live after conformable, and according unto the commandments of Christ▪ for the which he told them and said that forthwith so soon as he was dead, he was carried by the Angels into glory, there whereas all things were of delight, pleasure, and content, and did communicate only in the sight of God, and that there was none that entered therein, neither could enter, except he were baptized, according unto the preaching of the Spaniards, of whom and of others that were like unto them, there was an infinite number. Therefore if so be that they would go and enjoy of those benefits and delights▪ it is necessary that first they should be baptized, and afterwards to observe and keep the commandments that be preached unto them by the fathers, that are amongst the Castillas, and therewith he vanished away, 
The Indians would not go into heaven because there were spanish soldiers.  and they remained treating amongst themselves concerning that which they had heard, and was the occasion that some of them forthwith received the baptism, and that others did delay it, saying, that because there were Spaniard soldiers in glory, they would not go thither, because they would not be in their company.  
All this hurt is done by one perverse or impious man, and with one evil ensample, the which amongst many good, as you have in those parts: but in especial amongst them in particular, it ought to be reprehended and punished seuéerely with rigour.  
These islands at the first discovery of them, had the fame to be Mal Sanos, or unwholesome, but since experience hath showed and proved it to the contrary: It is a country marvelous fertile, and yieldeth very much Rice, wheat, goats, hens, dear, buffs, kine, and great store of hogs, whose flesh is so savoury as the mutton they have in Spain: there be also many cats that yield sivet, great store of fruits which be very good and savoury: 
Sivit. Honey.  great abundance of Honey, and fish, and all sold at so small a price, that almost it is sold for nothing. 
Sinamum.  Also there is great store of cinnamon, but no Oil of Olives, but that which is carried thither out of the Nuova Espania: 
Linseed Oil.  they have much Oil of Algongoli and of Flax s●ede, the which they do spend ordinarily in that country, so that the Oil of Olives is not miss with them.  

Cloves. Saffron. Pepper. Nutmegs. Cotton and Silk. Powder. Saltpetre. Iron. Steel. Quicksilver. Brass. Copper.  There is great store of Cloves, Saffron, Pepper, Nutmegs and many other drugs: great store of cotton and silk of all colours, the which is brought unto them by merchants of China, every year a great quantity, from whence cometh more than twenty ships laden with pieces of silks of all colours, and with earthen vessel, powder, saltpetre, Iron, steel, and much quicksilver, brass, copper, wheat flower, walnuts, biscuit, dates, linen cloth, counting chests very gallantly wrought, calls of network, Buratos, Espumillas, basins and ewres made of tin, parchment lace, silk fringe, and also of gold, the which is spun and twisted after a fashion never s●ene in all Christendom, and many other things of great curiosity, and all this aforesaid is sold very good cheap. Likewise such things as the islands do yield, are sold very good cheap, for you shall have four roves of wine which cometh of the Palm tree for four rials of plate (the which for lack of that made of grapes is very good) twelve haneges of Rice for eight rials of plate, three hens for one rial, a whole hog for eighteen rials, a whole buff for four rials, a dear for t●o rials, and yet it must be both great and good, four roves of sugar for six rials, a ●otiia of Oil made of Algongoli for three rials, two baskets of saffron for two rials: six pounds of pepper or cloves for one rial, two hundred nutmegs for one rial, a rove of synamum six for rials, a kintal of iron or steel for ten rials, thirty dishes of very fine earth four rials, and all other things after this rate.  
But amongst all other notable things that these Spaniards have seen, in those islands, and in the kingdom of China, and other places whereas they passed: there is one thing which hath caused them most to marvel at, and to have it most in memory, which is a tree, ordinarily called Palma de Cocos, but doth differ from that which beareth the dates, and with great reason, for that it is a plant so full of mystery and profit, that there hath come a ship unto these islands, and the said ship, and all that was in her to be sold, with ropes, cords, masts, sails, and nails were made of this tree, and the merchandise that she brought was mantles made of the rind of the said tree, with great subtlety and fine works. Likewise all the victuals that was in the said ship for the sustentation of thirty men that came in her, yea their water was of the same tree.  
The merchants that came in this ship did certify of a truth, in all the Island of Maldivia from whence they came, they have no other sustainment, but only that which this tree yieldeth: they do make houses hereof, and tiles for to cover the same, the fruit doth yield a Meollio or curnell, which is very savoury and healthful, the savour thereof is much like to green hazel nuts, and if you do cut the branch there whereas the Coco cometh forth is the principal fruit, and every one of them hath ordinarily a pint of water, the which is very sweet & delicate all the said substance doth return into the trunk of the tree, whereas they do boar a hole, and thereat they do draw out all that water, which is much: and mingling it with other things they make thereof good wine, the which is drunk in all those islands and in the kingdom of China. Of the same water they make vinegar, and of the Meollio kernel aforesaid, oil very medicinal, milk like unto Almon milk: honey and sugar very savoury. These and many other virtues hath this palm, whereof I have declared part, for that they are notable, & do cause admiration unto all men that pass into those parts: I do leave to declare the rest because I would not be tedious. Nigh to the city of Manilla, on the other side of the river there is a town of Chinos that be baptised, such as have remained there to dwell to enjoy the liberty of the gospel. There are amongst them many handicrafts men, as shoemakers, tailors, goldsmiths, blacksmiths, and other officers, and some merchants.   

CHAP. XIIII. The barefoot Friars depart from the Island of Luzon, unto China, and is declared such as was there seen.  
FOr that the principal intent of these religious men when they went out of Spain, was for to go unto the mighty kingdom of China for to preach the holy gospel, and did persever continually with that desire, they would never entreat of any other thing, but only to put it in execution: and for the accomplishing of the same, they sought many means and ways, sometimes in requesting the governor of his aid and help to procure the same, for that it was an easy thing to be performed, having continually ships of the merchants of China in the port of Manilla.  
The governor did drive them off with many reasons, but principally he laid before them that rigorous law, which they knew was established against such as did enter into that kingdom without particular licence, yet notwithstanding all this was not sufficient to abate the loving desire of those Friars, which was only settled in their minds for to go and preach the holy gospel in that kingdom by one means or other, although it were to put their lives in hazard: and for the prosecuting hereof, the commissary of those islands, who was Friar Geronimo de Burgos did elect six religious men for the same purpose: amongst them was the father Ignatio, of whom I (as I have said) understood by writing and relation, many things, the which is declared in these Itinerario or commentary: so that there was with him seven religious men, all servants of God, and very desirous of the salvation of souls, which was the occasion that they put themselves in so long and tedious a journey, leaving their own country and quietness. These seven with the good will of the governor Don Gonsalo Ronquillo, and of the bishop, whom they did overcome and win with requests and perseverance, and carried in their company a Spaniard their friend, called john De Feria, of Andolozia, and other two soldiers that went with pretence to become friars, one Portugal and six Indian Islanders: all the which the eight day after Corpus Christi, which was the one and twenty day of june, in anno 1582. they departed from the port of Cabite, whereas they did embark themselves in a bark of the said john De Feria, and making sail at five of the clock in the afternoon, in the morning betimes they found themselves twenty leagues overthwart the port that is called Del Frail, whereas they determined to go to sea, leaving the coast of the Island of Manilla, which lieth North and South with China: from the which City which is (as I have said) in fourteen degrees and a half, unto the Cape of Boxeador which is in nineteen, it is one hundredth leagues sailing, and from this Cape to the firm land of China, they count it scarce fourscore leagues. And God was so pleased, although they had two days calm, the seventh day, which was the day before the apostle saint Peter and saint Paul, at eight of the clock in the morning, they discovered the firm land of China: then straightways upon the sight thereof, the commissary commanded to bring forth the habits which he carried ready made for to put upon the Friars, for that when the Chinos should see that they were all Friars, they should be void of all suspicion, to think them to be spies, as they thought when the first Friars went thither (as hath been told you,) and not contented herewith, he threw all the soldiers apparel into the sea, and one hargabus of john De Feria, with the Flask wherein he carried his powder, and all other things such as he thought would be a hurt and hindrance unto them, if it should so fall out that they should err out of the port whereas the Portugals do use, and fall upon the coast, as afterwards it fell so out, they left nothing but a match which they forgot, which lacked very little to have cost them full dear. But when they had sight of the land, they did not well know it, for that they had never seen it before, & were also ignorant of the ports, although they were very near to the bay of Canton, they took their course unto the Northwest, whereas they should have gone to the south-west, which was the occasion that they came unto the province of Chincheo. This day at five a clock in the afternoon they discovered a port that was not far from them, whither they sailed and entered in, and came to an anchor on the outmost side, yet with great fear and dread, for that they knew not the security thereof, neither the trouble that might happen.  
They were not so soon at an anchor, but they saw come forth of the said port many barks, both small and great, and in them many soldiers with hargabusses, lances, sword and targets, and in their soreshippe some small pieces of ordinance. And when they came nigh unto the bark wherein the Spaniards were, within musket shot, they stayed and discharged great store of hargabus shot. But they who carried no armour to offend others, neither to defend themselves, the answer that they gave unto the shot, was making of many signs of peace, calling them with their hands to come nearer unto them, that they might see and understand that they came not thither with any pretence to do harm: Yet all was not sufficient to cause them to leave off their shooting, neither to come any nearer unto their bark. At this present there was amongst the soldiers one Chino that had been at Luzon, and did know the Spani●rds, being of God inspired: he made signs unto the rest, to leave off their shooting, which presently they did: and he came with his Brigantine unto their bark, and after him all the rest: who when they saw that they had neither armour nor weapon, neither will to fly from them, they entered into the bark, and with their naked sword in their hands flourishing with them over the heads of the Spaniards, with a great noise and tumult, they carried them into the port, which was called Capsonson, whereas was a general of a great army of ships that were at an anchor in the said port, who straightways commanded that there should be carried on board his admiral four of the Spaniards, the which they understood was done to take their lives from them: for the which, by reason they did not name any person, four religious men did offer themselves to go, and after they had confessed themselves, they took their leave of their companions, and carried every one of them a cross in his hand, and his breviary, without any other thing else.  
So when they came before the captain, they found him more meeker and milder than they thought to have done (surely a work done by God in recompense of the great peril that those his servants did put themselves in to do his service and commandment). He asked of them, from whence they came, and wherefore, with many other questions in effect: but when that he was certified of the truth, he commanded them to return again unto their bark, without doing unto them any other harm, yet with a strait precept that they should not go forth without his express licence.  
So with this commandment they remained in their bark three days, guarded with many barks and soldiers: and the last of them, the Captain sent for two of the religious men, and when they came before him, he commanded them to be carried before a justice, a friend of his there hard by. These justices did talk with them with so great gravity, and signs of cruelty, that every time they came before them, they thought verily that forthwith they would command them to be carried to be executed: and without all doubt, either they had will to do it, or else to put them in great fear of death, for that it was plainly seen in divers things they commanded: but especially in one day there came unto them a judge, with many armed men, and compassed their bark round about with a great number of Brigandines, with plain signs to give them assault, or else to sink them: but within a little while they were all in quiet, and the judge entered into a ship that was thereby at anchor, and being set in a rich chair, guarded with many soldiers about him, he commanded the rest that were in the Brigandines forthwith to go to visit and search their bark, and sent with them an interpreter, one of Chincheo, who did a little understand the Portugal tongue. These soldiers carried in their hands black banners, and other heavy and sorrowful signs (which is used in that kingdom, when at any time they do execute any person.) So after they had made their v●sitation, although they found in their bark not any prohibited thing, but one●y the match which I have spoken off▪ they commanded that they should forthwith he embarked two and two into the Brigandines whereas the armed soldiers were, who did direct their foreshippes towards a tower, which was a prison, wherein was put all such sheaves as, were taken upon the coast, out of the which there cometh none ●●rth but unto execution. But when the Indians of the islands saw it, they wept bitterly, which moved the Spaniards unto great compassion, although they were themselves in the same trance and peril, and as nigh their death, & made no other reckoning insomuch that two of the religious men seeing them so nigh ●he tower (although when as they were far off, they made show as though they cared not for it) yet at that time they were so far from all reason and understanding, that all the night one of them knew not what he did, without any knowledge of the people wherein he was, but lay as a dead man: and the other with pure imagination & melancholic humour fell into a great infirmity, whereof within a few days after he died in the city of Canton: but in conclusion the stoutest of them all had fear enough, & would have given his life for a small matter, for that he was without all hope●, and thought verily that they carried them unto execution: which was the occasion that a Spaniard, one of them that went with pretence to be a friar, & the habit on, having in his power ● thousand & six hundred rials of plate, he threw them into the sea, saying, seeing that I am going to die, I will that it be in the habit of saint Francis, with the poverty in which the glorious saint lived and died, for to follow him in his steps aright. With this fear aforesaid they were carried towards the tower: but when they came nigh to it, there followed after the soldiers that carried them a skiff, with many oars, in great haste, & called a loud unto them saying, that the captain general commanded that they should bring back again those prisoners to his ship, the which forthwith they accomplished: & after he had demanded of them certain questions, he commanded to carry them to the said tower, the which was done, as they could perceive, for to put them in more fear. So after they had feared & scared them with this rigorous tentation. The said captain himself went into one of the Brigandines, & went with them on land, whereas presently when he came on shore, he carried the Spaniards into a temple of their Idols, unto whom he did his accustomed reverence, yet the religious men, although they were with great fear of death as afore said, they would not imitate him, but turned their faces from their Idols, and did spit at them, giving the captain to understand by signs, that he should not worship them, for that they had no more goodness in them, than was given by man, so that by good reason, to the contrary, those Idols should give reverence unto men because they made them, and to whom they ought to give their true worship, is unto the true God, the creator of heaven and earth.  
By this act it is plainly to be seen the gift of strength, the which the holy Ghost doth give unto his baptised Christians as in these religious men, that were at deaths door, yet had they strength and spirit for to resist and reprehend them that could take away their lives. The captain although he made a show that he was offended with that which he had seen them do, yet he did them no harm, but presently brought them out of the temple, and commanded the soldiers to remain there and guard them all that night: the which they passed lying upon the ground, and yet thought themselves happy, and gave thanks to God for that he had delivered them from the death that was so nigh unto them.   

CHAP. XV. Here he doth prosecute in things which the said fathers did see, and understand, the second time they entered into the kingdom of China, and of the troubles they passed.  
THe next day in the morning the Priest of the Idols did open the temple, whereas presently they put in the Spanish religious men, who saw him and his ministers lighting of little candles, and making perfumes unto their Idols, with many superstitious ceremonies, the which being done, they cast certain lots (a thing much used amongst them) as they understood it was done for to consult with the devil (who was within those Idols) to know what they should do with them, yet this they could not perfectly understand, but straightways they were carried out of the temple, and brought by the soldiers before a judge, who was the chief and principal of all the sea of that province, and was six leagues from the place in a City called Quixue: the way thither was very plain and broad, and paved, and upon both sides there were fields both of corn and flowers. So with the help of God, the Spaniards came before the presence of this general in eight days, although it was with great travel, by reason they had neither force nor strength for to travel, for that they had lost it with the heavy and sorrowful news as aforesaid.  
Yet notwithstanding at their coming to the city Quixue, the soldiers had them in continual guard and keeping, till the next day following, than they were carried before the general, where he was in a very great & fair house, the which had two cou●ts, one of them was next unto the door of the street, and the other was towards the farther parts of the house, both of them were railed round about in manner of grates: they were planted full of divers sorts of great trees, wherein did feed a great number of dear and other wild beasts, but yet as tame as sheep. Right over against the inward court there was a gallery, whereon was many soulidiers which did guard and kee●e the person of the general, who was in a mighty great and gallant hall, set in an ivory chair with great majesty. Before they entered into the second court, there was discharged within, both artillery and habagus shot, and played upon a drum, which was as big as those which they use in Spain: that being done, there was a great sound of hoybuckes and trumpets, and of many other instruments: the which being done, they straightways opened the gates of the innermost court, whereas the gallery was aforesaid, from whence they might see the throne whereas the general was set. There was before him a table whereon was paper and other necessaries for to write (a thing commonly used in all that country:) the soldiers that were his guard were, all in one livery of silk, & were in so gallant consort, & had so great silence, which made the Spaniards greatly to marvel: The first order was of the hargabushes, and the second were pikes, and betwixt the one and the other, was placed a sword and a target, there might be about four hundred soldiers. Behind them were placed the officers of justice or executioners, with their instruments for to whip and punish offenders: and in the midst of them were the scriveners and proctor's.  
About thirty paces more or less from the chair where the general was set, was placed certain Gentlemen, and to the number, of a dozen pages bore headed, very gallantly appareled in silk and gold. In the midst amongst these soldiers were the Spaniards carried, and before them such tokens and shows, as they do use when as they do present before the judges such as be condemned unto death. A good way before they came nigh unto the place whereas the general was, they caused them to kneel down: at which instant there was brought forth certain Chinos that were prisoners to be judged, and so soon as their indictment was read, and judgement given, the executioners did execute the rigour of the sentence in the presence of the Spaniards, first pulling off their apparel, and then making fast their hands and feet very fast with cords, in such sort, that they shrieked that the noise reached unto heavens: they kept them so bound until they saw farther what the judge would command. who when he had heard his indictment, if he would that he should be whipped, he striketh a blow with his hand upon the table that is before him: then the executioners do strike five blows upon the calves of the legs of the offender with a broad cane, in the order as hath been said, and is so cruel that none can suffer fifty of them but he dieth. The blow being given upon the table by the general, straightways one of the proctor's maketh a cry or noise, where at presently cometh the executioner for to execute his office. And if the offender doth deserve more, than the judge doth strike another blow upon the table: then is there given him other five blows, and in this sort doth the judge so many times as his offence doth deserve. At the lamentations and shrieks that these miserable offenders do give, the judges show no more sign of pity then if they were strooken upon a stone. So the audience being concluded and done with the naturals of the country, the general commanded that the spaniards should come a little nearer, and looked and searched their garments and all the rest, as also their Breviarios & books: that being done, they were informed by those that brought them, how and in what order they were apprehended, and of all other things touching their coming into that kingdom: understanding thereof, he commanded them to be carried unto prison, where they were put in sure hold, and with great watch and guard for certain days, in the which time they passed incredible trouble, as well of hunger as of thirst and heat, which was the occasion that the most part of them fell sick of agues, and of the lask.  
So after these days that they were in prison, they were carried once again to the audience, and many other more were brought forth to be visited, all people believing that the Spaniards should no more return, but be executed, for the which they received great content, to be cleared by one death, of so many as daily they had before their eyes. In the conclusion of this audience the general did decree, that they should be carried by sea unto the City of Canton, whereas was the viceroy of that province, and he to command them to be executed or punished according as he thought best, according unto the penalty put upon whatsoever stranger that should enter into that kingdom without licence (as they did enter). But when they saw that they were carried out of the prison unto the sea, they verily believed that it was to drown them therein, for the which (having a new confessed themselves, and commended themselves unto God) they did animate one another, with the representation of the reward which was prepared for them: but when they came unto the bar whereas they should embark themselves, upon a sudden the sea began to wax very lofty and troublesome, that it seemed almost a miracle, and it increased in such sort, that the soldiers and mariners said, that never before they had seen the like torment, the which endured the space of ten days: the which was the occasion that they did not embark themselves, and that the general did change his pretence, and determined that they should be carried by land unto the great City of Saucheo Furio, the which was presently put in ure: they were many days on this journey, with fifty soldiers that did guard them: in the which they saw so many curious things, and of so great riches, that they judged it to be the best country in all the world.  
So when they came unto the city, with so small trouble and weariness, by reason of their long journey and evil entreatings by the soldiers, they were presently carried (as might be said) from Herode to pilate, and escaped not one day, but they were carried to the public audience, or else before some particular judge. This city was very fresh both within and without, and full of many orchards, whereas were an infinite number of fruit, with gardens, stanges of water, and other things of great recreation. This city is three times so big as Seville, and compassed about with a mighty strong wall, their houses are very great and well wrought, their streets are exceeding fair, broad and long and so strait that from the one end unto the other they may see a man. In equal distance the one from the other, there are built many triumphal arks: (which is an ordinary and common thing used in the cities of that kingdom) upon their gates there are little towers, whereon is planted all the artillery that they have for the defence of the city (as hath been said) all the which is environed and compassed about with a river which is great and fair, on the which is ordinarily sailing an infinite number of barks and brigandines, and is of so great depth, they may come & lie hard unto the wall, yea ships of great burden. On the one side of the city there is a little Island of great recreation, unto the which they do pass by a very fair bridge, the one half made of stone and the other of timber, and is of so great a length, that on the part that is made of stone, the father friar Ignacio did tell thirty Inns or victualling houses whereas was to be bought, not only flesh and fish, but also great store of ambergris, of great estimation and valour, as amber, musk e, pieces of silk and cloth of gold.   

CHAP. XVI. The Spaniards are sent unto the city of Hucheofu, & do declare what happened there unto them.  
FRom the city of Saucheofu they were sent unto Hucheofu the which is more principal and great than the first, always having with them in company and guard the number of soldiers aforesaid: sometimes they travailed by land and sometimes by water, whereas they saw so many rich things, which in respect to them, all that they had seen unto that time was nothing. Of the which, although I have had particular relation of many of them, I leave off here the declaring thereof, for that of an Itinerario or commentary I will not make a history. But principally for that many of them do seem to be incredible, and will be more unto those that have not had any notice of the mightiness of this kingdom.  
In the discourse of this their journey, the cities and towns they saw, were many and very big, and all compassed with strong walls: and at one of them there was a mighty river, on the which was edified more than five hundredth engines or wheels, and they were made with so much art, that alonely with the violence of the stream of the river, that doth force them, they water all the grounds there abouts for the space of two leagues and more, without any other help or humane force.  
In this city they were certain days in visiting, and complements, after the which they were commanded to go unto Canton, of the which in the two relations before, is made particular mention. So when they came unto the City they were carried unto the prison of the Thequixi, which is whereas are put such as are condemned to die, the which they plainly perceived. There they remained very many days, and the most part of them were carried unto the tribunal seat of the judges, in company with others that were condemned to die.  
At this time there was in the city, the Tutan, who was the viceroy of the province: and the Chacu, who is the general visitor, and that was at such time as was done great justice for to clear the prisons, whereas were thousands of men, and some that had been there more than ten years. There was some day at that time that in the presence of our people, were brought forth to be judged two thousand prisoners, some to the death, and others to be whipped, and other to be banished with other kind of penalties, according unto the disposition & rigour of their laws. That day wherein they make capital audience, they use particular ceremonies, as shooting of certain pieces of artillery, and to shut the gates of the city, not permitting any to enter in, neither go forth, till such time as that act and justice be finished, and many other things as hath been declared in the first part of this history.  
The Spaniards being in the city at this time of so great calamity, it so fell out that the same time there was a gentleman of Portugal called Arias Gonsalo de Miranda, chief captain of the city of Machao (very devout unto religious men, and a friend unto Spaniards) who understanding the great trouble and danger wherein they were, he took order by all means possible to set them at liberty, and had so great care therein, that he went through with his intent, in such sort that they were delivered out of prison, and from the great fear in which they were, and all by the intercession of this gentleman, who did use so good persuasions for the love he did bears unto them, that he made void the evil opinion they had against them, and with compulsion to revoke the rigorous sentence of death pronounced against them. I do not here in particular treat of such things as happened unto these religious men the servants of God, as well in the prison, as on their journey, for that they were many, and to declare them, is requisite a long time, and to make a new history.  
And although in the books before, have been declared the riches of that kingdom, and all things in particular, yet for the better certification, I thought it good (and not without purpose) to declare in the chapter following, some of th●se which the father friar Martin Ignatio did communicate with me, using in the treating thereof so much brevity that it shall seem rather an Epilogo, than a new relation. And for a more verification of the truth, whereby better credit may be given thereunto, seeing that the persons who did see it do agree in that which shall be here declared, and again, for that the said father and his companions did see more things than the others, whose relations be already set down. The occasion wherefore they put confidence in them, and to let them see and understand many secrets, was for that they were sentenced and condemned to die: for without all doubt if they had understood that they should have returned out of the kingdom, they should never have seen them, for they have great care that any other nations should know their secrets, their manner of government and living.   

CHAP. XVII. Here it doth entreat of the mightiness, goodness, riches, and fortitude of the kingdom of China.  
THis kingdom is under the tropic of Capricorn, and stretched forth on the sea coast, south west and North-east, more than five hundredth leagues: it hath on the parts south west the kingdom of Cochinchina, and on the north east, it doth confine on Tartary, a kingdom which doth compass the most part of the land, on the other part to the northwest, there is an other mighty kingdom of white people, which is beyond the kingdom of Persia, it is called Catay: there be in it Christians, and the king thereof is called Manuel. It is said of a truth that from the furthest part of this kingdom unto jerusalem is six months travail by land, 
Six months' travail from jerusalem unto China.  the which they understood by certain Indians which came from that kingdom by Persia, whose testimonials were made in jerusalem six months before, wherein was declared how that they had traveled by Arabia felix, and passed the red sea. The other fourth part of this kingdom is compassed with a very asper and high mountain, which is five hundredth leagues upon a right line: but nature had left certain places open towards the northwest, which might be fourscore leagues little more or less, towards the sea of japon which is towards the Septentrion. The great riches of this country, and the great number of people that be therein, did supply the same (as in the first part of this history is more at large declared). And for that the king of this country seeing himself oppressed and troubled by the mighty Tartaro & seemed that easily he might defend himself from him, in shutting up of those gates which nature had left open betwixt the mountains, he did shut it up with the death of many thousand of people, for that he used therein great tyranny, which afterwards was the occasion of his own death.  
This mountain, with the supply by man is the famous wall of the kingdom of China, that is of five hundred leagues long, yet you must understand it in the manner aforesaid, the better to give credit thereunto, for alonely faure score leagues were made by man's hands with great industry, and there is upon it an infinite number of bulwarks, which maketh it the more fairer and stronger: But yet not so strong as is the other four hundredth and twenty leagues which were made by nature.  
Nigh unto the same there is a great desert full of ditches and lakes of water, 
Great ditches & lakes.  which is the occasion that this kingdom hath been conserved for more than two thousand years, as doth appear by their own histories, which they hold to be very true.  
All is imparted into fifteen provinces with that of Aynao, and every one of them hath a principal City of the which it beareth the name. In the midst of this kingdom there is a great lake, 
A mighty lake.  out of the which proceedeth many great and mighty rivers, which run through all the kingdom, and are so big that there saileth up and down in them barks, sregats, brigandines, and many other vessels of an other kind of making. This great abundance of water is the occasion that it is so sertile, and so well provided of all things, and again the most part of their cities and towns are situated on the rivers side, so that by them the one province doth communicate with an other, carrying the one unto the other, great store of ambergris and other things of great curiosity, and is done with little cost, for that all things are done very good cheap.  
This sea cost of this kingdom is the biggest and the best that is known in all the world, there is upon it five provinces which be these, of Canton, Chincheo, Liampon, Nanquin and that of Paquian, which is the furthest towards the northwest, in the which is resident the king and his counsel with all his court ordinarily, and the most part of the men of war that it hath, for that this province doth confine upon the Tartaros their enemies. Some will say, that the kings ordinary dwelling there, is for that it is the best and most fertilest of all the kingdom. But I believe (according to the saying of some of the Chinos) that he doth it not but because it is so nigh unto Tartary, and to find himself there, whereas he may supply all necessities which might happen upon a sudden by his enemies. In these rivers there are certain Islands, the which are very profitable unto all the kingdom, for that there is nourished & brought up in them great store of dear, hogs and other beasts, which is the occasion that the cities are so well provided and served.  
But one of the things which causeth most admiration to them that go to this kingdom, is to see so infinite a number of ships, and barks that be in every port thereof, and are so many, that there hath been a man in the city of Machao that hath laid a wager, 
More ships in one port than in all Spain.  that alonely in the river of Canton, there be more ships and vessels than in all the cost of Spain.  
One thing I may affirm, that I have heard declared by persons of great credit, that have been in that kingdom (but in especial of the father Ignacio whom I do follow in this Itinerario) that it is an easy thing in any one of these five provinces that be upon the sea cost, to join together a thousand ships of war and all of them (as they say in Spain) dedicated for that purpose. The occasion why there be so many, is already declared in his proper chapter. There are divers opinions touching the greatness of this kingdom: but the most are conformable with the father friar, Martin de Herrada, who like a good Geomatrician and Mathematician went nighest the prick. This opinion is declared in the first part of this history, whereunto I refer me, and in that which toucheth in particular, things of that kingdom, for that it is there declared at large as it was taken out of their books. But one thing I cannot let pass but declare, for that it seemeth worthy to make thereof a particular memory: and I understood it, by the mouth of the said father Ignacio, which is that he doth affirm it to be certain true & approved, 
They never had the plague.  that every day in the year one with an other (besides wars and the plague, the which in this countrio they remember not to have any, neither do they find written in their histories for 2000 years, neither by famine nor any other accidental occasions to consume the people) yet doth there die many thousands of people both small & great, in all the fifteen provinces of this kingdom: which is no small grief unto them, who with a christian zeal doth consider this heavy tribute of so many souls that the devil doth recover every day, and carry them unto his mansion or dwelling.  
All this kingdom is so fertile, as well for the ordinary watering as also for the temperature of the heaven, that almost all the whole year they do gather fruits, but in especial of wheat and rice: so that both the one and the other are very good cheap, that our people in the discourse of their travail or pilgrimage did buy one pyco of rice or of wheat meal, which is five rou●s of Spain for one rial and a half, & according unto this rate, all other things bear their prices, as hath been before declared. They say that in this country there be many elephants, lions, tigers, ownses, & other brute breasts, of the which these friars saw very few alive, but many skins of them, which is a sign that it is of truth. There are many beasts whereof come the musk, the which are, of the tigers & like unto a little dog, the which they do kill & put them under the ground certain days, and after that it is putrefied & rotten, the flesh and blood is converted into that sweet powder. There be also many civet cats & little worth, a great number of horse. & although those which the said friars did see were little, yet is it a common voice & fame that in some of the fifteen provinces there are very good: but they were not there, so that they can not say they had seen them. But the hens, geese, ducks, and other poultry that are in all parts of this kingdom are without number, which is the occasion that they are of small estimation: the abundance of fish jam no less, as well of the sea as of the rivers, in the which they are conformable. All they that do declare of the things of this country, and the small price that it is sold for, is such, that the said Friar doth affirm, and others that have been in that kingdom, that for the value of six maravadies (which is a penny) may four companions eat very well of flesh, fish, rice, and fruits, and drink good wine of that country.  
In all this kingdom there are many mines both of gold and silver, and all very rich: 
mines of gold & silver.  but the king will not let them be laboured but with great limitation (saying) that which is in those mines be in his house, and that they should procure to bring it from other kingdoms: yet notwithstanding the abundance is so great both of the one and the other, and so common, that there is no man, although he be of an occupation, but he hath in his house things both of gold and silver, and other very rich jewels. They do esteem for his value more the silver than the gold: 
Silver for his value more esteeme● than gold.  and they say the cause is, for that the prices of gold are variable, as in Italy: but the silver is always at one s●aye and price.  
There are great store of pearls, but in especial in the Island of Aynao, and great abundance of quicksilver, copper, iron, steel, laton, tin, lead, salt peter, brimstone, and other things which were wont to beautify a kingdom, but above all, there is very much musk and amber gryce. 
Amber gryce   
The king of this kingdom, besides the great rent the which he hath, it is said that he hath great treasories in all the principal cities, those which are the head cities of the provinces, for the confirmance thereof, it was affirmed unto the said friar for a very certainty, that in the city of Canton, all the money that hath entered into the same for the space of five hundred years (as well by way of the Portugeses, as by those of the kingdom of Cyan, 
Wonderful treasure.  and others their borderers, and all the tributes of that province) is altogether in the king's treasure house of that city, which amounteth unto by good account, many more millions than may be well numbered for to give credit thereunto. It is as common for the people of this country to wear silk, as in Europe to wear linen, yea they do make their shoes thereof, some of satin, and many times of cloth of gold, of very gallant colours: the cause is by reason of the great abundance that they have thereof, and is of so great quantity that it is carried from the City of Canton unto the Protingall Indians more than three thousand kintals every year, besides a great quantity which is carried unto japon, and ordinarily more than ●iftéene ships laden for the Islands of Luzon. 
Fleets may be laden with silk.  The Sianes and other nations do also carry away a great quantity: and although there are carried away ordinarily as afore said, yet there remaineth so great quantity in that kingdom, that many fleets may be laden therewith.  
There is also great store of glaxe, cotton, and other kind of webstrie, and also good cheap, that the aforesaid Friar doth affirm, that he hath seen sold a canga, which is fifteen fadam for four rials of plate. The fine earthen dishes that are in this country, cannot be declared without many words. But that which is brought from thence into Spain is very course, although unto them that hath not seen the finer sort, it seemeth excellent good: but they have such with them, that a cupboard thereof amongst us would be esteemed as though it were of gold. The finest cannot be brought forth of the kingdom upon pain of death, neither can any have the use thereof, but only the Loytias, 
Sugar. ho nigh and wax.  which be there gentlemen (as hath been told you). There is great quantity of sugar, honey, and wax, and very good cheap as aforesaid. And in conclusion I say, that they live with so great abundance, that all things do flow so that they lack nothing necessary for their bodies: but for their souls which is the principallest, they do lack (as you have understood in the discourse of this history) God remedy the same at his pleasure.  
The rent which the king of this kingdom hath, is declared unto you in a proper chapter of itself, so that in this I will declare that which the said friar told me, 
A river that yieldeth a million and a half every year in sal●.  and is only of one river, which is called the river of the salt, and is in the province of Canton, and is worth unto him every year a million and a half. And although the ordinary rent the which he hath every year, doth exceed the greatest king that is now known in all the world in quantity: yet in his treasories which be gathered together and kept (if it be true that the Chinos do say) in every principal city of these fifteen provinces, is more than a great number of kings together have or can procure, no nor come nigh unto it by a great deal.  
All the cities and towns of this kingdom are walled about with stone walls, and at every fifteen paces a bulwark, 
All cities are walled.  and without the wall commonly all of them have a river or else a great deep moot, wherein they may bring water at all times, with the which they are very strong: they do use no forts, neither have they any, but only over the gates of the Cities, towers (as hath been declared) and in them is put all the artillery the which is for the defence of that city or town.  
They use many sorts of weapons, 
They use hargabushes, bows, and lances.  but in especial hargabushes, bows, lances of three or four manners, swords like unto faunchers, & with them targets. All the soldiers when they go to fight, they wear long garments down to their knees, very well stuffed with cotton wool, 
England, France, Spain and the Turk hath not so many soldiers as this kingdom.  the which doth resist the thrust of a lance, or a stab: all such soldiers as have the king's rial pay wear in token thereof red and yellow hats, of the which there is so great a number, as well horsemen as foot men, that almost it is impossible to number them. And it is a common opinion of all them that have been in this kingdom, and have seen them, that all Spain, France, and the great Turk hath not so many as this kingdom hath. They have amongst them captains of ten soldiers, 
Captains of few and many soldiers.  some of a hundredth soldiers, some of a thousand, of ten thousand, of twenty thousand, & in this sort to a hundred thousand. The number of soldiers that these captains do lead, are known by certain ensigns that they bear. They muster and make show of their people every new moon, & the same day they do pay them royally, & their pay must be in silver & in no other money. It is said by such as have seen this pay, but especially the aforesaid father, friar Ignacio, that they give them a piece of silver, which may weigh so much as a rial and half of Spain, and is as much worth there as four crowns amongst us, in respect of the value of all things. But both in the one and in the other kingdom, that day that they do receive their pay, every one must make a show of some act in arms, the which is done in the presence of viewers or mustermasters: and such as are found that do not his exercise with dexterity, they are reprehended and cruelly punished: they do skirmish with great consort, and in that which toucheth obedience to their captains, & unto the ensigns the which they do use in their wars, they may compare with all nations of the world.   

CHAP. XVIII. This chapter doth treat of certain rites & ceremonies, and other signs & tokens which be found, and do show that they have had notice of the holy law of the gospel.  
SUch ceremonies as unto this day have been seen amongst the people of this kingdom, are gentilicas, without any mixture with the moors nor with any other sect: yet there is found amongst them, that is a sufficient indition, that they have had in some time past, some particular notice of the evangelical law, as is plainly seen by certain pictures which have been found and seen amongst them, whereof we have made particular mention, the which they believe was known by the preaching of the Apostle S. Thomas, who passed through this kingdom when as he went unto the Indians, & from thence to the city of Salamina, 
Salamina where S. Thomas was martyred.  which in their language is called Malipur, whereas he was martyred for the name & faith of jesus Christ: of whom at this day they do remember in that kingdom, by the tradition of their antecessors, who said, that many years passed there was in that kingdom a man that did preach unto them a new law. whereby they might go unto heaven: who after that he had preached certain days, & saw little fruit thereof (for that they were all occupied in civil wars) he departed from thence unto the Indians. But first he left certain disciples behind him that were baptized and well instructed in matters of faith that they might preach unto them when as occasion did serve for the same. In many places they do worship the devil, only for that he should do them no harm, and so the said friar did tell me, for that he● was divers times in presence when as they did obsequies of certain Chinos that lay a dying: and he saw that they had painted before the dead man, a furious devil, having in his left hand the sun, and in his right hand a dagger, with the which he made a show as though he would strike him. This picture was put before him at the point that he should yield up the ghost, strengthening him, that he should put great trust thereon.  
And as the friar did demand of them what reason they had to do the same: some of them answered, and said, because the devil should do no harm unto the dead man in the other world they put his picture before him, that he might know him, and take him for his friend.  
That which is understood of these Chinos is, that although they have amongst them many errors of the Gentiles, yet with great ease they would be reduced unto our faith, if they might have liberty for to preach, and they to receive it.  
When as the sun and the moon is in eclipse, they believe verily, that the prince of the heaven will destroy them, and for very fear they put themselves in that colour: the people generally do worship unto them, and believe verily that the sun is a man and the moon a woman. And therefore, when as they begin to be eclipsed, they make great sacrifices and invocations unto the prince afore said, desiring him not to kill nor destroy them, for the great necessity they have of them. All generally believe the immortality of the soul, and that in the other world they shall be rewarded or punished, according as they lived in this world in company of the body. And therefore they do use to make in the fields sepulchres wherein they command themselves to be buried after they be dead.  
When they should be buried, they command to kill all their servants, or their wives, those that best he loved in his life, saying that they do it, that they should go with them to serve them in the other world, whereas they believe they shall live eternally & die no more. They put with them into their sepulchres things to be eaten, & great riches, believing that they do carry the same into the other world, & there to serve their necessities. In this error were the Indians of the Peru of old antiquity, as the Spaniards have seen by experience. There is in this kingdom many universities, & colleges, wherein is taught philosophy, both natural & moral, and the laws of the country, for to learn to govern by them, unto the which the king doth send ordinarily visitors to see & understand, the order that is amongst them, & to reward or punish the students according unto the desert of either of them. They are greatly ashamed when they see any evil thing committed, although they be not punished for the same, and a●● people that do permit with ease correction, as the father Ignacio and his companions did see by experience, who going always as condemned men to die, yet at all times when they did see them do reverence unto their Idols or unto the devil or any other evil thing, they did reprehend than with great liberty who did not only seek to hurt them for the same, but did greatly rejoice to hear their reasons wherewith they did prohibit or forbid them. The said friar did tell me, that one day passing by an hermitage, whereas dwelled an hermit, who had upon the altar in the same, an Idol for his saint: before whom was there a Chino a principal man, worshipping the same, the said father without any fear went unto him, & began to reprehend him, and to spit at the Idol, & caused him therewith to leave off his worshipping, whereof he was greatly amazed both he & all the rest of his company, to see with what boldness it was done, and no harm done unto him for the same, either they supposed that the Chino did think him to be a mad man or else (which is most to be believed) that God did work with his servant whereby he would give him his reward for thatwhich he had done, in returning for his honour, in mitigating the fury of that man, & to give him understanding, that he was reprehended with reason. There are many Chinos converted to the faith as well in the islands Philippinas, as in the city of Machao, and they baptize of them daily, who givetokens and outward shows to be good christians, and say that the greatest difficulty for to convert all the whole kingdom, will be in them that do govern in the same, for they had need of a particular aid and help of the mercy of God, to bring them unto the faith: for that they are had in reverence and obeyed as Gods upon the earth. Besides this they do give themselves to all delights, 
Given to delights.  that any humane creature can imagine, for that they put all their felicity therein, and do it with so great extremity, that it is supposed there is no people in all the world, that may be compared unto them.  
For besides that they are always carried in little chairs, and upon men's shoulders, which are covered with silk & gold, yet are they given much unto banquets wherein they have so many different sorts of meats, as their appetites do require. And it is greatly to be marveled at, 
Their women are chaste, but their men are vicious.  that the women of this kingdom are marvelous chaste and secret as any whatsoever, and to the contrary the men are as vicious, but in especial the Lords and Governors: and for that our faith do reprehend with rigour and terror the excess of these things, it is to be believed that it will be a great impediment to the entry of the gospel amongst them: yet God may so touch them, and in such sort, that there will be no difficulty. Amongst the common people there will be no such impediment, but rather they will embrace with great content our holy law, for that it will be an occasion to clear & set them at liberty from the tyranny of the devil, and from their judges and Lords, who do entreat them as slaves. This is the opinion of all them that have entered into this kingdom, and have entreated of this matter with the Chinos. They have amongst them some good things, and worthy to be imitated and followed, of the which I will here set down two, which are things of great purpose to my judgement. The one is, that unto none they do give the office to govern, by no manner of ways nor means, although they be suborned by friendship: but only by his own merits, and sufficient ability. The second, that none can be viceroy, governor, nor judge of a province or city in the which he is natural borne, the which they say is done to take away the occasion of doing any injustice, being carried away or led by parents or friendship. All other things of this kingdom I do remit unto that which hath been before declared, for to pass unto the rest, the which in this Itinerario is promised to be mentioned and declared.   

CHAP. XIX. This chapter doth treat of the islands of japon, and of other things in that kingdom.  
THe Islands of japon are many, and altogether make a mighty kingdom, that is divided amongst many lords: it is distant from the firm land of China, 
japon is 300 leagues from China.  three hundred leagues, & in the midst betwixt both kingdoms is the province of Lanquin, which is one of the fifteen afore named, although going from Machao a city of the Portugeses, & joining unto Canton, which is of the proper China, they do make it but 250 leagues, traveling towards the north, & commonly they do account the same leagues from the islands of Luzon or Philippinas, unto the said islands of japon: whereunto they may go by nova hispania, for that it is the better & surer navigation, and shorter voyage, for according unto the reckoning of the pilots that do navigate those seas, they make it no more than 1750. leagues, which is not half of that which the Portugeses make in their navigation.  
These islands are many (as afore said) yet are they populared with much people, who in their bodies & faces differ very little from the Chinos, although not so politic: by the which it seemed to be true, that which is found written in the histories of the kingdom of China, saying that these Iapones in old time were Chinese, & that they came from that mighty kingdom unto these islands, whereas they do now devil for this occasion following. A kinsman of a king of China, a man of great countenance and valour, having conceived within his breast, for to kill the king, & thereby to make himself lord of the country, the better to put this in execution, he gave to understand of his evil intent unto others of his friends, requesting their favour to execute the same, promising that he would do his best. This being done, & having them always for his especial friends, unto whom it seemed no difficult thing, and again moved with ambition, they did promise him: and for the better confirmation thereof, they began to prepare soldiers & to have them ready against the day appointed. And for that this their pretence could not be brought to effect with such secrecy as the matter required, their treason came to be discovered unto the king, at such good opportunity that he might very well seek remedy for his own safeguard at his pleasure, unlooked for of his kinsman, & the rest of his followers, who were all taken with great ease. Then was it determined, by those of the royal council, that all the traitors should have their throats ●ut according unto the laws of the country: but when their sentence was carried unto the king to be confirmed, (he understanding that they much repent, & were sorry for their sin and treason that they had pretended against him) he determined to remedy the same with less damage, fearing what might hap by their deaths, so that he commanded they should not die, 
The first inhabiting of the japon.  but be banished for ever out of the kingdom, with precise band, that they their wives, & children, & all that should come of them, should for ever live on those islands that are now called japon, which were at that time desert & without people. This sentence was executed, & the offenders did accept the same for mercy. So they were carried to the said islands, whereas when they saw themselves out of their natural country, & without any possibility ever to return again, they ordained their common wealth as a thing to last for ever: directing all their laws which were for their conservation & government contrary unto the Chinos from whence they came. But in particular they made one, wherein they did prohibit for ever, their descendants to have any friendship with the Chinos, & did admonish them to do them all the evil that was possible, which is observed & kept unto this day inviolable, showing themselves their contraries in all they may, even in their apparel, speech, & customs: for the which there is no nation so abhorred of the Chinos, as is the Iapones, so that they are paid their hatred with the like. And although at that time the said Iapones were subjects and tributaries unto the king of China, and so continued long time after, now at this day they are not, but do all harm that may be unto those of that kingdom.  
They have much silver, but not so fine as that is of our Indians, likewise great abundance of rice and flesh, and in some parts wheat▪ & although they have all this, with many fruits, and herbs, & other things which be their ordinary victuals: yet are they not so well provided as are their confines or neighbours, and no default in the land, for that it is very good and fruitful. But that the natural people do give themselves very little unto the tilling and sowing thereof, for that they are more affectioned unto the wars, then unto that: and this is the reason that many times they do lack provision and victuals, which is the very same reason that the natural people & others do report of them. 
In the Iapones are 66. kingdoms.  There be in these Islands three score & six kingdoms or provinces, and many kings, although it may be better said, rulers or principals, such as the Spaniards found in the islands of Luzon▪ for which cause, although they be called kings, yet are they not, neither in their contractation nor rent, for they have very little in respect of the multitude of people. The king Nobunanga who died in the year 1583. was the most principal and greatest Lord amongst them all, as well of people, as of riches: who was slain by a captain of his, and punished by God by this means for his luciferine pride, for that it did far exceed that of Nabuchadonozor, and was come unto that point that he would have been worshipped for a God: for the which he commanded to make a sumptuous temple, and to put in it things that did well declare and show his folly: of the which that you may see how far it did extend, I will declare here only that which he did promise unto them that did visit his temple.  

A luciferine pride.  First the rich men that came unto the said temple, and did worship his picture, should be more richer: and those that were poor should obtain great riches: and both the one and the other, that had no successors to inherit their goods, should also obtain them, and also long life for to enjoy the same, with great peace and quietness.  
The second, that their life should be prolonged to 80. years.  
The third, that they should be hole of all their infirmities and diseases, and shall obtain full accomplishment of all their desires with health and tranquillity. And the last he commanded that every month they should celebrate a feast for his birth day, and therein to visit his temple, with certification that all those that did believe in him, and in that which he promised, should without all doubt see it accomplished, and those which in this life were faulty and did not do in effect his commandment, in the other they should go the way to perdition. And the better to accomplish this his will, he commanded to be put in this temple, all the Idols in his kingdoms that were most worshipped, such as to whom frequented most pilgrims: the which being done, he presently forbade that not one of them all should be worshipped, but he only that was the true Fotoque and universal God, the author and creator of nature.  
This foolishness did this proud king a little before his miserable death, and many other more, that I do leave out for fear that I should be too tedious in this Itinerario. There did succeed this proud king in the kingdom his son called Vozequixama, who for that he is very young, at this day it is governed by a worthy captain called Faxivandono.  
All men that are borne in this land are naturally inclined to wars and robberies, and it is used ordinarily amongst themselves, always he that hath most power and strength, doth carry away the best part, and yet he doth enjoy it with little security, for that as the proverb saith (he findeth a last for his shoe, or the length of his foot is found) and another cometh (when he thinketh lest off) and carrieth away their spoil with victory, revenging injuries the one for the other, without being requested thereunto: which is the occasion that they are never without civil wars, & that seemeth to be the influence of the clime of that land. This and the continual exercise in arms, and in robberies hath given them the name of warriors, and do terrify all their borderers and neighbours.  
They use many weapons, but especially hargabusses, swords and lances, and are very expert in them. On the firm land of China they have done many sudden robberies and thefts, and have gone through therewith at their pleasure: and would have done the like at the islands of Luzon, & used for the same all means possible, but yet it fell out contrary unto their meanings, and returned their backs full evil against their wills, with their hands upon their own heads.  
On a time they came unto the Illocos, who with the favour of the Spaniards (whose vassals they are) did desende themselves worthily: that the Iapones thought it best to return unto their houses and to leave their begun pretence, with determination never to put themselves in the like peril, for that they had lost many of their company. Not many years since there happened unto them the like disgrace in China, there went ten thousand of them to rob and steal, and at their going on land, they did sack a city with little hurt, and small resistance, who with the content of that pray, forgot themselves and did not prevent the harm that might chance unto them: the Chinos being offended did compass them about in such sort, that when the Iapones remembered, themselves, they were in that case that they were constrained to yield unto their enemies, who at their wills did repay themselves very well of the injury received, and a very good warning unto all those that shall hear thereof, to sly from putting themselves into the like trance: so the Chinos were very well revenged of the injury by them received.  
The faith of Christ is very well planted in some of these islands, by the good diligence and travel of the fathers and Jesuits, but in particular, by that which was done by master Francisco Xabier, one of the ten companions of the father Ignacio de Loyola founder of the said religion: he traveled with great zeal, in the converting of the said islands, and that which was a great help unto the same, was his holy doctrine and apostolic life, as unto this day the Iapones do confess, attributing unto him (next unto God) the goodness that hath come unto them by receiving the baptism, whom the fathers of that company have followed in all points, such as remained after his death, as also such as have gone thither since that time.  
So that unto them may be attributed the thanks for the mollifying of such adamantine hearts, as are those of the natural people of these Islands, whose wits (although they be good and subtle) are naturally known to be inclined unto wars, robberies and doing of evil: and at this day, being Christians, they do follow their evil inclinations, yet notwithstanding, by the good doctrine and ensample of the said fathers, they are much better Christians then those of the oriental or East Indians.  
I do not set down here the number of those that are baptized in these islands, for that there are therein divers opinions, as also for that the fathers of the name of jesus or jesuits do distinctly declare in their letters. The Portugals say that in respect of the number of people that are to be converted, the number that are baptized are very few, and that there are many that are not, for lack of ministers and preachers: the which may easily be remedied, in commanding to go thither, more religious men of other orders, for to aid and help the said Jesuits, the which should be unto them a particular content and comfort as I do believe, as hath been seen by experience in all parts of the Indians, whereas have come religious men unto places of their doctrine, for that the quantity of people is so great that are in these Islands, that although there should go thither many labourers of the Gospel, and all the orders of religious men, the one should not be a let or hindrance unto the other, and they should all of them find enough to occupy themselves, especially if that the successor of Nobunanga were converted with his subjects. All the men of these islands are well set and well proportioned, and go well appareled, although not in so good order as those of China: they live very healthfully and long, by reason that they do use very few diversities of meats: they do not suffer amongst them any Physicians, and do not cure themselves, but with simples.  
They have amongst them many priests of their Idols, whom they do call Bonsos', of the which there be great covents. Likewise they have amongst them, great witches, who do ordinarily talk with the devil, 
Many w●●ches,  and are not a small impediment for them to receive the law of God in that kingdom. The women or wives of these Iapones do keep themselves very close, and very seldom go forth of their houses, in the which they do resemble those of China much (as hath been said) yet have they many wives, for that by their laws it is lawful for them to have as they please, & can sustain, yet are they so prudent, that they do restrain themselves, and live in great peace. Both men-servants and women-servants do serve their masters, as though they were slaves, & they may kill them at their pleasure without incurring any penalty of their laws: a thing far different from any good policy. Many other things more could I declare of this kingdom, the which I do let pass, for the reason aforesaid: and again for that the fathers of the company of jesus, have entreated thereof at large and vere truly.  

islands of Amazons.  Not far from these islands of japon, they have discovered of late certain Islands which are called of the Amazons, for that they are all inhabited by women, whose ordinary weapons are bows and arrows, and are very expert in the same: they have their right breast dry, the better to exercise their bow. Unto these islands in certain months every year goeth certain ships from Iapones with merchandise, and they bring from thence such as they have there: in the which time the men do deal with the Amazons as with their own proper wives, & for to avoid dangers that might happen amongst themselves they deal in this order following.  

A strange custom.  After that their ships are arrived, there goeth on shore two messengers for to give advice unto the queen of their arrival, and of the number of men that are in their ships, who doth appoint a day when they shall all come on shore: the which day she doth carry to the waters side the like number of women, as they be of men, but the said women do first come thither before the men do disembarke themselves, and every one of them doth carry in their hand a pair of shoes, or a pair of slippers, and on them their own several mark, and do leave them on the sands at the water's side, without any comfort or order, and presently depart from thence. Then the men come on shore, and every one take the first pair of shoes that he cometh unto, and put them on: then presently the women come forth, and every one of them carrieth with her him who hath fallen unto her by lot, to put on her shoes, and maketh him her guest, without any other particularity, although it chanceth unto the most vilest of them all to meet with the queens shoes, or otherwise to the contrary.  
So when the months are expired set down by the queen, in the which are permitted the men aforesaid, they do departed, every one leaving with his hostis his name, and the town where he dwelleth, for that if it so fall out that they be with child, and be delivered of a son, that he may be carried the year following unto his father, but the daughters do remain with them.  
This is very doubtful to be believed, although I have been certified by religious men, that have talked with persons that within these two years have been at the said islands, & have seen the said women, and that which causeth me more to stand in doubt, is for that the fathers of the company that dwell at the Iapones, have not in their letters made any particular mention of them: therefore let every one give credit to this as liketh him best.   

CHAP. XX. They have notice of certain kingdoms borderers unto these islands of japon, and it treateth of some things of them, according unto the truest intelligence that hath come from those parts, & of certain miracles that happened in the kingdom of Cochinchina, that were notable.  
FRom the City of Machao, which is inhabited by Portugals, and situated on the skirt of the firm land of China, in two and twenty degrees, the aforesaid father Ignacio did travel for Malaca, passing by the gulf of Aynao, which is an Island and province of China, and five leagues from the firm land, and from the Philippinas one hundredth and fourscore. It is a very rich province and of great provision, and in the strait that is betwixt them and the firm land, there is great fishing of pearls and Aliafar, 
Great fishing of Pearls.  and those which are there found do in many killats exceed them that are brought from Bareu, which is on the coast of Arabia, or those that are brought from Manar, which is another kingdom, from whence is brought many unto that of China.  
This province of Aynao is very good and strong, and the people thereof very docible and well inclined. From this Island to the kingdom of Cochinchina, is five and twenty leagues, and from Machao, one hundredth and twenty five: it is a mighty kingdom and is in sixteen degrees of altitude, and the one part thereof is joined with the firm land of China. The whole is divided into three provinces. The first doth enter forty leagues into the land, and hath in it a mighty king. The second is more farther within the land, and he that is Lord thereof is a king of greater power than the first, and joining unto the sun more towards the Septentrion is the third, the which is more greater and of more riches, whose king in respect of the other two, is an Emperor, and is called in their language Tunquin, which doth signify the same. Unto him be subject the other two kings: yet notwithstanding his mighitinesse, and called emperor, he is subject unto the king of China, and doth pay him tribute and parias. 
●arias is a duty for the ●inges own ●erson.  It is a country very well provided of victuals, and as good cheap as in China. There is great store of a wood called Palo de Agnila, and of another wood called Calambay, and both of them are very odoriferous.  

Abundance ●f silk & gold.  Great abundance of silk and gold, and of other things very curious: all these kingdoms are at a very point to be reduced unto our faith, for that the principal (he whom they give title of Emperor) hath sent divers times to Machao, and unto other parts whereas are Christians, and have requested to send them persons both learned and religious, for to instruct them in the law of God, for that they are all determined to receive it, and be baptized: and do desire it with so great ferventness, that in many cities they have the timber ready to build & edify churches, and in a readiness all other kind of necessaries for the same.  
There was in Machao a religious man of the order of barefoot Friars of saint Francis, who understanding the great and good desire of this king, did send him by certain Portugal merchants that did trade into his country, a cloth whereon was painted the day of judgement, and hell, and that by an excellent workman, and also a letter, wherein he did signify unto him the great desire he had with some other of his companions to go into his kingdom to preach the Gospel. The which being received by the said king, and informed the signification of the picture, and of the religious man that sent it him, he rejoiced very much with the present, and did send in return of the same an other that was very good, unto the same religious man, and a letter of great courtesy, & did accept the offer that he sent in his letter, and did promise that all that went thither should have good entertainment, and that he would presently make them a house next unto his.  
This religious man, although h● had a desire to put in execution the kings will, yet at that time he could not, by reason that he had but few companions: the which the king did understand, and caused him to send unto the bishop of Machao three or four letters, requesting him to send him the said religious men, with certification that having them there, both he and all the rest of his kingdom would receive the faith of Christ and the holy baptism: unto the which letters they did always make answer with promises that he would send them unto him: but after because they did not accomplish the same, the king did complain of him unto certain Portugal merchants with great grief saying: this your bishop of Machao doth greatly lie: for that I have requested him by four letters to send me religious men for to preach the law of the gospel, & he consenting unto my will, did never accomplish nor perform his word. Unto this day they have not accomplished this desire, for the great lack they have of such ministers as they do demand, & are requisite in those parts, and cannot supply their want and necessity, except they should leave them unprovided that be already baptized. They do drive them off with fair words & promises, that with as great brevity as is possible, their desire shallbe satisfied. And this was the answer that was given in Machao unto certain messengers or ambassadors that were sent by the aforesaid king, for the same demand, the which was required with great instance. The which messengers for their comfort & for his who sent them, did carry with them all such Images as they might have, but specially that of the cross, in which form & likeness (as hath been informed) they have made in the kingdom an infinite number, and set them in all their streets, highways, & houses, whereas they are worshipped & reverenced with great humility, as well for that it is in an ensign of Christ, whose faith they do desire to receive, as also for a notable miracle which happened in that kingdom, worthy to make thereof a particular mention, the which I will set down here, in such sort as the ambassadors aforesaid did declare in public before the inhabitants of Machao, when as they came to demand religious men for to instruct them in the gospel.  
There was a man naturally borne in this kingdom, 
A miracle.  who for certain occasions went forth of the same, and came & dwelled amongst the Portugals, who seeing the Christian ceremonies and being touched with the hand of God, was baptized, and remained certain years in the same town, giving outward shows to be a good Christian, and one that feared God, at the end thereof, he changed his mind, and determined to return unto his own country, and there to live according unto that which he had learned of the Christians, the which he believed to do with ease, without any gainsaying or contradiction. Whereas when he came thither, he did observe all such things as a Christian was bound to do: but amongst other signs and tokens of the same, he made a cross and set it by the door of his house, whereunto he did reverence at all times when he passed by the same with great devotion. His neighbours when as they saw that sign, a thing of them never seen before, and how that that Christian did make particular reverence, they began to mock and scorn him, and the cross, and pulled it down from the place whereas it was set, & did other things in despite thereof, and of him that had set it there in that place, whose hatred and discourtesy was so much, that they determined in their minds to burn it, and to put the same in execution, who at the same instance did all miraculously die, I say those that would have burnt the same, the which was seen of many other, who have given sufficient testimony thereof. And within few days after, all the whole lineage of those dead persons did follow the same way, and not one escaped. This miracle being spread throughout all the kingdom, the naturals thereof did set up many crosses in all parts.  
This they say was the principal motion that God put into their hearts for to move them to demand for such as should baptize them, and preach the holy gospel. Likewise a great help unto the same was the declaration of the painted cloth, which the aforesaid religious man did send to the king. Since that time there hath gone unto the City of Machao certain naturals of that kingdom, who being affectioned unto our faith were baptized there: with the which, and with the hope aforesaid, they are all sustained, till such time as it is the pleasure of God to send them the remedy for their souls, the which he hath caused them to desire, which cannot be long, according unto that which hath been seen, and the miracles that God doth work, the more for to kindle their desire, as the miracle of the cross before spoken off, and others the which certain Cochinchinos did declare in the City of Machao, in anno, 1583. and happened the same year, and was very fresh in the memory of all those of the said kingdom. The one of them was, that one of the Christians aforesaid went to visit a principal man that had the palsy, and kept his bed many years before: 
Another miracle.  and conferring with his long sickness, he told of certain miracles, such as he had understanding that was done by Christ our redeemer, when that he was man amongst men whom he redeemed: but in particular those which he did in the healing of the like infirmities, such as he lay sick of: alonely with his divine virtue, in touching of them with any part of his garments, or shadow. The judge hearing this, he had a particular faith & devotion to him that had done these miracles that the christian had told him, & asked what his name was, & what signs & tokens he had: he told him that his name was jesus of Nazareth redeemer of the world, the saviour and glorifier of men. And the better to declare unto him his signs, he showed to him an Image or picture that he had of his, that which was given him such time as he was baptized, printed in paper: & of jesus Christ when he ascended up into heaven, the which for lack of Churches, and other of greater volume, he should have continually with him & make his prayers thereunto. This sick man took it, and fixed his eyes thereon with so great devotion and faith, in requesting him to give him his health, & that he would presently believe in him, & be baptized. At the same instant in the sight of them all, he felt himself whole of the infirmity that he had suffered so many years before, and never could find any humane remedy for the same, although he had proved an infinite number. He straightways willed the Christian to baptize him, unto whom he gave a great sum of money, the which he received against his will, and spent it in works of mercy, and with part thereof he bought a big bark in the which at this day he doth pass people through a river, whereas they were wont to pass great peril and danger, and he doth it for God's sake, and receiveth nothing for the same.  
A few days after in another part of this kingdom, there happened another miracle of no lesser substance than the first, that is, there was a Cochinchina in the said city of Machao, who did ask to be baptized of a barefoot Friar, which after that he had catechized sufficiently, he gave it unto him: and after a great time that he had been in his company, and had experience of his Christianity & devotion, he gave him licence for to return unto his country, with a good token, that at his coming thither he would procure to augment the desire of Christianity, the which God had begun to kindle in their breast.  
This good new christian did procure the same with so great care, that he did profit very much (being helped with the favour of God, who made him his instrument) he healed certain infirmities, in showing unto the patients an Image of our lady, the which he had continually about his neck, and had thereunto great devotion, and would declare to them with great zeal the Lords prayer, or Pater noster. His fame was so much spread abroad in all parts of this province, wherein he dwelled, that it came unto the ears of a Mandarin, or principal judge of the same, who was many days in his bed a leper, both of hands and feet, and never could find any physician nor medicine, that could give him his health, nor any other humane remedy: who being very desirous to be healed, he sent ●or the said Christian, and asked if he would take upon him to heal him of that infirmity, as it was affirmed that he had done by others of greater importance. The Christian said he would, than the judge did promise unto him for the same, great gifts and rewards, but he made no account thereof, but only requested of him for reward, that after he should be hole, that he would be baptized and become a Christian: the which he did accept, and principally he showed unto him the Image that he had of our lady, saying: If thou wilt believe in this lady, that is here engraved, and in her most holy son jesus Christ the redeemer of the whole world, thou shalt presently be made hole. This Mandarin or judge did behold the same with great attention, and thought on the words which he had heard spoken. And in determining with himself to believe the same, at the very point that he did put it in execution, he was healed of all his infirmity, a thing which caused great admiration in all that province.  
These miracles and that of the cross, in a short time being known abroad, have caused such a desire unto the inhabitants of that kingdom to become Christians, that by all manner of means possible they do procure the same: the which is not followed for lack of ministers, as aforesaid, and is no small grief unto them that Christianly do put themselves to consider how the devil our adversary doth carry unto his infernal mansion, those souls which seem to be well disposed for to enjoy the benefit of God, and his eternal goodness: all the which is for lack of ministers, and not for any other default. God remedy the same for his mercy's sake.  
The said father Ignacio (whom as I have said, I do follow in many things of this Itinerario) did tell me, that as he passed by this kingdom for to go unto Spain, he saw the devotion of the people thereof, and the great desire they had to be Christians, and how that the people were ready and bend for to receive the holy Gospel, very humble and of good understanding. He would have tarried for to baptize them, and would have done it, only for charity and compassion, seeing with what devotion they did demand the same, and the great number of souls that were condemned: but he was constrained by force to go unto Malaca, and again it seemed unto him, that amongst so many people, his small force might do little good: and that it were better for him to go unto Spain, and to procure more companions to help him, as he did, and returned with them, and with many other rewards, of Pope Gregory the thirteenth received: and he also received great favours of the king of Spain, and with great hope, that his majesty will give his particular aid, for to go thorough with this enterprise, which will not be of small effect. I do believe of a truth, that in small time all that kingdom shall be subject unto the Catholic saith of Rome, and to be the gate, whereby to enter the law of the Gospel into the mighty kingdom of China, for that this of Cochinchina is upon the same firm land, and their language and customs are almost in one manner.  
They are very white people of this kingdom, and are appareled like unto those of China: their women are very honest and shamefast, 
Their women are honest & shamefast.  and their apparel is very curius and gallant. The men wear their hair dispersed, and do comb and trim it with too much care. In all the country almost, all of them are appareled in silk, for that they have there very much, and excellent good: the country is very wholesome, and full of old folks and children, which is a sufficient proof for the goodness thereof.  
They say that they never had amongst them neither pestilence nor hunger, 
They never had plague, pestilence nor hunger.  which is the like as we have said of the kingdom of China.  
Let him that can, do it in such sort that so great and infinite a number of souls that at this day are under the tyranny of the devil, may see them in the Christian liberty, and in the other life enjoy their creator.   

CHAP. XXI. In this chapter is declared of such kingdoms as are adjoining unto that of Cochinchina, and of some notable things in them, with the rites and customs of the inhabitants.  

The kingdom of Champa Rich of drugs.  NIgh unto this kingdom of Cochinchina, there is another called Champa, that although it be poor of gold and silver, yet is it very rich of drugs and gallant wood, and great store of provision. This kingdom is very great and full of people, & they somewhat whiter than those of Cochinchina, they are as nigh & as willing to become Christians as their neighbours but for the performance thereof, they do lack that which the other do. They have the same laws and ceremonies as well the one as the other, and are all Idolaters, and do worship the second causes, in the same order as the Chinos do, unto whom likewise they do make one manner of acknowledging.  
From this Island you may go with ease unto Malaca, leaving on the right hand a kingdom which is called Camboia, 
The kingdom of C●mboia.  the which is great & very full of people, and all of them affectioned to go to sea, and navigation, by reason whereof they have an infinite number of vessels: It is a very fertile country, with great store of provision: there are Elephants in great number & Abadas, which is a kind of beast so big as two great bulls, and hath upon his snout a little horn. At this day there is one of them at Madrid, the which was brought out of the Indians to his majesty, and many do go to see it for a strange thing, and never the like seen in Europe, whose skin is so hard (according unto the report) that no man although he be of great force and strength can pass it with a thrust. Some have said that it is an Unicorn, but I take it for the contrary, and they are of my opinion almost all those that have been in those parts, and have seen the true Unicorn.  
In this kingdom there is a religious man of the order of S. Dominicke, called friar Silvester, whom God did carry into those parts for to remedy the souls that are therein: he doth employ himself to learn their natural language, and to preach the holy gospel in the same tongue, and hath them likewise prepared, that if he had any companions for to help him, they should obtain much fruit for the heavens: he hath sent and requested for some unto the India of Portugal, but they would never send him any, peradventure by some sinister information, by men which the devil doth mark as instruments, for to stay and let the salvation of those souls, for ever to remain in his tyrannical power. This friar did write a letter unto Malaca unto friar Martin Ignacio, and unto o●her religious men, entirely requesting them for the love of God, to give such order that he might be helped with some religious men, of what order soever, with certification that therein they shall do great service unto God, and put remedy in those souls, whom he dare not baptize, for fear that after lacking the evangelical refreshing, to water and cherish them, they return to bring forth that evil fruit of Idolatry. This petition did not take effect according to his desire, for that there was not to serve his turn, nor any that was unoccupied. They understood of him that brought this letter, that the king of that kingdom had in great veneration the said father Siluestro, in so ample manner, as was the patriarch joseph in Egypt: he had in all that kingdom the second place, and every time that the king would speak with him, he gave him a chair: and gave him great privileges, and licence for to preach the holy gospel throughout all the kingdom without any contradiction, and for to edify the churches and all other things whatsoever he thought necessary: this king himself helping thereunto, by giving of great gifts and charity. He said also that in all the kingdom there were erected many crosses, and were had in great reverence. And for the confirmation of the truth hereof, the aforesaid friar Ignacio did see in Malaca a present that the king of this kingdom of Camboia did send unto another friend of his: and amongst many things contained therein of great riches & curiosity: there were two crosses very great and well made, of a gallant wood & very sweet, and all garnished very richly with silver and gold, with their titles enamelled.  

The kingdom of Sian.  Nigh unto this kingdom is that of Sian, in the height of fourteen degrees from the pole Arctic, and three hundred leagues from Machao, whereas the Portugals do go to trade: It is the mother of all Idolatry, 
The mother of Idolatry.  and the place from whence hath proceeded many sects, unto japon, China and Pegu. It is a flourishing country and well replenished of all such things as be requisite for to merit the name to be good. There be in it many Elephants and Abadas, and other beasts that are nourished in that country: besides this, it is very rich of metals, and gallant sweet wood. 
Faint hearted people.  The people of this kingdom for the most part are fainthearted or cowards, for which occasion although they are infinite in number, yet are they subject unto the king of Pegu, who overcame them long time since, in a battle (as afterwards shall be declared:) and they do pay him ordinarily great and heavy tributes. They would be converted very easily unto the faith of jesus Christ, and would leave their Idols, if they had any to preach unto them: yea, & would subject themselves unto any king or Lord that would favour them, and not unto this whom now they do obey, for that he doth entreat them tyrannously. They have amongst them many religious men after their fashion, who do live in common, and lead an asper and sharp life: for the which they are had of all the rest in great veneration. The penance which they do is wonderful & strange, as you may judge by some things that I will declare here: amongst a great number that be told of them, there are none of them that can marry, neither speak to any woman, & if by chance he do, they arewithout remission punished by death. They go always barefoot, & very poorly appareled, & do eat nothing but rice & green herbs, and this they do ask for charity every day, going from door to door with their wallet at their backs, always with their eyes looking on the ground, with such modesty & honesty, that it is to be wondered at: they do not crave their charity, neither take it with their hands, nor do any other thing but call or knock, & stand still, till such time as they give them their answer, or put some thing into their wallets. It is told them for a truth, that many times for penance they do put themselves stark naked in the heat of the sun, which is there very great, for that the country is in twenty six degrees of the Equinoctial, whereas they are much troubled there with gnats, whereof there is an infinite number, and is a thing that if they did pass it for God's sake: it is a kind of martyrdom of great desert. God for his mercy lighten them with his grace, that this which they do smally unto the profit of their souls, may be the occasion that after they are baptized, they may deserve for the same many degrees of glory.  
Likewise in secret they do great penance, and do rise up at midnight to pray unto their Idols, and they do it in quires, as is used amongst us Christians. It is not permitted them any rents, nor any other kind of contractation: and if they be seen to deal in any, they are detested and hated, as an heretic is amongst us.  
For this kind of asper living (the which they do, according unto the report) for the love of the heaven, and that with great zeal: they are respected of the common people for saints, and for such they do reverence them, and do commit them unto their prayers, when they are in any trouble or infirmity. These and many other things more be declared of them in like order, which may serve for to confound us, that confessing, we do not observe & keep, having for the same our sure reward, not of human interest, but that which God hath prepared for the good in heaven.  
The law of the Gospel in this kingdom would bring forth much fruit, for that the people are charitable, and lovers of virtue, and of them that have it. This experience had the father Ignacio and his companions in China, at such time as they were prisoners, where there were in a city certain ambassadors from the king of Syan, who were bound to the court, and there they understood that the Spaniards were sentenced to death for entering into that country without licence: they went to visit them, & when they saw them with their asper habits and very poor, & did resemble very much the habit of their religious men, they had so great affection unto them, that over and above they sent them good charity, the which was two bags of rice, much fish & fruits: they did offer to them all the money they would desire, & to ransom them in all that the judges would demand ●or them: in recompense of this good will they showed unto the Spaniards, they did verify that aforesaid, that they are great lovers of virtue.   

CHAP. XXII. Of many other kingdoms that are in this new world, and of their names and properties, but in espiciall, of that famous City of Malaca.  

The kingdom of Lugor, and that of Patone.  NIgh unto this kingdom of Syan there are two kingdoms together, the one of them is called Lugor, and the other Patane, they belong both unto one king, who is a Moor and of the lineage Malaya, yet notwithstanding the people of these kingdoms are Gentiles, and do● understand in them to have great good will to become Christians, if they had any to preach unto them the Gospel. 
Gold, pepper and drugs.  The land is very rich of gold, Pepper and of drugs, but the people faint hearted and cowards, and for little▪ for which occasion they are more given unto things of contentment and pleasure, then unto wars or brawlings.  

The kingdoms of Paon and jor.  At the end of this kingdom is the strait of Malaca, in the which there are two small kingdoms, the one of them is called Paon and the other jor: the people of the first are the most traitorous that are in all the whole world, as the Portugals have many times experimented, and those of the second kingdom: sometimes they are in peace, and sometimes in war with the said Portugals. They will have peace when they do see themselves in necessity of the same, but war ordinarily. These two kingdoms are half moors, by reason whereof it seemeth that with an evil will they will be reduced unto the law of the gospel, if that by the help of God they be not mollified of their hearts.  
This strait of Malaca is under the Equinoctial line, and is accounted from the kingdom of Cochinchina unto it, 
The strait of Malaca is under the l●ne.  376. leagues: this is an evil strait and very dangerous for ships that pass through it, for very few times it is without storms or some other greater danger, as it happened unto a very great ship in the mouth of the strait, in the presence of friar Martin Ignacio, the which in very little space, was swallowed up with the sea, & in it more than three hundred thousand ducats in merchandise that was within her, although the success thereof our people did attribute it more unto the just judgement of God than unto the storm, for that according as they were informed, they had committed grievous offences, at the time when she sank: for being very nigh with his ship in the which he went, and many other more, they felt not, neither had any suspicion of any danger. From this strait to go unto Malaca, you coast alongst the sea, five and twenty leagues: all which coast is full of great mighty and thick woods: by reason whereof, as also for that it is not inhabited, there are many tigers, elephants and mighty great lysards, and other furious beasts.  
The city of Malaca in our pole arctic is elevated from the equinoctial only one degree: of ancient time it was the most principallest city of all these kingdoms, and resident therein a mighty king a Moor, but after it was conquered by the Portugeses, who in these wars did wonderful things of great force & courage: they did drive forth all the moors out of the same, and out of all the borders, and made of their Mezquita or temple, (which was a singular piece of work) a high church, as it doth remain unto this day: there are also three monasteries of religious men, one of S. Dominicke, an other of S. Francis, and the third of the company of jesus, or Jesuits. It is a very temperate country being so nigh the equinoctial line: the reason is, for that every week ordinarily it raineth three or four times, (which is the greatest cause of health in all that country) and thereby is made wonderful fruitful, and with great abundance of provision, but particularly of fruits, for there is great store, and some sorts never seen in Europe, amongst the which there is one, that is called in the Malaca tongue Durion, and is so good that I have heard it affirmed by many that have gone about the world, that it doth exceed in savour all others that ever they had seen, or tasted: it is in form like unto a melon, whose ryne is somewhat hard, and hath upon it little white pricks which seemeth like hair, and within the fruit be partitions, which be of the colour like unto maniar blanco, and of so good savour and taste as it, 
A daint●e kind of mea●.  Some do say that have seen it, that it seemeth to be that wherewith Adam did transgress, being carried away by the singular savour. The leaves which this tree yieldeth, are so big that a man may cover himself with one of them, which me thinketh is but conjecture or defining: but there is Cannafistola for to lad fleets very big and good, 
A tree of a wonderful e●f●et.  and of a singular effect, one of the notablest things in this kingdom, & is a marvelous tree of an admirable virtue, the which putteth forth so many roots of so contrary virtue, that those which grow towards the orient be good against poison, agues, and many infirmities that do war against humane life, 
Two contraries in one subject.  & those roots that grow ●owards the west, be rank poison, & in effect, all clean contrary unto the first. So that it seemeth here to be found two contraries in one subject, a thing which in philosophy they were wont to count impossible.  
This city is of great contractation, for that there come thither all the kingdoms that we have spoken of, and from many other more that are nigh thereabouts: but in particular a great number of great ships from the Indians, Canton, Chincheo, and from many other places, likewise the Iapones carry thither their silver to sell, & those of the kingdom of Syan carry many things very curious, but especially cloves, and pepper of the Island Malucas, and those of Burneo bring much sanders & nutmegs, and those of jaba & Pegu, bring the wood of aguila, and those from Cochinchina & Cham bring great store of wrought silk, drugs, and spicery, and those of Samatra or Trapovana much gold and wrought things & fine cloth of Vengalas & Coromandel. All these and other things, make this city famous and plentiful, as also very much enlarged of the Portugeses that go thither ordinarily every year, and traffic there.   

CHAP. XXIII. Of some kingdoms of the new world, and of particular things that have been seen in them, and treateth of the city and river of Ganies.  
over against this famous city of which so many things may be spoken of, is that mighty kingdom and Island of Samatra, 
The Island of Samatra supposed to be the Island of Ophir.  called by the ancient cosmogrosers Trapovana, which is (as some say) the Island of Ophir, whether the fleet went which king Solomon sent▪ of which there is particular mention made in the scripture, in the third book of the kings cap. 9 & 10. and in the Paralipomenon cap. 9 that went & returned again laden with gold & rich timber for to adorn the temple of jerusalem, and of many other curious things, whose memory doth remain unto this day amongst the natural people, although diffusedly. But not so much as those that have it out of the holy scripture, neither so true. This Island is under the equinoctial line, so that the one half doth extend unto the pole artic & the other half unto the pool antarctic. It hath in longitude 230. leagues, and in latitude three score & seven leagues: and is so nigh unto Malaca, that in some parts it is less than ten leagues. In this kingdom there are many lords & rulers, yet he that hath the greatest part thereof is a Moor, and is called Achan, it is one of the richest islands in all the world, 
The richest Island in the world.  for that it hath many mines of fine gold, of the which (although there is a law that they cannot take out of them more than is necessary) yet there is great abundance carried from thence to Malaca, Turkey and many other places. There is gathered upon this Island great abundance of pepper and beniewyn of Boninas in great quantity, out of whose trees (whereof there is great woods) there come forth so sweet a smell that it seemeth an earthly paradise, and was wont to be smelled twenty leagues at sea, for which respect the ships that sail that way do come so nigh the land as they may to have the comfort of that smell. There is also much Camphora and all kind of spices, by reason whereof there cometh unto this kingdom to traffic, many Turks that come in ships and foists out of the red sea, Also there doth traffic thither those of the kingdom of Sunda, java the great, and Ambayno, and others that are there nigh unto them. Unto this Island came certain Portugeses to buy and sell, whereas they were all slain, and some for the profession of the faith, for the which they are holden for martyrs of jesus Christ, by the opinion of christians that do dwell nigh, when they understood the cause. The most part of this kingdom are moors, & therefore they do abhor the christians, & do make with them all the warr● they can, but in especial with them that dwell in Malaca, whom many times they have put in great danger of their lives, and loss of their goods.  
Running from this kingdom of Malaca by the north & northwest cost is the mighty kingdom of Pegu, the which is in bigness greater than Samatra, & equal in riches, especially of pearls and all sorts of stones, & very fine crystal: there is great store of provision and an infinite number of people, and the king thereof is mighty: to whom (as we have said) the king of Cyan doth pay tribute, because he overcame him in a battle which he had with him, in the year 1568. according unto the common opinion: the occasion was, that understanding, how that the said king of Syan had in his power a white Elephant▪ (whom those of the kingdom of Pegu do worship for God) the king sent to buy the same, and to give for it so much as he would esteem or value it: but he utterly denied the same, and said that he would not let him have it for all that he had in his kingdom: the which caused so great anger unto the king, that he called together all the soldiers that he could make, with determination to get by force of arms, that which he could not by fair means and great riches: in the which he did so great diligence, that in a few days he had joined together an army of a million and six hundredth thousand of men of war, 
An army of a million and six hundred thousand men.  with whom he departed unto the said kingdom of Syan, which was from his kingdom two hundredth leagues, and did not only perform his pretence in bringing away the white Elephant, but did also make the king tributary, as he is unto this day, as hath been declared unto you.  
The rites of the people and priests of this country, do resemble much those of the kingdom of Syan: they have amongst them many monasteries of men that live honestly, solitary, & with great penance, and people very apt to receive the holy gospel. For over and above that they are docible and of a good understanding, they are men which do study philosophy and are well inclined and charitable, and have a particular affection unto virtue, and unto such as they do know that have virtue, and very friendly to remedy the necessity of their poor neighbours.  
Going from this kingdom towards the north is the kingdom of Arracon, very plentiful of provision, but few things of contractation or ambergris, 
The kingdom of Arracon.  which is the occasion that it is not well known to the Spaniards, for that they have not gone thither. They do understand of the natural people, and of their customs, that they are very apt to receive the holy gospel.  
From this kingdom alongst the same coast, you came unto the kingdom of Vangala, 
The kingdom of Vangala.  through the which doth pass the river Ganges, one of the four that come forth of paradise terrenall, the which being understood by a certain king of this kingdom, he determined to cause some to ascend up that river, till such time as he had found the head spring or head thereof, and therewith paradise: for the which effect he commanded to be made divers ●ortes of barks both small and great, and sent in them up the river certain men (of whose diligence he had long experience, & were provided with victuals for many days, and gave commandment that presently after that theyhad discovered that which he desired, that they should return with great speed, far to give him particular and true relation, with pretence forthwith to go himself to enjoy the things which he thought necessary to be seen, and worthy to be desired, of his travail, and in a place so delightful.  
These men did navigate up the river many months, and came unto a place whereas the water came forth so softly and with so small noise, which gave them to understand that they were not far from the first head thereof, which should be paradise that which they went to seek. They gave to understand that in this place, after they had seen so many tokens, & comforted themselves with marvelous sweet smells, and airs of great delight, they thought verily that they had been in the paradise terrenall. And more, when as they came unto that place, where as the river did run so peaceable, and the air so delicate and sweet, there entered into the hearts of them all, so great and extraordinary joy, that they seemed to be in the true paradise, and forgot all the travail that they had passed for to come thither, and of any other thing that did signify pain or grief. But when they did intend to go forwards with this their pretence and intent, and thereunto did put all diligence possible, they found by experience that all their travail was in vain, and how that they remained always in one place: and could not understand from whence did come or proceed that contradiction, they could not find in the waters by reason of the peaceableness thereof.  
This experience being done, attributing it unto a misery because they could not get a shore, they returned back again by the same river, till they came to their own kingdom, whereas they arrived in a very short time, and gave their king to understand (who sent them) all as afore said▪ and many other things more, the which I do leave out for that I do take it apocrypha. They hold it for a certainty that the rivers Eufrates and Tigris are not far from this river Ganges, and it seemeth to be true for both of them do discharge their currents or water into the Persian sea, the which is not far distant from this kingdom.  
The people of this kingdom have this river in great reverence, which is the occasion, that they never enter into the same but with great respect and fear. And when they do wash or bathe themselves in it, they have it for a certainty that they remain clear from all their sins. Likewise this kingdom with great ease might be converted unto the catholic faith as it seemeth, for that they have amongst them, many moral rites, ceremonies, and virtues.   

CHAP. XXIIII. Of the kingdom of Coromandel and others his borderers, and of the city of Salamina, whereas was and died the glorious Apostle S. Thomas, and of the power and riches of the king of this kingdom, & the order of their buryings, and other things of great curiosity.  
RUnning alongst the coast from Vengala, is the kingdom of Masulapatar, and certain other kingdoms nigh unto the same: they be all Gentiles as the rest of their borderers yet it is understood, with great facility they would leave their opinions. It is a kingdom that hath great abundance of provision, and lack of things of contractation or ambergris, which is the occasion that they are little known.  
Travailing a little forwards, is the kingdom of Coromandel whose chief city is called Calamina, and now vulgarly Malipur, and is there whereas was martyred the happy Apostle S. Thomas. And they say that at this day there remaineth some of his relics, by whom God did many miracles. The natural people therefore have a particular memory until this day of that saint.  
This city at this day is populared with Portugeses and with the natural people▪ there is in it a church, wherein is comprehended the house whereas was, and died the holy Apostle: this country belongeth unto the king of Visnaga, who although he be a Gentile, he hath great reverence and respect unto the house of the holy Apostle, and for particular devotion he doth give every year a certain charity. There is in this city two covents of religious men, the one of the company of jesus, and the other of the order of S. Francis.  
From this city of Calamina to that of Visnaga there whereas the king is, it is five and thirty leagues by land. This king is mighty, and his kingdom very great and full of people, and hath great rents. They say that only the rent he hath of fine gold, is worth unto him three millions, of the which he spendeth but one only, and doth keep every year two millions in his treasury, the which according unto the report & fame, is at this day with many millions. He hath twelve principal or chief captains, and every one of them hath the government of an infinite number of people & hath great rend for the same, for he that hath least rent hath six hundred thousand ducats yearly. Every one of them are bound to give the king to eat, and all the people of his house, one month in the year: so that by this account the twelve captains which are the lords of the kingdom (and as we might say) dukes, do bear his cost all the whole year. The million the which he doth spend, is in gifts and in extraordinary things. The king hath in his house, what with wives, servants and slaves, nigh about fourteen thousand persons, and in his stable ordinarily a thousand horse, and for his service and guard eight hundredth Elephants, of whom he doth spend every day eight hundredth ducats. The guard of his person is ●oure thousand horsemen, to whom he giveth great wages. He hath also in his house three hundredth wives besides a great number of concubines: they go all gallantly appareled, and with rich jewels, of the which there are of great estimation in the kingdom, they do almost every three days change new colours of apparel. They do ordinarily use colours of precious stones, such as are called in spain ojo de gato cats eyes. They have great store of sapphires, pearls, diamonds, rubies, & many other stones, that are in that kingdom in great abundance.  
Amongst all these wives there is one that is as legitimate, whose children do inherit: and if it so fall out that she is barren, the first that is borne of any of the other doth inherit: which is the occasion that they never lack a successor in that kingdom.  
When the king of this kingdom doth die, they do carry him forth into a mighty field, with great sadness and mourning apparel, and there in the presence of those twelve peers afore said, they do burn his body with wood of Sandalo, which is of a great smell, with the which they do make a great fire.  
After that the body of the king is burned and consumed, they throw into the same the wives that he best loved, with servants and slaves, those that he most esteemed in his life time: the which they do with so great content, that every one doth procure to be the first for to enter into the fire, and they that are last, do think themselves unhappy. All these do say that they go to serve the king in the other life, whereas they shallbe with great joy. This is the occasion that they go with so good a will to die, and carry with them the most richest and festival apparel they have. Of this is gathered that they do believe the immortality of the soul, for that they do confess there is an other life, and that thither they do return and live for ever without end. They are people that would be converted with the like facility unto the holy gospel as their neighbours, if there went any thither to preach.  
Three score and ten leagues from this city, there is a Pagode or temple of Idols, whereas is a rich fair every year, it is a very sumptuous building, and edified in a place so high, that it may be seen many leagues before you come unto it.  
It hath ordinarily four thousand men of guard, who are paid with the rent of the temple, the which is rich and very good. There is nigh unto the same many mines of gold and precious stones, and that is taken out of them is rend unto the temple. There is in it a priest of the Idols, whom they call in their language brama, and is as the high priest in that country. All the people of the land do come unto him, to understand the doubts of their manner of living, and he doth dispense with them in many things that be prohibited by their laws, the which he may do according unto the said laws, and many times he doth dispense with certain of them. But here one to be laughed, at, which is that when a woman cannot suffer the condition of her husband, or is weary of him for other occasions, she goeth unto this Brama, and giving unto him a piece of gold, 
A strange custom.  which may be to the value of a ducat in Spain, he doth unmarry them, and setteth her at liberty that she may marry with an other, or with many if she please: & in token of this she is given a mark with an iron upon her right shoulder, so that with that alone she remaineth at liberty, and her husband cannot do unto her any harm for the same, neither compel her to return again to his company.  
There are in this kingdom many mines of very fine diamonds, and are had in great estimation, and very well known in Europe. There hath been found in them a stone so fine and of so great value, that but few years past, the king did sell the same unto an other mighty king his borderer, called Odialcan for a million of gold, 
A diamond sold for a million of gold.  besides other things of value that he gave him over and above. It is a healthful country, with very go●d and fresh airs, rich of provisions, and of all other necessaries, not only for the humane life: but also for curiosity and delights that be therein. It is in fourteen degrees towards the pole artico. All the people therein are faint hearted and cowards, and for little travail, which is the occasion that they are nothing affectionate unto wars, and is understood, with great facility they would receive the gospel.  
Nigh unto the same there is an other little kingdom called Mana, in the which there is a town with Portugeses, the which is called in their language Negapatan, there is in the same a covent of the order of S. Francis, whose religious friars, although they are but a few, do occupy themselves in the converting of the natural people thereof, and it is to be believed that they shall reap much fruit and do good, for they have given shows of the same: for that about three years past the prince of that country was converted, by the preaching of the same friars, who went now to receive the holy baptism with great and incredible joy unto the christians. All the rest of the kingdom (as it is believed) will shortly imitate him. In this Island there are many pearls and aliofer, all very good, round and fine.   

CHAP. XXV. This chapter treateth of many kingdoms of that new world, the rites and customs of the inhabitants, and of some curious things.  
THe afore said father, Martin Ignacio departed with his companions from this cost, and went towards the islands of Nicobar, whereas are many moors & gentiles, all mingled the one with the other. 
glanss of Nicobar.  They did not stay there, but presently passed to the town of Cuylan, which is inhabited with Portugeses, & from Malaca 416. leagues. This Island is situated from six unto ten degrees under our pole, & hath in longitude, three score and six leagues, and nine and thirty of latitude. Of old● time it was an Island much celebrated, & in those parts had in great reverence, for that it is said that there dwelled & died there in times past men, whose souls are in heaven, and are celebrated & honoured by them of the country as though they were gods, with many sacrifices and orations, the which they do ordinarily. There come from other kingdoms bordering thereupon, unto this Island, many pilgrims, but our people could never understand the ground & occasion thereof, neither how they lived, whom they do hold for saints. There is upon the same Island a very high mountain which is called Pico de adan which father Martin did see, & did hear the natural people thereof say, that it had that name, for that by the same. Adam went up into heaven: but what Adam it was they could not declare.  
There is on this Pico like a monastery, the which the natural people do call Pagode: At one time they had therein an Ape's tooth, 
Anapes tooth for their God  the which they did worship for their God: and ther● came thither unto that effect, some two hundred and three hundred leagues. It so happened in the year 1554. the viceroy of India, called Don Pedro Mascarenas sent an army unto this kingdom, with many Portugals, with intent to reduce them unto the obedience of the king of Portugal, all of that country, as they were before, who few years past, did rise against them, and took away and denied their feature. The soldiers did sack that Pagode or monastery, and thinking to find some treasure therein, they broke it, and beat it down unto the foundation: and there they found the aforesaid apes tooth, the which they did worship, put in a chest of gold and stones, and carried it unto Goa, unto the said viceroy. When that this was understood and known to other kings their borderers, and unto him of Pegu, of this loss (the which of them was judged to be great) they sent their Ambassadors to the said viceroy, that they might in the name of them all, demand the said tooth, the which they did worship, & to offer for the ransom thereof seven hundred thousand ducats of gold. The viceroy woul● have given it them for that quantity of gold which they did offer, & would have done it in effect, if it had not been for the archbishop of Goa, who was called Don Gaspar, & other religious men, who did disturb him putting great scrupulosity, & laid unto his charge the hurt that come by their Idolatry, in giving them the same, of the which he should give a strait account unto God. The which did so much in him, that he dispatched away the ambassador: without any regard of the gold that they would have given him in their presence, he did deliver the same unto the said archbishop & religious men, & they before their eyes did break it, & burned it, & threw the dust thereof into the sea, which was not a little wonder unto the said ambassadors, to see how little they did esteem so great a quantity of gold, and for a thing which they esteemed not, but threw it into the sea with so great liberality.  
This Island is fertile, peaceable, & healthful, and all full of woods, and there are mountains very thick of orange trees, siders, Limas, Plantanoes, & Palmas, and many cinnamon trees, which be the best in all the world, & of most strength & effect, for the which they go to buy, for to bring it unto Europe, & they give it for a small price. Likewise there is pepper, but the natural people did pull up certain hills that were full of it, & of cinnamon, because they saw there came from far to buy these two commodities, & fearing that it would be an occasion that their country would be taken from them. It is a country of great provision, & doth bring forth mighty elephants, and they say that there is many mines of diamonds, rubies, & other stones that are called girasolis. In no part of this oriental Indies, there was none of so good a beginning in the conversion of the souls, as was in this Island, for that certain religious friars of the order of S. Francis did labour very much, and did baptize in a few days more than fifty thousand souls, which gave to understand that with a very good will they did receive the law of the gospel, and had edi●ted many churches, and fourteen monasteries of the same religion: but few years past, a king of that kingdom, being weary of certain things, which in all that Indians are very public. he forsook the religion & faith he had received, and did raze & destroy many portingals that where there inhabited, thrusting forth all the religious men that did baptize, & minister the sacraments. This evil king was called Raxu. Many of them that were christened, & content with the faith of jesus Christ they had received, detesting that which this tyrannous king had done, they went & dwelled in the company of the portingals, & others did build a town the which is called in their language Columbo, whereas is a great number of them: unto this day do endure throughout all that kingdom the crosses, in token of their ancient christianity: alongst all the coast they do use many Galiotas or galleys, & go with them, robbing and spoiling all thereabouts. The natural people do say, that with a good will they would again return and receive the law of the gospel, if they had it there preached. From this Island after they had passed a little gulf, they came upon the coast of a kingdom called Tutucuriu, and ran all alongst the cost of the same, running from the cape of Comerin to Cuylan. Here there is a Pagode or temple of their gods very great and rich, thither come all the Gentiles of that kingdom, at certain feasts in the year with great devotion: there is in is it a triumphant chariot, so great that 20. horse cannot move it, they bring it forth in public upon their festival days, & is carried by elephants, & by an infinite number of men, who voluntarily do hale and pull at certain ropes that are made fast thereunto. Upon the highest of this chariot is made a tabernacle very richly adorned, and within the same an Idol, whom they do worship: then immediately under the same are the kings wives that go singing. They do bring it forth with much musick● & rejoicings, & do carry it a good way in procession, and amongst many things of honour that they do unto it, they do use one so brute and beastly as the reader may well judge thereof, which is, 
● brutish use.  that many of them do cut pieces of their own flesh and do throw it unto the Idol, and the other not contented with this, do throw themselves on the ground that the chariot may pass over them, and there they remain all to pieces. Those that do die in this sort, they account them for great saints, and are had in singular veneration. Many other manners and fashions of idolatry is declared of this kingdom, and more beastly than this we have spoken of, the which I let pass, because I would not be tedious in this Itinerario. All the people of this kingdom, be very bad and ill inclined, for which cause the fathers of the company of jesus, that are in certain towns nigh unto the same, cannot as yet bring them out of their errors, although they have put therein great care and diligence.  
Upon the same cost, & a little distant from this kingdom there is a town of Portugeses called Coulan, and 25. leagues further a city which is called Cochin, in the which there are religious men of S. Francis, of S. Dominicke, of S. Austin, & of the company of jesus, who have there a very good study, or seminary, whereas they do bring forth much fruit. Nigh unto this city is Santo Tom, whereas are many baptized and good christians, very abstinent and chaste, unto whom the patriarchs of Babylon do provide them of bishops: the authority where with they do it, is not known, nor whence they have it, for that as I do understand, the seat apostolicke did never give it them. About the same matter, at this present there is in Rome a bishop of this kingdom, and one of the kingdom of Pimienta, with whom I have talked divers times, and is come thither to give his obedience unto the Pope and to know of him the order that his pleasure is should be observed, in receiving of those bishops which come thither by the commandment of the patriarch. In this kingdom there are many kings, but the principallest of them is he of Cochin, and next unto him, he of Coulan, & nigh unto them are many petty kings, as is he of Mangate & Cranganor, and are all Gentiles, although amongst them there are mixed many moors. There hath been found in this kingdom certain jews, that have gone from Palestina & those parts. There is in this country universally, a law very strange and little heard of, which is, that the sons do not inherit after their fathers, but his brother's son, and the reason they give for the same, is, for that they have no certainty of their children, for that they have no wives proper nor appointed to themselves, I promise you it seemeth to me, their reason to be as barbarous as their law, for that the like inconvenience doth follow their brother's children. They have many rites & blindness amongst them, but one above all the rest, which is, that in certain feasts amongst them: they do use baths, & after that they are bathed, they say that they remain free & clear from all their sins They have many augorismes, of whom I will not entreat, for that they are not worthy of memory. In this country is gathered most of the pepper that is brought into Europe, for which cause this kingdom is called that of the Pimienta.   

CHAP. XXVI. The chapter doth treat of many kingdoms of the new world, and of the particular and curious things of them.  
THe aforesaid father went from Cochin to the kingdom of Cananor, & passed by Tanaor & Calicut which is called of the natural people Malabar they are little kingdoms, 
The kingdom of Cananor, Tanaor, and Calic●t.  but in them much people. In that of Cananor there are inhabited many Portugeses, and religious men of the order of S. Francis: it is a country in all things like unto Cochin, for which cause, and for that they observe & keep one manner of customs & rites, I remit the touching of this kingdom to the other aforesaid.  
Then forwards on there are other two small kingdoms the one is called Barcelor, & the other, Mangalor, there be in them some christians: it is a good country & rich, and hath it for certain, that within a little time, they will be all baptized. From this kingdom they went unto Goa, a principal city, and inhabited with Portugeses, & is as the metropolitan of all those kingdoms: it is in fifteen degrees of height▪ and is set from Cochin unto it a hundredth leagues, this city is situated in a little Island compassed round about with water, and in compass but only four leagues, and is divided from the firm land of Odialcan by a mighty river. It is a good country & peaceable, and doth enjoy a very fair and pleasant river. In this City ordinarily is resident the viceroy of the India, and the archbishop: there are many Churches and covents, & besides the high church, there are fourteen parish churches, besides fifteen hermitages that are within and without the city: there be four covents, all very sumptuous, of S. Dominicke, of S. Austin, of saint Francis, and of the company of jesus. And without the city there is another of Recoletoes Franciscanos reform Francis friars.  
Nigh unto this Island are those of Salcete and Barde●, 
Islands Salcete & Bards.  there whereas the religious men of saint Francis, and the company of jesus have certain christian towns. Few years past, the Gentiles of Sancete did kill certain fathers of the company of jesus, in abhorring the faith, who died with great spirit and strength▪ so that I believe they went into joy with God.  
Beyond Goa on the same coast towards the North, 
The towns of Chaul, Basayn. Damaun. Cambaya.  is in eighteen degrees and a half from the town of Chaul, & beyond that Basayn, & nigh thereunto Damaun: all these three towns are inhabited with Portugals, and the farthest is the province of Cambaya, subject unto the grand Tartar, or Mogor, by an other name. Two and fort●e leagues beyond that, 
The city of Diu.  is the city called Diu, whereas is a very fair and good fortress of Portugals, with a very great haven and sure, whose name doth extend throughout all Turkey.  
Two hundred and seventy leagues beyond that, 
The city of Oromuz.  is the City of Oromuz on the ●oast of Persia, and in the same hath the said Portugals; an other fortress, much better than that of Diu, and more inexpugnable: it is the biggest in all the Indians, but not of so great name as that of Diu. In this city of Oromuz they gather nothing else but salt, and that in great abundance, yet notwithstanding▪ it is replenished of all that may be imagined, for that there is brought thither from Persia, and Arabia, great provision and many other curiosities. They say, that from this place they may easily go to Venice, taking their way to Aleph, and to Tripoli in Soria.  
All this coast of the India's unto Persia, is inhabited with many and mighty kingdoms, in the which there an infinite number of people: one of them is that of Odialon; 
Odialon,  the which is very rich, and of much people, and all moors. Nigh unto this is another called Disamaluco, hard by the kingdom of the great Tartar, which in their language is called Mogor, 
Mogor.  the which, next unto that of China, (I do think) is the greatest in all the world, as may be collected in that which is declared of the mightiness thereof, both in ancient and latter histories. On the other side of Oromuz is the kingdom of Persia, 
Persia.  whose king is Xactamas, or Ishmael Sophi, great Sultan of Egypt, descending by lineal descent from the Sultan, Campson Gaurio, whom Selim, Emperor of the Tartaros did overcome in battle, nigh unto Damascus, in the year 1516.  
All those of this kingdom are moors, although they & the Turks are as the Christians and heretics, for that the Persians do follow the interpretation of the law of Mahomet, of certain Alie●▪ or doctors. And the Turks go a different way, and do follow others. This contractation and different interpretation of the law, is the occasion that betwixt the one and the other: there is ordinarily cruel wars: and it is the great mercy of God, for that the Turk may not have any space, to come and do evil unto his Christians, or if he do come, he shallbe overtaken with the Persians, his enemy the Sophi, and entrapped with all the evil they can do unto him: who that although he be a Moor, and of the sect of Mahomet, yet he is a friend unto Christians.   

CHAP. XXVII. Of other kingdoms and notable things that are until you come into Spain, and to conclude, the compassing of the world.  

Arabia Felix.  near unto the strait of Oromuz is Arabia Felix, where as all the inhabitants are of the sect of Mahomet, and do follow the same interpretation that the Sophi doth. So running a long by Arabia, 
The red sea.  you come strait unto the red sea, or Arabico, the which hath four hundred and fifty leagues of Longitude, and in some parts it is of a mighty depth: the water thereof seemeth to be red, although taking it out thereof, it is white: the cause thereof is, for that the ground under the water is of the same colour. By reason whereof, when as the sun doth shine thereon, it seemeth red, and thereby it hath got the name the which it hath unto this day. By this sea, and by that of Basora, the great Turk doth carry much spicery, silks, and cloth of gold, and all riches out of the oriental India's, the which may easily be disturbed, 
The land of Abexin, that of Prester john.  but the way how, is not for this place nor time. On the other side is the land of Abexin, which is that of Prester john, a kingdom although it is very great, yet it extendeth very little on this coast. 
Mazaubique.  From this kingdom or point going to the south-west is six hundredth leagues to Mazaubique whereas there is inhabitant of Portugeses. All this coast is black people, gentiles and Idolaters, and is in fifteen degrees in altitude towards the south, and in the same manner are all the rest that are inhabited from Mazaubique unto the cape of Buena Esperansa. They are without memory of the preaching of the gospel, if that God for his mercy do not take pity on them, and put into the hearts of some to go thither and to procure the remedy of so infinite number of souls.  
So after the said father had informed himself of all that is said, and of many other things more, which is left out for to evitate tediousness, till such time as of them may be made a particular history, he departed from Goa and Cochin towards Portugal, and passed by the Islands of Maldivia which are many, & all are inhabited with moors, 
The islands of Maldivia.  nigh unto the which they do enter the pool Antartico, crossing the equinoctial from the coast of Arabia, from thence they sailed with a fair wind till they came right against the Island of saint Lorenzo, which is very great, 
The Iland● of S. Lorenzo.  for that it hath two hundredth seventy and five leagues of longitude, and fourscore and ten of latitude. All inhabited with much people, very quiet and civil: the faith of Christ was never preached amongst them, yet I do believe that if it were, they would quietly receive the same. Passing from this Island, they came unto the Cape of Buena Esperansa, that which is another very good Island, 
The Cape o● Buena. Esperansa.  whose inhabitants and dwellers are much like to those of saint Lorenzo: it is in the temperate Zona, & nigh unto the straits of Magellanes. This Cape of Buena Esperansa is called by another name the Cape Tormentorio: it is five and thirty degrees large from the pole Antartico. And from Cochin unto this Cape, they put one thousand three hundred, fifty and eight leagues, that way which they do ordinarliy Navigate. When they do pass by this cape, they were wont to have great and strong winds. They go from thence to the Island of S. Elena, 
The Iland● of S. Elena,  which is beyond the Cape forwards, five hundred and seventy leagues. It is not inhabited with people, but full of swine, goats, and great abundance of partridges, and in all the coast is great store of fish, the which is taken with great ease: it is but a little Island, and hath circuit no more than five leagues.  
From this Island they do Navigate four hundred leagues until they come under the Equinoctial, 
Guinea.  upon the coast of Guinea, returning unto the pole Arctic, in four and forty degrees in altitude (which was almost at the same place from whence he departed at his going forth) after he compassed the world. They passed in sight of the land, and from thence they sailed forwards, and saw other land until they came unto Lisbon, having (after they had crossed the equinoctial) sailed a thousand four hundred and fifty leagues. So that after the aforesaid father, friar Martin Ignacio had made his account of all that he had traveled, from the time he departed from Sivel, till he returned unto Lysborne, in compassing the world, he found that it was nine thousand and forty leagues by sea & by land, besides many other leagues that he traveled in China, and in other parts, of the which he doth make no account. All these leagues, are full of mighty kingdoms, and all or the most part of them, are subject unto the tyranny of lucifer. God for his infinite mercy convert them, and take pity on them, as he did when that he came from heaven upon the earth to die for all, & put into the heart of the king of Spain, that amongst other good works, the which with his most Christian zeal doth intend and do, for to procure this, which will be, so much unto the glory of God, and great desert of honour unto himself, the which he may do very commodiously, being as he is at this day Lord of all the Indies, and of the biggest part of all that new world.  
This petition is worthy, that all we Christians do desire of God, for that his holy name in all the world may be praised and exalted, and the sons of Adam, who for their sins are so dispersed and forgotten of God, and first beginning, they may go and enjoy the happy and glorious kingdom, for the which they were created.   
FINIS.